BREEAM New Construction 2014 [PDF]

1 downloads 750 Views 9MB Size Report
Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions ... Table - 5: BREEAM Environmental section weightings ... Table - 28: Credits available for each building type relating to the public transport Accessibility Index (AI) .... To stimulate demand and create value for sustainable buildings, building products and supply chains.
blank page

Terms and conditions

Terms and conditions Disclaimer This Scheme Document is the property of BRE Global Limited and is made publicly available for information purposes only. Any testing, assessment, certification or approval activity related to this Scheme Document must be conducted in accordance with BRE Global Limited’s approved processes, and such activity may only be undertaken by authorised employees, agents, and associates of the Building Research Establishment Limited and BRE Global Limited, or approved parties (“Approved Party (ies)”). Any party wishing to use or reproduce this Scheme Document to offer testing, assessment, certification or approval must apply to BRE Global Limited for training, assessment and an associated licence, in order to qualify as an Approved Party; a fee will normally be charged. BRE Global Limited will not unreasonably refuse such applications. BRE Global Limited accepts no responsibility for any unauthorised use or distribution by others of this Scheme Document and may take legal action to prevent such unauthorised use or distribution.

Copyright The information and images contained in this document are the property of BRE Global Limited unless explicitly stated to the contrary, and are protected by copyright laws. The information and images contained in this document may be downloaded and printed without requiring specific permission but remains the intellectual property, technical know-how and copyrighted material of BRE Global Limited. Such material is not to be used in a derogatory manner, in a misleading context or for commercial purposes. Where such material is being issued to others, the source including the web address and copyright status must be acknowledged. We may require you to register your details before downloading certain information or documents.

Trade Marks BRE, BRE Global, BREEAM, Smartwaste and the Green Guide are all trademarks owned by either BRE or BRE Global Limited and may not be used without written permission from BRE or BRE Global Limited. Uncontrolled copy if printed. Valid on day of printing only © BRE Global Ltd 2014

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

i

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Acknowledgements BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 has been made possible through the continued efforts of many dedicated BRE Group staff members, the BRE Global Limited Governing Body, the BRE Global Limited Standing Panel of Experts, BREEAM Assessors and those who have responded to our consultation calls and meetings or provided feedback in other ways. BRE Global Limited also extends its gratitude to those who support BREEAM by continuing to specify and apply the method and contribute towards a sustainable built environment.

ii

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

About BRE Global Limited BRE Global Limited (part of the BRE (Building Research Establishment) Group) is an independent third party approvals body offering certification of fire, security and sustainability products and services to an international market. BRE Global Limited’s mission is to 'Protect People, Property and the Planet'. We aim to achieve this by: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Researching and writing standards Testing and certification in the areas of fire, electronics, security and sustainability Developing world leading sustainability assessment methods Undertaking research and consultancy for clients and regulators Promulgating standards and knowledge throughout the industry through publications and events Developing and delivering training

BRE Global Limited’s product testing and approvals are carried out by recognised experts in our world renowned testing laboratories. BRE Global Limited is custodian of a number of world leading brands including: 1. Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method (BREEAM) - the world’s leading environmental assessment method for buildings 2. Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB) for approval of fire and security products and services. BRE Global Limited is a trading subsidiary of the BRE Trust, the registered research and education charity which owns the BRE Group. BRE Global Limited Bucknalls Lane Watford Hertfordshire WD25 9XX T +44 (0)333 321 8811 F +44 (0)1923 664 910 E [email protected] www.breglobal.com www.greenbooklive.com

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

iii

blank page

Table of contents Terms and conditions

i

Acknowledgements

ii

About BRE Global Limited

iii

Table of contents

v

List of tables

viii

List of figures

xi

About this Scheme Document

xii

Introduction

1

Introduction to BREEAM

2

BREEAM UK New Construction

5

When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme

7

How to use the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version

10 12

Buildings types not covered under the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version

15

Building life cycle stages covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version

16

Building life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version

17

Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings

18

BREEAM rating benchmarks

19

Minimum standards

20

Environmental section weightings

22

BREEAM assessment issues and credits

23

Calculating a building's BREEAM rating

24

The BREEAM evidential requirements

26

Management

31

Man 01 Project brief and design

32

Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning

38

Man 03 Responsible construction practices

42

Man 04 Commissioning and handover

48

Man 05 Aftercare

53

Health and Wellbeing

58

Hea 01 Visual comfort

59

Hea 02 Indoor air quality

75

Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories

87

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

v

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Hea 04 Thermal comfort

90

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

96

Hea 06 Safety and security Energy

115

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

116

Ene 02 Energy monitoring

127

Ene 03 External lighting

133

Ene 04 Low carbon design

136

Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage

144

Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems

148

Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems

152

Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment

158

Ene 09 Drying space

163

Transport

166

Tra 01 Public transport accessibility

167

Tra 02 Proximity to amenities

174

Tra 03 Cyclist facilities

178

Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity

186

Tra 05 Travel plan

192

Water

195

Wat 01 Water consumption

196

Wat 02 Water monitoring

207

Wat 03 Water leak detection

211

Wat 04 Water efficient equipment

215

Materials

218

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

219

Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection

234

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials

237

Mat 04 Insulation

245

Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience

250

Mat 06 Material efficiency

255

Waste

vi

110

258

Wst 01 Construction waste management

259

Wst 02 Recycled aggregates

268

Wst 03 Operational waste

273

Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes

278

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change

280

Wst 06 Functional adaptability

285

Land Use and ecology

288

LE 01 Site selection

289

LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features

293

LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology

299

LE 04 Enhancing site ecology

307

LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity

311

Pollution

316

Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants

317

Pol 02 NOx emissions

325

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

332

Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution

348

Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution

351

Innovation Inn 01 Innovation Appendices

354 355 358

Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types

359

Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Education buildings

361

Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential buildings

363

Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and shell and core project assessments

364

Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction simple building assessments

369

Appendix F – TBA

374

Appendix G – TBA

375

Appendix H – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates

376

Index

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

378

vii

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

List of tables Table - 1: BREEAM 2014 New Construction environmental sections and assessment issues

5

Table - 2: List of non-domestic building types covered under BREEAM UK New Construction 2014

12

Table - 3: BREEAM rating benchmarks

19

Table - 4: Minimum BREEAM standards by rating level

20

Table - 5: BREEAM Environmental section weightings

22

Table - 6: Example BREEAM score and rating calculation

24

Table - 7: Minimum standards for a BREEAM 'Very Good' rating

25

Table - 8: Evidence types

27

Table - 9: Minimum values of average daylight factor required.

60

Table - 10: Daylighting uniformity criteria.

61

Table - 11: Space type and illuminance requirements-both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should be met.

62

Table - 12: View out building specific requirements.

63

Table - 13: Internal and external lighting building specific requirements.

64

Table - 14: Exemplary level values of average daylight factor required.

65

Table - 15: Exemplary level illuminance value requirements. Both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should be met. 66 Table - 16: Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights

68

Table - 17: VOC criteria by product type

77

Table - 18: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Education buildings

96

Table - 19: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Healthcare buildings

98

Table - 20: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Office buildings

98

Table - 21: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Law Courts buildings

99

Table - 22: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and 'Other' building types

100

Table - 23: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Multi-residential buildings and 'Other residential' institutions

102

Table - 24: Ene 01 EPRNC benchmark scale

116

Table - 25: Innovation credits

117

Table - 26: Best Practice Energy Efficient Measures in Laboratories

153

Table - 27: Examples of solutions deemed to comply with the criteria for the reduction of unregulated energy load from significantly contributing systems. 158 Table - 28: Credits available for each building type relating to the public transport Accessibility Index (AI) score. 168

viii

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Table - 29: Credits available for Tra02 for different building types

174

Table - 30: Cycle space criteria for each building type

178

Table - 31: Credits available in Tra04 Maximum car parking capacity for different building types

186

Table - 32: Table - 2Default occupancy rates by building type

189

Table - 33: BREEAM Credits available for percentage improvement over baseline building water consumption. 197 Table - 34: Water efficient consumption levels by component type

200

Table - 35: defines for each component type the appropriate data that will need to be collected from manufacturers’ product information to complete the assessment.

201

Table - 36: Elements assessed by building type

219

Table - 37: Allocation of credits by building type and Mat 01 points

220

Table - 38: The Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) type and tier ranking

226

Table - 39: Green Guide points uplift by EPD type

227

Table - 40: Building type and the use of appropriate Green Guide ratings

230

Table - 41: The number of BREEAM credits achieved is determined as follows

237

Table - 42: Applicable materials (building and associated hard-landscaping)

240

Table - 43: Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme tier levels and corresponding BREEAM ‘responsible sourcing of materials’ points.

240

Table - 44: Green Guide rating points/element

246

Table - 45: Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradations effects to consider.

250

Table - 46: Construction waste resource efficiency benchmarks

259

Table - 47: Diversion from landfill benchmarks

260

Table - 48: Construction waste groups

264

Table - 49: Minimum levels (by weight and volume) of high-grade aggregate specified per application (where present) that is recycled and/or secondary aggregate 268 Table - 50: BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value

294

Table - 51: Broad habitat types(Source: Countryside Survey 2007)

299

Table - 52: Inclusive analysis of average total taxon richness by broad habitat in ‘Fields and Other Main Land Cover Parcels plots’ in Great Britain.

301

Table - 53: Table 1: Additional measures for the improvement of long term biodiversity

312

Table - 54: Default system operational design life values

320

Table - 55: Average annual leakage rates for the UK

320

Table - 56: List of some common refrigerant types with low GWP

323

Table - 57: Excess oxygen conversion factors

328

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

ix

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Table - 58: Definition of flood zones by country

x

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

345

List of figures Figure 1: The BREEAM Certification mark

3

Figure 2: BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the Royal Institute of British Architects (RIBA) Outline Plan of Work 2013 8 Figure 3: Example of certificate at design stage

376

Figure 4: Example of certificate at post construction stage

377

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

xi

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

About this Scheme Document This document is the technical guide for the 2014 version of the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme. It describes an environmental performance standard against which new, non-domestic buildings in the UK can be assessed and achieve a BREEAM New Construction rating. The Scheme Document and the information detailed within is intended for use by trained, qualified and licensed BREEAM Assessors in accordance with the procedural and operational requirements of BREEAM (as described in the BREEAM Operations Manual, SD5070) under the terms and conditions of a BREEAM licence. This document should be used by nonBREEAM Assessors for reference purposes only.

xii

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Changes to this BREEAM Scheme Document This Scheme Document is subject to revision and can be re-issued from time-to-time by BRE Global Limited. A schedule of the publication date for each issue of this document is provided below. Any additions to this document that necessitates its re-issue will be highlighted throughout the text (note: deletions are not identified in the updated issue). A detailed list of all additions and deletions made to each issue is available separately. BREEAM Assessors can download this list of changes from the BREEAM Assessor's Extranet. The list of changes is also available to other parties on request; please email [email protected]. Scheme document

Issue number

Date of Issue

SD5076

0.1 (DRAFT)

11/02/2014

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

xiii

blank page

Introduction

Introduction

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

1

Introduction

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Introduction to BREEAM BREEAM (Building Research Establishment's Environmental Assessment Method) is the world’s first sustainability rating scheme for the built environment and has contributed much to the strong focus in the UK on sustainability in building design, construction and use. BREEAM is now an international standard that is locally adapted, operated and applied through a network of international operators, assessors and industry professionals. Through its application and use BREEAM helps clients measure and reduce the environmental impacts of their buildings and in doing so create higher value, lower risk assets. To-date, BREEAM has been used to certify over 260,000 building assessments across the building life cycle and it is being applied in over 50 countries.

Aims of BREEAM To mitigate the life cycle impacts of buildings on the environment To enable buildings to be recognised according to their environmental benefits To provide a credible, environmental label for buildings To stimulate demand and create value for sustainable buildings, building products and supply chains.

Objectives of BREEAM To provide market recognition of buildings with a low environmental impact To ensure best environmental practice is incorporated in the planning, design, construction and operation of buildings and the wider built environment. To define a robust, cost-effective performance standard surpassing that required by regulations. To challenge the market to provide innovative, cost effective solutions that minimise the environmental impact of buildings. To raise awareness amongst owners, occupants, designers and operators of the benefits and value of buildings with a reduced life cycle impact on the environment. To allow organisations to demonstrate progress towards corporate environmental objectives. BREEAM is developed and operated to meet the following underlying principles: Ensure environmental quality through an accessible, holistic and balanced measure of environmental impacts. Use quantified measures for determining environmental quality. Adopt a flexible approach that encourages and rewards positive outcomes, avoiding prescribed solutions. Use robust science and best practice as the basis for quantifying and calibrating a cost effective and rigorous performance standard for defining environmental quality. Reflect the social and economic benefits of meeting the environmental objectives covered. Provide a common international framework of assessment that is tailored to meet the ‘local’ context including regulation, climate and sector. Integrate building professionals in the development and operational processes to ensure wide understanding and accessibility. Adopt third party certification to ensure independence, credibility and consistency of the label. Adopt existing industry tools, practices and other standards wherever possible to support developments in policy and technology, build on existing skills and understanding and minimise costs. Align technically and operationally with relevant international standards, including the suite of standards on the ‘Sustainability of Construction Works’ prepared by the European Committee for Standardisation Technical Committee CEN/TC 350. Engage with a representative range of stakeholders to inform ongoing development in accordance with the underlying principles and the pace of change in performance standards (accounting for policy, regulation and market capability).

2

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Introduction to BREEAM

Introduction

The aims, objectives and principles of BREEAM are embodied within a Core Technical Standard owned and managed by BRE Global Limited. This is applied through a suite of BREEAM Schemes covering aspects of the built environment life cycle. These schemes are locally developed and operated by a number of different organisations, called National Scheme Operators (NSOs), across a range of countries. For a full list of BREEAM National Scheme Operators and Schemes visit www.breeam.com.

The UK BREEAM Schemes BRE Global Limited is the National Scheme Operator of BREEAM in the UK. We develop and operate a number of BREEAM schemes, each designed to assess the environmental performance of buildings at various stages in the life cycle, and these include: BREEAM Communities for the master-planning of a larger community of buildings BREEAM New Construction for new build, domestic and non-domestic buildings BREEAM In-Use for existing non-domestic buildings in-use BREEAM Refurbishment for domestic and, from summer 2014, non-domestic building fit-outs and refurbishments Independent BREEAM Assessors, trained, qualified and licensed by BRE Global Limited can undertake a BREEAM assessment using this Scheme Document and associated reporting and calculation tools. Once an assessment is complete and quality assured BRE Global Limited will issue a BREEAM certificate. The BREEAM certificate provides formal verification that the Assessor has completed an assessment of a building in accordance with the requirements of the scheme and its quality standards and procedures. A BREEAM certificate provides assurance to any interested party that a building’s BREEAM rating, at the time of certification, accurately reflects its performance against the BREEAM standard. Anyone wishing to verify the BREEAM rating of a building can do so by either checking its BREEAM certificate, which will contain the certification mark, (see below) or by searching the BREEAM buildings listings on www.greenbooklive.com. Examples of a BREEAM UK New Construction certificate can be found in Appendix H.

Figure 1: The BREEAM Certification mark

Ensuring quality and consistency All BREEAM Schemes are developed and operated by National Scheme Operators in accordance with the Code for a Sustainable Built Environment. The Code for a Sustainable Built Environment is a set of strategic principles and requirements which define an integrated approach to the design, management, evaluation and certification of the environmental, social and economic impacts of the built environment.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

3

Introduction

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

The Code is interpreted through the BREEAM Core Process and Technical Standards. These linked documents set out the requirements that a compliant scheme must meet in order to be affiliated with the Code. The Standards ensure that a common scientific and performance basis is used by all compliant schemes operated by National Scheme Operators, whilst ensuring that these are relevant to local demands, standards and practices. The Code and associated standards are developed and maintained by BRE Global Limited with direction from the BREEAM Strategy Board, under the auspices of the BRE Global Governing Board. To ensure independence, competence and impartiality, all National Scheme Operators are required to maintain scheme operations accredited to International Standards. In the UK, BRE Global Limited is accredited by the United Kingdom Accreditation Service (UKAS) to: BS EN ISO 17024 (Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons) for BREEAM Assessors. BS EN 45011 (General requirements for bodies operating product certification systems) for the complete BREEAM assessment process. BRE Global Limited is also certified to ISO 9001 for all its BREEAM related activities. As a certification body accredited by UKAS, BRE Global Limited maintains an open and accountable governance structure. The operation of BREEAM is overseen by an independent Governing Body and a Standing Panel for Peer & Market Review. The Governing Body represents stakeholder interests to ensure, amongst other things, that we at BRE Global Limited are acting independently and impartially, operating our processes correctly, and treating our customers fairly. The Standing Panel provides BRE Global Limited with access to a range of experts that can review BRE Global Limited’s standards and schemes to ensure their robustness from a scientific, technical and market perspective as well as ensuring the development of the standards and schemes is open to greater external and independent scrutiny.

4

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

BREEAM UK New Construction

Introduction

BREEAM UK New Construction The BREEAM UK New Construction scheme is a performance based assessment method and certification scheme for new buildings. The primary aim of BREEAM UK New Construction is to mitigate the life cycle impacts of new buildings on the environment in a robust and cost effective manner. This is achieved through integration and use of the scheme by clients and their project teams at key stages in the design and construction process. This enables the client, through the BREEAM Assessor and the BRE Global certification process, to measure, evaluate and reflect the performance of their new building against best practice in an independent and robust manner. This performance is quantified by a number of individual measures and associated criteria stretching across a range of environmental issues see Table - 1, which is ultimately expressed as a single certified BREEAM rating, i.e. the label (section 3 describes how a BREEAM rating is calculated). Table - 1: BREEAM 2014 New Construction environmental sections and assessment issues Management

Health and wellbeing Project brief and design Life cycle cost and service life planning Responsible construction practices Commissioning and handover Aftercare

Energy

Visual comfort Indoor air quality Safe containment in laboratories Thermal comfort Acoustic performance Safety and security

Transport Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Energy monitoring External lighting Low carbon design Energy efficient cold storage Energy efficient transportation systems Energy efficient laboratory systems Energy efficient equipment Drying space

Water

Materials Water consumption Water monitoring Water leak detection Water efficient equipment

Waste

Public transport accessibility Proximity to amenities Cyclist facilities Maximum car parking capacity Travel plan

Life cycle impacts Hard landscaping and boundary protection Responsible sourcing of materials Insulation Designing for durability and resilience Material efficiency Land use and ecology

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

5

Introduction

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Construction waste management Recycled aggregates Operational waste Speculative floor and ceiling finishes Adaptation to climate change Functional adaptability Pollution

Innovation Impact of refrigerants NOx emissions Surface water run-off Reduction of night time light pollution Reduction of noise pollution

6

Site selection Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features Minimising impact on existing site ecology Enhancing site ecology Long term impact on biodiversity

Innovation

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme

Introduction

When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme Timing the engagement with and use of the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme via the BREEAM Assessor is essential for ensuring seamless integration of the methodology in the new build procurement process. Without this, the ability to cost effectively optimise the building’s environmental performance and achieve the desired BREEAM rating will be compromised. Appointing a BREEAM Assessor or Accredited Professional early in the project will help in achieving the target rating without undue impacts on the flexibility of design decisions, budgets and potential solutions.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

7

Introduction

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Figure 2: BREEAM assessment and certification stages and the Royal Institute of British Architects (RIBA) Outline Plan of Work 2013

8

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

When and how to engage with the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme

Introduction

Figure 2 serves to highlight the link between the BREEAM UK New Construction assessment and certification stages and the RIBA Outline Plan of Work 2013. This figure can assist clients in timing their engagement with BREEAM and the appointment of a BREEAM Assessor. Clients can view up-to-date listings of licensed BREEAM UK New Construction Assessors and BREEAM Accredited Professionals at Green Book Live www.greenbooklive.com. It is important to recognise that BREEAM primarily reflects the overall performance of the building rather than just the opportunities or limitations placed on specific stakeholders involved in the procurement process. This means that the client, design team, principal contractor and BREEAM Assessor, as well as other specialist disciplines, have an important role to play throughout the procurement process, if the desired performance level is to be achieved and reflected through the certified BREEAM rating. The onus of orientating the brief towards sustainability needs to come first and foremost from the client. To facilitate this, BRE Global recommends that clients and their project teams engage with a BREEAM Assessor and/or BREEAM Accredited Professional no later than the Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) and ideally sooner where practical. This will ensure that realistic targets are set and can be met, appropriate responsibilities can be defined and understood and low or no cost solutions to environmental impacts can be sought and applied wherever possible.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

9

Introduction

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

How to use the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme This BREEAM Scheme Document is a technical document which has been created to: 1. Enable qualified and licensed BREEAM Assessors to complete BREEAM assessments and determine a rating 2. Enable BRE global Ltd to complete quality assurance reviews of a BREEAM Assessors assessment report, in accordance with the standards to which BRE Global Ltd is accredited 3. As an aid for BREEAM Accredited Professionals (AP) to undertake project team facilitation, in terms of defining, monitoring and successfully achieving the desired BREEAM rating 4. As a reference for clients and members of the project team whose proposed building is being BREEAM assessed. The scheme document is split into six parts: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Introduction (section 1) Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version (section 2) Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildingsScoring, including minimum standards (section 3) The BREEAM evidential requirements (section 4) Assessment criteria (sections 5 - 14) Appendices (A - H).

The Scope section describes the types of buildings and stages of assessment that this version of the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme can be applied to. Appendices A to H provide additional scoping guidance for specific building and project types. The Scope section can be used by clients and BREEAM Assessors to check whether this is the correct BREEAM Scheme to use for their project. The Scoring and rating section illustrates how a building’s assessed performance is measured and rated. It outlines the BREEAM rating level benchmarks, the minimum BREEAM standards for each rating level and the BREEAM environmental section weightings. It also includes a description of the BREEAM assessment issues and ‘credits’, including BREEAM ‘Innovation credits’, and how performance against these is calculated and expressed as a BREEAM rating. Please note that, for the purpose of formal assessment and certification, actual building performance must be determined by the BREEAM Assessor using the relevant BREEAM reporting and calculation tools. The BREEAM evidential requirements section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the various types and forms of evidence required by the BREEAM Assessor to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM criteria. This includes a description of why BREEAM requires an auditable trail of evidence, a table of general types of building information produced during a building project, and therefore typically required and used as evidence of compliance, and guidance on the differing forms of evidence that can be used and at what stages of the assessment, such as letters of commitment. The Assessment criteria section includes the 51 BREEAM assessment issues, categorised in 10 environmental sections. Each issue defines a level of performance (the assessment criteria) against which the assessed building demonstrates compliance (using appropriate project information, i.e. evidence) in order to achieve a corresponding number of available BREEAM credits. The majority of BREEAM issues and credits are tradable, meaning that a client and their project team can pick and choose which to target in order to build their BREEAM performance score and achieve the desired BREEAM rating. Several BREEAM issues have minimum standards, meaning that to achieve a particular BREEAM rating specific credits or criteria must be achieved (BREEAM’s minimum standards are outlined in the section Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings). Each BREEAM issue is structured as follows:

10

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

How to use the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme

Introduction

1. Issue information: This contains the assessment issue reference, title, number of credits available1 and whether the issue forms part of BREEAM’s minimum standards. 2. Aim: This outlines the broad objective of the issue and the impact it measures/mitigates. 3. Assessment criteria: This outlines the good/best practice performance level benchmark(s) and criteria. Where the building complies with the assessment criteria, as determined by the BREEAM Assessor, the relevant number of BREEAM credits can be awarded. Some issues have Exemplary Level Criteria; where a building demonstrates that it meets Exemplary Level Criteria, a BREEAM Innovation credit can be awarded (refer to the Innovation section for more details). Up to a maximum of 10 Innovation credits are available. 4. Checklists and tables: This section contains any checklists and tables referenced in the assessment criteria section. This can include tables of benchmarks or building type specific performance criteria. 5. Compliance notes: These notes provide additional guidance that supports the application and interpretation of the main assessment criteria, including how to assess compliance in a particular location or for a particular building or project type, e.g. shell only. 6. Methodology: This section includes a description of any methodology used to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved for a given level of building performance. It includes, for example, calculation procedures or guidance on how non-BREEAM schemes, standards or qualifications referenced in the assessment criteria relate to those criteria. 7. Evidence: This section describes the type(s) of project information that must be provided by the design team/client and given to the BREEAM Assessor to enable verification of the building’s performance against the assessment criteria and so justify the award of the relevant number of BREEAM credits. Section 4, the BREEAM evidential requirements provides further guidance on evidential requirements. 8. Additional information: This section contains any further information relevant to the application of the assessment criteria, including any definition of terms used in the assessment issue or sources of additional information that may be of use in addressing the issue. The Appendices provide supporting information relevant to either the scope of the BREEAM 2014 scheme or its assessment criteria.

1For some assessment issues the number of credits available will vary by building type. Furthermore, some issues may not be

applicable to certain building types or buildings which do not contain a particular function or area, e.g. a laboratory.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

11

Scope

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version The BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme can be used to assess the environmental life cycle impacts of new nondomestic buildings at the design and construction stages. ‘New Construction’ is defined as development that results in a new standalone structure, or new extension to an existing structure, which will come into operation or use for the first time upon completion of the works. This BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version is applicable to new non-domestic buildings in the United Kingdom only.

Type of buildings that can be assessed using the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version The non-domestic building types which can be assessed and rated using this scheme version are outlined in Table - 2. Additional guidance for some of the building types listed is also provided in the appendices (refer to the footnotes). Table - 2: List of non-domestic building types covered under BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 Sector

Building type

Commercial

Offices

General office buildings Offices with research and development areas (i.e. category 1 labs only)

Industrial

Industrial unit – warehouse storage/distribution Industrial unit – process/manufacturing/vehicle servicing

Retail

Shop/shopping centre Retail park/warehouse ‘Over the counter’ service provider e.g. financial, estate and employment agencies and betting offices Showroom Restaurant, café and drinking establishment Hot food takeaway

Education1

Pre-school Schools and sixth form colleges Further education/vocational colleges Higher education institutions

Healthcare2

Teaching/specialist hospitals General acute hospitals Community and mental health hospitals

Public (non-housing)

Description

1For schools, further and higher educational building types, see also Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and

Education buildings. 2For healthcare building types, see also Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types.

12

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Scope

Sector

Building type

Description GP surgeries Health centres and clinics

Prisons1

High security prison Standard secured prison Young offender institution and juvenile prisons Local prison Holding centre

Law Courts

Law courts Crown and criminal courts County courts Magistrates’ courts Civil justice centres Family courts Youth courts Combined courts

Multi-residential accommodation/Supported living facility2

Residential institutions (long term stay)

Residential care home Sheltered accommodation Residential college/school (halls of residence) Local authority secure residential accommodation Military barracks

Other

Residential institutions (short term stay)

Hotel, hostel, boarding and guest house Secure training centre Residential training centre

Non residential institutions

Art gallery, museum Library Day centre, hall/civic/community centre Place of worship

Assembly and leisure

Cinema Theatre/music/concert hall Exhibition/conference hall Indoor or outdoor sports, fitness and recreationcentre (with/without pool)

Other

Transport hub (coach/bus station and above ground rail station) Research and development (category 2 or 3 laboratories - non-higher education) Crèche

1The Prisons category includes any building type that is part of a prison establishment, including residential blocks or a hybrid

of building types. 2For multi-residential building types, see also Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential buildings for further detail of scope

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

13

Scope

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Mixed use developments and building types Developments which consist of a number of separate buildings of differing functional types, or a single building containing a number of different functions e.g. office and retail or retail and GP surgery, will typically require an assessment and therefore BREEAM rating and certificate for each individual building or functional use within a single building. This is necessary as BREEAM defines differing criteria and benchmarks for some assessment issues according to building type, function and use. Therefore to maintain comparability and consistency of the assessment and BREEAM rating, a separate assessment score and rating are required for each building type function or use in the development, Further guidance on how to define mixed-use developments for the purpose of a BREEAM assessment can be found in Guidance Note TBC – Mixed-use developments and similar buildings (or units),

Similar building types (or units) on the same site It is possible to assess and rate a number of separate but similar buildings, or individual units within a larger building development, within one BREEAM assessment report. Further guidance on this type of assessment can be found in Guidance Note TBC – Mixed-use developments and similar buildings (or units),

Shell and core/speculative buildings Non fitted-out ‘speculative’ new buildings, often referred to as shell and core buildings, can be assessed using the BREEAM UK New Construction scheme. Further details on the application of the scheme to these types of new building can be found in Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and shell and core project assessments.

Simple building developments Less complex building types can be assessed using a set of ‘simple buildings’ criteria, defined within this BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme. Further details on the application of this scheme to ’simple buildings’ can be found in Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction simple building assessments For each individual assessment issue, guidance on ‘simple buildings’ compliance is provided in the Compliance Notes section.

14

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Buildings types not covered under the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version

Scope

Buildings types not covered under the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version Building types not listed in Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version – Table - 2: will fall into one of two categories, those where a current but separate BREEAM New Construction scheme document exists and those which currently do not have an existing, up-to-date scheme document.

Other current BREEAM New Construction schemes Data centres: 2010 version There is a separate BREEAM UK New Construction 2010 scheme version and technical manual for Data Centres (SD5068); the 2010 version should be used for the assessment and certification of data centres in the UK.

Other building types not defined If a particular building type requiring assessment is not listed above or in Scope of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version – Table - 2: , it can still be assessed using BREEAM UK New Construction. Such building types will require the development of a set of tailored assessment criteria, i.e. a BREEAM Bespoke assessment. In such instances BREEAM Assessors and clients should contact BRE Global for advice and information on how to proceed.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

15

Scope

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Building life cycle stages covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version This BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme can be used to assess and rate the environmental impacts arising from a newly constructed building development (including external site areas), at the following life cycle stages: 1. New Build Design Stage (DS) - leading to an Interim BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment 2. New Build Post-Construction Stage (PCS) – leading to a Final BREEAM rating and certificate of assessment

Design Stage The DS assessment and interim BREEAM rating confirms the proposed new building’s performance at the design stage of the life cycle. Assessment and ideally certification will occur prior to the beginning of operations on site. The BREEAM rating at this stage is labelled as ‘interim’ because it does not represent the building’s final, new construction BREEAM performance. To complete an assessment at this stage the design must be advanced to a point where the relevant design information is available to enable the BREEAM Assessor to evaluate and verify the building’s performance against the criteria defined in this Scheme Document. The interim DS assessment will therefore be completed and certified at the scheme design or detailed design stages.

Post-Construction Stage (PCS) The PCS assessment and BREEAM rating confirms the final ‘as-built’ performance of the building at the new construction stage of the life cycle. A final PCS assessment is completed and certified after practical completion of the building works. There are two approaches to assessment at the post-construction stage: 1. A post-construction review (PCR) of an interim design-stage assessment 2. A post-construction assessment (PCA) A PCR serves to confirm that the building’s ‘as built’ performance and rating is in accordance with the assessment certified at the interim design stage. Where an interim DS assessment has not been carried out i.e. certified, and a BREEAM assessment and rating is required, a full post construction stage assessment can be conducted.

16

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Building life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version

Scope

Building life cycle stages not covered by the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme version The BREEAM UK New Construction scheme is not designed for, and therefore not appropriate to assess the environmental impacts of buildings at the following life cycle stages: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Existing building refurbishment and fit-out (see Appendix TBC for more information) Existing building in operation or existing unoccupied building (refer to the BREEAM In-Use scheme) Existing building de-construction (no BREEAM scheme for this life cycle stage at present) Infrastructure projects (no BREEAM scheme for this life cycle stage at present)

Part new-build, part refurbishment projects TBC

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

17

Scope

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Scoring and rating BREEAM assessed buildings

18

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

BREEAM rating benchmarks

Scope

BREEAM rating benchmarks There are a number of elements that determine the overall performance of a new construction project assessed using BREEAM, these are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

The BREEAM rating level benchmarks The minimum BREEAM standards The environmental section weightings The BREEAM assessment issues and credits

How these elements combine to produce a BREEAM rating for a new building is summarised on the following pages. This is followed by a description and example describing the methodology for calculating a rating. The BREEAM rating benchmarks for projects assessed using the 2014 version of BREEAM UK New Construction are as follows: Table - 3: BREEAM rating benchmarks BREEAM Rating

% score

OUTSTANDING

≥ 85

EXCELLENT

≥ 70

VERY GOOD

≥ 55

GOOD

≥ 45

PASS

≥ 30

UNCLASSIFIED

< 30

The BREEAM rating benchmarks enable a client and all other stakeholders to compare the performance of a newly constructed building with other BREEAM rated buildings, and the typical sustainability performance of a stock of new nondomestic buildings in the UK. In this respect each BREEAM rating broadly represents performance equivalent to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Outstanding: Less than top 1% of UK new non-domestic buildings (innovator) Excellent: Top 10% of UK new non-domestic buildings (best practice) Very Good: Top 25% of UK new non-domestic buildings (advanced good practice) Good: Top 50% of UK new non-domestic buildings (intermediate good practice) Pass: Top 75% of UK new non-domestic buildings (standard good practice)

An unclassified BREEAM rating represents performance that is non-compliant with BREEAM, in terms of failing to meet either the BREEAM minimum standards of performance for key environmental issues or the overall threshold score required to achieve at least a Pass rating. .

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

19

Scope

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Minimum standards To maintain a flexible system BREEAM adopts a ‘balanced score-card’ approach to the assessment and rating of building performance. This means that, to achieve a particular level of performance the majority of BREEAM credits can be traded, i.e. non-compliance in one area can be off-set through compliance in another to achieve the target BREEAM rating. However, to ensure that performance against fundamental environmental issues is not over-looked in pursuit of a particular rating, BREEAM sets minimum standards of performance in key areas e.g. energy, water, waste etc. It is important to bear in mind that these are minimum acceptable levels of performance and, in that respect they should not necessarily be viewed as levels that are representative of best practice for a BREEAM rating level. To achieve a particular BREEAM rating, the minimum overall percentage score must be achieved and the minimum standards, detailed in Table - 4 below, applicable to that rating level complied with. Table - 4: Minimum BREEAM standards by rating level Minimum standards by BREEAM rating level BREEAM issue

Pass

Good

Very Good

Excellent

Outstanding

Man 01: Project brief and design

None

None

One credit (Stakeholder consultation (project delivery))

One credit (Stakeholder consultation (project delivery))

One credit (Stakeholder consultation (project delivery))

Man 03: Responsible construction practices

Criterion 2 None

Criterion 2 None

Criterion 2 None

Criterion 2 One credit (Considerate construction)

Criterion 2 Two credits (Considerate construction)

Man 04: Commissioning and handover

None

None

None

Criterion 9

Criterion 9

Man 5: Aftercare

None

None

None

One credit (Seasonal commissioning

One credit (Seasonal commissioning)

Ene 01: Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

None

None

None

Five credits

Eight credits

Ene 02: Energy monitoring

None

None

One credit (First sub-metering credit)

One credit (First sub-metering credit)

One credit (First sub-metering credit)

Wat 01: Water consumption

None

One credit

One credit

One credit

Two credits

Wat 02: Water monitoring

None

Criterion 1 only

Criterion 1 only

Criterion 1 only

Criterion 1 only

20

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Minimum standards

Scope

Minimum standards by BREEAM rating level BREEAM issue

Pass

Good

Very Good

Excellent

Outstanding

Mat 03: Responsible sourcing of materials

TBC

TBC

TBC

TBC

TBC

Wst 01: Construction waste management

None

None

None

None

One credit

Wst 03: Operational waste

None

None

None

One credit

One credit

LE 03: Minimising impact on existing site ecology

None

None

One credit

One credit

One credit

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

21

Scope

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Environmental section weightings Environmental weightings are fundamental to any building environmental assessment method as they provide a means of defining, and therefore ranking, the relative impact of environmental issues. BREEAM uses an explicit weighting system derived from a combination of consensus based weightings and ranking by a panel of experts. The outputs from this exercise are then used to determine the relative value of the environmental sections used in BREEAM and their contribution to the overall BREEAM score. This weighting system is defined in greater detail within the BRE Global Core Process Standard (BES 5301) and it’s supporting procedural documents. These form part of the over-arching BREEAM Standard and the Code for a Sustainable Built Environment. The same ranking of impacts used in BREEAM underpins the scoring mechanisms in the BRE Green Guide to Specification and the BRE Environmental Profiling Method for construction materials. Table - 5 outlines the weightings for each of the nine environmental sections included in the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme. Table - 5: BREEAM Environmental section weightings Environmental section

Weighting Fully fitted out

Shell only

Shell and core only

Management

12%

12.50%

11%

Health and Wellbeing

15%

10%

10.50%

Energy

15%

14.50%

15%

Transport

9%

11.50%

10%

Water

7%

4%

7.50%

Materials

13.5%

17.50%

14.50%

Waste

8.5%

11%

9.50%

Land Use and Ecology

10%

13%

11%

Pollution

10%

6%

11%

Total

100%

100%

100%

Innovation (additional)

10%

10%

10%

Each of the above environmental sections consists of a differing number of assessment issues and BREEAM credits (as described below and defined in detail in the technical sections of this Scheme Document).

22

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

BREEAM assessment issues and credits

Scope

BREEAM assessment issues and credits BREEAM UK New Construction consists of fifty one individual assessment issues spanning the nine environmental categories, plus a tenth category called ‘innovation’ (described below). Each issue addresses a specific building related environmental impact or issue and has a number of ‘credits’ assigned to it. ‘BREEAM credits’ are awarded where a building demonstrates that it meets the best practice performance levels defined for that issue, i.e. it has mitigated an impact or, in the case of the health and wellbeing section, addressed a specific building occupant-related issue, e.g. good thermal comfort, daylight or acoustics. The number of ‘credits’ available for an individual assessment issue will vary and generally the higher the number there are for a given issue, the more important that issue is in terms of mitigating its impact. In most cases, where there are multiple ‘credits’ available, the number awarded is based on a sliding scale or benchmark, where progressively higher standards of building performance are rewarded with a higher number of ‘credits’. It is worth noting that, in addition to the environmental section and overall score and BREEAM rating, verified performance against individual assessment issues also provides users with a credible set of key building performance indicators for a range of embodied, operational and construction phase building impacts. In this respect, in addition to using BREEAM to define overall targets, it is possible to use the method to define performance levels in support of specific organisational policy objectives for individual environmental issues. Care should be taken when setting design targets using individual issues and credit levels in this way as it can limit design flexibility and have an impact on project costs.

Awarding ‘credits’ for innovation It is one of the aims of BREEAM to support innovation within the construction industry and its supply chain. BREEAM does this by making additional ‘credits’ available for the recognition of sustainability related benefits or performance levels which are currently not recognised by standard BREEAM assessment issues and criteria. By doing this BREEAM is rewarding buildings that go beyond best practice in terms of a particular aspect of sustainability i.e. where the building or its procurement has demonstrated innovation. Awarding ‘credits’ for innovation enables clients and design teams to boost their building’s BREEAM performance and, in addition, helps to support the market for new innovative technologies, and design or construction practices. There are two ways in which BREEAM awards ‘innovation credits’ to recognise innovation in building design and procurement. The first is by meeting exemplary performance criteria defined within an existing BREEAM issue i.e. going beyond the standard BREEAM assessment criteria and therefore best practice. Note, not all assessment issues have exemplary performance criteria. The second route is where an application is made to BRE Global by the registered project’s BREEAM Assessor to have a particular building technology or feature, design or construction method or process recognised as ‘innovative’. If the application is successful and subsequently compliance is verified, an ‘innovation credit’ can be awarded. An additional 1% can be added to a building’s overall score for each ‘innovation credit’ achieved. The maximum number of ’innovation credits’ that can be awarded for any one building is 10; therefore the maximum available additional score for ‘innovation’ is 10%. Innovation credits can be awarded regardless of the building’s final BREEAM rating, i.e. they can be awarded at any BREEAM rating level. Refer to the Inn 01 Innovation section for more detail.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

23

Scope

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Calculating a building's BREEAM rating A BREEAM Assessor must determine the BREEAM rating using the appropriate assessment tools and calculators. An indication of performance against the BREEAM scheme can also be determined using a BREEAM Pre-Assessment Estimator. The PreAssessment Estimator is available from the BREEAM website www.breeam.com. The process of determining a BREEAM rating is outlined below and an example calculation included in Table - 6 1. For each of BREEAM’s nine environmental sections the number of ‘credits’ awarded must be determined by the BREEAM Assessor in accordance with the criteria of each assessment issue (as detailed in the technical sections of this document). 2. The percentage of ‘credits’ achieved is then calculated for each section. 3. The percentage of ‘credits’ achieved in each section is then multiplied by the corresponding section weighting. This gives the overall environmental section score. 4. The section scores are then added together to give the overall BREEAM score. 5. The overall score is then compared to the BREEAM rating benchmark levels and, provided all minimum standards have been met, the relevant BREEAM rating is achieved. 6. An additional 1% can be added to the final BREEAM score for each ‘innovation credit’ achieved (up to a maximum of 10%). Table - 6: Example BREEAM score and rating calculation BREEAM Section

Credits Achieved

Credits Available

% of Credits Achieved

Section Weighting (fully fitted)

Section Score

Management

10

22

45%

0.12

5.45%

Health and Wellbeing

8

10

80.00%

0.15

12.00%

Energy

16

30

53.33%

0.15

7.99%

Transport

5

9

55.56%

0.09

5.00%

Water

5

9

55.56%

0.07

3.89%

Materials

6

12

50.00%

0.135

6.75%

Waste

3

7

42.86%

0.085

3.64%

Land Use and Ecology

5

10

50.00%

0.10

5.00%

Pollution

5

13

38.50%

0.10

3.85%

Innovation

2

10

20.00%

0.10

2%

Final BREEAM score

55.57%

BREEAM Rating

VERY GOOD

24

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Calculating a building's BREEAM rating

Scope

Table - 7: Minimum standards for a BREEAM 'Very Good' rating Minimum Standards for BREEAM ‘Very Good’ rating

Achieved?

Man 01: Project brief and design

Y

Man 03: Responsible construction practices

Y

Ene 02: Energy monitoring

Y

Wat 01: Water consumption

Y

Wat 02: Water monitoring

Y

Mat 03: Responsible sourcing of materials

Y

LE 03: Minimising impact on existing site ecology

Y

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

25

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

The BREEAM evidential requirements This section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the types of evidence required to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM issues.

Why does BREEAM require evidence? BREEAM is a third party assessment and certification scheme operated in accordance with international standards. Operating to international standards ensures that certification schemes such as BREEAM are run in a consistent and reliable manner. The BREEAM Assessor's assessment report and the BRE Global Quality Assurance process are the fundamental tenets of BREEAM, ensuring consistency of, and confidence in, the BREEAM rating awarded by the assessor. To maintain this consistency and credibility all certification decisions must be based on verified and credible project information that is traceable, i.e. evidence based. This is not only important for ensuring compliance with the international standards to which BREEAM operates, but also in terms of managing risk to clients and BREEAM Assessors in the event that a certification outcome is challenged.

The assessment report and the BREEAM Assessor role It is the BREEAM Assessor who determines the BREEAM rating and the assessment report is the formal record of an assessor’s audit against the criteria defined in the Technical Manual for a BREEAM scheme. The BREEAM certificate issued by BRE Global provides assurance that the service provided by the assessor (that is, the process of producing the assessment report) has been conducted in accordance with the requirements of the scheme. The purpose of the certificate is therefore to give confidence to the client in the assessor’s performance and processes in determining a BREEAM rating. It is the role of the assessor to gather project information and use it to assess performance against the BREEAM scheme in a competent and impartial manner. To award a BREEAM credit, the assessor must be satisfied beyond reasonable doubt that the evidence gathered demonstrates unambiguous compliance with all relevant criteria defined in the BREEAM scheme. All evidence must be appropriately referenced in the formal report produce by the assessor and made available on request from BRE Global Ltd for quality assurance checks. Clear, ordered and well referenced evidence for each BREEAM issue and criterion facilitates efficient quality assurance and certification. BREEAM Assessors can access further guidance on assessment report referencing in a Guidance Note to be provided on the BREEAM website.

Evidence types Evidence should not necessarily need to be prepared specifically for the purpose of the BREEAM assessment. In many instances, the assessor should be able to source readily available and prepared project information for the purpose of demonstrating compliance. For this reason, BREEAM aims to avoid being prescriptive on the type of evidence required, although some issues do require specific documents to be provided. The assessor and project team will find that many assessment issues require more than one piece or type of information to demonstrate compliance with one criterion, or alternatively, one piece of information may be sufficient to demonstrate compliance with multiple criteria. To assist project teams and the BREEAM assessor in their collation of building information at each stage of assessment, the different types of documentation that can be used as evidence of compliance are listed below. These evidence types fall broadly into three categories:

26

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

1. General evidence type 2. Specific evidence type 3. Other evidence type. For some assessment issues, the assessor is likely to require a mixture of general and specific evidence types. General evidence includes a broad list of defined building information commonly produced for a building project. One or a mix of these types of building information can be used to demonstrate compliance for one or more of the BREEAM issues and criteria, as deemed appropriate by the BREEAM Assessor for the stage of assessment. General BREEAM evidence types are listed below in Table - 8, and are not specifically listed in the ’ Evidence‘ section found within each BREEAM issue. Note, not all general evidence types will be appropriate for all issues and it is the responsibility of the assessor to ensure that the evidence provided demonstrates compliance. Specific evidence is defined building information that must be provided to verify compliance with the relevant criteria for the BREEAM credit sought. In most cases it will be the only type of evidence capable of verifying compliance. Where specific evidence is not provided and appropriately referenced in the assessment report, the Quality Assurance checks will identify non-conformity and certification will be delayed. An example of specific evidence would be a copy of the building regulations output document from the approved software for BREEAM issue Ene 01. When required, specific evidence is defined and listed for each BREEAM issue in the ‘Evidence’ section for both final and interim stages of assessment. Note, not all BREEAM issues will have specific evidence requirements. Although the ‘Evidence’ section of each issue highlights the evidence required to demonstrate compliance with particular criteria, simply submitting this evidence may not be sufficient to demonstrate compliance with that criteria. Additional ‘general evidence types’ may be required to confirm full compliance with the criteria. For example Mat 01; to demonstrate compliance with criteria 1-5 at the design stage, a copy of the Mat 01 tool is listed in the ‘Evidence’ table. However, in addition to the Mat 01 tool, further evidence is required to demonstrate how this tool has been completed, i.e. general evidence types such as building specifications confirming the materials to be used. Other types of evidence can still be used to demonstrate compliance where an information type provided by a client/design team is not listed in Table - 8 or the ‘Evidence’ table for each issue. To avoid non-conformities and delays in certification, undefined alternative types of evidence must demonstrate credible, robust and traceable assurance to the same level as, or better than, specified or general evidence types. If in doubt, please contact BREEAM prior to accepting such evidence. Table - 8: Evidence types Ref

Document/evidence type

Description/notes

E1

As constructed information

Information produced at the end of a project to represent what has been constructed. This will comprise a mixture of ‘as-built’ information/drawings and surveys from specialist subcontractors and the ‘final construction issue’ from design team members.

E2

Building information model (BIM)

The BIM (or BIM files) used for the project containing relevant information/evidence of compliance.

E3

BRE Global correspondence reference number

For example the reference number for a BRE Global response to an assessors technical query.

E4

BREEAM Assessor’s site inspection report

A formal report based on the BREEAM Assessor's own survey of the site/building to confirm compliance with BREEAM criteria. An assessor’s site inspection report will be distinct from their formal BREEAM assessment report, serving as a form of evidence of compliance in its own right, and it may include photographs taken by the assessor as part of the survey.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

27

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Document/evidence type

Description/notes

E5

Building contract(s)

The contract (or excerpts/clauses from it) between the client and the contractor for the construction of the project. In some instances, the Building Contract may contain design duties for specialist subcontractors and/or design team members.

E6

Certificates of compliance (third party)

Examples include ISO 14001, BES 6001, FSC (Forest Stewardship Council), EPC (environmental profile certificate), EPD (environmental product declaration), Considerate Constructors etc.

E7

Communication records

Formal communication records between/from relevant project stakeholders and/or other third parties confirming an appointment, action or outcome. This may be in the form of a letter, meeting minutes, email correspondence, publication or another form of media (see also additional guidance on following pages).

E8

Communication strategy

The strategy that sets out when the project team will meet, how they will communicate effectively and the protocols for issuing information between the various parties, both informally and at information exchanges

E9

Computer aided modelling results/outputs

Examples include thermal modelling, flooding, life cycle assessment, life cycle costing, ventilation modelling etc.

E10

Construction specification

The specification for the project/building. 1

E11

Construction stage data/information

For example, purchase orders, metering data, log books, commissioning records/reports etc.

E12

Contractual tree

A diagram that clarifies the contractual relationship between the client and the parties undertaking the roles required on a project.

E13

Cost information

Project costs, including the cost estimate and life cycle costs.

E14

Design drawings2

Developed Design and Technical Design, including the coordinated architectural, structural and building services design. Site plans, drainage designs.

E15

Design programme

A programme setting out the strategic dates in relation to the design process. It is aligned with the Project Programme but is strategic in its nature, due to the iterative nature of the design process, particularly in the early stages.

E16

Design responsibility matrix

A matrix that sets out who is responsible for designing each aspect of the project and when. This document sets out the extent of any performance specified design.

E17

Feasibility study

Studies undertaken to test the feasibility of the Initial Project Brief for the site or in a

1For the purpose of BREEAM the specific clause of the specification must be referenced within the report. 2Evidence in the form of design drawings must be presented in a clear, professional working format with clearly identified

legends indicating revision number, date, title, owner etc. (where appropriate).

28

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ref

Document/evidence type

Description/notes

specific context and to consider how site-wide issues will be addressed. E18

Final project brief

The Initial Project Brief amended so that it is aligned with the Concept Design and any briefing decisions made during this stage.

E19

Other third party information

For example, maps, public transport timetables, product data/details, manufacturers’ literature, government /EU standards or codes, EU labelling.

E20

Professional services contract

An agreement to provide professional or consulting services such as, designing, feasibility studies, or legal or technical advice.

E21

Professional specialist reports

Professional reports resulting from specialist surveys/studies/test results, e.g. contaminated land, ecology, flood risk assessment, surface water run-off report, site investigation, acoustics, indoor air quality plan, low and zero carbon technologies study, transportation analysis, commissioning reports, passive design analysis report, free cooling analysis report, life cycle assessment, landscape and habitat management plan etc.

E22

Project Execution or Quality Plan

The Project Execution Plan is produced in collaboration between the project lead and lead designer, with contributions from other designers and members of the project team. The Project Execution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to be used to develop the design.

E23

Project programme

The overall period for the briefing, design, construction and post completion activities of a project.

E24

Project roles table

A table that sets out the roles required on a project as well as defining the stages during which those roles are required and the parties responsible for carrying out the roles.

E25

Project strategy

The strategies developed in parallel with the Concept Design to support the design and, in certain instances, to respond to the Final Project Brief as it is concluded. Examples include strategies for sustainability, acoustics, handover, maintenance and operational, fire engineering, building control, technology, health and safety, construction, travel plan, sustainable procurement plan.

E26

Risk assessment

The risk assessment considers the various design risks and other risks on a project and how each risk will be managed and the party responsible for managing each risk.

E27

Schedule of services

A list of specific services and tasks to be undertaken by a party involved in the project which is incorporated into their professional services contract.

E28

Strategic or initial project brief

The brief prepared following discussions with the client to ascertain the project objectives, the client’s business case and, in certain instances, in response to site feasibility studies.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

29

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

BRE Global Ltd endeavours to ensure that BREEAM requires only types or categories of information which already exist as a result of the design and procurement process for a new building. This information should therefore be readily available from the project team and easily referenced. The assessor is responsible for auditing the evidence as it is provided to them and is not required or expected to tailor evidence; doing so is likely to result in non-conformities and a delay in certification as the conflict of interest that may arise is investigated.

Communication records Any communication records used as evidence must provide clear confirmation of the author’s identity and role, the date and the recipient(s) identity. Formal letters of correspondence must be on company/organisation headed note-paper with a signature (electronic signatures are acceptable). Meeting minutes must include date, location and attendee information (names, organisations and roles), along with a record of the meeting and agreed actions.

Written commitments at the interim stage of assessment – Design stage At the interim design stage of assessment it is permissible to use letters or emails to demonstrate intent to comply with BREEAM criteria (provided they meet the requirements for the communication records above). Such evidence must also make clear the actions and evidence (or an understanding thereof) that will be undertaken and provided to ensure the projects ongoing compliance, particularly at the final stage of assessment, i.e. post-construction. This is to ensure that the party who makes the commitment is clearly aware of the actions and evidence that needs to be supplied to demonstrate compliance with BREEAM at the final stage of assessment. Whilst letters of commitment can play a role in demonstrating compliance, they are not a replacement for more formal and established types of project information. The assessor must not award credits where they have a reason to doubt the validity or intent of written commitments or where it is not unreasonable to expect formal design or specification information to be available to confirm compliance.

Written commitments at the final stage of assessment – Postconstruction Evidence supplied at the post-construction stage must be reflective of the completed building and must therefore demonstrate what has actually been implemented. For example if sub-meters have been specified at design stage, evidence at the post construction stage would need to demonstrate that these have actually been installed. Appropriate evidence may be a photograph or as-built drawings showing the location of the sub-meters. Letters of commitment cannot be used to demonstrate compliance at the final, post-construction stage of assessment. The only exception to this is where the criteria require an action to take place post-construction, i.e. after handover and possibly during the building operation. An example could be a letter from the building owner/occupier making a commitment to conduct post-occupancy evaluation. As with letters of commitment at the design stage, the BREEAM Assessor must not award BREEAM credits where they have a reason to doubt the validity or intent of written commitments or where it is not unreasonable to expect a formal documentation, e.g. a schedule of services and/or professional services contract.

30

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Management

Management

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

31

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Man 01 Project brief and design Number of credits available

Minimum standards

4

Yes

Aim To recognise and encourage an integrated design process that optimises building performance.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Stakeholder consultation (2 credits) Sustainability Champion (2 credits). The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit – Stakeholder consultation (project delivery)

1. Prior to completion of the Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2), the project delivery stakeholders have met to identify and define their roles, responsibilities and contributions for each of the key phases of project delivery. 2. In defining the roles and responsibilities for each key phase of the project, the following must be considered: a. End user requirements b. Aims of the design and design strategy c. Particular installation and construction requirements/limitations d. Occupiers budget and technical expertise in maintaining any proposed systems e. Maintainability and adaptability of the proposals f. Requirements for the production of project and end user documentation g. Requirements for commissioning, training and aftercare support. 3. The project team demonstrate how the project delivery stakeholder contributions and outcomes of the consultation process has influenced or changed the Initial Project Brief, including if appropriate, the Project Execution Plan, Communication Strategy, and the Concept Design.

One credit - Stakeholder consultation (third party)

4. Prior to completion of the Concept Design stage, all relevant third parties have been consulted by the design team on the minimum consultation content. 5. The project must demonstrate how the stakeholder contributions and outcomes of the consultation exercise have influenced or changed the Initial Project Brief and Concept Design. 6. Prior to completion of the Technical Design (RIBA Stage 4), consultation feedback has been given to, and received by, all relevant parties.

Additionally for Education, Healthcare, Law Courts and Major Transport Node building types only: (criterion 7) 7. The consultation exercise used a method carried out by an independent party.

One credit - Sustainability Champion (design)

8. An a Sustainability Champion has been appointed to facilitate the setting and achievement of BREEAM performance target(s) for the project. The design stage Sustainability Champion is appointed to perform this role during the project preparation and brief stage, as defined by the RIBA Plan of Work 2013. 9. The defined BREEAM performance target(s) has been contractually agreed between the client and design/project team

32

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Man 01 Project brief and design

Management

no later than the Concept Design stage. 10. To achieve this credit at the interim (design) assessment stage, the agreed BREEAM performance target(s) must be demonstrably achieved by the project design. This is demonstrated via the BREEAM Assessor’s design stage certification report.

One credit - Sustainability Champion (monitoring progress)

11. The Sustainability Champion criteria 8, 9 and 10 have been achieved. 12. A Sustainability Champion is appointed to monitor progress against the agreed BREEAM performance target(s) throughout the design process and formally report progress to the client and design team.

To do this the Sustainability Champion must attend key project/design team meetings during the Concept Design, Developed Design and Technical Design stages, as defined by the RIBA Plan of Work 2013, reporting during, and prior to, completion of each stage, as a minimum.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Stakeholder consultation (project delivery) - (1 credit) 1. Criteria 1 to 3 Stakeholder consultation (third party) - (1 credit) 2. Criteria 4 to 6 3. Criterion 7 is not applicable. Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue. Sustainability Champion (design) - (1 credit) 4. Criteria 8 to 10. Sustainability Champion (monitoring progress) - (1 credit) 5. Criteria 11 to 12.

Country specific

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

33

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

Minimum consultation content

Minimum consultation content will be dependent on the building but would typically include the following: 1. Functionality, build quality and impact (including aesthetics) 2. Provision of appropriate internal and external facilities (for future building occupants and visitors/users) 3. Management and operational implications 4. Maintenance resources implications 5. Impacts on the local community, e.g. local traffic/transport impact 6. Opportunities for shared use of facilities and infrastructure with the community/appropriate stakeholders, if relevant/appropriate to building type. 7. Compliance with statuary (national/local) consultation requirements. In the case of educational building types, minimum content also includes: 8. How the building/grounds could best be designed to facilitate learning and provide a range of social spaces appropriate to pupils’, students’ and other users’ needs. In the case of building types containing technical areas/functions, e.g. laboratories, workshops etc., minimum content also includes: 9. The end-users broad requirements for such facilities, including appropriate sizing, optimisation and integration of equipment and systems.

CN5

Assessing and awarding the available credits for a Sustainability Champion

There is an additional credit for appointing a Sustainability Champion during the construction and handover phase (see BREEAM issue Man 03 Responsible construction practices). The key aim of the credit in Man 03 is to encourage and reward contractors and project teams that appoint a Sustainability Champion and therefore ensure continuation of the sustainability objectives during the construction phase and that the constructed building meets the client's target BREEAM rating.

CN6

BREEAM related performance targets

If, at Post Construction, the BREEAM performance targets set at the end of the Concept Stage have not been achieved, the credits awarded at the interim ‘design’ certification stage for appointing the BREEAM Sustainability Champion must be withheld in the final assessment. See Relevant definitions.

General

Methodology None.

34

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Man 01 Project brief and design

Management

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1-3

Consultation plan setting out the process and scope of the consultation.

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions BREEAM Accredited Professional (AP) An individual qualified and accredited by BRE as a specialist in built environment sustainability, environmental design and assessment. The role of the BREEAM AP is to facilitate the project team's efforts to successfully schedule activities, set priorities and negotiate the trade-offs required to achieve a target BREEAM rating when the design is formally assessed. For a list and contact details of BREEAM Accredited Professionals visit http://www.greenbooklive.com/ BREEAM related performance targets BREEAM performance targets refer specifically to the BREEAM rating and minimum standards required. This does not necessarily include individual targeted BREEAM issues/credits, which may be traded over the course of the project as it evolves. In agreeing a BREEAM target it is recommended that individual BREEAM issues, credits and criteria are targeted or prioritised to ensure that the agreed target is achievable, and achieved without potentially costly alterations to the design at a later stage. Communication strategy The RIBA Plan of Works 2013 defines the Communication Strategy as a strategy that sets out when the project team will meet, how they will communicate effectively and the protocols for issuing information between the various parties, both informally and at Information Exchanges. Consultation feedback This is feedback which focuses on the stakeholder suggestions, comments, recommendations and the consultation outcomes. This includes how the suggestions and outcomes influenced, or resulted in modifications to, the proposed design and building operation/use.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

35

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Independent party With respect to compliance with the criterion relating to using an 'independent party', the client/design team needs to demonstrates that either: 1. They have used a party independent of the design process to conduct the necessary consultation exercise, using a compliant method. Examples of independent third party compliant methods include the Design Quality Indicator 1 (DQI),and the Achieving Excellence Design Evaluation Toolkit (AEDET) in Healthcare buildings. Or alternatively; 2. If the consultation is to be carried out by an organisation involved with the design of the building e.g. the project architect, then they must present the assessor with evidence that robustly demonstrates the independence of the consultation process. BREEAM has not attempted to define what form this evidence must take; the onus is on the design team or relevant individual to clearly demonstrate to the BREEAM Assessor a credible level of independence. Key design team meetings Key design team meetings can be defined as those where fundamental decisions that influence or affect the building’s proposed, design and its construction in accordance with the design (and therefore the building’s sustainability impacts and BREEAM performance), are discussed and made. These meetings would typically include representatives from at least three of the parties listed below. 1. Representatives of the client/developer 2. The principal contractor 3. The architect 4. Structural engineers 5. Building services engineers 6. Cost consultants 7. Environmental consultants 8. Project management consultants. Key phases The definition of key phases of project delivery includes the following: Concept Design Developed Design Construction Commissioning and Handover In Use occupation. Project delivery stakeholders The purpose of criterion 1 is to reflect the need to consider the input of all the major project stakeholders from the earliest practical stage, to ensure smooth and successful delivery of the project's sustainability objectives. Project delivery stakeholders therefore include the client, the building occupier (where known), the design team and the principal contractor. With regards to contractors’ involvement, it ensures their input in terms of formulating sustainable design solutions, commenting/inputting on the practicality and build ability of (one or more) design solutions and their impact on programming, cost etc. BREEAM recognises that traditionally for some projects the contractor for the works might not be appointed at the early stages of the project and therefore compliance with criterion 1 would not be possible. In these instances, to ensure the aim of the criteria is upheld, provided that a suitably experienced person with substantial construction/contracting experience in projects similar to the proposed works is involved prior to appointment of the contractor, criterion 1 will be met. A suitably experienced person could be a contractor appointed as a consultant for this stage or a construction project manager. Project Execution Plan The RIBA Plan of Works 2013 defines a Project Execution Plan as a plan produced in collaboration between the project lead and lead designer, with contributions from other designers and members of the project team. The Project Execution Plan sets out the processes and protocols to be used to develop the design. It is sometimes referred to as a 'project quality plan'.

1The Design Quality Indicator is a method to assess the design quality of buildings. www.dqi.org.uk

36

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Man 01 Project brief and design

Management

Relevant third parties. (see criterion 4) This includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Actual/intended building users (if known) including facilities management (FM) staff or those responsible for the day-to-day operation of the building and grounds. 2. Representative consultation group from the existing community (if the building is a new development in an existing community) or for a community still under construction. 3. Existing partnerships and networks that have knowledge and experience from existing buildings of the same type. 4. Potential users of any shared facilities, e.g. operators of clubs and community groups. AND the following where relevant: 5. In educational buildings, representatives of Local Education Authority, Board of Governors etc. 6. Local or national historic/heritage groups (over and above any requirements relating to statutory consultees). 7. Specialist service and maintenance contractors/representatives where the building function has particular technical requirements in complex environments, e.g. buildings containing laboratories. Sustainability Champion (design) With respect to the use of the term within this BREEAM issue only, an Sustainability Champion is an individual qualified and accredited to provide the design team with advice on built environment sustainability, environmental design and environmental assessment (including BREEAM). They will facilitate the team's efforts to successfully schedule activities, set priorities and negotiate the trade-offs required to achieve the target BREEAM rating when the design is formally assessed by the BREEAM Assessor. The aim of the Sustainability Champion credits is to encourage an integrated design and construction process that uses BREEAM as a framework for establishing, agreeing and achieving the desired level of sustainability performance for the project. The Sustainability Champion credits in this issue focus on achieving this objective during the preparation and brief, and design stages of the project. Individuals who are accredited under the following schemes approved by BRE Global meet the definition of an approved Sustainability Champion: BREEAM Accredited Professionals. Providers of schemes/qualifications who feel their members meet this definition and who would like to be listed under the definition of approved Sustainability Champion should contact BRE Global.

Other information None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

37

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning Number of credits available

Minimum standards

4

No

Aim To deliver whole life value from investment and promote economic sustainability by recognising and encouraging the use of life cycle costing and service life planning to improve design, specification and through-life maintenance and operation.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Two credit - Elemental life cycle cost (LCC)

1. An elemental life cycle cost (LCC) analysis has been carried out, at Process Stage 2 (equivalent to Concept Design - RIBA Stage 2) together with any design option appraisals in line with 'Standardized method of life cycle costing for construction procurement' PD 156865:2008 1. 2. The LCC analysis shows: a. An outline LCC plan for the project based on the buildings basic structure and envelope, appraising a range of options and based on multiple cash flow scenarios e.g. 20, 30, 50+ years; b. The fabric and servicing strategy for the project outlining services component and fit-out options (if applicable) over a 15 year period, in the form of an 'elemental LCC Plan'.

One credit - Component level LCC Plan

3. A component level LCC plan has been developed by the end of Process Stage 4 (equivalent to Technical Design – RIBA Stage 4) in line with PD 156865:2008 and includes the following component types (where present): a. Envelope, e.g. cladding, windows, and/or roofing b. Services, e.g. heat source cooling source, and/or controls c. Finishes, e.g. walls, floors and/or ceilings d. External spaces, e.g. alternative hard landscaping, boundary protection. 4. Demonstrate, using appropriate examples provided by the design team, how the component level LCC plan has been used to influence building and systems design/specification to minimise life cycle costs and maximise critical value.

One credit - Capital cost reporting

5. Report via the BREEAM assessment reporting tool, the predicted capital cost for the building in pounds per square metre (£k/m2).

Checklists and tables None.

38

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning

Management

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Elemental life cycle cost, capital cost reporting and maintenance strategy,criteria 1 to 2 and 5 Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Component level LCC plan , criteria 3 to 4 Both options: The plan must include all component types to be installed by the developer. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Capital cost reporting - (1 credit) 1. Criterion 5 is applicable.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

Appropriate examples See criterion 4.

The option(s) selected to demonstrate how life cycle costs have been minimised and critical value maximised must be appropriate in terms of its relative impact on project costs, future building maintenance burden and size (volume or area).

CN5

Pre-defined specifications

Where the building is constructed to a pre-defined standard specification, the LCC plan for this specification may be used to help demonstrate compliance.

CN6

Capital cost reporting

At the design stage of assessment, where the information is not yet available, the credit can be awarded where the client commits to providing this information for the final stage of assessment.

General

Building type specific CN7

Law Courts buildings – responsibility for compliance

When considering this issue, the term project team includes the Ministry of Justice. Responsibility for complying with the criteria of this issue may fall with any or all of the project team members and it is likely that this will vary depending on the procurement route used for the project.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

39

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post -construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1-2

Elemental life cycle cost plan

As per interim design stage

3-4

Component level life cycle cost plan

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Life cycle cost (LCC) The cost of an asset, or its parts throughout its life cycle, while fulfilling the performance requirements; a methodology for systematic economic evaluation of life cycle costs over a period of analysis, as defined in the agreed scope. Elemental LCC plan This is commonly used for developing solutions at project level during option appraisals. Costs are normally at building elemental level on the entire asset. Information may be a mix of typical benchmark costs for key elements, comparative cost modelling or approximate estimates. It is expressed as cost per square meter of gross internal floor area (GIFA) and presented for elemental analysis, aligned to the level of capital cost plans. Predicted capital cost TBC

Other information Capital cost reporting This information is collected to assist research into the cost and savings of developing sustainable/BREEAM assessed buildings to inform the business case for sustainability and the ongoing development of BREEAM. All data submitted will be treated as confidential and only used anonymously. Component level LCC plan A component level LCC plan is commonly used for cost planning specification choices of systems, elements or component levels during design development. Component level LCC appraisal for service life planning at the feasibility stage requires the environment of the building and other local conditions to be identified, and the fundamental requirements to be met in planning the service life of the building. Decisions should be made on;

40

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Man 02 Life cycle cost and service life planning

Management

the likely design life of the building (rather than the contractual design life) minimum functional performance criteria for each component over the building’s design life components that must be repairable, maintainable or replaceable within the design life of the building. When to undertake life cycle costing Life cycle costing is relevant throughout the building or constructed asset’s life cycle, in particular during the project planning, design and construction and also during the in-use phases. (For further information please refer to standard PD 15865 Supplement to ISO: 15686-5.) Standardised method for life cycle costing (SMLCC) for construction The objectives of the Standardised method for life cycle costing (SMLCC) for construction procurement are to provide: 1. A UK standard cost data structure for life cycle costing, which aligns with BS ISO 15686-5 and with the Building Cost Information service (BCIS) Standard Form of Capital Cost Analysis (SFCA) and industry recognised occupancy cost codes. (Refer to Annexes A, B and C) (http://www.rics.org/uk/ ) 2. Life cycle costing practitioners with a standardised method of applying life cycle costing, applicable to the UK construction industry and to the key stages of the procurement process. 3. Process mapping the life cycle costing stages – to help structure how to plan, generate, and interpret and present the results for a variety of different purposes and levels of life cycle cost planning. 4. Instructions on how to define the client’s specific requirements for life cycle costing and the required outputs and forms of reporting – and to decide on which method of economic evaluation to apply. 5. Simplification and demystification – by providing practical guidance, instructions and definitions, together with informative worked examples on how to undertake life cycle costing (for construction). 6. An industry accepted methodology, to facilitate a more accurate, consistent and robust application of life cycle costing estimation and option appraisals, thereby creating a more effective and robust basis for life cycle cost analysis and benchmarking. This document, PD 15865, also seeks to help eliminate confusion over scoping and terminology and to address concerns over the uncertainty and risks that are undermining confidence in life cycle costs used for construction procurement. (For further information please refer to standard PD 15865 Supplement to ISO: 15686-5 from which this extract was sourced.) 1PD 15865:2008 Standardized method of life cycle costing for construction procurement: a supplement to BS ISO 15686-5

Buildings and constructed assets - Service life planning - Part 5: Life cycle costing

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

41

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Man 03 Responsible construction practices Number of credits available

Minimum standards

6

Yes

Aim To recognise and encourage construction sites which are managed in an environmentally and socially considerate, responsible and accountable manner.

Assessment criteria This issue is split in to four parts: Environmental management (1 credit) Construction stage Sustainability Champion (1 credit) Considerate construction (up to 2 credits) Monitoring of construction site impacts (2t credits). The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit – Environmental management

1. The principal contractor operates an environmental management system (EMS) covering their main operations. The EMS must be either: a. be third party certified, to ISO 14001/EMAS or equivalent standard; or b. have a structure that is in compliance with BS 8555 2003 and has reached phase four of the implementation stage, ‘implementation and operation of the environmental management system’, and has completed phase audits one to four, as defined in BS 8555. 2. All site timber used in the project is sourced in accordance with the UK government’s Timber Procurement Policy, seeRelevant definitions). 3. The principal contractor implements best practice pollution prevention policies and procedures on site in accordance with Pollution Prevention Guidelines (PPG) 6 Working at construction and demolition sites.

One credit – Sustainability Champion (construction)

4. A Sustainability Champion is appointed to monitor the project to ensure ongoing compliance with the relevant sustainability performance/process criteria, and therefore BREEAM target(s), during the Construction, Handover and Close Out stages (as defined by the RIBA Plan of Works 2013). To do this the Sustainability Champion will ideally be site based or will visit the site regularly to carry out spot checks and, frequently and without prior warning to monitor site activities, with the relevant authority to do so. The Sustainability Champion will report on progress at relevant project team meetings including identifying potential areas of noncompliance and any action needed to mitigate. 5. The defined BREEAM performance target forms a requirement of the principal contractor's contract (See Compliance note CN6). 6. To achieve this credit at the final post-construction stage of assessment, the BREEAM related performance target for the project must be demonstrably achieved by the project. This is demonstrated via the BREEAM assessor’s final postconstruction stage certification report.

42

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Man 03 Responsible construction practices

Management

Up to two credits - Considerate construction

7. Where the principal contractor has used a ‘compliant’ organisational, local or national considerate construction scheme and their performance against the scheme has been confirmed by independent assessment and verification. The BREEAM credits can be awarded as follows: a. One credit where the contractor achieves ‘compliance’ with the criteria of a compliant scheme. b. Two credits where the contractor significantly exceeds ‘compliance’ with the criteria of the scheme. Refer to theRelevant definitionssection for a list of compliant schemes and therefore how performance, as determined by a compliant scheme, translates in to BREEAM credits.

Up to two credits - Monitoring of construction site impacts

8. Responsibility has been assigned to an individual(s) for monitoring, recording and reporting energy use, water consumption and transport data (where measured) resulting from all on-site construction processes (and off site were possible) throughout the build programme. To ensure the robust collection of information, this individual(s) must have the appropriate authority and responsibility to request and access the data required. Where appointed, the Sustainability Champion could perform this role.

One credit - Utility consumption Energy consumption 9. Monitor and record data on principal constructor's and sub-contractors' energy consumption in kWh (and where relevant, litres of fuel used) as a result of the use of construction plant, equipment (mobile and fixed) and site accommodation. 10. Report the total carbon dioxide emissions (total kgCO2/project value) from the construction process via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool.

Water consumption 11. Monitor and record data on principal constructor's and sub-contractors' potable water consumption (m3) arising from the use of construction plant, equipment (mobile and fixed) and site accommodation. 12. Using the collated data report the total net water consumption (m3), i.e. consumption minus any recycled water use, from the construction process via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool.

One credit - Transport of construction materials and waste

13. Monitor and record data on transport movements and impacts resulting from delivery of the majority of construction materials to site and construction waste from site. As a minimum this must cover: a. Transport of materials from the factory gate to the building site, including any transport, intermediate storage and distribution, See Relevant definitions. b. Scope of this monitoring must cover the following as a minimum: i. Materials used in major building elements (i.e. those defined in BREEAM issue Mat 01 Life cycle impacts), including insulation materials. ii. Ground works and landscaping materials. c. Transport of construction waste from the construction gate to waste disposal processing/recovery centre gate. Scope of this monitoring must cover the construction waste groups outlined in the project's waste management plan. 14. Using the collated data, report separately for materials and waste, the total fuel consumption (litres) and total carbon dioxide emissions (kgCO2 eq), plus total distance travelled (km) via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool.

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve one innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 15. With reference to the considerate construction criterion 7, in addition to meeting the criteria for two credits the contractor achieves compliance with the criteria of the compliant scheme to an exemplary level of practice.

Checklists and tables None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

43

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Environmental management (1 credit) 1. Criteria 1 to 3 Considerate construction (up to 2 credits) 2. Criterion 7 Monitoring of construction site impacts Utility consumption (1 credit) 3. Criteria 8 to 12

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

Site Clearance

The scope of this issue applies to the principal contractor and their scope of works. If the scope of their works includes demolition and site clearance then this stage of work falls within the scope of the assessment and therefore the issue criteria.

CN5

Site timber and reusable formwork See criterion 9.

Re-usable timber formwork itself does not automatically comply. All timber used in the manufacture of the formwork must either be initially reclaimed, or sourced in accordance with the UK government's Timber Procurement Policy.

CN6

Target setting

At present data from construction sites do not generally exist in enough detail to set benchmarks and targets. BREEAM therefore does not set any requirements at present in terms of specific targets for reducing energy, water and transport consumption resulting from the construction process. Whilst BREEAM does not require them, it is strongly recommended that site specific targets are set and reported against. Following adoption of widespread and consistent measurement and reporting protocols for construction site impacts and collation of construction site data, BREEAM is likely in future to establish consistent and complimentary targets as part of demonstrating compliance with this BREEAM issue (see alsoAdditional information).

General

44

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Man 03 Responsible construction practices

Management

Ref

Terms

Description

CN7

Healthcare buildings (NHS sites) See criterion 1.

As a prerequisite of awarding any of the available credits for this issue, the principal contractor must achieve the measure requiring operation of ‘An Environmental Management System’ (as defined in criterion 1 One credit – Environmental management).

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Compliant organisational, local or national considerate construction schemes The following are defined as compliant schemes for the purpose of this BREEAM issue: Considerate Constructors Scheme To achieve BREEAM credits using the Considerate Constructors Scheme (CCS) and its Code of Considerate Practice, the principal contractor must achieve scheme certification and a CCS score as follows: 1. One credit: a CCS score between 25 and 34* 2. Two credits: a CCS score between 35 and 39** 3. Exemplary level performance: a CCS score of 40 or more***. * score of 5 in each of the five sections must be achieved ** score of 7 in each of the five sections must be achieved *** score of 7 in each of the five sections must be achieved A site can be visited by a CCS Monitor more than once and the CCS Certificate will be awarded based on the results of the Monitor’s final visit. At the final stage of the BREEAM assessment the number of BREEAM credits awarded should therefore be based on the final visit and the subsequent Monitor’s report and certified CCS score. Considerate Constructors Scheme The Considerate Constructors Scheme (CCS) is a national initiative set up by the UK construction industry to improve its image. The scheme is a self-financing, independent organisation owned by the Construction Umbrella Bodies (Holdings) Ltd (made up of the Construction Products Association and the Construction Industry Council). Sites and companies that register with the scheme sign up and are monitored against a Code of Considerate Practice, designed to encourage best practice beyond statutory requirements.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

45

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Construction processes The construction process includes the enabling works, assembly, installation and dis-assembly activities necessary for servicing the construction and completion of a new building. Factory gate For the purposes of this issue, the factory gate is defined as being the product manufacturer gate (i.e. where manufacture and pre-assembly finishes and the material is in its final product form). Examples might include: 1. Steel/concrete/glass manufacturers for cladding, windows and beams etc 2. Quarry gate for aggregate and sand 3. Concrete plant for concrete 4. Saw mill and timber processing plant for timber. Sustainability Champion With respect to the use of the term within this BREEAM issue only, a Sustainability Champion is an individual trained and qualified to provide advice on built environment sustainability, environmental design/construction, and environmental assessment (including BREEAM). They will monitor and audit construction site activities and facilitate the construction team's efforts to successfully schedule activities, set priorities and take the necessary action required to meet the sustainability related performance levels required to achieve the target BREEAM rating, when the final building is formally assessed by the BREEAM Assessor.The aim of the Sustainability Champion credits is to encourage an integrated design and construction process that uses BREEAM as a framework for establishing, agreeing and achieving the desired level of sustainability performance for the project. The Sustainability Champion credits in this issue focus on achieving this objective during the construction, handover and close out stages of the project. Individuals who are accredited under the following schemes approved by BRE Global meet the definition of an approved Sustainability Champion: BREEAM Accredited Professionals Providers of other schemes or qualifications who feel their members meet this definition and who would like to be listed under the definition of a Sustainability Champion should contact BRE Global.

Other information CO2 Reporting protocols At time of publication the following guidance is available for CO2 measuring protocols. 1. Encord: http://www.encord.org/?page_id=210 (have launched a CO2e protocol) 2. GHG Protocol - http://www.ghgprotocol.org/about-ghgp 3. DECC guidance for business: https://www.gov.uk/measuring-and-reporting-environmental-impacts-guidance-forbusinesses

Tools for monitoring and targeting construction site impacts ‘smartER’ is an add-on to BRE’s online waste management planning tool SMARTWaste Plan. ‘smartER’ enables SMARTWaste users to capture, monitor and target a project's onsite energy consumption, and therefore produce a CO2 footprint, water consumption and responsible sourcing of timber. The system can be used as a tool to help meet the criteria of this issue and as a source of evidence for demonstrating compliance. It is available through the SMARTWaste Membership scheme. Transport and CCS data can also be collected by developing tailor-made versions of SMARTWaste. More details are available at www.smartwaste.co.uk Compliant organisational, local or national considerate construction schemes Where a considerate construction/constructors scheme exists and is not listed as a BREEAM compliant scheme, the scheme administrator/operator should apply to BRE Global Ltd. for details on how to achieve recognition as a compliant scheme. Construction Excellence and reporting of construction site impacts Constructing Excellence publish the construction industry key performance indicators (KPIs) based on data collected by the Department for Business, Innovation and Skills via a voluntary quarterly survey returns by contractors throughout the UK. The Office of National Statistics also reports the annual results in the Construction Statistics

46

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Man 03 Responsible construction practices

Management

Annual. One of the key performance indicators is the ‘amount of CO2 emissions caused by the energy used during the construction process per £100,000 of project value (kg CO2/£100k). Information collated by contractors as part of their voluntary submissions to Constructing Excellence may also serve to help demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue. Reporting protocols (energy) (see criteria 2 and 3) At present, BREEAM sets no requirement on the use of a particular method or protocol for reporting energy/carbon from construction sites, as there are currently no uniformly accepted protocols for the collection of data and assessment of emissions from construction sites (source: ‘Carbon: Reducing the footprint of the construction process, an action plan to reduce carbon’ (Strategic Forum and Carbon Trust, 2010). Until such time as there is a consistent measurement protocol for reportingCO2/Energy from construction sites, BREEAM requires confirmation of the methodology and/or protocol used for monitoring, collating and reporting data on construction site energy consumption, as part of the reporting and certification process.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

47

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Man 04 Commissioning and handover Number of credits available

Minimum standards

4

Yes

Aim To encourage a properly planned handover and commissioning process that reflects the needs of the building occupants.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into four parts: Commissioning schedule and responsibilities (1 credit) Commissioning building services (1 credit) Commissioning building fabric (1 credit) Handover (1 credit). The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Commissioning schedule and responsibilities

1. There is a schedule of commissioning that identifies and includes a suitable timescale for commissioning and recommissioning of all complex and non-complex building services, control systems and building fabric. 2. All commissioning activities are carried out in accordance with current Building Regulations, BSRIA1 and CIBSE2 guidelines and/or other appropriate standards, where applicable. Where a building management system (BMS) is specified, refer to the Compliance note CN7 on BMS commissioning procedures. 3. An appropriate project team member(s) is appointed to monitor and programme pre-commissioning, commissioning and, where necessary, re-commissioning activities on behalf of the client. 4. The principal contractor accounts for the commissioning programme, responsibilities and criteria within their budget and main programme of works, allowing for the required time to complete all commissioning activities prior to handover.

One credit - Commissioning building services

5. For buildings with complex building services and systems, a specialist commissioning manager is appointed during the design stage (by either the client or the principal contractor) with responsibility for: a. Undertaking design reviews and giving advice on suitability for ease of commissioning. b. Providing commissioning management input to construction programming and during installation stages. c. Management of commissioning, performance testing and handover/post hand-over stages. Where there are simple building services, this role can be carried out by an appropriate project team member (see criterion 3 above), provided they are not involved in the general installation works for the building services system(s).

One credit - Commissioning building fabric

6. The commissioning schedule and responsibilities criteria above are achieved (criteria 1-4). 7. The integrity of the building fabric, including continuity of insulation, avoidance of thermal bridging and air leakage paths is quality assured through completion of a thermographic survey and/or airtightness testing and inspection. The survey/testing is undertaken by Suitably Qualified Professional (see compliance note 3) in accordance with the appropriate standard. 8. Any defects identified in the thermographic survey and/or airtightness testing report is rectified prior to building handover and close out. Any remedial work must meet the required performance characteristics for the building/element.

48

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Man 04 Commissioning and handover

Management

One credit - Handover A Building User Guide is developed prior to handover for distribution to the building occupiers and premises managers. A training schedule is prepared for building occupiers/premises managers, timed appropriately around handover and proposed occupation plans, which includes the following content as a minimum: 9. The building’s design intent 10. The available aftercare provision and aftercare team main contact(s), including any scheduled seasonal commissioning and post occupancy evaluation 11. Introduction to, and demonstration of, installed systems and key features, particularly building management systems, controls and their interfaces 12. Introduction to the Building User Guide and other relevant building documentation, e.g. design data, technical guides, maintenance strategy, operations and maintenance (O&M) manual, commissioning records, log book etc. 13. Maintenance requirements, including any maintenance contracts and regimes in place.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Commissioning schedule and responsibilities, commissioning building services, criteria 1 to 5 Option1- Shell only: These criteria are not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2- Shell and core only: With regard to the scope of services being specified/installed, all assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply and require assessment. Commissioning fabric, criteria 6 to 8 Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Handover, criterion 9 Option1- Shell only: This criterion is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2- Shell and core only: The guide includes as far as possible all relevant sections regarding the services and fabric installed. On completion of works the building owner/agent/user hands it over to the fit-out contractor who can then complete the relevant sections based on the fit-out strategy. Handover, criterion 10 Both options: This criterion is not applicable. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

49

Management

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Commissioning schedule and responsibilities (1 credit) 1. Criteria 2 to 4 Handover (1 credit) 2. Criteria 9 and 10

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Other appropriate standards See criterion 2.

Appropriate standards for completion of this criteria are referenced accordingly and include standards covering:

CN6

Process related equipment See criterion 2.

Any process or manufacture-related equipment specified as part of the project may be excluded from the assessment of the commissioning credits, except where they form an integral part of the building HVAC services, such as some heat recovery systems.

CN7

BMS commissioning procedures See criterion 2.

Where a BMS is specified, the following commissioning procedures must be carried out: 1. Commissioning of air and water systems is carried out when all control devices are installed, wired and functional 2. In addition to air and water flow results, commissioning results include physical measurements of room temperatures, off coil temperatures and other key parameters as appropriate 3. The BMS/controls installation should be running in auto with satisfactory internal conditions prior to handover 4. All BMS schematics and graphics (if BMS is present) are fully installed and functional to user interface before handover 5. The occupier or facilities team is fully trained in the operation of the system.

General CN4

building fabric commercial refrigeration fume cupboards microbiological safety cabinets.

Methodology None.

50

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Man 04 Commissioning and handover

Management

Evidence Critera

Design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

7-8

-

Thermographic survey and level 2 thermography certificate

9-10

-

Building User Guide

Additional information Relevant definitions Building User Guide Dedicated building/site specific guidance for the non-technical building user. The purpose of the guide is to help building users access, understand and operate the building efficiently and in a manner in keeping with the original design intent. A Building User Guide will provide easily accessible and understandable information relevant to the following stakeholders: The building’s staff (or where relevant residents) The non-technical facilities management team/building manager Other building users, e.g. visitors/community users The content of the guide will be specific to the building type, but should include information on the following: Overview of the building and its environmental strategy, e.g. energy/water/waste efficiency policy/strategy and how users should engage with/deliver the policy/strategy. Building services overview and access to controls, e.g. where to find them, what they control, how to operate effectively and efficiently etc. Pre-arrival information for visitors, e.g. access and security procedures/provisions Provision of, and access to, shared facilities Safety and emergency information/instructions Building related operational procedures specific to building type/operation, e.g. laboratories. Building related incident reporting/feedback arrangements Building related training information/links Provision of, and access to, transport facilities, e.g. public transport, cyclist facilities, pedestrian routes etc. Provision of, and access to, local amenities Re-fit, refurbishment and maintenance arrangements/considerations Links, references and relevant contact details There is no requirement on what format the Building User Guide should take. Complex systems There include, but are not limited, to air conditioning, comfort cooling, mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, complex passive ventilation, building management systems (BMS), renewable energy sources, microbiological safety cabinets and fume cupboards, cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant, fume cupboards, microbiological safety cabinets.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

51

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Suitably qualified professionals - thermographic survey and airtightness testing Thermography surveys and airtightness testing are to be undertaken by suitably qualified professionals in accordance with the appropriate standards, as follows: Airtightness testing: by professionals with membership of ATTMA (Air Tightness Testing and Measurement Association) attained at organisational level maintaining UKAS accreditation (as air tightness testing laboratories to ISO 17025). Thermographic survey: by a professional holding a valid Level 2 certificate in thermography (as defined by the UKTA website http://www.ukta.org

Other information None 1BSRIA Commissioning Guides: Application Guide 1/91 - Commissioning of VAV systems in Buildings Application Guide

20/95 - Commissioning of Pipework Systems Commissioning HVAC Systems: Guidance on the division of responsibilities (TM 1/88.1) Commissioning of Air Systems. Application procedures for buildings Application Guide 3/89.3 Pre-Commission Cleaning of Pipework Systems (BG 29/2012) 3/89.3 Commissioning Water Systems application procedures for buildings Superseded AG Commissioning Water Systems (BG 2/2010). Commissioning Job Book - A framework for managing the commissioning process (BG 11/2010) 2CIBSE Commissioning Codes:

Set of Seven Codes (2003) CIBSE Commissioning Code A: Air Distribution Systems (1996 confirmed 2006). ISBN: 9780900953736 CIBSE Commissioning Code B: Boilers ISBN: 9781903287293 CIBSE Commissioning Code C: Automatic Controls ISBN: 9781903287132 CIBSE Commissioning Code L: Lighting (SLL Commissioning Code L). ISBN: 9781903287323 CIBSE Commissioning Code M: Commissioning Management. ISBN: 9781903287330 CIBSE Commissioning Code R: Refrigerating Systems. ISBN: 9781903287286 CIBSE Commissioning Code W: Water Distribution Systems ISBN: 9781906846152.

52

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Man 05 Aftercare

Management

Man 05 Aftercare Number of credits available

Minimum standards

3

Yes

Aim To provide post-handover aftercare to the building owner/occupants during the first year of occupation to ensure the building operates and adapts, where relevant, in accordance with the design intent and operational demands.

Assessment criteria This issue is split in to three parts: Aftercare support (1 credit) Seasonal commissioning (1 credit) Post occupancy evaluation (1 credit). The following is required to demonstrate compliance :

One credit - Aftercare support

1. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to provide aftercare support to the building occupier(s), which includes the following as a minimum: a. A meeting programmed to occur between the aftercare team/individual and the building occupier/management (prior to initial occupation, or as soon as possible thereafter) to: i. Introduce the aftercare team or individual to the aftercare support available, including the Building User Guide (where existing) and training schedule/content. ii. Present key information about the building including the design intent and how to use the building to ensure it operates as efficiently and effectively as possible. b. Onsite facilities management training, to include a walkabout of the building and introduction to and familiarisation with the building systems, their controls and how to operate them in accordance with the design intent and operational demands. c. Initial aftercare support provision for at least the first month of building occupation, e.g. on-site attendance on a weekly basis to support building users/management (this could be more or less frequent depending on the complexity of the building/building operations). d. Longer term aftercare support provision for occupants for at least the first 12 months from occupation, e.g. a helpline, nominated individual or other appropriate system to support building users/management. 2. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to co-ordinate the collection and monitoring of energy and water consumption data for a minimum of 12 months, once the building is occupied. This is done to facilitate analysis of discrepancies between actual and predicted performance, with a view to adjusting systems and/or user behaviours accordingly.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

53

Management

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

One credit - Seasonal commissioning

3. The following seasonal commissioning activities will be completed over a minimum 12 month period, once the building becomes substantially occupied: a. Complex systems - Specialist Commissioning Manager: i. Testing of all building services under full load conditions, i.e. heating equipment in mid-winter, cooling/ventilation equipment in mid-summer, and under part load conditions (spring/autumn). ii. Where applicable, testing should also be carried out during periods of extreme (high or low) occupancy. iii. Interviews with building occupants (where they are affected by the complex services) to identify problems or concerns regarding the effectiveness of the systems. iv. Re-commissioning of systems (following any work needed to serve revised loads), and incorporating any revisions in operating procedures into the operations and maintenance (O&M) manuals. b. Simple systems (naturally ventilated) - external consultant/aftercare team/facilities manager i. Review thermal comfort, ventilation, and lighting, at three, six and nine month intervals after initial occupation, either by measurement or occupant feedback. ii. Take all reasonable steps to re-commission systems following the review to take account of deficiencies identified and incorporate any relevant revisions in operating procedures into the O&M manuals.

One credit - Post occupancy evaluation

4. The client or building occupier makes a commitment to carry out a post occupancy evaluation (POE) exercise one year after initial building occupation. This is done to gain in-use performance feedback from building users to inform operational processes, including re-commissioning activities, and maintain or improve productivity, health, safety and comfort. The POE is carried out by an independent party (see Man 01 Project brief and design – Relevant definitions) and needs to cover: a. A review of the design intent and construction process (review of design, procurement, construction and handover processes). b. Feedback from a wide range of building users including facilities management on the design and environmental conditions of the building covering: i. Internal environmental conditions (light, noise, temperature, air quality) ii. Control, operation and maintenance iii. Facilities and amenities iv. Access and layout v. Other relevant issues. c. Sustainability performance (energy/water consumption, performance of any sustainable features or technologies e.g. materials, renewable energy, rain- water harvesting etc.). 5. The client or building occupier makes a commitment to carry out the appropriate dissemination of information on the building’s post occupancy performance. This is done to share good practice and lessons learned and inform changes in user behaviour, building operational processes and procedures, and system controls. Refer to Compliance notes CN5CN6 for a definition of appropriate dissemination. This also provides advice on appropriate dissemination where the building or building information is commercially or security sensitive.

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve one innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 5. There is (or will be) operational infrastructure and resources in place to co-ordinate the following activities at quarterly intervals for the first three years of building occupation: a. Collection of occupant satisfaction, energy consumption and water consumption data. b. Analysis of the data to check the building is performing as expected and make any necessary adjustments to systems controls or to inform building user behaviours. c. Setting targets for reducing water and energy consumption and monitor progress towards these. d. Feedback any ‘lessons learned’ to the design team and developer for use in future projects. e. Provision of the actual annual building energy, water consumption and occupant satisfaction data to BRE.

Checklists and tables None.

54

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Man 05 Aftercare

Management

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

Collection and monitoring of energy and water consumption data See criteria 2 and 4.

This function can be coordinated/carried out by a dedicated aftercare team or, where the building occupier is known and able to confirm compliance based on their existing or proposed operations for the building, the building owner/occupier’s estates/facilities management team.

CN5

Appropriate dissemination of post occupancy evaluation information See criterion 4.

1. Appropriate dissemination includes communication to immediate stakeholders such as building occupants, managers and owners. In addition information should be communicated externally. 2. Appropriate dissemination in most cases will be the production and publication of a building case study through one of the following means: 1. Client’s/building owner’s own website, publicly available literature or press release 2. Industry/sector or government/local authority sponsored website or information portals. Where there is a demonstrably justifiable reason why public dissemination is not possible, for example the information is commercially or security sensitive, compliance can be demonstrated by a commitment to produce and disseminate the relevant information at an organisational level or to appropriate internal/external stakeholders. Alternatively, the sensitive parts of the relevant information for dissemination can be omitted from the publication.

CN6

Relevant information for dissemination See criterion 4.

This includes the following information about the building and its performance: 1. A basic description of the project and building 2. BREEAM rating and score 3. The key innovative and low-impact design features of the building 4. Project cost 5. Project size: floor area, site area

General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

55

Management

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description 6. Facilities available for community use (where relevant) 7. Any steps taken during the construction process to reduce environmental impacts, i.e. innovative construction management techniques 8. Predicted and actual carbon dioxide emissions and/or Energy Performance Certificate rating. 9. Outcomes of the post occupancy evaluation study, to share the lessons learned from the project including: a. Occupant feedback b. Energy and water consumption including renewable energy generation, level of rainwater/grey water provision.

CN7

Provision of annual energy and water consumption and occupant satisfaction data See criterion 4.

One way of demonstrating compliance with this criterion is for the client/end user to register and therefore commit the building for assessment under the relevant part of the BREEAM In-Use scheme.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Complex systems These include, but are not limited to, air conditioning, mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, complex passive ventilation, building management systems (BMS), renewable energy sources, microbiological safety cabinets and fume cupboards, cold storage enclosures and refrigeration plant, fume cupboards, microbiological safety cabinets. Soft Landings Framework 1 (see criterion 1) A framework written and produced by Useable Buildings Trust (UBT) and Building Services Research and Information Association (BSRIA) that seeks to promote improved briefing, design, handover and building performance in use. Embedding the principles of this framework within a project should ensure that the evidence is available to demonstrate compliance with particular aspects of the criteria under this BREEAM issue. Please also note that BSRIA has produced a BREEAM New Construction/Soft landings interpretation note2 for clients and design teams.

56

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Man 05 Aftercare

Management

Specialist Commissioning Manager The Specialist Commissioning anager is a specialist contractor rather than a general sub-contractor.

Other information It should be noted that the government Soft Landings programme will become compulsory for local government developments after 2016. This is a version of the Soft Landings concept tailored for use on public sector related projects to link in with the work of the government’s Building Information Modelling Task Group. Further information is available from: http://www.bimtaskgroup.org/government-soft-landings/ 1The Soft Landings Framework, for better briefing, design, handover and building performance in use, Usable Buildings Trust

(UBT), BSRIA BG 4/2009.. 2BREEAM 2011 and Soft Landings, an interpretation note for clients and designers, BSRIA BG 28/2011.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

57

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Health and Wellbeing

58

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Health and Wellbeing

Hea 01 Visual comfort Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

No

Aim To ensure daylighting, artificial lighting and occupant controls are considered at the design stage to ensure best practice visual performance and comfort for building occupants.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into three parts: Daylighting and glare control (up to3 credits - building type dependent) View out (1 credit except for a healthcare building with inpatient areas, which has 2 credits available) Internal and external lighting (1 credit) The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Glare control

1. The potential for disabling glare has been designed out of all relevant building areas using a glare control strategy, either through building form and layout and/or building design measures (see Compliance notes CN5). 2. The glare control strategy avoids increasing lighting energy consumption, by ensuring that: a. The glare control system is designed to maximise daylight levels under all conditions whilst avoiding disabling glare in the workplace or other sensitive areas. The system should not inhibit daylight from entering the space under cloudy conditions, or when sunlight is not on the facade. AND b. The use or location of shading does not conflict with the operation of lighting control systems.

Up to two credits - Daylighting (building type dependent)

3. The glare control criteria 1 and 2 have been achieved. 4. Daylighting criteria have been met using either of the following options: a. The relevant building areas meet good practice daylight factor(s) and other criterion as outlined in Table - 9 and Table - 10. OR b. The relevant building areas meet good practice average and minimum point daylight illuminance criteria as outlined in Table - 11.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

59

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Table - 9: Minimum values of average daylight factor required. Building/area type

Credits

Daylight factor required

Minimum area (m2) to comply

Other requirements

EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 10

Education buildings Pre-schools, schools, further educationoccupied spaces

2

2%

80%

Higher educationoccupied spaces

1

2%

60%

OR Higher educationoccupied spaces

2

2%

80%

2

2%

80%

3%

80%

2%

80%

Living rooms, dining rooms, studies (including home office)

2%

80%

Non-residential or communal occupied spaces

2%

80%

Healthcare buildings Staff and public areas Occupied patient’s areas (dayrooms, wards) and consulting rooms

EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 10

Multi-residential buildings Kitchen

1

EITHER (a) OR (c) in Table - 10

Retail buildings Sales areas

1

-

35%

Point daylight factors of 2% or more

Other occupied areas

1

2%

80%

EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 10

Prison buildings

60

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Building/area type

Health and Wellbeing

Daylight factor required

Minimum area (m2) to comply

1.5%

80%

N/A

Internal association or atrium area (prison buildings only)

3%

80%

EITHER a uniformity ratio of at least 0.7 OR a minimum point daylight factor of 2.1%

Patient care spaces

3%

80%

EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 10

Teaching, lecture and seminar spaces

2%

80%

EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 10

2%

80%

EITHER (a) OR {(b) and (c)} in Table - 10

Cells and custody cells

Credits

1

Other requirements

Courts, industrial, office buildings and all other building types All occupied spaces, unless indicated in Relevant definitions

1

Table - 10: Daylighting uniformity criteria. Ref

Criteria

(a)

A uniformity ratio of at least 0.3 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 0.3 times the relevant average daylight factor value in Table - 9. Spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria, must achieve a uniformity ratio of at least 0.7 or a minimum point daylight factor of at least 0.7 times the relevant average daylight factor value in Table - 9.

(b)

At least 80% of the room has a view of sky from desk or table top height (0.85m in multi-residential buildings, 0.7m in other buildings).

(c)

The room depth criterion d/w +d/HW < 2/(1-RB) is satisfied. Where: d = room depth, w = room width, HW = window head height from floor level, RB = average reflectance of surfaces in the rear half of the room, Note: Table - 16gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head heights of sidelit rooms

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

61

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Table - 11: Space type and illuminance requirements-both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should be met. Area type

Credits

Minimum area to comply

Average daylight illuminance (averaged over entire space)

Minimum daylight illuminance at worst lit point

At least 300 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

At least 90 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

Education buildings Pre-schools, schools, further education occupied spaces

2

80%

Higher education occupied spaces

1

60%

OR Higher education occupied spaces

2

80%

2

80%

At least 300 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

At least 90 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

80%

At least 300 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

At least 300 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

100%

At least 100 lux for 3450 hours per year or more

At least 30 lux for 3450 hours per year or more

At least 100 lux for 3450 hours per year or more

At least 30 lux for 3450 hours per year or more

80%

At least 200 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

At least 60 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

Healthcare buildings Staff and public areas

Occupied patient's areas (dayrooms, wards) and consulting rooms Multi-residential buildings Kitchen

1

Living rooms, dining rooms, studies (including home office) Nonresidential/communal occupied spaces Retail buildings Sales areas

1

35%

At least 200 lux point daylight illuminances for 2650 hours per year or more

Other occupied areas

1

80%

At least 200 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

62

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

At least 60 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Area type

Health and Wellbeing

Credits

Minimum area to comply

Average daylight illuminance (averaged over entire space)

Minimum daylight illuminance at worst lit point

80%

At least 100 lux for 3150 hours per year or more

N/A

Internal association / atrium area

80%

At least 300 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

At least 210 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

Patient care spaces

80%

Teaching, lecture and seminar spaces

80%

At least 300 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

At least 90 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

Prison buildings Cells and custody cells

1

Courts, industrial, office buildings and all other building types All occupied spaces, unless indicated in Relevant definitions

1

80%

At least 300 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

At least 90 lux for 2000 hours per year or more

One credit - View out

5. 95% of floor space in relevant building areas is within 7m of a wall which has a window or permanent opening that provides an adequate view out. 6. The window/opening must be ≥ 20% of the surrounding wall area (refer to relevant definition in the Additional information section). Where the room depth is greater than 7m, compliance is only possible where the percentage of window/opening is the same as, or greater than, the values in table 1.0 of BS 8206 1. 7. In addition, the building type criteria in Table - 12 are applicable to view out criteria.

Table - 12: View out building specific requirements. Building type

View out requirements

Prison buildings

Cells An adequate view out from a normal standing or sitting position and the distance between each window and nearest external solid object (i.e. buildings, screens, walls/fences) is ≥ 10m. Where existing features prevent compliance with this criteria in less than 20% of the cells within the building, the credit can still be awarded. Patient occupied spaces See Healthcare requirements for these spaces.

Multi-residential buildings

Living rooms – (self contained flats), communal lounges, individual bedrooms and bedsits – (sheltered housing) All positions within relevant areas are to be within 5m of a wall which has a window or permanent opening providing an adequate view out. The window/opening must be ≥ 20% of the surrounding wall area.

Healthcare buildings with inpatient areas

Patient occupied spaces, e.g. wards and dayrooms As criterion 5 for the relevant building areas PLUS the distance between the wall with the

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

63

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Building type

View out requirements

(one additional credit)

window/opening and nearest external solid object (e.g. buildings, screens, walls/fences) is ≥ 10m.

One credit - Internal and external lighting levels, zoning and control Internal lighting 8. All internal lighting systems are designed to avoid flicker and stroboscopic effects. 9. Internal lighting in all relevant areas of the building is designed to provide an illuminance (lux) level appropriate to the tasks undertaken, accounting for building user concentration and comfort levels. This can be demonstrated through a lighting design strategy that provides illuminance levels in accordance with the CIBSE Code for Lighting 2012 and any other relevant industry standard. 10. For areas where computer screens are regularly used, the lighting design complies with CIBSE Lighting Guide 7 2 sections 3.3, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8 and 4.9. This gives recommendations highlighting: a. Limits to the luminance of the luminaires to avoid screen reflections. (manufacturers’ data for the luminaires should be sought to confirm this). b. For up-lighting, the recommendations refer to the luminance of the lit ceiling rather than the luminaire; a design team calculation is usually required to demonstrate this. c. Recommendations for direct lighting, ceiling illuminance, and average wall illuminance.

External lighting 11. All external lighting located within the construction zone is designed to provide illuminance levels that enable users to perform outdoor visual tasks efficiently and accurately, especially during the night. To demonstrate this, external lighting provided is specified in accordance with BS 5489-1:2013 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas3.

Zoning and occupant control 12. Internal lighting is zoned to allow for occupant control (see relevant definition) in accordance with the criteria below for relevant areas present within the building: a. In office areas, zones of no more than four workplaces b. Workstations adjacent to windows/atria and other building areas separately zoned and controlled c. Seminar and lecture rooms: zoned for presentation and audience areas d. Library spaces: separate zoning of stacks, reading and counter areas e. Teaching space or demonstration area f. Whiteboard or display screen g. Auditoria: zoning of seating areas, circulation space and lectern area h. Dining, restaurant, café areas: separate zoning of servery and seating/dining areas i. Retail: separate zoning of display and counter areas j. Bar areas: separate zoning of bar and seating areas k. Wards or bedded areas: zoned lighting control for individual bed spaces and control for staff over groups of bed spaces l. Treatment areas, dayrooms, waiting areas: zoning of seating and activity areas and circulation space with controls accessible to staff. Note: the criteria for zoning of lighting control are excluded for assessments of prison buildings. 13. Areas used for teaching, seminar or lecture purposes have lighting controls provided in accordance with CIBSE Lighting Guide 5 4. 14. In addition the building type criteria inTable - 13 (where relevant); Table - 13: Internal and external lighting building specific requirements. Building type

Internal and external lighting requirements

Education buildings

Manual lighting controls are easily accessible for the teacher whilst teaching and on

64

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Building type

Health and Wellbeing

Internal and external lighting requirements entering/leaving the teaching space.

Prison buildings

Cells Lit to a maintained illuminance of 200 lux at table-top level. In addition there must be the facility (using, for example, dimming, step switching or separate task and general lighting) for the occupant of the cell to select a lower level of general lighting if required. Exercise yards Lit to a maintained illuminance of at least 10 lux. However, if such spaces are, or will be, used as sports facilities they must be lit to a maintained illuminance of 100 lux.

Court buildings

Separate zoning is also provided for the following areas (as a minimum): 1. Judge’s/magistrate’s bench 2. Dock 3. Jury area 4. Public seating area. Lighting control of the zones in the above spaces, and the courtroom as a whole, cater for the following settings: 1. Full lighting (to allow cleaning etc.) 2. Normal lighting (for court sessions) 3. Dimmed (for the purpose of showing audio visual evidence, but allowing enough light for note taking).

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for daylighting: 15. Criteria 1 and 2 have been achieved. 16. Daylighting criteria have been met using either of the following options: a. Relevant building areas meet exemplary daylight factor(s) and the relevant criteria in Table - 14. OR b. Relevant building areas meet exemplary average and minimum point daylight illuminance criteria in Table - 15. Table - 14: Exemplary level values of average daylight factor required. Area type

Credits

Daylight factor required

Minimum area (m2) to comply

Other requirements

All building types

The criteria outlined in Table - 15 concerning uniformity ratio (a), view of sky (b) or room depth criterion (c) are met where they are used to demonstrate compliance.

All building types (excluding retail – see below) Functions as identified in the standard criteria (multi storey buildings)

1

3%

80%

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Where used, a minimum point daylight factor of 1.2% OR 2.1% for spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria

65

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Area type

Credits

Daylight factor required

Minimum area (m2) to comply

Other requirements

Functions as identified in the standard criteria (single storey buildings)

4%

80%

Where used, a minimum point daylight factor of 1.6% OR 2.8% for spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria

Prisons and court cells

2%

80%

N/A

Prison internal association/atrium area

5%

80%

A uniformity ratio of at least 0.7 or a minimum point daylight factor of 3.5%.

N/A

50%

Point daylight factor 2%

Common areas and offices (multi storey buildings)

3%

80%

Where used, a minimum point daylight factor of 1.2% OR 2.1% for spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria

Common areas and offices (single storey buildings)

4%

80%

Where used, a minimum point daylight factor of 1.6% OR 2.8% for spaces with glazed roofs, such as atria

Retail Sales areas

1

Table - 15: Exemplary level illuminance value requirements. Both criteria (average illuminance and minimum point illuminance) should be met. Area type

Credits

Minimum area to comply

Average daylight illuminance (averaged over entire space)

Minimum daylight illuminance at worst lit point

All building types (excluding retail – see below) Multistorey buildings Occupied spaces (unless indicated below)

66

1

80%

At least 300 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

At least 90 lux for 2650 hours per year or more

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Area type

Credits

Health and Wellbeing

Minimum area to comply

Average daylight illuminance (averaged over entire space)

Minimum daylight illuminance at worst lit point

Single storey buildings Occupied spaces (unless indicated below)

80%

At least 300 lux for 3000 hours per year or more

At least 120 lux for 3000 hours per year or more; or in spaces with glazed roofs (such as atria), at least 210 lux for 3000 hours per year or more

Prisons and courts buildings Cells and sustody sells

80%

At least 100 lux for 3450 hours per year or more

N/A

Prison buildings Internal association or atrium areas

80%

At least 300 lux for 3250 hours per year or more

At least 210 lux for 3250 hours per year or more

50%

At least 300 lux point daylight illuminances for 2000 hours per year or more

80%

Select relevant criteria above for occupied spaces dependant on whether you are assessing a Multi-storey or Single-storey building.

Retail Retail buildings Sales areas Retail buildings Other occupied areas

1

Checklists and tables Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights The table below gives maximum room depths in metres for different room widths and window head heights of sidelit rooms.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

67

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Table - 16: Reflectance for maximum room depths and window head heights Reflectance (RB) 0.4 Room width (m)

0.5

0.6

3.0

10.0

3.0

10.0

3.0

10.0

2.5

4.5

6.7

5.4

8.0

6.8

10.0

3.0

5.0

7.7

6.0

9.2

7.5

11.5

3.5

5.4

8.6

6.5

10.4

8.1

13.0

Window head height (m)

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Glare control criteria 1 to 2 Both options : All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. The design team must demonstrate how the glare control criteria will be met without a reliance on blinds when the building is occupied. Daylighting criteria 3 to 4 and 15 to 16 Both options : All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply View out criteria 5 to 7 Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Where it is not possible to confirm which areas of the building will contain workstations/benches or desks, then all areas of the building designed for and/or likely to be occupied by workstations/benches or desks must comply with the relevant criteria. Internal lighting criteria 8 to 10, 12 to 14 Both options : These assessment criteria are not applicable to a shell and core assessment. External lighting criteria 11, 14 Both options 1 and 2: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings

68

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Health and Wellbeing

Ref

Terms

Description

CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

General Daylighting and glare control CN4

Percentage of assessed area See criterion 4.

Where the criteria specify that a percentage of floor area must be adequately illuminated by daylight, this refers to the percentage of the total floor area of all the rooms that must be assessed, i.e. the compliant area. If for example, a development has six rooms that must be assessed, each 150m2 (total area 900m2) and 80% of this floor area must meet the criterion, then 720m2 must comply with the criterion; this is equal to 4.8 rooms. The number of rooms that must comply must always be rounded up; therefore in this example, five rooms must have an average daylight factor of 2% or more (plus meet the other criteria) to achieve the credit.

CN5

Compliant forms of glare control -curtains as glare control

Compliant shading measures for meeting glare control criteria include: building integrated measures (e.g. low eaves) occupant controlled devices such as blinds (where transmittance value is < 0.1 (10%)) bio-climatic design external shading or brise soleil Glare control must provide shading from both high level summer and low level winter sun. Where using fixed systems, design studies can be used to demonstrate that sunlight is prevented from reaching building occupants during occupied hours. Curtains (where used without other forms of shading) do not meet the criteria for the glare control criteria, as they do not provide sufficient control to optimise daylight in to the space. Furthermore, the use of curtains to control glare is likely to cause occupants to rely more on artificial lighting.

CN6

Borrowed light

For areas where borrowed light is used to demonstrate compliance with daylighting criteria, calculations or results from appropriate lighting design software must be provided to demonstrate that such areas meet the BREEAM criteria (if the light from these sources is required in order for the room to comply). Examples of borrowed light include: light shelves, clerestory glazing, sun pipes or internal translucent/transparent partitions (such as those using frosted glass).

CN7

Room depth criterion rooms lit from two opposite sides

For rooms lit by windows on two opposite sides, the maximum room depth that can be satisfactorily illuminated by daylight is twice the limiting room depth (d) (measured from window wall to window wall; CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 5 The

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

69

Health and Wellbeing

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description reflectance of the imaginary internal wall should be taken as 1.

CN8

Uniformity with rooflights

The room depth criteria cannot be used where the lighting strategy relies on rooflights. In such areas either appropriate software has to be used to calculate the uniformity ratio or, in the case of a regular array of rooflights across the whole of the space, Figure 2.36 (p.37) within CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 can be used to determine the uniformity ratio.

CN9

Daylighting - uniformity ratio Calculation

The uniformity ratio calculation, minimum point daylight factor and minimum daylight illuminance can exclude areas within 0.5m of walls. Areas within 0.5m are not regarded as part of the working plane for this purpose, although they are included in the average daylight factor and average daylight illuminance calculations.

CN10

View of sky requirement See criterion 4.

To comply with the view of sky criteria (ref (b)) in Table - 10, at least 80% of the room that complies with the average daylight factor requirement must receive direct light from the sky, i.e. it is permissible for up to 20% of the room not to meet the view of sky requirement and still achieve a compliant room.

CN11

View of sky requirement existing site features

Where existing site features prevent a room from meeting the credit criterion. The credit can still be achieved where evidence demonstrates that 90% of the room is able to achieve the criteria.

Internal and external lighting levels/zoning and control CN12

Relevant industry standard for lighting design

Pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges: Building Bulletin 90: ‘Lighting Design for Schools’6 Please note that for care homes housing people with dementia the following standard can be used instead of the CIBSE Code for Lighting: Design Lighting for People with Dementia, University of Stirling, Stirling, 2008 7. Please note that the illuminance levels specified in the CIBSE Code for Lighting, 2009 align with BS EN 12464-1 8.

CN13

Occupancy/workstation layout unknown

Where occupancy or workstation layout is not known, lighting control can be zoned on the basis of 40m2 grids, i.e. an assumption of 1 person/workspace per 10m2.

CN14

Small spaces

Buildings consisting entirely of small rooms/spaces (less than 40m2) which do not require any subdivision of lighting zones/control will meet the zoning criteria by default.

CN15

Zones of four workspaces

The limit of four workspaces is indicative of the required standard but is not a fixed requirement. Where there is justification for this to be increased to fit with the adopted lighting strategy, this may be accepted provided that the assessor is satisfied that the aim of this criterion is upheld, i.e. that there is suitable zoning/control of lighting to enable a reasonable degree of occupant control over lighting in their personable work area. The relevant design team member,

70

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Ref

Health and Wellbeing

Terms

Description e.g. lighting consultant, should set out how this is to be achieved in such an instance.

CN16

Lighting zoning and control - auditoria spaces

The controls specified will depend on the size and use of the space but a typical auditorium or lecture theatre with stepped seating and a formal lectern/demonstration/performance area would typically be expected to have lighting controls as follows: 1. Full normal lighting (to allow for entry/exit, cleaning etc.), 2. Demonstration area lighting off and audience area lighting reduced to a low level (for the purpose of line slide projection, but allowing enough light for the audience to take notes), 3. All lighting off (for the projection of tone slides, colour slides, and for the purposes of visual demonstrations/performances), 4. Separate localised lectern lighting.

Building type specific CN17

Education - Education funding agency requirements

For Education buildings, where the EFA daylighting requirements have been achieved, for all relevant rooms within the building, (in accordance with Priority School Building Programme (PSBP) Authority Draft, Facilities Output Specification: Generic Design Brief by the Education Funding Agency, June 2013 1’) it can be assumed that the BREEAM daylighting requirements have also been met and therefore the two credits available for daylighting can be awarded by default. In this instance, evidence would need to be provided to demonstrate that the EFA requirements have been achieved.

CN18

Education (pre-schools) and acute Special Educational Needs (SEN) controls for children

Where child care and/or acute SEN spaces are included within the scope of the assessment, controls should be provided for the teacher/member of staff, i.e. it is not a necessity for the controls to be accessible to the children. Where nursery spaces are included within the scope of the assessment, controls should be provided for the member of staff, not the nursery school children.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements

1Priority School Building Programme PSBP Authority Draft, Facilities Output Specification: Generic Design Brief by the Education

Funding Agency, June 2013

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

71

Health and Wellbeing

Criteria

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria. 3 and 4

Daylighting calculations

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Adequate view out BREEAM defines an adequate view out as a view of a landscape or buildings (rather than just the sky) at seated eye level (1.2 – 1.3m) within the relevant building areas and should ideally be through an external window. A view into an internal courtyard or atrium will comply provided the distance from the opening to the back wall of the courtyard/atrium is at least 10m (therefore allowing enough distance for the eyes to refocus). The view cannot be an internal view across the room, as this is likely to become obstructed by partitions, filing cabinets etc. Average daylight factor The average daylight factor is the average indoor illuminance (from daylight) on the working plane within a room, expressed as a percentage of the simultaneous outdoor illuminance on a horizontal plane under an unobstructed CIE Standard Overcast Sky. Clinical areas Areas of the building in which medical functions are carried out that require specific restricted environmental conditions such as humidity, daylighting, temperature, etc. (e.g. X-ray, operating department, delivery room, etc). Computer simulation Software tools that can be used to model more complex room geometries for daylighting. Construction zone For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAM-assessed building, and the external site areas that fall within the scope of the new works. Illuminance The amount of light falling on a surface per unit area, measured in lux. Occupied space A room or space within the assessed building that is likely to be occupied for 30 minutes or more by a building user. Please note there is a specific, unrelated, definition of 'unoccupied' with reference to acoustic testing and measurement and this should not be confused with the definition used here. Patient areas Areas of the building used mainly by inpatients (e.g. wards, dayrooms, etc) Point daylight factor A point daylight factor is the ratio between the illuminance (from daylight) at a specific point on the working plane within a room, expressed as a percentage of the illuminance received on an outdoor unobstructed horizontal plane. This is based on an assumed overcast sky, approximated by the ‘CIE (Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage) overcast sky’. The minimum point daylight factor is the lowest value of the daylight factor on the working plane at a point that is not within 0.5m of a wall. Similarly the minimum illuminance is calculated at the worst lit point on the working plane that is not within 0.5m of a wall. These points will usually be close to a rear corner of the room. Computer simulations are the most appropriate tools to allow for point daylight factors and illuminances to be calculated.

72

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 01 Visual comfort

Health and Wellbeing

Public areas Within a Healthcare building type, this includes areas of the building designed for public use where no medical functions are carried out (e.g. reception, retail unit, waiting areas). Relevant building areas: daylighting For the purpose of BREEAM this is defined as areas within the building where good daylighting is considered to be of benefit to the building users (typically those areas occupied continuously for 30 minutes or more). This includes the following (where occupied continuously for 30 minutes or more) specifically stated because they are often omitted; 1. Sports hall exercise spaces 2. Laboratory areas unless the type of research that will be carried out requires strictly controlled environmental conditions, such as the exclusion of natural light at all times. 3. Self contained flats 4. Kitchen and catering areas 5. General communal areas 6. Small offices (including those within multi-residential buildings) 7. Meeting rooms (including those within multi-residential buildings) 8. Leisure areas 9. Any area that may involve close up work. However, this excludes the following (where present): 1. Media, arts production, SEN sensory spaces, x-ray rooms and other areas requiring strictly controlled acoustic or lighting conditions 2. Clinical areas with controlled environmental conditions, e.g. operating theatres, delivery rooms or pathology. However, BREEAM strongly advise that the benefits from daylighting and view out are seriously considered when designing areas of critical and intensive care in healthcare buildings. 3. Holding areas and custody cells where security issues conflict with the BREEAM daylighting requirements. 4. Custody cells in courts, where privacy is a functional/operational requirement. Glare control For glare control include areas of the building where lighting and resultant glare could be problematic for users e.g.those areas that have been designed to contain/use workstations, projector screens etc. and sports halls. Spaces in the categories described above, for which daylight and view out are excluded should not be assessed against the glare control criteria. View out BREEAM defines relevant building areas requiring a view out to include areas of the building where: 1. There are or will be workstations/benches or desks for building users. 2. Close work will be undertaken or where visual aids will be used. 3. A view out is deemed to be of benefit to the building occupants e.g. in spaces where occupants are likely to spend a significant amount of time. Excluded areas for each of these might include: 1. Nurse bases where they are located centrally in a ward/patient area in order to enable patient observation. 2. Courtrooms and interview rooms where compliance is not possible due to security or privacy criteria. 3. Prison staff areas containing workstations that for security or observational purposes must be located centrally within the building. 4. Any clinical areas where the control of environmental/operational conditions prevents such spaces from providing a view out. 5. Conference rooms, lecture theatres, sports halls, acute SEN and also any spaces where the exclusion or limitation of natural light is a functional requirement e.g. laboratories, media spaces, etc. Internal and external lighting Where no external light fittings are specified (either separate from or mounted on the external building façade or roof), the criteria relating to external lighting do not apply and the credit can be awarded on the basis of compliance with the internal lighting criteria. The following internal areas are excluded from the lighting zone requirements: 1. Media and arts production spaces 2. Sports facilities (exercise spaces only, including hydrotherapy and physiotherapy areas).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

73

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Lighting zoning For rooms or spaces not listed within criterion 12, the assessor can exercise an element of judgement when determining whether the specification is appropriate for the space given its end use, and the aim and criteria of this BREEAM issue. Separate zoning control Light switches or controls for a particular area/zone of the building that can be accessed and operated by the individual(s) occupying that area or zone. Such controls will be located within, or within the vicinity of, the zone or area they control. Staff areas Areas of the building used mainly by staff (e.g. offices, meeting rooms, staff rooms) and medical areas where patients are admitted but that do not require restricted environmental conditions (e.g. consulting rooms, physiotherapy, etc). Surrounding wall area Surrounding wall area refers to the area (in m2) of the internal wall on which the window/opening is located, including the area of the window/opening itself. Uniformity The uniformity is the ratio between the minimum illuminance (from daylight) on the working plane within a room (or minimum daylight factor) and the average illuminance (from daylight) on the same working plan (or average daylight factor). View of sky/no-sky line Areas of the working plane have a view of sky when they receive direct light from the sky, i.e. when the sky can be seen from working plane height. The no-sky line divides those areas of the working plane, which can receive direct skylight, from those that cannot. Working plane CIBSE LG10 defines the working plane as the horizontal, vertical or inclined plane in which a visual task lies. The working plane is normally taken as 0.7m above the floor for offices and 0.85m for industry.

Other information None. 1BS 8206-2:2008 Lighting for buildings.Code of Practice for daylighting 2CIBSE Lighting Guide 7, 2005 3BS 5489-1:2013 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas, Code of Practice for the design of road lighting, BSI, 2013 4SLL LIGHTING GUIDE 5: Lecture, teaching and conference rooms, 1991 5CIBSE Lighting Guide LG10 Daylighting and window design, 1999. 6Building Bulletin 90: ‘Lighting Design for Schools’ 7Pollock R, McNair D, McGuire B and Cunningham C, Design Lighting for People with Dementia, Dementia Services

Development Centre, University of Stirling, Stirling, 2008 8BS EN 12464-1:2002 Light and lighting. Lighting of work places. Indoor work places, 2003

74

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 02 Indoor air quality

Health and Wellbeing

Hea 02 Indoor air quality Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

No

Aim To recognise and encourage a healthy internal environment through the specification and installation of appropriate ventilation, equipment and finishes.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Minimising sources of air pollution (4 credits) Adaptability - potential for natural ventilation (1 credit) Note: The potential for natural ventilation credit does not apply to buildings on a prison development. The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Minimising sources of air pollution One credit - Indoor air quality (IAQ) plan 1. An indoor air quality plan has been produced, with the objective of facilitating a process that leads to design, specification and installation decisions and actions that minimise indoor air pollution during occupation of the building. The indoor air quality plan must consider the following: a. Removal of contaminant sources b. Dilution and control of contaminant sources c. Procedures for pre-occupancy flush out d. Third party testing and analysis e. Maintaining indoor air quality in-use.

One credit- Ventilation The building has been designed to minimise the concentration and recirculation of pollutants in the building as follows: 2. Provide fresh air in to the building in accordance with the criteria of the relevant standard for ventilation. 3. Design ventilation pathways to minimise the build-up of air pollutants in the building, as follows: a. In air-conditioned and mixed-mode buildings/spaces: i. The building’s air intakes and exhausts are over 10m apart and intakes are over 20m from sources of external pollution. OR ii. The location of the building's air intakes and exhausts, in relation to each other and external sources of pollution, is designed in accordance with BS EN 13779:2007 1 Annex A2. b. In naturally-ventilated buildings/spaces: openable windows/ventilators are over 10m from sources of external pollution. 1BS EN 13779:2007 Ventilation for non-residential buildings - Performance requirements for ventilation and room-

conditioning systems

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

75

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

4. Where present, HVAC systems must incorporate suitable filtration to minimise external air pollution, as defined in BS EN 13779:2007 Annex A3. 5. Areas of the building subject to large and unpredictable or variable occupancy patterns have CO or air quality sensors 2 specified and: a. In mechanically ventilated buildings/spaces: sensor(s) are linked to the mechanical ventilation system and provide demand-controlled ventilation to the space. b. In naturally ventilated buildings/spaces: sensors either have the ability to alert the building owner or manager when CO levels exceed the recommended set point, or are linked to controls with the ability to adjust the quantity of fresh 2 air, i.e. automatic opening windows/roof vents.

One credit - Volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (products) 6. Criterion 1 is achieved. 7. All decorative paints and varnishes specified meet the criteria in Table - 17 8. At least five of the eight remaining product categories listed in Table - 17 meet the testing requirements and emission levels criteria for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions (listed in the table).

One credit - Volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (post construction) 9. Criterion 1 is achieved. 10. The formaldehyde concentration level is measured post construction (but pre-occupancy) and is found to be less than or equal to 100µg/averaged over 30 minutes (WHO guidelines, source BRE Digest 464 part 2 1). 11. The total volatile organic compound (TVOC) concentration level is measured post construction (but pre-occupancy) and found to be less than 300µg/over 8 hours, in line with the building regulation requirements. 12. Where VOC and formaldehyde levels are found to exceed the limits defined in criteria 10 and 11, the project team confirms the measures that have, or will be taken, in accordance with the IAQ plan, to reduce the levels to within these limits. 13. The testing and measurement of the above pollutants are in accordance with the following standards where relevant: a. BS EN ISO 16000-4: 2004 Diffusive sampling of formaldehyde in air 1 b. EN ISO 16000-6 VOCs in air by active sampling 2 c. BS EN 16017-2: 2003 VOCs - Indoor, ambient and workplace air by passive sampling 3 d. BS EN ISO 16000-3: 2001 4 formaldehyde and other carbonyls in air by pumped sampling. 14. The measured concentration levels of formaldehyde (µg/m3) and TVOC (µg/m3) are reported, via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool.

Adaptability - Potential for natural ventilation One credit (credit not applicable to prison buildings) 15. The building ventilation strategy is designed to be flexible and adaptable to potential building occupant needs and climatic scenarios. This can be demonstrated as follows: a. Occupied spaces of the building are designed to be capable of providing fresh air entirely via a natural ventilation strategy. The following are methods deemed to satisfy this criterion dependent upon the complexity of the proposed system: i. Room depths are designed in accordance with CIBSE AM10 (section 2.4) to ensure effectiveness of any natural ventilation system. The openable window area in each occupied space is equivalent to 5% of the gross internal floor area of that room/floor plate. OR ii. The design demonstrates that the natural ventilation strategy provides adequate cross flow of air to maintain the required thermal comfort conditions and ventilation rates. This is demonstrated using ventilation design tool types recommended by CIBSE AM10 5 (or for education buildings by using the ClassVent tool). For a strategy which does not rely on openable windows, or which has occupied spaces with a plan depth greater than 15m, the design must demonstrate (in accordance with criterion 15a- i above) that the ventilation strategy can provide adequate cross flow of air to maintain the required thermal comfort conditions and ventilation rates.

1BRE Digest 464, VOC emissions from building products: control, evaluation and labelling schemes, Yu, C. and Crump. D, 2002

76

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 02 Indoor air quality

Health and Wellbeing

16. The natural ventilation strategy is capable of providing at least two levels of user-control on the supply of fresh air to the occupied space (see CN7 for further details). Note: Any opening mechanisms must be easily accessible and provide adequate user-control over air flow rates to avoid draughts. Relevant industry standards for ventilation can be used to define ‘adequate levels of fresh air’ sufficient for occupancy and internal air pollution loads relevant to the building type. Note: Multi-residential buildings with self contained flats and individual bedrooms must have a degree of openable window function. This does not need to provide two levels of user-control (as required above), but must be occupant controlled.

Exemplary level criteria Minimising sources of air pollution - volatile organic compound (VOC) emission levels (products) The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve innovation credits for this BREEAM issue:

One credit 17. Criteria 2-4 have been achieved. 18. The formaldehyde emission levels have been measured and found to be less than or equal to 0.06mg/m3 air in accordance with the approved testing standards in Table - 17

Two credits 19. Criteria 2-4 have been achieved. 20. The formaldehyde emission levels have been measured and found to be less than or equal to 0.01mg/m3 air in accordance with the approved testing standards in Table - 17

Checklists and tables Table - 17: VOC criteria by product type Ref

Product

A

Paints and varnishes

B

Requirements

Performance requirements

VOC content limit

Compliant performance standard

EN 13300:2001 and EU Directive 2004/42/CE21

Compliant testing standard

ISO 11890-2:2006 – Paints and varnishes – Determination of VOC content, Part 2 – Gas Chromatographic method

Manufacturer also to confirm

Paint to be fungal and algal resistant in wet areas e.g. bathrooms, kitchens, utility rooms

Wood panels (including particle board, fibreboard including MDF, OSB, cement bonded particle board, plywood, solid wood panel and acoustic board) Option 1 - Performance requirements

Formaldehyde E1 class in accordance with EN 13986:2004.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

77

Health and Wellbeing

Ref

C

D

E

78

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Product

Requirements

Option 1 – Compliant testing standard(s)

EN 717-1:2004 Wood based panels – Determination of formaldehyde release by chamber method.

Option 2 – Performance requirements

Formaldehyde level of 0.1mg/m3

Option 2 – Compliant testing standard(s)

1. ISO 16000-9 Determination of the emission of VOC from building products and furnishing - Emission chamber method. OR 2. Emission testing method for California Specification 01350 (Californian Department for Public Health CDPH) – Standard method for the testing and evaluation of VOC emissions from indoor sources using environmental chambers. Note: For either method the resultant emission/surface area obtained from the chamber test method must be extrapolated to predict what the emissions would be in a theoretical model room (as detailed in the standard) and this extrapolated emission rate compared with the required formaldehyde level of 0.1mg/m3.

Manufacturer also to confirm

The absence of regulated wood preservatives.

Timber structures (e.g. glue laminated timber) Option 1 - Performance requirements

Option 1 - Formaldehyde E1 Class in accordance with EN 14080:2005.

Option 1 - Compliant testing standards

EN 717-1:2004 Wood based panels – Determination of formaldehyde release by chamber method.

Option 2 - Performance requirements

As category B above.

Option 2 - Compliant testing standards

As category B above.

Wood flooring e.g. parquet Option 1 - Performance requirements

Option 1 - Formaldehyde E1 Class in accordance with EN 14342:2005.

Option 1 - Compliant testing standards

EN 717-1:2004 Wood based panels – Determination of formaldehyde release by chamber method.

Option 2 - Performance requirements

As category B above.

Option 2 - Compliant testing standards

As category B above

Resilient textile and laminated floor coverings (e.g. vinyl, linoleum, cork, rubber, carpet, laminated wood flooring)

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 02 Indoor air quality

Ref

F

G

Health and Wellbeing

Product

Requirements

Option 1 - Performance requirements

Option 1 - Formaldehyde E1 Class in accordance with EN 14041:2006.

Option 1 - Compliant testing standards

EN 717-1:2004 Wood based panels – Determination of formaldehyde release by chamber method.

Option 2 - Performance requirements

As category B above.

Option 2 - Compliant testing standards

As category B above.

Suspended ceiling tiles Option 1 - Performance requirements

Option 1 - Formaldehyde E1 Class in accordance with EN 13964:2004.

Option 1 - Compliant testing standards

EN 717-1:2004 Wood based panels – Determination of formaldehyde release by chamber method.

Option 2 - Performance requirements

As category B above.

Option 2 - Compliant testing standards

As category B above.

Flooring adhesives Performance requirements

Absence of all carcinogenic and sensitising substances – in accordance with the globally harmonised system (GHS) of classification and labelling of chemicals. Refer to: 1. Globally Harmonized System of Classification and Labelling of Chemicals (GHS) - Fourth revised edition, United Nations, 2011. http://www.unece.org/ OR 2. C1, C2 and C3 classifications identified in Annex A of BS EN 13999-1:2007.

Compliant testing standard

BS EN 13999:2007 Adhesives. Short term method for measuring the emission properties of low-solvent or solvent-free adhesives after application. 1. Part 2 – Determination of volatile organic compounds 2. Part 3 – Determination of volatile aldehydes 3. Part 4 - Determination of volatile diisocyanates

Manufacturer also to confirm

None

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

79

Health and Wellbeing

Ref

Product

H

Wall coverings

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Requirements

Performance requirements

Compliant performance standard

Vinyl chloride monomer (VCM) content Formaldehyde level Migration of heavy metals 1. BS EN 233:1999, Section 5.7 - Finished wall papers 2. BS EN 233:1999, Section 5.7 - Wall vinyls and plastic wall covering 3. BS EN 234:1997, Section 9.0 - Wall papers for subsequent decoration 4. BS EN 259-1:2001, Section 4.5-4.7- Heavy duty wall coverings

Compliant testing standard

BS EN 12149:1998 – Wall coverings in roll form. Determination of migration of heavy metals and certain other elements, of vinyl chloride monomer and of formaldehyde release - Test A Heavy metals, Test B Vinyl chloride monomer, Test C Formaldehyde.

Manufacturer also to confirm

None

Relevant standards - VOCs

All standards outlined inTable - 17 above are standards recognised across Europe and Internationally for VOCs content and testing. In instances where a product is not assessed against the listed European or International standard it is acceptable to use an alternative, nationally recognised standard provided the following is met as a minimum: 1. The performance level requirements required by the alternative standard are equivalent to or better than those specified in the ISO EN standard specified. For example, if a material containing formaldehyde has been added to the floor covering product as part of the production process, then the E1 emission measured for formaldehyde must be less than 0.124mg/m3(as required by EN 14041:2004). 2. Where an alternative standard omits evaluation of a particular material, it is only acceptable to use the alternative standard in instances where the product does not contain that particular material. BREEAM assessors should seek confirmation from BRE Global prior to awarding credits for compliance with standards not listed in Table - 1 or previously approved as alternative nationally recognised standards.

Alternative to testing - paints and varnishes (category A)

For decorative paints and varnishes, where the product manufacturer states that the method to determine the VOC content in a product is to use a calculation technique rather than testing in accordance with BS EN 13300:2001, this will be acceptable for the purposes of BREEAM compliance provided the manufacturer has confirmed the following: 1. The calculation method is acceptable for the purpose of compliance with the European Regulation on Classification, Labelling and Packaging of Substances and Mixtures (CLP), or where in transition to CLP, the UK Chemicals (Hazard Information and Packaging for Supply) Regulations 2009, and the product complies with the Decorative Paint Directive 2004/42/CE. 2. The manufacturing process, i.e the paint or varnish formulation and raw material mixing, is carried out in accordance with an ISO 9001 (or equivalent) certified quality management procedure.

Products with no formaldehyde containing materials

For some floor coverings and wood based panels, the requirement for formaldehyde testing (referred to in the above criteria) does not apply to “floor coverings to which no formaldehyde-containing materials were added during production or post-production processing”, or in the case of EN 13986:2004, wood-based panels. As such, if a product manufacturer confirms that they have made a declaration of formaldehyde class E1 without testing

80

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 02 Indoor air quality

Ref

Health and Wellbeing

Product

Requirements

(in writing or via a company product fact sheet or literature) then the product in question meets the BREEAM requirement relevant to formaldehyde testing. A declaration of E1 without testing is effectively confirmation from the manufacturer that formaldehyde emissions comply with the emission level requirements of the relevant standard(s )and therefore, evidence confirming the actual emission level(s) via testing will not be required by the assessor to demonstrate compliance with that particular requirement.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Indoor air quality, criterion 1 Both options: This criterion and credit is not applicable for a shell and core assessment. Ventilation, criteria 2 to 5 Option 1 - Shell only:These criteria are not applicable to this shell and core assessment option Option 2 - Shell and core only: Criteria 2 and 3 are applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Criterion 4 and 5 do not apply. Where ventilation systems are not within the remit of the shell and core developer, compliance can be demonstrated through the building servicing strategy where this is predetermined by the built form or core services provision as appropriate to the shell and core option being followed. VOC's criteria,6 to14 and 17 to 20 Both options: These criteria and credits are not applicable to shell and core assessments. Adaptability - potential for natural ventilation, criteria 15to 16 Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Indoor air quality - N/A 1. Criterion 1 is not applicable. Ventilation (1 credit) 2. Criteria 2 to 3 are applicable, (criteria 4 and 5 are not applicable). Volatile organic compound (VOC) (1 credit) 3. Criteria 6 to 8 are applicable, (criteria 9 to 14 are not applicable). Adaptability - potential for natural ventilation (1 credit - not applicable to prison buildings) 4. Criteria 15 and 16 are applicable.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

81

Health and Wellbeing

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

Furnishings

The scope of the VOC credits does not extend to furnishings, e.g. desks or shelving, it focuses on the key internal finishes and fittings integral to the building.

CN5

Mechanically ventilated or cooled buildings See criteria 15 and 16.

Buildings that employ a mechanically ventilated/cooled strategy are still able to achieve this credit provided it can be demonstrated that the features required by the criteria can be made easily available to the building user, e.g. windows fixed shut for an air conditioned strategy can be modified to be opening windows. The aim of the potential for natural ventilation criteria is to ensure that a building is capable of providing fresh air using a natural ventilation strategy. Where the building is predominantly naturally ventilated, but mechanical ventilation is necessary to boost ventilation during peak conditions, (i.e. maximum occupancy and/or peak temperature conditions) due to the function/specific usage patterns of the building, the potential for natural ventilation credit can still be awarded provided calculations/modelling demonstrate that the mechanical ventilation system will be required for ≤ 5% of the annual occupied hours in the occupied space(s) for the adopted building design/layout.

CN6

VOC's - number of products required to comply See criterion 8.

Where five or less products are specified within the building, the number of products that needs to be assessed for VOC criteria reduces proportionally as follows:

Levels of ventilation See criterion 15.

The two levels of ventilation must be able to achieve the following:

CN8

Industrial areas: air pollution/ventilation rate requirements

For industrial buildings the minimising sources of air pollution and adaptability (potential for natural ventilation) criteria and credits apply only to office areas and not to operational areas. If the building does not contain any office areas, these credits and their requirements do not require assessing.

CN9

Measuring the distance. See criteria 3a&b.

The distance requirement for air intakes and extracts does not necessarily mean the plan distance, but the three dimensional distance around and over objects; e.g. on plan the air intakes may be less than 20m from a source of external pollution, but the intake may be on the roof of a 10 storey building and therefore over 20m from the source of pollution.

General

CN7

82

Where five products are present, four must comply Where four products are present, three must comply Where three products are present, two must comply Where two or fewer products are present, all must comply.

Higher level: higher rates of ventilation achievable to remove short-term odours and/or prevent summertime overheating Lower level: adequate levels of draught-free fresh air to meet the need for good indoor air quality throughout the year, sufficient for the occupancy load and the internal pollution loads of the space.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 02 Indoor air quality

Ref

Health and Wellbeing

Terms

Description

Building type specific CN10

Healthcare Window openings See criteria 15 and 16.

In healthcare buildings some openings in public and patient areas need to be provided with restricted opening distances of not more than 100mm (HTM 55, Windows6). This is for health and safety reasons, especially where windows are within reach of the elderly, mentally ill or children. However, it is felt that good design can overcome these restrictions and provide compliant natural ventilation solutions, even in safety-sensitive areas.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Areas with a large and unpredictable occupancy The following are examples of these types of space: Auditoria Gyms Retail store or malls Cinemas Waiting Rooms. Where the assessed building does not have any areas deemed to be large with an unpredictable pattern of occupancy, the criterion does not apply. ClassVent ClassVent is a customised spreadsheet design tool that provides a means of sizing ventilation openings for a natural ventilation strategy for school classrooms. The tool was developed by the Department for Children, Families and Schools (formerly DfES). The tool can be downloaded from http://www.teachernet.gov.uk/docbank/index.cfm?id=9955 Clinical areas Hea 01 Visual comfort. Occupied spaces See relevant definition provided in issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

83

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

The following building areas, where relevant to the building type, can be excluded from the definition of occupied spaces for the potential for natural ventilation criteria: 1. Ancillary building areas, e.g. WCs corridors, stairwells, store rooms, plant rooms 2. Swimming/hydrotherapy pools 3. Catering and small staff kitchens 4. Washrooms or changing areas 5. Laboratory or other areas where strictly controlled environmental conditions are a functional requirement of the space. 6. Custody cells and holding areas in law courts 7. Operational, shop floors or ancillary areas in industrial buildings 8. Healthcare buildings: rooms or departments where control of ventilation is required for prevention of cross infection and/or controlled environmental conditions including: a. Operating theatres b. Laser surgery unit c. Operative imaging unit d. Intensive treatment unit e. Infectious diseases isolation unit f. Wards housing immuno-compromised patients g. Manufacturing pharmacy h. Specialised imaging, X-ray and scanning unit i. Pathology containment laboratories j. Mortuary and dissection suite k. Research laboratories and associated animal houses l. Sterilising and disinfecting unit (SDU) m. Emerging treatment technologies including gene therapy and stem cell units n. Areas immediately adjacent to the above are excluded if it can be demonstrated that reverse air flow would be likely with natural ventilation o. Any other areas which require mechanical ventilation to satisfy the requirements of Healthcare Technical Memorandums p. Any other areas that require mechanical ventilation due to specific operational related processes. Occupied spaces requiring local exhaust ventilation e.g. laboratories, workshops, food technology rooms must still demonstrate that they meet the criteria for potential for natural ventilation (unless listed as an exempted area under this compliance note). Openable window area The openable window area is defined as the geometric free ventilation area created when a ventilation opening, e.g. window, is open to its normal operational fully designed extent for ventilation purposes (i.e. this excludes open areas created when reversible windows are opened for cleaning etc). It is not the glazed area of a façade or the glazed area of the part of the window that is openable (unless it opens fully). Relevant standards (ventilation) Education buildings: Building Bulletin 101 Ventilation of School Buildings. Offices spaces: Top of the range recommended in the British Council for Offices Guide to Best Practice in the Specification of Offices7 i.e. 12 litres per second per person. Clinical areas with controlled environmental conditions: HTM 03-01 Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises8(England, Wales and Northern Ireland) SHTM 03-01 Ventilation for Healthcare premises Part A: Design and Validation1 (Scotland) Relevant standards are not listed for all areas/building types as the provision of fresh air is adequately covered in Approved Document Part F Ventilation (and the standards referenced there in). Sources of external pollution This includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Highways and the main access roads on the assessed site 2. Car parks and delivery/vehicle waiting bays 3. Other building exhausts, including from building services plant industrial/agricultural processes

1SHTM03-01 ventilation for Healthcare Premises Part A: Design and Validation, Health Facilities Scotland, Feb 2013

84

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 02 Indoor air quality

Health and Wellbeing

Service and access roads with restricted and infrequent access (for example roads used only for waste collection) are unlikely to represent a significant source of external pollution. These roads can therefore be excluded from the criteria of this issue. This does not include vehicle pick-up/drop-off or waiting bays. Volatile organic compound (VOC) Any organic liquid and/or solid that evaporates spontaneously at the prevailing temperature and pressure of the atmosphere with which it is in contact (Source: BS EN ISO 11890).

Other information Indoor air quality and measurement The testing and measurement of pollutants must be in accordance with the relevant standards (as listed in the Hea 02 Indoor air qualitytable ). Sample measurements should normally be taken in representative habitable or occupiable rooms, so not every room in a building would need to be sampled (see below for examples of representative room types). For example, in an office, one sample in a cellular/single occupancy office should suffice to assess the VOC concentration of the air for that type of habitable space in the building (assuming the other cellular offices have the same specification). In larger rooms, such as open-plan office areas, further sampling locations should be used to understand the homogeneity of the atmosphere. Depending upon the performance of the measurement method in terms of repeatability and the required level of confidence in the value obtained, replicate samples may be taken at one or more sampling locations. Prior to measurements being taken, the ventilation and heating systems should be operating for a period of time to ensure the relevant spaces in the building reach equilibrium in terms of their internal environmental conditions. Typically this may take between 12-24 hours. Examples of representative room types include: naturally ventilated carpeted office, mechanically ventilated vinyl floored meeting room, workshop, living room or bedroom. Rooms that are not habitable or occupiable may, for example, include toilets, store room, plant room, stairways or corridors. The definition of 'habitable or occupiable rooms' comes from Approved Document F, Means of Ventilation, HM Government, 2010. In accordance with the criteria, where levels are found to exceed the defined limits, the credit can only be claimed where the project team confirms the measures that have, or will be undertaken in accordance with the IAQ plan, to reduce the TVOC and formaldehyde levels to within the required limits. This information is provided to assist project teams and BREEAM assessors on the appropriate scope of IAQ testing; therefore it is guidance only and not a requirement of complying with BREEAM. The testing regime should be determined based on the advice of the appropriate person appointed to conduct the testing, in order to determine and report representative values of indoor air quality for the building. There are a number of publications available on the issue of measuring and improving the indoor air quality in buildings including BR 450, A protocol for the assessment of indoor air quality in homes and office buildings, Crump, Raw, Upton, Scivyer, Hunter, Hartless. BRE (2002).

Volatile organic compounds VOCs are emitted by a wide array of products numbering in the thousands. Examples include: paints and lacquers, paint strippers, cleaning supplies, pesticides, building materials and furnishings, glues and adhesives, urea-formaldehyde foam insulation (UFFI), pressed wood products (hardwood plywood wall panelling, particleboard, fibreboard) and furniture made with these pressed wood products. ‘No’ or ‘low’ VOC paints are available from most standard mainstream paint manufacturers. The emissions of VOCs from paints and varnishes are regulated by the Directive 2004/42/CE, implemented in the UK by the Volatile Organic Compounds in Paints, Varnishes and Vehicle Refinishing Products Regulation 2005. Products containing high organic solvent content should also be avoided (EU VOC Solvent Directive 1999/13/EC). Exposure risk assessment of any possible release of chemicals from manufactured products and their possible impact on health and the environment generally, is an important requirement of European regulations. The possible impact of a building product on indoor air quality is included in the European Construction Products Directive, 89/106/EEC. The amended Directive, 93/68/EEC provided the criteria for CE Marking of products.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

85

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Products to be fitted in buildings should not contain any substances regulated by the Dangerous Substances Directive 2004/42/CE, which could cause harm to people by inhalation or contact. Materials containing heavy metals (e.g. antimony, barium, cadmium, lead and mercury) and other toxic elements (e.g. arsenic, chromium and selenium) or regulated biocides (e.g. pentachlorophenol) should be avoided. Various labelling schemes identify products that have been tested and shown to be low emitting and these have been summarised in BRE Digest 464. The standards outlined in Table - 17 however are the only standards recognised by BREEAM for the purposes of assessing this issue. Dangerous substances are defined in the Dangerous Substances Directive (67/548/EEC) BS EN 14175 and Fume cupboard discharge velocity: BS EN 14175 Part 2 states that the discharge velocity from fume cupboard extracts should be at least 7m/s but that a figure of 10m/s is preferable to ensure that the discharge will not be trapped in the aerodynamic wake of the stack. Higher discharge velocities may be required, especially in windy locations, but higher rates may cause noise problems. 1BS EN ISO 16000-4: 2004: Determination of formaldehyde -- Diffusive sampling method 2EN ISO 16000-6: Determination of volatile organic compounds in indoor and test chamber air by active sampling on Tenax

TA sorbent, thermal desorption and gas chromatography using MS/FID 3BS EN ISO 16017-2:2003, Indoor, ambient and workplace air. Sampling and analysis of volatile organic compounds by sorbent tube/thermal desorption/capillary gas chromatography. Diffusive sampling 4BS EN ISO 16000-3: 2001: Determination of formaldehyde and other carbonyl compounds -- Active sampling method 5CIBSE AM10, 2005, Natural Ventilation in Non-Domestic Buildings 6Health Technical Memorandum 55 Building Components – Windows, NHS Estates, 1998. 7BCO Guide 2009, Best Practice in the Specification of Offices, BCO, 2009. 8HTM 03-01 Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises, Department of Health, 2007.

86

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories

Health and Wellbeing

Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

No

Aim To recognise and encourage a healthy internal environment through the safe containment and removal of pollutants.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit -laboratory containment devices and containment areas

1. An objective risk assessment of the proposed laboratory facilities has been carried out prior to completion of the Developed Design (RIBA Stage 3 or equivalent) to ensure potential risks are considered in the design of the laboratory. 2. Where containment devices such as fume cupboards are specified their manufacture and installation meet best practice safety and performance requirements and objectives, demonstrated through compliance with the following standards: a. General purpose fume cupboards: BS EN 14175 Parts 1-7 (as appropriate)1 b. Recirculatory filtration fume cupboards: BS 7989:2001 2 c. Microbiological safety cabinets: BS EN 12469:2000 3(for manufacture) and BS 5726:2005 1(for installation). d. Clean air hoods, glove boxes, isolators and mini-environments: BS EN ISO 14644-7:2004 2 e. Articulated extension arms: PD CEN/TR 16589 3 Or, for Schools, Sixth Form Colleges and Further Education with laboratories and fume cupboards for subjects up to and including A-level (or equivalent): f. Building Bulletin 88 4, Fume cupboards in schools. 3. Where laboratory containment devices that are ducted to discharge externally are specified, the guidance in the National Annex of BS EN 14175-2 must be followed to ensure an appropriate discharge velocity is achieved.

One credit - buildings with containment level 2 and 3 laboratory facilities

4. Where containment level 2 and 3 laboratory facilities are specified they must meet best practice safety and performance criteria and objectives. This is demonstrated as follows: a. Criterion 1 has been achieved. b. Ventilation systems are designed in compliance with the best practice guidance set out in 'DRAFT HSE Biological Agents and Genetically Modified Organisms (Contained Use) Regulations 2010'4. c. Filters for all areas designated as containment level 2 and 3 are located outside the main laboratory space for ease of cleaning/replacement and the filters are easily accessible by maintenance staff or technicians. 5. The design team demonstrate that the individual fume cupboard location and stack heights have been considered in accordance with HMIP Technical Guidance Note (Dispersion) D1 5.

1BS 5726:2005 Microbiological safety cabinets, Information to be supplied by the purchaser to the vendor and to the

installer and siting and use of cabinets. Recommendations and guidance, BSi. 2BS EN ISO 14644-7:2004 Clean rooms and associated controlled environments. Separative devices (clean air hoods, gloveboxes, isolators and mini-environments), BSi. 3PD CEN/TR 16589 Laboratory installations - Capture devices with articulated extract arm, BSi. 4The Biological Agents and Genetically Modified Organisms (Contained Use) Regulations 2010, HSE.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

87

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable to shell and core assessments. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable to simple buildings.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Laboratory containment device requirement for schools, sixth form and further education See criterion 2f.

For fume cupboards specified/installed for up to and including A-Level subjects, confirmation of the specification and installation in accordance with Building Bulletin 88 will be acceptable for BREEAM compliance. BS 7989 and parts of BS 14175 may be relevant to some installations; in such cases the person or organisation responsible for producing or installing the laboratory equipment should be able to confirm if they are relevant given the type of fume cupboard installation.

General CN4

Building type specific CN5

Building specific guidance

No building specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Methodology None.

88

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories

Health and Wellbeing

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Fume cupboard/safety cabinet Scientific equipment designed to limit a person's exposure to hazardous fumes or biological material. Air is drawn through the enclosure of the cupboard conducting the contaminated air away from the experimental area and those using the equipment. Risk assessment For the purpose of the relevant laboratory criteria in this issue, a risk assessment is a systematic consideration of any activity in which there is a hazard, followed by decisions on the substances, equipment and procedures used and on the restrictions and precautions needed to make the risk acceptably low. Below is a list of useful resources: 1. Schools, Sixth Form Colleges and Further Education assessments can refer to CLEAPSS (www. cleapss.org.uk) for further advice. 2. Higher Education assessments should discuss the most appropriate risk assessment with the end user of the building.

Other information BS EN 14175 and Fume cupboard discharge velocity: BS EN 14175 Part 2 states that the discharge velocity from fume cupboard extracts should be at least 7m/s but that a figure of 10m/s is preferable to ensure that the discharge will not be trapped in the aerodynamic wake of the stack. Higher discharge velocities may be required, especially in windy locations, but higher rates may cause noise problems. 1BS EN 14175-1:2003 Fume Cupboards, Vocabulary, BSi

BS EN 14175-2:2003 Fume Cupboards, Safety and performance requirements, BSi. BS EN 14175-3:2003 Fume Cupboards, Type test methods, BSi. BS EN 14175-4:2004 Fume Cupboards, onsitetest methods, BSi. DD CEN/TS 14175-5:2006 Fume Cupboards, Recommendations for installation and maintenance, BSi. BS EN 14175-6:2006 Fume Cupboards, Variable air volume fume cupboards, BSi. BS EN 14175-7:2012 Fume Cupboards, Fume cupboards for high heat and acidic load, BSi. 2BS 7989:2003 Specification for recirculatory filtration fume cupboards, BSi.I, 2003. 3BS EN 12469:2000 Biotechnology. Performance criteria for microbiological safety cabinets, BSi. 4Building Bulletin 88: Fume Cupboards in Schools, 1988, Department for Education and Employment 5Guidelines on Discharge Stack Heights for Polluting Emissions, HMIP Technical Guidance Note (Dispersion) D1, 1993.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

89

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Hea 04 Thermal comfort Number of credits available

Minimum standards

3

No

Aim To ensure that appropriate thermal comfort levels are achieved through design, and controls are selected to maintain a thermally comfortable environment for occupants within the building.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Thermal modelling

1. Thermal modelling has been carried out using software in accordance with CIBSE AM11 1 Building Energy and Environmental Modelling. 2. The modelling demonstrates that the building design and services strategy can deliver thermal comfort levels in occupied spaces in accordance with the criteria set out in CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design2 ; or other appropriate industry standard (where this sets a higher or more appropriate requirement/level for the building type) and CIBSE TM52 Avoiding overheating in European Buildings1, for free-running buildings. 3. The software used to carry out the simulation at the detailed design stage provides full dynamic thermal analysis. For smaller and more basic building designs with less complex heating or cooling systems, an alternative less complex means of analysis may be appropriate (such methodologies must still be in accordance with CIBSE AM11). 4. Thermal modelling results demonstrate that thermal comfort levels in occupied spaces meet the category B requirements for both PMV (predicted mean vote) and PPD (predicted percentage of dissatisfied) indices as set out in Table A.1 of Annex A in ISO 7730:2005. When assessing free-running buildings, parameters for the hours of exceedance, daily weighted exceedance and upper limit temperature, as outlined in CIBSE TM52, should be used to establish the risk of overheating. 5. The PMV and PPD indices are reported via the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool, based on the modelling undertaken above.

One credit - Adaptability - for a projected climate change scenario

6. Criteria 1-5 are achieved. 7. Thermal modelling demonstrates that the building design and services strategy can deliver the same thermal comfort levels, PMV and PPD indices in occupied spaces achieved for the first credit under a projected climate change environment (see Relevant definitions) 8. Where thermal comfort criteria are not met for the projected climate change environment, the project team demonstrates how the building has been adapted, or will be adaptable in future using passive design solutions in order to subsequently meet the requirements under criterion 7. 9. The PMV and PPD indices are reported via the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool, based on the modelling undertaken above.

1CIBSE TM52 The limits of thermal comfort: Avoiding overheating in European buildings, 2013

90

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 04 Thermal comfort

Health and Wellbeing

One credit - Thermal zoning and controls

10. Criteria 1 to 5 are achieved. 11. The thermal modelling analysis (undertaken for compliance with criteria 1-5) has informed the temperature control strategy for the building and its users. 12. The strategy for proposed heating/cooling system(s) demonstrates that it has addressed the following: a. Zones within the building and how the building services could efficiently and appropriately heat or cool these areas. For example consider the different requirements for the central core of a building compared with the external perimeter adjacent to the windows. b. The degree of occupant control required for these zones, based on discussions with the end user (or alternatively building type oruse specific design guidance, case studies, feedback) considers: i. User knowledge of building services ii. Occupancy type, patterns and room functions (and therefore appropriate level of control required) iii. How the user is likely to operate or interact with the system(s), e.g. are they likely to open windows, access thermostatic radiator valves (TRV) on radiators, change air conditioning settings etc., iv. The user expectations ( this may differ in the summer and winter)and degree of individual control (i.e. obtaining the balance between occupant preferences, for example some occupants like fresh air and others dislike drafts). c. How the proposed systems will interact with each other (where there is more than one system) and how this may affect the thermal comfort of the building occupants. d. The need or otherwise for an accessible building user actuated manual override for any automatic systems.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Thermal modelling criteria 1-5 Option 1 - Shell only:All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. However for the purpose of the thermal model a baseline servicing strategy will need to be assumed. This is to reduce the risk of an under-performing fabric being designed for the basic building envelope. Option 2 - Shell and core only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. However, where assumptions are required for the purpose of the thermal model, these must be reasonable and represent typical use patterns and loads given the parameters and function of the building. Note that thermal modelling may need to be completed on the basis of a typical notional layout. Adaptability - for projected climate changes criteria 6-9 Option 1 - Shell only: These criteria are not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2 - Shell and core only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. However where assumptions are required for the purpose of the thermal model, these must be reasonable and represent typical use patterns and loads given the parameters and function of the building. Note that thermal modelling may need to be completed on the basis of a typical notional layout.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

91

Health and Wellbeing

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description Thermal zoning and controls criteria 10-12 Both option 1 and 2: These criteria are not applicable to shell and core assessments. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

CN3

Dynamic thermal modelling

For simple building assessments, dynamic thermal modelling is not a requirement to achieve the credits but may be preferable as it can provide more accurate analysis results. Note that assessment criterion 3 already clarifies use of an alternative less complex means of modelling, which must be in accordance with CIBSE AM11.

Country specific CN4

Country specific

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN5

Appropriate industry standard See criterion 2.

BREEAM has not attempted to list all appropriate industry standards. Any recognised collaborative industry or sector best practice standard or guidance that sets thermal performance levels, in terms of thermal comfort and design temperature can be considered an appropriate industry standard for the purposes of this BREEAM issue. CIBSE Guide A (table 1.5) includes recommended summer and winter comfort criteria (temperature ranges) for a number of specific building applications. See also the relevant Compliance Notes below for industry standards deemed appropriate by BREEAM for schools and healthcare buildings.

CN6

Buildings with less complex heating/cooling systems See criterion 3.

For buildings with less complex heating/cooling systems the thermal comfort strategy need only comply with criteria 12a and b. Compliance can be demonstrated where zoning allows separate occupant control (within the occupied space) of each perimeter area (i.e. within 7m of each external wall) and the central zone (i.e. over 7m from the external walls). For example, adequate TRVs (thermostatic radiator valves) placed in zones around the building perimeter, and the provision of local occupant controls to internal areas, such as fan coil units. Note: The distance requirement for smaller buildings is approximate; however, the assessor must use sound judgement considering fully the aims of this issue, before accepting solutions that do not strictly meet the above criteria. Examples of potentially compliant heating control measures can be found in Technology Guide CTG002 Heating control3.

General

Building type specific

92

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 04 Thermal comfort

Health and Wellbeing

Ref

Terms

Description

CN7

Industrial Industrial unit with no office space

Where an industrial unit contains no office space and only an operational or storage area, this BREEAM issue does not apply.

CN8

Education (schools only) Appropriate industry standards and criteria for schools, See criterion 2.

An appropriate industry standard for schools is Building Bulletin 101, Ventilation of school buildings. This standard includes the requirement that there should be no more than 120 hours when the air temperature in the classroom rises above 28 °C. However, to comply with BREEAM (in relation to criterion 2) internal summer temperatures in the classroom must be significantly better than the recommendations of Building Bulletin 101, e.g. there are fewer than 60 hours a year where temperatures rise above 28 °C. This additional criteria is set to ensure closer alignment with CIBSE Guide A, which recommends limiting the expected occurrence of operative temperatures above 28 º C to 1% of the annual occupied period (e.g. around 25–30 hours). For schools with a straightforward servicing strategy, ClassCool is considered a suitable alternative to an AM11 full dynamic model.

CN9

Healthcare appropriate industry standards and criteria See criterion 2.

The appropriate industry standard for healthcare is Health Technical Memorandum 03-01 Specialised ventilation for healthcare premises. Thermal comfort levels in patient and clinical areas must be in accordance with the temperature ranges set out in HTM 03-01, Appendix 2. Furthermore, internal summer temperatures must not exceed 28 º C dry bulb for more than 50 hours per year (as defined in HTM 0301, paragraph 2.15). Other occupied spaces not covered in HTM03-01 Appendix 2 should be in accordance with CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design.

CN10

Education and prisons occupant controls See criterion 8.

In this issue, occupant controls are intended to be for staff-use only.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

7, 8, 11, 12

Thermal comfort study

As per interim design stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

93

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Relevant definitions ClassCool A tool developed by the Department for Children, Schools and Families (DCSF, formerly DfES) which provides a simplified method of assessing the extent of classroom overheating. ClassCool may not be appropriate for other spaces, such as libraries and halls, and other means of assessing overheating will be requiredwww.teachernet.gov.uk/iaq.. Clinical areas Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort Occupied space Refer to Hea 01 Visual comfort, however for the purpose of BREEAM issue Hea 04 the definition excludes the following: 1. Atria or concourses 2. Entrance halls or reception areas 3. Ancillary space e.g. circulation areas, storerooms and plant rooms Passive design Passive design uses layout, fabric and form to reduce or remove mechanical cooling, heating, ventilation and lighting demand. Examples of passive design include optimising spatial planning and orientation to control solar gains and maximise daylighting, manipulating the building form and fabric to facilitate natural ventilation strategies and, making effective use of thermal mass to help reduce peak internal temperatures. Patient areas Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. Predicted mean vote (PMV) The PMV is an index that predicts the mean votes of a large group of persons on the seven-point thermal sensation scale based on the heat balance of the human body. Thermal balance is obtained when the internal heat production in the body is equal to the loss of heat to the environment. See 'Other Information' for the seven point thermal sensation scale. Predicted percentage dissatisfied (PPD) The PPD is an index that establishes a quantitative prediction of the percentage of thermally dissatisfied people who feel too cool or too warm. For the purposes of ISO 7730, thermally dissatisfied people are those who will feel hot, warm, cool or cold. See the seven-point thermal sensation scale in 'Other Information'. Projected climate change environment Dynamic thermal simulation software packages currently provide the facility for building designs to be assessed under external climatic conditions specific to geographic location. Industry standard weather data for the UK is available in the form of Test Reference Years (TRYs) and Design Summer Years (DSYs) provided by CIBSE. This weather data enables thermal analysis of building designs under current climatic conditions, yet no account is taken of the projected variations in weather data that will occur during the building's life-cycle as a result of climate change. The following probabilistic TRY weather data files should be used to establish the projected climate change environment against which the design is evaluated: Free Running Buildings Time Period: 2050s Emissions Scenario: Medium (A1B) Mechanically Ventilated or Mixed Mode Buildings Time Period: 2030s Emissions Scenario: Medium (A1B) The above weather files represent the minimum requirements to perform thermal modelling under a climate change scenario and subsequently demonstrate compliance. Where design teams feel that added consideration of building occupant risk/sensitivity to overheating is necessary, weather files can be used that exceed the minimum

94

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 04 Thermal comfort

Health and Wellbeing

requirements outlined above. The time periods indicated above have been selected to represent the building services life cycle likely to be present in each building services strategy type. A shorter time period is chosen for mechanically ventilated/mixed mode building types due to consideration of mechanical servicing equipment life span (before major upgrade or replacement is required), and to avoid over-specification of plant which could lead to inefficient operation. Separate occupant control Responsive heating or cooling controls for a particular area/zone of the building that can be accessed and operated by the individual(s) occupying that area or zone. Such controls will be located within, or within the vicinity of, the zone or area they control. Thermal comfort In British Standard BS EN ISO 7730:2005: Ergonomics of the thermal environment. Analytical determination and interpretation of thermal comfort, thermal comfort is defined using the calculation of PMV and PPD indices and local thermal comfort criteria and is ‘that condition of mind which expresses satisfaction with the thermal environment.’ The term ‘thermal comfort’ describes a person’s psychological state of mind and is usually referred to in terms of whether someone is feeling too hot or too cold. Thermal comfort is difficult to define because it needs to account for a range of environmental and personal factors in order to establish what makes people feel comfortable. HSE considers 80% of occupants as a reasonable limit for the minimum number of people who should be thermally comfortable in an environment. The purpose of this issue is to encourage appropriate and robust consideration of thermal comfort issues and specification of appropriate occupant controls to ensure both maximum flexibility of the space and thermal comfort for the majority of building occupants. Thermal dynamic analysis Thermal comfort analysis tools can be subdivided into a number of methods of increasing complexity. The most complex of these and the one that provides greatest confidence in results is the full dynamic model. This type of model enables annual heating or cooling loads, overheating risks and control strategies to be assessed.

Other information Projected climate change weather data A range of alternative probabilistic weather files produced in accordance with the UK climate impacts programme (UKCIP) 2009 projections have been produced to be compatible with simulation software packages. These weather files provide the opportunity to evaluate the impact of varying climate change scenarios building design performance throughout its life-cycle. Projected climate change weather files are currently available in TRYs and DSYs and according to three projected time periods; 2030s, 2050s and 2080s, and for each period two 'emissions scenarios' are available; Medium Emissions (A1B) and High Emissions (A1F1). The PROMETHEUS project at Exeter University has produced a number of future weather files specific to different locations across the UK, created using the UKCP09 weather generator. Weather files produced under the PROMETHEUS project are available at the following location: http://emps.exeter.ac.uk/research/energy-environment/cee/projects/prometheus/ 1CIBSE Applications Manual AM11 Building energy and environmental modelling, CIBSE, 1998. 2CIBSE Guide A Environmental Design, 7th Edition, Issue 2, CIBSE, 2007 3CTG002 Technology Guide, Heating control: maximising comfort, minimising energy consumption, The Carbon Trust, 2006

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

95

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

No

Aim To ensure the building's acoustic performance including sound insulation meet the appropriate standards for its purpose.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance :

Up to three credits for Education, Healthcare, Office and Law Courts building types

1. The building meets the appropriate acoustic performance standards and testing requirements defined in the checklists and tables section which defines criteria for the acoustic principles of: a. Sound insulation b. Indoor ambient noise level c. Reverberation times

Up to three credits are available for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and ‘Other’ building types Up to two credits 2. Where the building meets the acoustic performance standards and testing requirements detailed in Table - 22 (see additional information) for all relevant functional areas. OR

Up to three credits 3. Where a suitably qualified acoustician (see relevant definitions) is appointed to define a bespoke set of performance requirements for all function areas in the building using the three acoustic principles defined in criterion 1, setting out the performance requirements for each and the testing regime required.

Up to four credits are available for Multi-residential and 'other residential institutions' building types

4. One, three orf four credits are available for multi-residential and other residential institution buildings where the relevant criteria in the checklists and table section has been applied. Please also see CN7.

Checklists and tables Table - 18: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Education buildings Education buildings (Three credits) First credit - Sound insulation

96

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

Health and Wellbeing

Education buildings (Three credits) Criteria

Achieve the performance standards set out in Section 2 of the Acoustic Performance Standard for the Priority Schools Building Programme (APS), June 2013 1 relating to airborne and impact sound insulation of walls and floors.

Testing requirement

A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the APS requirements and the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools2.

Second credit - Internal indoor ambient noise levels Criteria

Achieve the indoor ambient noise level standards set out within Section 2 of APS for all room types. For roofs with a mass per unit area less than 150kg/m2 (lightweight roofs) or any roofs with glazing or rooflights, calculations using laboratory data with ‘heavy’ rain noise excitation as defined in BS EN ISO 140-18 3 are required (in accordance with the guidance in APS) for teaching/learning spaces to demonstrate that the reverberant sound pressure level in these rooms are not more than 25 dB above the appropriate limits presented within Section 2 of APS, table 1.

Testing requirement

Indoor ambient noise levels (excluding rain noise): A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Rain noise: installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance, reference is also made to the notes below.

Notes

For heavy weight roofs, or parts of the roof that are heavyweight, with a mass per unit area greater than 150kg/m2 (including those with sedum planting) that do not have any glazing or rooflights, calculations are not required, as such the credit can be awarded on a default basis of compliance.

Third credit - Reverberation Criteria

Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index (STI): Teaching and study spaces: achieve the requirements relating to reverberation time for teaching and study spaces set out within table 5 in Section 2 of APS. Open plan teaching spaces: achieve the performance requirements relating to speech transmission index (STI) set out within Section 2.8 of APS. Corridor and stairwells: for those that give direct access to teaching and study spaces, achieve the performance requirements relating to sound absorption.

Testing requirement

Teaching and study spaces: A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Open Plan teaching spaces: STI Measurements of the STI should be taken in at least one in ten typical student listening positions in the open-plan spaces in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Corridors and stairwells:

1Acoustic Performance Standards for the Priority Schools Building Programme, Department of Health, June 2013 2ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic Testing of Schools, version 1.2, July 2011 3BS EN ISO 140-18:2006 Acoustics. Measurement of sound insulation in buildings and of building elements

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

97

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Education buildings (Three credits) Installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance. Where this refers to the use of building regulations, the country specific building regulations or standards can be applied (see relevant definitions).

Table - 19: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Healthcare buildings Healthcare buildings (three credits) First credit - Sound insulation Criteria

Achieve the airborne sound insulation performance standards set out in Section 2 of HTM 0801:Acoustics 2013 1 determined according to the privacy requirements using both Table 3 and Table 4 from HTM 08-01:Acoustics. Impact noise is controlled at source and the weighted standardised impact sound pressure level (L’nT,w) does not exceed 65dB in noise sensitive rooms, following the guidance in HTM 08-01:Acoustics.

Testing requirement

A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the requirements of Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics.

Second credits - Internal indoor ambient noise levels Criteria

The indoor ambient noise requirements for noise intrusion from external sources in Table 1 of HTM 08-01 Acoustics, 2013 are not exceeded. The values for internal noise from mechanical and electrical services in Table 2 of HTM 08-01 Acoustics are not exceeded.

Testing requirement

A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the Section 7 of HTM 08-01:Acoustics. Rain noise: Installation of a specification compliant with the HTM 08-01 criteria demonstrates compliance.

Third credit - Reverberation Criteria

Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index (STI)): Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption set out in Section 2 of HTM 08-01:Acoustics.

Testing Requirement

A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics.

Table - 20: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Office buildings Office buildings (Three credits) First credit - Sound insulation

1HTM 08-01, Acoustics, Health Technical Memorandum, Department of Health, 2013

98

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

Health and Wellbeing

Office buildings (Three credits) Criteria

The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies with the performance criteria given in Section 7 of BS 8233:1999 1.

Testing requirement

A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional information section of this BREEAM issue.

Second credits - Internal indoor ambient noise levels Criteria

Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the 'good practice' criteria levels given in Section 7 of BS 8233:1999.

Testing requirement

A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlines in the Additional information section of this BREEAM issue.

Notes

Unless calculations from the suitably qualified acoustician or mechanical services engineer confirm otherwise; the contribution to the indoor ambient noise level from mechanical services for the privacy index should be assumed to be less than 35 dB, LAeq,T, regardless of the upper limit during the design stage of the project. To increase the ambient noise level, where privacy is required or the ambient targets include a minimum as well as maximum limit, an artificial sound source or sound masking system may be required. Any artificial sound source or sound masking system should be installed and in operation at the time of the acoustic testing to demonstrate compliance.

Third credit - Reverberation Criteria

Acoustic environment (control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index): Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and reverberation times, where applicable, set out in Section 7 of BS 8233:1999.

Testing Requirement

A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional information section of this BREEAM issue.

Table - 21: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Law Courts buildings Law Courts buildings (three credits) First Credit - Sound insulation Criteria

The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies with the performance targets given in Section 28 of Court Service Design Guide (CSDG), HMCS, 2010 2.

Testing requirement

A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the requirements of Section 28 of the CSDG and ‘Calculation Procedures’ where

1BS 8233: Sound Insulation and noise reduction for buildings - Code of practice, 1999 2Court Service Design Guide (CSDG), Her Majesty's Court Service (HMCS), 2010

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

99

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Law Courts buildings (three credits) applicable. Second credits - Internal indoor ambient noise levels Criteria

Achieve indoor ambient noise levels that comply with the requirements of Section 28 of the CSDG.

Testing requirement

A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with Section 28 of the CSDG.

Third credit - Reverberation Criteria

Acoustic environment (Control of reverberation, sound absorption and speech transmission index): Achieve the requirements relating to sound absorption and reverberation times, where applicable, set out in Section 28 of the CSDG.

Testing requirement

A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with Section 28 of the CSDG and ‘Calculation Procedures’ where applicable.

Table - 22: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Industrial, Retail, Prisons and 'Other' building types Industrial, Retail, Prisons and other building types (Two credits) First credit – Sound insulation and internal indoor ambient noise levels Room function

All room functions

Criteria

Internal indoor ambient noise levels: Indoor ambient noise levels comply with the 'good practice' criteria levels of BS 8233:1999, Tables 5 and 6 (see additional information section) unless otherwise stated below. Where the room types below are present, the appropriate criteria for ambient noise levels, sound insulation and acoustic privacy must also be achieved.

Testing requirement

Internal indoor ambient noise levels: A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures outlined in the Additional information section of this BREEAM issue.

Room function

Educational space (teaching and lecture spaces)

Criteria

Internal indoor ambient noise levels: Achieve the indoor ambient noise level standards set out within Section 2 of APS for all teaching and lecture theatre room types. See also the criteria below for acoustically sensitive rooms and apply if relevant.

Testing requirement

Internal indoor ambient noise levels: A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with

100

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

Health and Wellbeing

Industrial, Retail, Prisons and other building types (Two credits) the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Rain noise: Installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance, reference is also made to the “notes” below. Notes

For heavy weight roofs, or parts of the roof that are heavyweight, with a mass per unit area greater than 150kg/m2(including those with sedum planting) that do not have any glazing/rooflights, calculations are not required, as such the credit can be awarded on a default basis of compliance.

Room function

Medical treatment rooms

Criteria

Sound insulation: Achieve the airborne and impact sound insulation criteria in Health Technical Memorandum HTM 0801.

Testing requirement

Sound insulation: A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the requirements of Section 7 of HTM 08-01: Acoustics or SHTM 08-0: Specialist Services Acoustics, 20111 for assessments in Scotland.

Room function

Acoustically sensitive rooms

Criteria

Sound insulation: The sound insulation between acoustically sensitive rooms and other occupied areas complies with the following, where relevant: General office type areas: section 7.6.3.1 of BS 8233, as follows, Dw + LAeq,T > 75.Where privacy is viewed to be critical by the client and/or design team, or where the room is adjacent to a noisy space such as a music room, the area should comply with an enhanced privacy index: Dw + LAeq,T > 85. Examples of rooms where these criteria may be applicable include a judges chamber that is next to another judges chamber or waiting room, a Human Resources meeting room next to an adjacent office (cellular or open plan). Bedrooms in hotels or other residential institutions not assessed under BREEAM Multi-residential: section 7.6.2.2 of BS 8233 as follows: sound insulation (DnT,w) of not less than 50 dB for partitions and floors between rooms and between rooms and corridors.

Testing requirement

Sound insulation: A programme of pre-completion acoustic testing is carried out by a compliant test body in accordance with the acoustic testing and measurement procedures in the Methodology section.

Notes

See Relevant definitions. To increase the ambient noise level, where privacy is required or the ambient targets include a minimum as well as maximum limit, an artificial sound source or sound masking system may be required. Any artificial sound source or sound masking system should be installed and in operation at the time of the acoustic testing to demonstrate compliance.

Second credit – Reverberation Room function

Rooms/areas used for speech or performance, including public speaking

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

101

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Industrial, Retail, Prisons and other building types (Two credits) Criteria

Achieve reverberation times compliant with Section 2 of APS. In addition, or alternatively, if relevant to the assessed building; classrooms, seminar rooms and lecture theatres achieve reverberation times compliant with section 2 of APS.

Testing requirement

Reverberation times within teaching and study spaces: A programme of acoustic measurements is carried out by a compliant test body achieve the required performance standards set out in table 5 in section 2 of APS. Measurements should be carried out in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Open Plan teaching spaces: STI Measurements of the STI should be taken in at least one in ten typical student listening positions in the open-plan spaces in accordance with the ANC Good Practice Guide, Acoustic testing of Schools. Corridors and stairwells: installation of a specification compliant with the APS criteria demonstrates compliance. Reference is also made to the 'notes' below.

Notes

Where the reverberation time required by the relevant standard is not appropriate for the type of space/building assessed, the acoustician must confirm why this is the case. In addition the acoustician must set alternative appropriate reverberation times and provide these to demonstrate compliance.

Table - 23: BREEAM acoustic criteria for Multi-residential buildings and 'Other residential' institutions Multi-residential and 'Other residential' buildings (four credits) Room function

Individual bedrooms and self- contained dwellings

Criteria

One credit Airborne sound insulation values are at least 3dB higher and impact sound insulation values are at least 3dB lower than the performance standards in the Building Regulations or Standards. Three credits Airborne sound insulation values are at least 5dB higher and impact sound insulation values are at least 5dB lower than the performance standards in the Building Regulations or Standards. Four credits Airborne sound insulation values are at least 8dB higher and impact sound insulation values are at least 8dB lower than the performance standards in the Building Regulations or Standards.

Testing requirement

A programme of pre-completion testing is carried out by a compliant test body based on the normal programme of testing described in the relevant Building Regulations or Standards for every group or sub-group of dwelling (houses, flats or rooms for residential purposes) this must demonstrate that the performance standards detailed within this table are achieved. OR Use of constructions for all relevant building elements have been registered with and assessed and approved by Robust Details Limited (RDL) and found to achieve the performance standards required for the number of credits sought (see additional information section for further information on Robust Details).

Notes

Testing should be between habitable rooms on the ground floor and at higher storey levels if applicable. Where there are insufficient suitable separating walls or floors in a development to carry out the number of tests specified in the appropriate Building Regulations or Standards, all of the available suitable separating walls or floors must be tested. See also CN7

102

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

Health and Wellbeing

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Indoor ambient noise criteria: Both options – The basic built form has a large impact on the acoustic performance of the building, and in the case of a shell and core development, this aspect of the build would be outside the control of the tenant. A suitably qualified acoustician (SQA) must carry out a quantifiable assessment of the specification of the build form and any external factors that are likely to affect the indoor ambient noise levels. From this assessment, the SQA must confirm that given a typical arrangement and fit out specification for the building type, the development is likely to meet the levels required to demonstrate compliance with the BREEAM criteria. Where the specific room functions and areas within the building are yet to be defined, the acoustician must base their assessment on the most sensitive room type likely to be present in the building, as a worst case. For example in a retail assessment, where there are likely to be offices the acoustician should make an assessment based on this scenario. One credit can be awarded where this has been achieved. Sound insulation and reverberation criteria: Both options – Criteria not applicable. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Country specific CN3

Acoustic regulations/standards relevant

The following Standards or Building Regulations etc. are relevant for the assessment of the issue: England For Multi-residential assessments, where the criteria refer to the performance standards in building regulations, in England, this is referring to Approved Document E 2003 edition, with amendments 2004 and 2010– Resistance to the passage of sound, Northern Ireland For Multi-residential assessments, where the criteria refer to the performance standards in building regulations, in Northern Ireland, this is referring to - DOE Technical Booklet G - Sound 2012 Scotland For Healthcare buildings, where the criteria refer to the use of HTM08-01,

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

103

Health and Wellbeing

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description assessments in Scotland should use SHTM08-01. For Law Courts buildings, where the criteria refer to the use of Section 28 of Court Service Design Guide (CSDG), HMCS, 2010-assessments in Scotland should refer to ETS-01 Courtroom technology and spatial requirements design guide 2011 1 and ETS-03 Estates technical standard environmental performance, design guide 2011 2. For Multi-residential assessments, where the criteria refer to the performance standards in building regulations, in Scotland, this is referring to - Technical Handbook Section 5 - Noise, 2013 Wales For Multi-residential assessments, where the criteria refer to the performance standards in building regulations, in Wales, this is referring to Approved Document E 2003 edition, with amendments 2004 and 2010– Resistance to the passage of sound.

General CN4

Building types without areas 'used for speech'

Where a building type does not have areas 'used for speech', it does not need to comply with the relevant 'reverberation times' criteria. In these instances, the credit available for reverberation can be awarded by default where the building complies with the indoor ambient noise level and sound insulation criteria.

CN5

Remedial works

Where a programme of pre-completion testing identifies that spaces do not meet the standards, remedial works must be carried out prior to handover and occupation and the spaces re-tested to ensure compliance. Remedial works must be carried out to all affected and potentially affected areas, including rooms or spaces previously untested of a similar construction and performance requirement. The test report, or covering correspondence, should include a clear statement that the testing is in accordance with the required standard (where specified) or the BREEAM criteria (see Checklists and tables and Methodology section), and include the relevant pass/fail criteria.

CN6

Programme of testing

It is not acceptable to undertake a shorter test programme due to site readiness on the day of testing. If this issue arises additional testing should be scheduled. It may be that testing at less than the typical regime identified would be acceptable in some instances, for example in small healthcare facilities. Where this is the case, clear reasoning must be provided by the compliant test body prior to awarding the credit(s).

Building type specific CN7

Multi-residential or 'other residential institutions' Rooms not covered by residential criteria

Multi-residential and other residential institutions often contain a mixture of ‘nonresidential’ areas such as offices, small retail outlets, meeting rooms etc. and residential areas e.g. self contained dwellings or rooms for residential purposes. Where less than 5% of the floor area of the assessed building includes ‘nonresidential’ areas, these areas do not need to be assessed, hence only the

1ETS-01 Courtroom technology and spatial requirements, design guide, Scottish Court Service, 2011 2ETS-03 Estates technical standard environmental performance, design guide, Scottish Court Service, 2011

104

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

Ref

Terms

Health and Wellbeing

Description residential spaces need to be assessed against the residential criteria to demonstrate compliance with Table - 23. Where more than 5% of the floor area of the assessed building includes areas other than self-contained dwellings or rooms for residential purposes: If awarding 1 credit, only the self-contained dwellings and/or rooms for residential purposes need to be assessed to demonstrate compliance. If awarding 3 or 4 credits the ‘non-residential’ areas must meet the relevant criteria for their function, as set out in Table - 22 for ‘other buildings’and the self-contained dwellings or rooms for residential purposes need to be assessed to demonstrate compliance. The calculation for the percentage of floor area that is ‘non- residential’ should only include occupied spaces (as defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort) covered by the 'other buildings' criteria.

Methodology Testing, measurement and calculation procedures Where specific guidance on testing, measurement and calculation is not stated in the criteria tables above for the relevant building type, or within the relevant standard/guidance referenced, the following procedures can be followed by the acoustician when measuring or calculating the levels required to demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue. Measurements of sound insulation (airborne and impact) should be made in accordance with the relevant part of BS EN ISO 140 series, or the successor to these standards. For measurements of reverberation time, the relevant principles of BS EN ISO 354:2003 should be used and the guidance provided in BS EN ISO 140-7:1998 should be followed in respect of the number of source and microphone positions, and decay measurements. For measurements of ambient noise, when no specific guidance is available, the following procedures should be used: 1. Noise from both internal sources (e.g. mechanical ventilation systems, plant noise, noise making systems) and external sources (e.g. traffic noise transmitted via the building façade) should be included, and, where windows are openable as part of the ventilation strategy, these should be assumed to be open for the purposes of calculations and open for measurements. If openable windows are not part of the background/permanent ventilation strategy, then these should be assumed to be closed for the purposes of calculation and closed for measurements. 2. Noise from occupants and office equipment (e.g. computers) should not be included in the measurements. 3. Unless otherwise stated in the referenced document, a rate of testing of at least one in ten rooms/spaces of each performance level shall be subject to on-site performance testing. 4. Measurements should be made in at least four rooms in which noise levels can be expected to be greatest either because they are on the noisiest façade or because they are on a naturally ventilated façade. 5. Where different ventilation strategies are used, measurements should be conducted in rooms utilising each strategy. Otherwise, measurements should be made in rooms on the noisiest façade. 6. T in LAeq,T is taken as the duration of the normal working day (typically 8 hours between 09.00 and 17.00). 7. Measurements need not be made over a period of 8 hours if a shorter measurement period can be used. In this case, measurements should be made when external noise levels are representative of normal conditions throughout the day. 8. Measurement periods less than 30 minutes may give representative values for indoor ambient noise levels and may be utilized where this is the case. However measurement periods shorter than 5 minutes should not be used. 9. Measurements should be taken in a minimum of three locations in rooms at a height of 1.2m above the floor level and at least 1m away from any surface. 10. Where relevant, measurement of airborne sound insulation between teaching spaces should be conducted between one in four pairs of adjacent rooms (or teaching spaces) of each room type or performance requirement category and construction type.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

105

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

11. Where relevant, measurement of impact sound pressure level should be conducted in one in four teaching spaces (separated from rooms above) of each room type or performance requirement category and construction type. 12. The measured level of ambient noise should be used to determine compliance with the criteria for acoustically sensitive rooms. If at the time of acoustic commissioning it is not possible to measure ambient noise levels in the absence of construction or other extraneous noise sources that will not be present when the building is complete, then, for mechanical services the lower level of 35 dB, LAeq or the lowest design limit for the acoustically sensitive space should be used. The above is intended as guidance for undertaking acoustic testing or measurement to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements in BREEAM. If the acoustician has felt it necessary to deviate from the above procedures, they should provide a reason for doing so and confirm that the alternative procedures are adequate for demonstrating that the building meets the acoustic performance requirements.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

4

Multi-residential specific - Where Robust Details are to be used the following must be provided: 1. Design team confirmation that Robust Details chosen will achieve the required performance standards for sound insulation. 2. Purchase Statement from RDL which confirms that the relevant plots are registered with RDL.

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Acoustically sensitive rooms Where the term ‘acoustically sensitive rooms’ is referenced in this BREEAM issue, it refers to any room/space the design team or client deems to be acoustically sensitive for the purposes of privacy which may include the following types of space/rooms (where specified); 1. Cellular offices 2. Meeting or interview or consulting or treatment rooms. In addition; 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

106

Court buildings: Witness/consultation rooms and judgesor magistrates chambers and jury retiring rooms Prison buildings: Care or listener suites, Official visit rooms, ‘Closed visits’ rooms Educational buildings/spaces: rooms for teaching and learning i.e. classrooms, lecture theatres Rooms used for public speaking or seminars Any other room orspace the design team or client deems to be acoustically sensitive for the purposes of privacy.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

Health and Wellbeing

Compliant test body A Compliant Test Body is defined as : 1. Organisations having United Kingdom Accreditation Scheme (UKAS)accreditation to the appropriate scope, or who are accredited by a member of the International Accreditation Forum (IAF - www.iaf.nu) to the appropriate scope OR 2. Organisations or individuals registered with the Association of Noise Consultants (ANC) Registration Scheme OR 3. Organisations who can provide evidence that they follow the relevant principles of BS EN ISO/IEC 17024 (Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons)1 in relation to BREEAM requirements. Groups and sub-groups As defined in the Building Regulations for England and Wales Approved Document E: Resistance to the Passage of sound, section 1 (paragraphs 1.11 – 1.17). For example, flats and study bedrooms are usually considered as two separate groups, and if there are significant differences in construction type then the groups will need to be broken down into sub groups. In addition to this, where there are steps or staggers greater than 300mm between dwellings, dwellings without steps/staggers should be treated as a different sub-group to those with step/staggers. This is because the presence of steps/staggers is likely to improve performance. Habitable rooms For the purpose of this issue, habitable rooms include any room where individuals will sit or lie down and require a reasonably quiet environmental to concentrate or rest. Such rooms are bedrooms, living rooms, dining rooms, studies as well as kitchen-dining and kitchen-living rooms. Material change of use This is where there is a change in the purpose for which or the circumstance in which a building is used e.g. where a building has been converted from a non-dwelling (office, school, church etc.) to a dwelling. Multiple occupancy offices Office space that is not cellular in nature, i.e. it is open-plan, and designed to accommodate more than two desk spaces/workstations. Non-habitable rooms For the purpose of this issue, non-habitable rooms include any room that is not considered a habitable room (as defined above), it includes rooms such as kitchens, bathrooms, toilets, hallways, garages and laundry rooms. Occupied spaces Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 and note that for BREEAM issue Hea 05 there is a specific, unrelated, definition of 'unoccupied' with reference to acoustic testing and measurement, see Compliance notes for details. Robust details Robust Details (RDs) are construction solutions that provide an alternative to pre-completion sound insulation testing as a method of complying with Requirements E1 of Approved Document E (2003 edition) of the Building Regulations (England and Wales), DOE Technical Booklet G - Sound 2012 (Northern Ireland) and Technical Handbook Section 5 Noise, 2013 (Scotland). The relevant plots on a development must be registered with RDL and built in accordance with the RD specification. To give a reasonable level of assurance that these details will achieve the required minimum standards, RDL carry out random inspections during construction and random sound insulation tests after construction. A Robust Detail is deemed to be approved for BREEAM (Multi-residential building) credits only when it achieves a specified performance level as assessed by RDL. Robust Details can only be used in relation to assessment for new build dwellings and cannot be used to assess the performance of construction details in rooms for residential purposes or material change of use. Room for residential purposes This is defined within the Building Regulations for England and Wales Approved Document E as a room, or a suite of rooms which is not a dwelling (house or a flat) and which is used by one or more persons to live and sleep. It includes a room in a hostel, hotel, a boarding house, a hall of residence or a residential home, whether or not the room is

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

107

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

separated from or arranged in a cluster group with other rooms, but does not include a room in hospital, or other similar establishment, used for patient accommodation. Specified performance level Robust Details are approved for credits under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), where the specified performance levels set out below are met. Construction types that meet these levels are listed on the Robust Details website www.robustdetails.com on the CSH page. Where assessing self-contained dwellings in multi-residential buildings that are not defined as material change of use or rooms for residential purposes, Robust Details that meet the specified performance level as set out below can also comply with the credit criteria for self-contained units in multi-residential buildings and reference must be made to the CSH page on the Robust Details website: 1. Mature Robust Details (published for over 12 months and at least 100 test results) – regular assessment based on the 90th percentile of results from the last 100 site tests 2. Low use Robust Detail (published for over 12 months but fewer than 100 test results) – initial assessment based on the first 30 tests needed to qualify for the Robust Details scheme and the site tests available, and reviewed regularly as new test results become available, until it becomes a mature Robust Detail or is rejected. 3. New Robust Detail (published for less than 12 months and fewer than 100 test results) – initial assessment based on the first 30 tests needed to qualify for the Robust Details scheme, and reviewed regularly as new test results become available, until it becomes a mature Robust Detail or is rejected. It should be noted that not all RDs will necessarily achieve the performance levels required to achieve multi-residential credits. If in doubt, please check the list of currently approved details with RDL directly at www.robustdetails.com. Suitably qualified acoustician (SQA) An individual who holds a recognised acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate professional body. The primary professional body for acoustics in the UK is the Institute of Acoustics. An individual achieving all the following items can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment: 1. Holds a degree, PhD or equivalent qualification in acoustics/sound testing. 2. Has a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting acoustics in relation to construction and the built environment; including, acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for suitable acoustic performance levels and mitigation measures. Where a suitably qualified acoustician is verifying the acoustic measurements/calculations carried out by another acoustician who does not meet the SQA requirements, they must, as a minimum, have read and reviewed the report and confirm in writing that they have found it to: 1. Represent sound industry practice 2. Be appropriate given the building being assessed and scope of works proposed 3. Avoid invalid, biased and exaggerated recommendations. Additionally, written confirmation from the third party verifier that they comply with the definition of a Suitably Qualified Acoustician is required. Single occupancy offices Cellular office space designed to accommodate one or two desk spaces/workstations (typically no greater than 10m2). Unoccupied spaces Where the term ‘unoccupied space’ is referenced in this BREEAM issue it refers to the nature of the space for the purpose of carrying acoustic calculations or measurements i.e. such measurements must be carried out when the space is unoccupied and therefore devoid of sources of noise. Weighted standardized level differences (D ) nT,w HTM 08-01 defines this as the ‘unit for rating airborne sound insulation on site’. Weighted standardised impact sound pressure level (L' ) nT,w HTM 08-01 defines this as the ‘unit for rating impact airborne sound insulation on site’.

108

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 05 Acoustic performance

Health and Wellbeing

Other information Noise rating (NR) curves Noise assessments based on NR curves are often used by building services consultants to predict internal noise levels due to mechanical ventilation systems. However, the BREEAM requirement uses the indoor ambient noise level, LAeq,T which includes external noise transmitted via the façade as well as internal noise such as that from mechanical ventilation systems. In the absence of strong low frequency noise, LAeq,T can be estimated from the NR value using the following formula: LAeq,T≈ NR + 6 dB. Therefore, if the NR value is known, but not the sound pressure levels in the individual frequency bands, an estimate for the indoor ambient noise level LAeq,T can still be determined from the NR value for the building services noise. The LAeq,T for the external noise transmitted via the façade must then be combined with the LAeq,T for the building services. 1ISO/IEC 17024:2003 Conformity assessment - General requirements for bodies operating certification of persons

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

109

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Hea 06 Safety and security Number of credits available

Minimum standards

2

No

Aim To recognise and encourage effective measures that promote safe and secure use and access to and from the building.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit - Safe access Where external site areas form part of the assessed development the following apply: 1. Dedicated cycle paths provide direct access from the site entrance(s) to any cycle storage provided, without the need to deviate from the cycle path and, if relevant, connect to offsite cycle paths (or other appropriate safe route) where these run adjacent to the development’s site boundary. 2. Footpaths on site provide direct access from the site entrance(s) to the building entrance(s) and connect to public footpaths off-site (where existing), providing practical and convenient access to local transport nodes and other off-site amenities (where existing). 3. Where provided, drop-off areas are designed off/adjoining to the access road and provide direct access to pedestrian footpaths, therefore avoiding the need for the pedestrian to cross vehicle access routes. 4. Dedicated pedestrian crossings must be provided where pedestrian routes cross vehicle access routes, and appropriate traffic calming measures must be in place to slow traffic down at these crossing points. 5. For large developments with a high number of public users or visitors, pedestrian footpaths must be signposted to other local amenities and public transport nodes off-site (where existing). 6. The lighting for access roads, pedestrian routes and cycle lanes is compliant with the external lighting criteria defined in Hea 01 Visual comfort, i.e. in accordance with BS 5489-1:2013 1 Lighting of roads and public amenity areas. Where vehicle delivery access and drop-off areas form part of the assessed development, the following apply: 7. Delivery areas are not directly accessed through general parking areas and do not cross or share pedestrian and cyclist routes and other outside amenity areas accessible to building users and general public. 8. There is a dedicated parking/waiting area for goods vehicles with appropriate separation from the manoeuvring area and staff and visitor car parking. 9. Parking and turning areas are designed for simple manoeuvring according to the type of delivery vehicle likely to access the site, thus avoiding the need for repeated shunting. 10. There is a dedicated space for the storage of refuse skips and pallets away from the delivery vehicle manoeuvring area and staff/visitor car parking (if appropriate given the building type/function).

1BS 5489-1:2013 Part 1: lighting of roads and public amenity areas, Code of Practice for the design of road lighting, BSI, 2013

110

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 06 Safety and security

Health and Wellbeing

One credit - Security of site and building

11. A suitably qualified security consultant conducts an evidence-based Crime Impact Assessment (CIA) during or prior to Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent). The CIA must include: a. A visual audit of the site and surroundings, identifying environmental cues and features pertinent to the security of the proposed development, b. A summary of crime and disorder issues in the immediate vicinity of the proposed development, making reference to relevant crime statistics, c. Threats specific to the proposed, likely or potential use of the building(s), d. Threats specific to the proposed, likely or potential user groups of the building(s), e. Any detrimental effects the development may have on surrounding development or public space relevant to crime and the fear of crime. 12. The suitably qualified security consultant provides recommendations or solutions to the project team, during or prior to Concept Design(RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent). These recommendations or solutions shall aim to ensure that the design of buildings, public and private car parks and public or amenity space: a. Are designed and specified to minimise the risk of crime and fear of crime,. b. Address the threats and issues identified in the preceding Crime Impact Assessment, c. Are designed in accordance with a relevant approved security standard/scheme. 13. The suitably qualified security consultant completes a site inspection at the post-construction stage to confirm the development embodies the recommendations/solutions resulting from a compliant Crime Impact Assessment (as outlined above). Any deviation from those recommendations or solutions will need to be justified, documented and agreed in advance with the suitably qualified security consultant performing the site inspection.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

111

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

CN4

Development does not have any external site areas. See criteria 11, 12 and 13.

The safe access criteria apply only to developments that have areas external to the assessed building and within the boundary of the assessed development (regardless or not of whether that external area is or will be the responsibility of the future building occupant). This includes external parking areas. If the assessed building does not have any external areas and access to the building is direct from the public highway/footpath i.e. there is no onsite vehicle access and parking areas, then the criteria concerning safe access are not applicable. In such instances the two available credits must be assessed and awarded based on compliance with the security criteria.

CN5

Covered parking area, see criteria 1 to 10

Where the assessed building has no external areas but does have a covered parking facility, and cyclists/pedestrians/delivery vehicles access the building via this area, then the relevant safe access criteria apply and this area must be assessed against those criteria.

CN6

Delivery access through parking areas (smaller sites/deliveries) S See criteria 1 to 10 apart from 7

Criterion 7 (delivery access through general parking areas) can be relaxed for smaller sites if it can be confirmed that the building is of an operational type and size which is likely to mean all deliveries to the building will be made by small vans and not heavy goods vehicles.

CN7

No vehicle delivery and manoeuvring areas See criteria 1 to 6

The criteria concerning vehicle delivery access is not applicable where dedicated delivery access and drop-off areas do not form part of the assessed development.

Ref General

Building type specific CN8

Prisons Scope of security criteria for buildings on prison sites

In the case of an assessment of a prison building/development the security criteria apply only to publicly accessible buildings and car parking areas outside of the secure perimeter zone (but still on the wider prison site). This could include visitor reception/waiting buildings, facilities/estates offices and storage and visitor/staff parking. Security relating to secure prison buildings and their related site layout falls outside of the scope of BREEAM.

Methodology None.

112

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Hea 06 Safety and security

Health and Wellbeing

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Approved security standards/schemes Current BREEAM-approved standards and schemes are: Secured by Design Secured by Design: http://www.securedbydesign.com/professionals/guides.aspx Safer Parking Scheme Secured by Design: Car parks: www.britishparking.co.uk Project teams and suitably qualified security consultants seeking to use alternative standards or schemes must contact BRE Global Ltd with the relevant information and await confirmation that the standard or scheme is suitably equivalent to those listed above. Architectural Liaison Officer (ALO) An ALO is the same as the Crime Prevention Design Advisor (see below) and is the title given to the same role in some police forces. http://www.securedbydesign.com/index.aspx Crime Prevention Design Advisor (CPDA) A Crime Prevention Design Advisor is a specialist crime prevention officer, trained at the Home Office Crime Reduction College, who deals with crime risk and designing out crime advice for the built environment. In addition to physical security measures the officer will consider defensible space, access, crime and movement generators all of which can contribute to a reduction in crime and disorder. http://www.securedbydesign.com/index.aspx Crime Impact Assessment (CIA) A study to identify the threats of crime within the vicinity of the development, assessing the likely impacts of the crime risks identified. Dedicated cycle lanes Marked-out and clearly signed routes to accommodate building users arriving on and travelling through the assessed site on a bicycle. Cycle lanes should be fit for purpose and the following publications offer guidance on how to appropriately size, design and construct cycle lanes: 1. Local Transport Note 2/08 Cycle Infrastructure Design, Department of Transport, 2008. 2. The National Cycle Network Guidelines and Practical Details – issue 2, Sustrans and the relevant parts of Appendix VI NCN Design and Construction Checklist Dedicated pedestrian crossing Dedicated infrastructure/road markings and signage/instructions that enables a pedestrian to safely cross a vehicle carriageway on the assessed site and continue their journey to/from the building. Such a crossing must be fit for purpose, in that it will be appropriate for the width of the road, level of traffic and pedestrian use specific to the site. It will also act to alert drivers of vehicles using the carriageway to the potential presence of pedestrians in the carriageway, by ensuring they can be clearly seen and requiring the driver of the vehicle to give way to the pedestrian. External site areas Areas external to the assessed building, but within the development’s site boundary, which contain vehicle and/or pedestrian access roads/pathways to the building, parking, unloading and drop-off areas.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

113

Health and Wellbeing

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Peer review A process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or current full members maintain a standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a code of conduct and professional ethics. Secured by Design (SBD) A police initiative that seeks to encourage the construction industry to adopt crime prevention measures in the design of developments, to assist in reducing the opportunity for and fear of crime. Secured by Design is owned by the Association of Chief Police Officers (ACPO) and has the support of the Home Office Crime Reduction and Community Safety Group and other Government Departments. The Association of Chief Police Officers for England Wales and Northern Ireland (ACPO) and the Association of Chief Police Officers for Scotland (ACPOS) endorse and support the Secured by Design programme. The safer parking scheme An initiative of the Association of Chief Police Officers aimed at reducing crime and the fear of crime in parking facilities. Safer parking status, Park Mark®, is awarded to parking facilities that have met the criteria of a risk assessment conducted by the Police. The scheme is managed by the British Parking Association (BPA) and supported by the Home Office and Scottish Executive. Suitably Qualified Security Consultant (SQSC) The following are, at present, deemed to meet this definition: 1. Crime Prevention Design Advisors (CPDA) or Architectural Liaison Officers (ALO); or 2. A practising security consultant that meets the following requirements: a. Minimum of three years relevant experience within the last five years. This experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting security in relation to construction and the built environment, including, acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for security and crime prevention. b. Hold a recognised qualification in design and crime prevention. This qualification must incorporate recognised crime prevention theories and methodologies. These can include ‘situational crime prevention’ and CPTED (Crime Prevention through Environmental Design). c. Maintains (full) membership to a relevant professional body or accreditation scheme that meets the following: i. Has a professional code of conduct, to which members must adhere to; and ii. Ongoing membership is subject to peer review or the consultants’ Crime Impact Assessments and security recommendations/solutions are subject to regular audits by the scheme operator. Organisations, associations or scheme operators who wish to have their membership recognised as ‘suitably qualified’, should review their current status (and therefore their members) against the requirements above and, where they feel they are compliant, contact BRE Global Ltd with the relevant information/evidence.

Other information The Metric Handbook1 contains details of typical delivery/freight vehicle sizes and turning circles. In addition to the SbD Schools guidance, Managing School Facilities, Guide 4 Improving Security in Schools, published by the Department for Education and Employment (1996)2, offers guidance on how to improve the security of school premises. 1Metric handbook Planning and design data, Adler, Architectural Press 4th Ed. 2012. 2Managing School Facilities, Guide 4 Improving Security in Schools, published by the Department for Education and

Employment (1996)

114

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Energy

Energy

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

115

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions Number of credits available

Minimum standards

12

Yes

Aim To recognise and encourage buildings designed to minimise operational energy demand, primary energy consumption and CO2 emissions.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Up to twelve credits - Energy performance

1. Calculate an Energy Performance Ratio for New Constructions (EPRNC). Compare the EPRNCachieved with the benchmarks in Table - 24 and award the corresponding number of BREEAM credits.

Table - 24: Ene 01 EPRNC benchmark scale BREEAM credits

EPRNC

Minimum standards

1

0.075

Requires a performance improvement progressively better than the relevant national building regulations compliant standard (See Other information).

2

0.15

3

0.225

4

0.30

5

0.375

6

0.45

7

0.525

116

Excellent

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

Energy

BREEAM credits

EPRNC

Minimum standards

8

0.60

Outstanding

9

0.675

10

0.75

11

0.825

12

0.90

Zero net regulated CO2 emissions.

A description of how the EPRNC is calculated from a building's modelled operational energy performance, primary energy consumption and CO2 emissions is provided in the Methodology section. Note:The four countries of the UK have their own building regulations for energy and whilst they use the same methodology and approved calculation software, each have different definitions of the notional building and, set different requirements for regulatory compliance i.e. baseline performance. This is accounted forin the BREEAM NC 2014 Ene01 methodology through the ‘translator curves’ defined for each country. Therefore, the EPRNC and BREEAM credits are determined by comparing the assessed buildings modelled operational energy performance relative to the regulatory baseline for the country in which the building is located.

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve up to five innovation credits for this BREEAM issue:

Up to four credits - zero regulated carbon 2. The building achieves an EPRNC≥ 0.9 and zero net regulated CO2 emissions (see Relevant definitions). 3. An equivalent percentage of the buildings modelled ‘regulated’ operational energy consumption, as stipulated inTable 25, is generated by carbon neutral onsite or near-site sources and used to meet energy demand from ‘unregulated’ building systems or processes.

Five credits - carbon negative 4. The building is ‘carbon negative’ in terms of its total modelled operational energy consumption, including regulated and unregulated energy (see Relevant definitions in the Additional information section of this issue). Table - 25: Innovation credits Innovation credits

Equivalent % criteria

1

10%

2

20%

3

50%

4

80%

5

> 100%

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

117

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Energy performance, criterion 1 Option 1 - Shell only: Calculate an Energy Performance Ratio just for the building’s heating and cooling energy demand only (EPRED). Compare the EPRED achieved with the EPRNC in Table 1 'Ene 01 EPRNC benchmark scale' with the EPRED substituted for the EPRNC. Award the corresponding number of BREEAM credits. The exemplary credits for this issue are not applicable for shell only. Option 2 - Shell and core only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Services complying with the minimum requirements set out in relevant national building regulations should be assumed where these services are not within the remit of the shell and core developer (i.e. where services will be provided as part of the fit-out works). Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Building regulations for energy

The following lists the building regulations that are used to define each country’s BREEAM ‘translator curve’ for the purpose of benchmarking building energy performance relative to a regulatory baseline and awarding credits for this issue. Scotland Technical Handbook 2013 Non Domestic, Section 6 Energy Northern Ireland Technical Booklet F2 2012 Conservation of fuel and power in buildings other than dwellings England Approved Document Part L2A 2010 Conservation of fuel and power in new buildings other than dwellings, 2013 edition - for use in England Wales At the time of writing, the building regulations for Wales are under development. The intention is to finalise the Part L Approved Documents and make the regulatory

118

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

Ref

Terms

Energy

Description changes, to be implemented in June 2014.

General CN4

Extensions to existing buildings See criterion 1.

Where an existing building is being extended (and only the new extension is being assessed) and that extension uses existing building services plant, the energy modelling must be based on the building fabric of the new extension and any existing, common, building services plant and new building services plant installed that will service the new extension. The energy modelling does not have to consider the existing building fabric where this will not form part of the scope of the BREEAM assessment. Nor does it have to consider existing building services where they are not supplying services (heating, cooling and/or ventilation) to the new extension being BREEAM assessed.

CN5

Renewable and low carbon Installations See criterion 2c.

Where included as part of the project and therefore assessed under this BREEAM issue, the installation of low or zero carbon technologies can be used to off-set CO2 emissions arising from regulated and, in the case of exemplary credits, unregulated energy consumption. The LZC technology can be installed onsite,or near-site where a private wire arrangement is in place (see Relevant definitions).

CN6

Zero carbon sources of energy - double counting See criteria 6 and 7.

The project team must avoid double counting the energy from the zero carbon source. This may be particularly relevant where that source of energy generation is being accounted for in terms of the assessed building’s regulated CO2 emissions and/or it will contribute to off-setting other ‘ buildings' CO2 emissions, which are not part of this assessment.

CN7

Mixed use buildings assessed using SAP or SAP and SBEM See criterion 1.

In some instances, BREEAM assessed buildings with residential areas may have been classified under the domestic building regulations and will therefore have had their energy use modelled using the domestic assessment method, SAP, as well as or instead of SBEM. Further guidance on assessing a building's Ene 01 performance where SAP is used is provided in the Other information section for this assessment issue.

CN8

Building assessed part of a larger development

Where the building under assessment forms part of a larger development and either a new or existing LZC installation is provided for the whole site, then the amount of LZC energy generation counted for in this issue, and subsequent CO 2 emissions saved, should be proportional to the building’s energy demand compared to the total energy demand for the site.

CN9

Estimating energy demand from unregulated building systems/ processes

At present there is no standard or national calculation methodology for modelling unregulated energy demands in a building. To demonstrate compliance with the ‘exemplary level criteria’ the building’s modelled operational ‘regulated’ energy consumption is therefore used as a proxy for a building’s unregulated energy demand, i.e. unregulated energy equals 100% of regulated energy. Whilst not accurate, this approach enables BREEAM to assess and award credits for buildings that meet a proportion of its unregulated energy demand via onsite or near-site renewable energy sources. Where unregulated energy demand for the building can be accurately predicted, then this data can be used to determine the percentage of unregulated energy demand met via renewable energy sources. Unregulated

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

119

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Ref

Description energy demand could be estimated on the basis of metered data from a similar or the same building type with the same unregulated system/process loads or by using the methodology described in CIBSE TM54: 2013, 'Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage'1.

Methodology The methodology for the EPRNC calculation considers three metrics of modelled building performance when determining the number of credits achieved for this issue. The three metrics are: 1. The building’s heating and cooling energy demand 2. The building's primary energy consumption 3. The total resulting CO2 emissions. These three metrics for the actual modelled building performance are compared against the relevant national building regulations compliant standard (i.e. a baseline) and each is expressed as a percentage improvement. The percentage improvements are then compared against modelled building stock and 'translated' into a ratio of performance for each metric. These ratios are then weighted for each metric and added together to determine the overall Energy Performance Ratio (EPRNC). The calculation is determined using the following performance data from annual energy modelling of the building’s specified/designed regulated fixed building services and fabric, as undertaken by an accredited energy assessor using approved building energy calculation software: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Building floor area (m2) Notional building heating and cooling energy demand (mJ/m2) Actual building heating and cooling energy demand (mJ/m2) Notional building primary energy consumption (kWh/m2) Actual building primary energy consumption (kWh/m2) Target Emission Rate (TER) (kgCO2/m2) Building Emission Rate (BER) (kgCO2/m2)

The necessary energy modelling data required to determine building performance is sourced from National Calculation Method compliant energy modelling software, used by the design team to demonstrate building regulation compliance. This data is then entered into the BREEAM Ene 01 calculator to determine the EPRNC and number of credits achieved. The Ene 01 calculator is within the BREEAM assessment scoring and reporting tool, in the Assessment issue scoring tab, Energy section. The methodology summarised above is described in greater detail in a guidance note to be provided on the BREEAM website.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

3-5

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1-2

A copy of the Building Regulations Output Document from the approved

120

Final post construction stage

As per interim design stage, but with the output documents from the approved software reflecting

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

Criteria

3-5

Energy

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

software. The output documents must be based on the design stage of analysis. A copy of the Building Regulations Output Document from the design stage SAP calculations (where relevant for multi-residential buildings)

performance at the “as built” stage of analysis. This must account for any changes to the specification during construction and the measured air leakage rate, ductwork leakage and fan performances (as required by building regulations).

As above, plus: Evidence confirming : 1. The total carbon neutral energy generation (kWh/yr) 2. The source of the carbon neutral energy 3. Calculated estimate of energy consumption from unregulated systems/process (kWh/yr) (required only if confirming carbon negative status). 4. Calculated estimate of exported energy surplus (required only if confirming carbon negative status).

As required above and as per interim design stage.

Additional information Relevant definitions Accredited energy assessor A person registered with an accredited energy assessment scheme provider. The scheme provider will be licensed by the relevant government department to accredit competent persons in the energy assessment of non-domestic/ domestic buildings for the purposes of demonstrating compliance with the building regulations in the country of origin. For a full list of approved accreditation schemes/organisations for energy assessors and links to registers of accredited energy assessor’s visit: 1. Wales: https://www.ndepcregister.com/ (non-domestic), www.epcregister.com (domestic) 2. Scotland: www.scotland.gov.uk 3. Northern Ireland: www.epbniregisternd.com (non-domestic), https://www.epbniregister.com/ (domestic) 4. England: www.ndepcregister.com (non-domestic), www.epcregister.com (domestic)

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

121

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Approved building energy calculation software Software approved for the purpose of demonstrating compliance with the energy efficiency and carbon emission requirements of the building regulations (and in turn compliance with the Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD) recast 2012. The definition includes the Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM) and its interface iSBEM, as well as third party software approved by the relevant government department.A list of approved software for nondomestic buildings is available as follows: 1. Wales: www.ncm.bre.co.uk 2. Scotland: http://www.scotland.gov.uk/Topics/Built-Environment/Building/Buildingstandards/techbooks/sectsixprg 3. Wales, Northern Ireland and England: http://www.ncm.bre.co.uk/ 4. England: http://www.ncm.bre.co.uk Approved building energy calculation software will provide the data required for calculating the EPRNC and BREEAM Ene 01 credits. Please note that for dwellings (where relevant to the assessment of multi-residential buildings), the government’s Standard Assessment Procedure for the Energy Rating of Dwellings (SAP) may be used. The current version is SAP 2012 version 9.92 (October 2013).See also compliance note regarding the use of SAP outputs in multi-residential building assessments. Building Emission Rate (BER) The building CO2 emission rate expressed as kgCO2/m2/year. The BER is calculated in accordance with the National Calculation Methodology (NCM) and the Simplified Buildings Energy Model (SBEM). Building regulations Building regulations set standards for the design and construction of buildings to ensure the safety and health for people in or about those buildings. They also include requirements to ensure that fuel and power is conserved and facilities are provided for people, including those with disabilities, to access and move around inside buildings. In Scotland, they also aim to secure the welfare and convenience of persons in or about buildings and to further the achievement of sustainable development. See CN3 for details of the relevant documents for each country. Carbon negative building A building/site that generates, surplus to its own energy demand, an excess of renewable or carbon neutral energy and exports that surplus via the national grid to meet other, off-site energy demands, i.e. the building is a net exporter of zero carbon energy. Surplus in this respect means the building/site generates more energy via renewable/carbon neutral sources that it needs to meet its own regulated and unregulated energy needs. Any surplus must be exported through the national grid as additional capacity to that required by the Renewables Obligation i.e. Renewable Obligation Certificates are not claimed/sold for the renewable energy generation (see definition of Renewables Obligation Certificate). This definition of carbon negative focuses only on energy and carbon dioxide emissions resulting from the operational stage of the building life cycle (as this is the stated aim of this assessment issue). It does not take in to account the embodied carbon, in terms of carbon fixing or emissions resulting from the manufacture or disposal of building materials and components (these impacts/benefits are dealt with in BREEAM issue Mat 01 Life Cycle Impacts). Carbon neutral Carbon neutral means that, through a transparent process of calculating building operational emissions, reducing those emissions and offsetting residual emissions, net carbon emissions equal zero. This includes carbon emissions from both regulated and unregulated energy consuming plan and systems. See the 'zero net regulatedCO2 emissions' definition also. Controlled service or fitting The building regulations2 define this as a service or fitting in relation to which the building regulations imposes a requirement. Dwelling Emission Rate (DER) The DER is the estimated carbon dioxide emissions per m2 per year (kgCO2/m2yr) for the dwelling as designed. It accounts for energy used in heating, fixed cooling, hot water and lighting. It is the equivalent of the BER for dwellings.

122

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

Energy

Dynamic simulation model (DSM) A software tool that models energy inputs and outputs for different types of buildings over time. In certain situations, SBEM will not be sophisticated enough to provide an accurate assessment of a building’s energy efficiency. In these cases government-approved proprietary dynamic simulation models may be used. Energy demand The building energy provided for end uses in the building such as space heating, hot water, space cooling, lighting, fan power and pump power. Energy demands are the same as room loads. One of the outputs from the Building Regulations Output Document is for heating and cooling energy demand only, not for any other building energy uses. Heating and cooling energy demands are influenced by factors including building fabric heat loss, air permeability, glazing and shading. Energy Performance Ratio for New Constructions (EPR ) NC A metric that is unique to BREEAM and calculated by the BREEAM Ene 01 Calculator within the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting tool, using modelled outputs from the approved building energy calculation software. It is a ratio that defines the performance of a BREEAM assessed building in terms of its regulated operational heating and cooling energy demand, primary energy consumption andCO2 emissions. This measure of performance is used to determine the number of Ene 01 credits a building achieves in the BREEAM assessment. A description of how the EPRNC is defined and calculated is summarised in the Methodology section and outlined in greater detail in a Guidance Note Fixed building service The building regulations for energy performance of buildings define this as any part of, or any controls associated with: 1. Fixed internal or external lighting systems but does not include emergency escape lighting or specialist process lighting; or 2. Fixed systems for heating, hot water service, air-conditioning or mechanical ventilation. Low or zero carbon (LZC) technologies A low or zero carbon technology provides a source of energy generation from renewable energy sources or from a low carbon source such as combined heat and power (CHP) or ground source heat pumps (GSHP). National Calculation Method (NCM) The National Calculation Method (NCM) enables quantification of building operational energy consumption and CO2 emissions resulting from regulated building services/systems and fabric performance. The NCM is the methodology used for demonstrating compliance with the European Union Energy Performance of Buildings Directive (EPBD) 2012 (recast). Building energy modelling compliant with the NCM can be carried out using approved software (see Relevant definition of Approved building energy calculation software). The full details are described in the NCM Modelling Guide for the relevant country. 1. Wales:2013 Wales NCM Modelling Guide, www.2013ncm.bre.co.uk 2. Scotland: National Calculation Methodology (NCM) Modelling Guide for Scotland (2010), www.scotland.gov.uk/Topics/Built-Environment/Building/Building-standards/publications/ncmguide 3. Northern Ireland: NCM Modelling Guide (2010)3, www.ncm.bre.co.uk 4. England: NCM Modelling Guide (2013), www.ncm.bre.co.uk Notional building A hypothetical building of the same size, shape, orientation and shading as the actual building, with the same activities, zoning and system types and exposed to the same weather data, but with pre-defined specified properties for the building fabric, fittings and services. The notional building is concurrent with the national building regulations for Wales 2014, Northern Ireland 2012 and England 2013. For Scotland 2013, the ‘notional’ building is generated based upon a building designed to meet the 2002 standards and a percentage improvement is applied to define the compliant building target carbon dioxide emission rate (TER). Near-site LZC A low or zero carbon source of energy generation located near to the site of the assessed building. The source is most likely to be providing energy for all or part of a local community of buildings, including the assessed building e.g.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

123

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

decentralised energy generation linked to a community heat network or renewable electricity sources connected via private wire. Onsite LZC A low or zero carbon source of energy generation which is located on the same site as the assessed building. Primary energy consumption This refers to the direct use at the source, or supply to users without transformation, of crude energy, that is, energy that has not been subjected to any conversion or transformation process. Private wire arrangement In the context of BREEAM for low or zero carbon technology installations, a private wire arrangement is where any electricity generated on or in the vicinity of the site is fed directly to the building being assessed, by dedicated power supplies. If electricity is generated which is surplus to the instantaneous demand of the building, this electricity may be fed back to the national grid. The carbon benefit associated with any electricity fed into the grid in this manner can only be allocated against an individual installation or building. In cases where a building is supplied by a communal installation, no carbon benefit can be allocated to buildings which are not connected to the communal installation. Regulated energy Building energy consumption resulting from the specification of a controlled, fixed building services and fittings, including space heating and cooling, hot water, ventilation and lighting. Renewables Obligation Certificate (ROC) This is a green certificate issued to an accredited generator for eligible renewable electricity generated within the United Kingdom and supplied to customers within the United Kingdom by a licensed electricity supplier. One ROC is issued for each megawatt hour (MWh) of eligible renewable output generated 4. Standard Assessment Procedure (SAP) for Energy Rating of Dwellings The government’s approved methodology for assessing the energy performance of new dwellings. The current version is SAP 2012 version 9.92. The procedure accounts for energy used in: Space heating and cooling Hot water Fixed lighting Mechanical ventilation. The Simplified Building Energy Model (SBEM) SBEM is software developed for DCLG by BRE. SBEM is a computer program that provides an analysis of a building’s energy consumption. It calculates monthly energy use and carbon dioxide emissions of a building (excluding dwellings) based on a description of the building geometry, construction, use and HVAC and lighting equipment. SBEM is accompanied by a basic user interface, iSBEM. There also exists alternative approved software ‘front-end’ interfaces for SBEM (see definition of approved software above). Target Emission Rate (TER) The target emission rate is the minimum energy performance requirement (required by building regulations) for a new non-domestic building (kgCO2/m2yr). The TER is calculated in accordance with the National Calculation Methodology (NCM) and the Simplified Buildings Energy Model (SBEM). For dwellings, the TER is calculated using the SAP methodology according to the requirements defined in the building regulations for dwellings. The TER is expressed in terms of the mass of CO2 emitted per year per square metre of total useful floor area of the building (kgCO2/m2yr). Unregulated energy Building energy consumption resulting from a system or process that is not ‘controlled’, i.e. energy consumption from systems in the building on which the Building Regulations do not impose a requirement. For example, this may include energy consumption from systems integral to the building and its operation, e.g. lifts, escalators, refrigeration systems and ducted fume cupboards; or energy consumption from operational related equipment e.g. computers, servers, printers, photocopiers, laptops, mobile fume cupboards, cooking, audio-visual equipment and other appliances etc.

124

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

Energy

Zero net regulated carbon (CO ) emissions 2 The annual building net regulated CO2 emissions (kgCO2/m2yr) arising as a result of annual energy consumption from fixed building services, i.e. space heating and cooling, domestic hot water, ventilation and lighting, also referred to as controlled services and fittings, as a result of requirements imposed on such systems by the building regulations. In aiming to achieve a zero regulated carbon status, the building energy modelling can take account of contributions of energy generated from onsite and near-site renewable and low carbon installations. Energy generated and supplied from off-site renewable and low carbon installations cannot be used to meet this definition.

Other information Allowable solutions The term Allowable Solutions forms part of the proposed zero carbon definition. A consultation on allowable solutions is ongoing (at the time of writing). Once an official definition of allowable solutions is confirmed by the Government for nondomestic buildings, BRE will advise accordingly on the contribution of allowable solutions toward achieving BREEAM credits.

Building regulations classifications for multi-residential buildings Multi-residential buildings that can be assessed under BREEAM New Construction 2014 will be classified under either the nondwelling version of the relevant building regulations or a combination of the non-dwelling and dwelling of the building regulations, as outlined in CN7. For England and Wales, and Northern Ireland, areas classified under their relevant building regulations documents, Approved Documents (AD) Part L2A and the NI Technical Handbook F2, are classed as ‘buildings other than dwellings’. However this does also include ‘rooms for residential purposes’ (see below). Areas classified as Part L1A or Technical Handbook F1 are ‘self-contained dwellings’. The Part L/Technical Handbook F classification impacts this BREEAM issue in that areas classified as Part L2A/F2 must be assessed using SBEM and areas classified as Part L1A/F1 must be assessed using SAP. For Scotland, see the General section and Appendix A of the Technical Handbook Non-Domestic for definitions of domestic and non-domestic buildings.

Room for residential purposes The building regulations for Wales, Northern Ireland and England give the following definition: Room for residential purposes means a room, or suite of rooms, which is not a dwelling-house or a flat and which is used by one or more persons to live and sleep and includes a room in a hostel, a hotel, a boarding house, a hall of residence or a residential home but does not include a room in a hospital, or other similar establishment, used for patient accommodation.

Guidance for assessing Ene 01 performance in buildings that contain residential areas Guidance for assessing performance where the building has been modelled using SAP only The relevant data must be sourced from the SAP Data sheet from the approved software (provided by the Accredited energy assessor). This data must first be entered in to the 'Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using SAP'. The calculator converts the data into the outputs outlined in the Methodology section. Once converted by the Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator, the outputs should be entered into BREEAM’s Ene 01 Calculator. This calculator will then confirm the Energy Performance Ratio (EPR) and number of BREEAM credits achieved. The Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using SAP describes in detail what data to source from the SAP data sheet(s).

Guidance for assessing performance where the building has been modelled usingSAP and SBEM Where the building has been classified under both the non-dwelling and the dwelling regulations, because it contains both residential and non-residential areas, two sets of energy performance data will be required: one set from SBEM for the nondomestic areas; and one from SAP for the self-contained dwellings.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

125

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

The relevant SAP data must first be entered into the 'Ene 01 Supplementary Calculator for Multi-Residential Buildings Using SAP'. This calculator converts the data into the outputs outlined in the Methodology section. This converted SAP data along with the relevant outputs from SBEM must then be added to BREEAM’s Ene 01 Calculator in the BREEAM Assessment Scoring and Reporting Tool. This calculator will then confirm the Energy Performance Ratio (EPR) and number of BREEAM credits achieved. Where both SBEM and SAP outputs are used, the total credits achieved are determined by area weighting the credits achieved for the domestic and non-domestic parts of the building. The area weighted totals are then added together and rounded down to the nearest whole credit. The same method of area weighting is applied to the percentage improvement on the building's Target Emission Rate. The area weighted credits and percentage improvement are the totals used to determine compliance with BREEAM’s Ene 01 minimum standards. 1CIBSE TM54: 2013, Evaluating operational energy performance of buildings at the design stage 2The Building Regulations 2000, Approved Document Part L2A: The conservation of fuel and power in new buildings other

than dwellings, 2013 edition, HM Government. 3National Calculation Methodology (NCM) Modelling Guide (for buildings other than dwellings) in England and Wales, 2010 edition (revision January 2013) www.ncm.bre.co.uk 4www.ofgem.gov.uk

126

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 02 Energy monitoring

Energy

Ene 02 Energy monitoring Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

Yes

Aim To recognise and encourage the installation of energy sub-metering that facilitates the monitoring of operational energy consumption.

Assessment criteria Please note: The first credit is applicable to all building types. The second credit is not applicable to Pre-schools, Primary schools, Law courts, Prisons, Multi-residential and Other Residential institutions. The following is required to demonstrate compliance.

One credit - Sub-metering of major energy consuming systems (see definitions)

1. The energy consuming systems accounting for ≥90% of the estimated total annual energy consumption of the building are metered using an appropriate energy monitoring and management system or separate accessible energy submeters with pulsed outputs to enable future connection to an energy monitoring and management system (see Relevant definitions ). 2. The end energy consuming use is identifiable to the building user, for example through labelling or data outputs.

One credit - Sub-metering of high energy load and tenancy areas

3. An accessible energy monitoring and management system or separate accessible energy sub-meters with pulsed outputs to enable future connection to an energy monitoring and management system are provided, covering the energy supply to all tenanted areas or, in the case of single occupancy buildings, relevant function areas or departments within the building/unit.

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

127

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Sub-metering of major energy consuming systems, criteria 1-2 Option 1 - Shell only: These criteria are not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2 - Shell and core only: Criteria 1 and 2 apply to this shell and core assessment option. Sub-metering of high energy load and tenancy areas, criterion 3 Both options: This criterion applies to both the shell and core assessment options. Meters must be installed on the energy supply to each separate tenanted unit or floor plate within the assessed development. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

CN3

Scope of submetering for simple building assessments

Dependent upon the building type, the assessor should use their discretion to identify which other major energy consuming systems (where present) should be sub-metered.

Country specific CN4

Country specific criteria

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN5

Extensions to existing buildings

Where an existing building is being extended and it has existing building services plant and systems that will be common to both the new extension and existing building, the criteria only apply to the extension. In this case, energy services supplying energy consuming systems from the existing building shall, as a minimum, be metered at the entry points to the extension, e.g. hot water, chilled water, gas and electricity. However the best practice approach would usually be to ensure that the energy metering covers the entire building.

CN6

Lighting and small power

Due to traditional distribution methods, it can be difficult to cost-effectively separate lighting and small power. It is acceptable, within a single floor, for lighting and small power to be combined for metering purposes, provided that submetering is provided for each floor plate.

CN7

Modular boiler systems See criterion 1,

Modular boiler systems can be monitored as a whole. See definition of modular boiler systems in Relevant definitions .

General

Building specific

128

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 02 Energy monitoring

Energy

Ref

Terms

Description

CN8

Buildings situated on campus developments See criterion 3.

The systems for buildings situated on campus developments must be monitored using either an appropriate energy monitoring and management system or another automated control system, e.g. outstations linked to a central computer, for monitoring energy consumption. The criteria only apply to the assessed building. Where energy services are supplied from an existing building on the campus, they shall be metered at the entry points to the assessed building, e.g. hot water, chilled water, gas and electricity. Provision of a pulsed output is not sufficient to award the credit for these building types.

CN9

Small office, industrial or retail units See criterion 3.

For a development consisting of a number of small units a single meter per unit is sufficient to achieve this credit. Individual areas within each unit do not need to be sub-metered. For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, a small unit is defined as < 200m2.

CN10

Large office, industrial or retail units See criterion 3

For a development consisting of one or more larger units (i.e. > 200m2), sufficient sub metering to allow for monitoring of the relevant function areas or departments within the unit must be specified, in addition to metering of the unit as a whole.

CN11

Healthcare buildings: medicalbased systems See criterion 3

Large-scale medical equipment/systems can be ignored when assessing compliance with this issue (although it is recommended that sub-metering is considered in such instances).

CN12

Single occupant buildings: relevant function areas/departments See criterion 3.

The lists below summarise the commonly found functions by building types. These lists are not exhaustive and where other areas/departments exist, these should also be separately metered.

CN13

Office buildings

1. Office areas (metering by floor plate) 2. Catering

CN14

Retail buildings

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

CN15

Industrial units

1. Office areas 2. Operational area 3. Ancillary areas (e.g. canteen etc)

CN16

Education buildings

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Sales area Storage and warehouse Cold storage Offices Catering Tenant units

Kitchens (excluding small staff kitchens and food technology rooms) Computer suites Workshops Lecture halls Conference rooms Drama studio

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

129

Energy

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15.

Swimming pool Sports hall Process areas Laboratories High containment suites within laboratories Controlled environment chambers Animal accommodation areas Data centres IT work and study rooms, including IT equipped library space and any space with provision of more than one computer terminal per 5m2. Individual sub-metering of standard classrooms/seminar rooms is not required. CN17

Hospitals and other healthcare facilities

1. Operating department 2. Imaging department 3. Radiotherapy department 4. Pathology department 5. Dialysis department 6. Medical physics 7. Mortuary and post-mortem department 8. Rehabilitation, when including hydrotherapy pools 9. Central sterile supplies department (or equivalent) 10. Process areas, e.g. commercial-scale kitchens and laundries 11. IT rooms 12. Pharmacy department 13. Laboratories 14. Tenancy areas (e.g. catering, retail, laundry) In small healthcare buildings ( 55 lamp lumens/circuit Watt and lighting switches off after the lift has been idle for a prescribed length of time. c. The lift uses a drive controller capable of variable-speed, variable-voltage, and variable-frequency (VVVF) control of the drive motor. 4. For escalators and/or moving walks, each escalator and/or moving walk complies with at least one of the following: a. It is fitted with a load sensing device that synchronises motor output to passenger demand through a variable speed drive; OR b. It is fitted with a passenger sensing device for automated operation (auto walk), so the escalator operates in standby mode when there is no passenger demand.

One Credit - Regenerative drives

5. Criterion 1 is achieved. 6. The lift system has a regenerative drive unit so that any energy generated by a traction lift (due to running up loaded to less than the counterbalancing ratio or running down loaded to more than the counter balancing ratio) or by a hydraulic lift (due to running down) is returned back to the electricity utility supplier or used elsewhere in the building.

148

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems

Energy

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Option 1 - Shell only: This issue is not applicable. Option 2 - Shell and core only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Energy Consumption (1 credit) 1. Criterion 1 Energy efficient features (1 credit) 2. Criteria 2 and 3 only. 3. Criteria 4 to 6 are not applicable.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

Scope of this issue

The criteria relating to lifts do not apply to lifting platforms, wheelchair stairlift/platform(s) or other similar facilities to aid persons with impaired mobility. However, any lifting device with a rated speed greater than 0.15m/s must be assessed inclusive of goods and vehicle, passenger lifts. A demonstration of compliance to the BREEAM criteria relating to the excluded transportation types would be considered best practice for an energy efficient system (despite not being required for the purpose of awarding the available credits).

CN5

Transport analysis

The transport analysis can be in the form of a written statement justifying the lift selection for the following conditions: where a single lift is provided in a low rise building for the purpose of DDA compliance/disabled access only; or where a goods lift is selected based on the size of the goods it is intended to carry.

CN6

Building has no lifts, escalators or moving walks

This issue will not be assessed where a building contains no lifts, escalators or moving walks.

General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

149

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN7

Regenerative drives See criterion 6.

This credit can only be awarded where the regenerative drive produces an energy saving greater than the additional stand-by energy used by regenerative drives. Regenerative drives will typically be appropriate for high travel and high intensity usage lifts.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1

Calculations for estimated energy consumption.

As per interim design stage

Additional Information Relevant definitions Counterbalancing ratio Traction lifts use a counterweight to balance the weight of the car plus a proportion of the rated load. This results in the drive motor being sized only to raise or lower approximately half the rated load. Lowering the counterbalancing ratio means a smaller motor and controlling drive unit are required, thus saving energy. Hydraulic lifts may use a balance weight to balance out a proportion of the weight of the car; this reduces the size of the drive motor required for the lift. Lift car lighting The level of lift car lighting is determined by the relevant standards. For example, BS EN81-1/2: 1998+A3: 2009 requires 50 lux on the car floor and any control surfaces MRL: Machine room-less lift All equipment is contained in the lift well, not in a separate machine room. Standby condition A condition when a lift is stationary at a floor and has reduced the power consumption to the minimum level set for that particular lift and terminates at the next traffic demand (from BS EN ISO 25745-1: 2012). The period between when the lift was last used and when standby condition is entered is defined in BS EN ISO 25745-1 as 5 minutes Idle condition A condition when a lift is stationary at a floor following a run before the standby mode is entered (from BS EN ISO 25745-1: 2012).

150

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems

Energy

Other information BS EN ISO 25745 - Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving walks ISO 25745 is planned to consist of three parts, under the general title Energy performance of lifts, escalators and moving walks: Part 1: Energy measurement and verification Part 2: Energy calculation and classification for lifts (Elevators) Part 3: Energy calculation and classification for escalators and moving walks. Part 1 was published in October 2012. A draft of Part 2, ISO/DIS 25745-2:2013-06, was published for review in July 2013. The review end date was in October 2013. Part 3 is under development. Parts 2 and 3 are expected to be published in 2014. It has been estimated that approximately 5% of a building’s total energy consumption can be attributed to the operation of lifts and a large proportion of this can be attributable to standby mode in many situations. ISO 25745 Parts 2 and 3 are being prepared in response to the rapidly increasing need to ensure and to support the efficient and effective use of energy, providing: 1. A method to estimate energy consumption on a daily and an annual basis for lifts. 2. A method for energy classification of new, existing or modernised lifts. 3. Guidelines for reducing energy consumption that can be used to support building environmental and energy classification systems.

Counterbalancing Lifts have a specified rated load and as such the counterbalancing ratio will be set accordingly (see Relevant definitions). Provided the type, number of lifts and the rated lift load specified is based on an appropriate analysis of the transportation/lift passenger demand and traction required for the building, then the counterbalancing ratio can be considered optimised for the purposes of compliance with BREEAM. Counterbalancing ratios are normally provided in the range of 40-50% for safety reasons. Any other values should be carefully considered. Reduced load balancing increases the maximum power and torque required to be delivered by the hoisting motor and so may increase the size of motor selected; although the average hoisting power and energy consumption will be reduced. A detailed engineering analysis of the rope traction, hoisting motor and its drive performance and electromechanical braking capacity under rated and reduced load conditions should be carried out, to ensure safe traction and braking capacity.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

151

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

No

Aim To recognise and encourage laboratory areas that are designed to be energy efficient and minimise the CO2 emissions associated with their operational energy consumption.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into three parts: Pre-requisite Design specification (1 credit) Best practice energy efficient measures (upto 4 credits) - building type dependent. The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Pre-Requisite

1. Criterion 1 within issue Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories (Risk Assessment) has been achieved.

One Credit - Design specification

2. Client engagement is sought through consultation during the preparation of the initial project brief (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) to determine occupant requirements and define laboratory performance criteria. Performance criteria should include, but not be limited to the following aspects: a. Description of purpose b. Occupant/process activities c. Containment requirements and standards d. Air change rate requirements e. Ventilation system performance and efficiencies f. Heating and cooling requirements g. Interaction between systems h. Flexibility/adaptability of laboratory facilities. 3. The design team demonstrates that the energy demand of the laboratory facilities has been minimised as a result of achieving the defined design performance criteria. This has informed the right-sizing (see Relevant definitions) of the services system equipment (including ventilation supply and extract).

Laboratory containment devices and containment areas (criteria only applicable to buildings containing these facilities) 4. Specification of fume cupboards and other containment devices has been carried out in compliance with criteria 2 and 3 of issue Hea 03 Indoor air quality - laboratories, as appropriate to the containment device specification. 5. Where ducted fume cupboards are specified: a. Compliance with item A) in Table - 26. b. The measurement of volume flow rate should be taken in the exhaust duct (at the boundary of the laboratory) to take account of reductions in (inward) volume flow rate from fume cupboard leakage. c. A reduction in air flow does not compromise the defined performance criteria and therefore does not increase the health and safety risk to future building occupants.

152

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems

Energy

Up to four credits - Best practice energy efficient measures The following criteria are applicable where the laboratory area accounts for at least 10% of the total building floor area (see Relevant definitions). 6. Criteria 1-5 are achieved (or criteria 1-4 where ducted fume cupboards are not specified). 7. Laboratory plant and systems are designed, specified and installed to promote energy efficiency, demonstrated through compliance with items B to L in Table - 26 (see (a) and (b) below for how credits are awarded). a. Up to 2 credits: The laboratory area (see Relevant definitions) accounts for at least 10% (but less than 25%) of the total building floor area; OR b. Up to 4 credits: The laboratory area accounts for 25% or more of the total building floor area. 8. To achieve credits for energy efficient measures, the chosen measure(s) must have a reasonably significant effect on the total energy consumption of the laboratory, i.e. 2% reduction or greater. This must be demonstrated by calculations or modelling. 9. The energy efficient measures specified do not compromise the defined performance criteria, and therefore do not increase the health and safety risk to future building occupants.

Checklists and tables Table - 26: Best Practice Energy Efficient Measures in Laboratories Item

Category

Item Description

Credits 1

A

Fume cupboard reduced volume flow rates

An average design air flow rate in the fume cupboards specified no greater than 0.16m3 /s per linear metre (internal width) of fume cupboard workspace.

1

Specification and achievement of best practice fan power figures (as shown below) for all air handling units, laboratory extract systems, local extract ventilation, containment area extracts (where applicable) and fume cupboard extracts (where applicable).

1

Additional Items B

Fan power

Laboratory System

Best practice specific fan power (W/L/s)

General laboratory supply air handling unit (AHU's) with heating and cooling

1.5

General laboratory extract systems

1.2

Laboratory local extract ventilation – ducted

1.0

Containment area extract, without HEPA filtration

1.5

Containment area extract, with HEPA filtration

2.5

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

153

Energy

Item

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Category

Item Description

Credits 1

Fume cupboard extract

1.5

C

Fume cupboard volume flow rates (further reduction)

An average design air flow rate of < 0.12m3 /s per linear metre (internal width) of fume cupboard workspace

0.5

D

Grouping and/or isolation of high filtration/ventilation activities

Minimisation of room air change rates and overall facility ventilation flows by grouping together or isolating activities and equipment with high filtration or ventilation requirements.

0.5

E

Energy recovery - heat

Heat recovery from exhaust air (where there is no risk of cross-contamination) or via refrigerant or water cooling systems.

0.5

F

Energy recovery – cooling

Cooling recovery via exhaust air heat exchangers (where there is no risk of crosscontamination) or via refrigerant or water cooling systems.

0.5

G

Grouping of cooling loads

Grouping of cooling loads to enable supply efficiencies and thermal transfer.

0.5

H

Free cooling

Specification of free cooling coils in chillers or dry air coolers related to laboratory-specific activities.

0.5

I

Load responsiveness

Effective matching of supply with demand through modularity, variable speed drives and pumps, and other mechanisms.

0.5

J

Clean rooms

Specification of particle monitoring systems, linked to airflow controls.

0.5

K

Diversity

Achievement of high levels of diversity in central plant sizing and laboratory duct sizing, where compatible with safety.

0.5

L

Room air changes rates

Reducing air change rates by matching ventilation airflows to environmental needs and demands of containment devices.

0.5

1. Only whole credits can be awarded in BREEAM. Therefore to achieve a credit for items C to L (above) the laboratory must comply with at least two of the items. In an instance where, for example, three and half credits are achieved this would need to be rounded down to three credits.

154

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems

Energy

Compliance Notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Scope of this BREEAM issue

This issue is applicable only to Further Education, Higher Education and Other Research and Development facilities that contain laboratory space and containment devices and/or areas. This issue is not applicable for School buildings (primary and secondary level). The laboratory criteria within issue Hea 03 Safe containment in laboratories and guidance within Building Bulletin 88 should be followed for assessing laboratories and containment devices in these building types. Where there are a large number of containment devices (such as fume cupboards) present in a School or Sixth Form assessment, BRE should be contacted for further guidance.

General CN4

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

155

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Additional Information Relevant definitions Laboratory Areas Laboratory areas are defined as highly serviced (temperature/ventilation/humidity/containment controlled) spaces where physical/biological or chemical processing and/or testing is carried out. Such areas will have an inherently high energy demands. In order to maintain controlled conditions to enable experiments and comply with health and safety standards, typically laboratories: 1. Contain various exhaust and containment devices (such as fume cupboards and microbiological safety cabinets) 2. Are heavily serviced to circulate air and to supply heating, cooling, humidity, and clean air 3. Often require 24-hour access and fail-safe redundant backup systems and uninterrupted power supply or emergency power to enable irreplaceable experiments. Therefore, for the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, the definition of laboratory areas excludes any laboratory support areas such as: 1. Write up/offices 2. Meeting rooms 3. Storage 4. Ancillary and other support areas with lower servicing requirements. Teaching and other laboratories/workshops with a limited amount of fume cupboards or other containment devices and/or no energy intensive process equipment specified are excluded, unless the design team can provide evidence that their consumption is at least 50% higher than a typical office due to the laboratory process related activities. Benchmarks for general offices can be found in Table 1 in CIBSE TM46 1 Energy Benchmarks.Typically, in buildings where 40% of the floor area is laboratory related, only 10% will actually constitute laboratory areas as per the BREEAM definition. Different types of laboratories have different requirements for HVAC, plug load equipment and access. This can lead to enormous variations in energy and water requirements.The main types of laboratories include: 1. Wet laboratories - where chemicals, drugs or other material or biological matter are tested and analysed requiring water, direct ventilation and specialised piped utilities. Typically includes chemical science laboratories. These laboratories require specially designed facilities. 2. Dry laboratories - contain dry stored materials, electronics, and/or large instruments with few piped services. Typically includes engineering or analytical laboratories that may require accurate temperature and humidity control, dust control, and clean power. 3. Microbiological/clinical laboratories - often involve working with infectious agents. Typically require higher levels of primary containment and multiple secondary barriers including specialized ventilation systems to ensure directional air flow, air treatment systems to decontaminate or remove agents from exhaust air, controlled access zones, airlocks as laboratory entrances, or separate buildings or modules to isolate the laboratory. 4. In vivo laboratories - these require highly controlled environments for the care and maintenance of flora and fauna. The facilities are complex, and expensive to build and to operate. Tight environmental control over the facility is required to avoid the introduction of contaminants or pathogens, and prevent the possibility of infectious outbreaks, and avoid the transmission of odours. 5. Teaching laboratories - unique to academic institutes, they require space for teaching equipment, storage space for student belongings and less instrumentation than research labs. 6. Clean rooms - refers to a controlled environment (air quality, temperature and humidity) which prevent contamination and the regulating of environmental conditions, to facilitate accurate research and production needs. Typically used in UK universities for Nanotechnology, medical and pharmaceutical research/studies and microelectronics applications. Right-Sizing Right-sizing principles encourage the use of better estimates in equipment loads from which services equipment is sized in comparison to traditional methods of estimates based on ‘rated’ data obtained from manufacturers’ literature or design assumptions from previous projects. This can result in construction cost savings in addition to life cycle cost benefits, whilst taking account for the need for appropriate contingency.

156

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems

Energy

Other information Synergy with BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions This BREEAM issue has been developed to recognise improvements made to new laboratory areas/buildings that are not currently fully recognised in the National Calculation Methodology, used to assess and award credits in Ene01 Reduction of CO Emissions. 2 1TM46 Energy Benchmarks. CIBSE, 2008.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

157

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment Number of credits available

Minimum standards

2

No

Aim To recognise and encourage procurement of energy-efficient equipment to ensure optimum performance and energy savings in operation.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance.

Two credits

1. Identify the building's unregulated energy consuming loads and, for each estimate or model, its contribution to the total unregulated energy consumption of the building, assuming a typical/standard specification. 2. Identify the systems and/or processes that have a major impact on the total unregulated energy demand of the development and its operation and demonstrate, through either good practice design or specification, a meaningful reduction in the total unregulated energy demand of the building.

Table - 27 contains solutions deemed to satisfy compliance for common examples of significant contributors to unregulated energy demand for a number of different building types/functions.

Checklists and tables Table - 27: Examples of solutions deemed to comply with the criteria for the reduction of unregulated energy load from significantly contributing systems. Ref

Function/equipment

Criteria

A

Small power, plug in equipment

The following equipment has been awarded an Energy Star 1 rating OR has been procured in accordance with the Government Buying Standards2 1. Office equipment 2. Other small powered equipment 3. Supplementary electric heating. For domestic scale white goods, the criteria in Ref F Residential areas apply.

B

Swimming pool

158

1. Where automatic or semi-automatic pool covers, or ‘liquid’ pool covers with an automatic dosing system, are fitted to ALL pools, including spa pools and Jacuzzis (if relevant). 2. The covers envelop the entire pool surface when fully extended. 3. Where the air temperature in the pool hall can be controlled so that it is 1 °C above the water temperature.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment

Energy

Ref

Function/equipment

Criteria

C

Communal laundry facilities with commercial sized appliances

At least one of the following can be demonstrated for commercial sized appliances: 1. Specification of heat recovery from waste water 2. Use of water sourced from a rain water collection tank(s).

D

Data centres

1. Design is in accordance with the ‘Best practices for the EU Code of Conduct on Data Centres’3 principles with the data centre achieving at least the ‘Expected minimum practice’ level (as defined in the Code of Conduct). 2. Temperature set points are not less than 24°C, as measured at the inlet of the equipment in the rack.

E

IT-intensive operating areas

1. Uses a natural ventilation and cooling strategy as standard, with forced ventilation only to be used when the internal temperature exceeds 20 o C and active cooling only when the internal temperature exceeds 22 o C. 2. There is a mechanism to achieve automatic power-down of equipment when not in use, including overnight.

F

Residential areas with domestic scale appliances (individual and communal facilities)

G

Healthcare

H

Kitchen and catering facilities

Domestic scale appliances have the following ratings (or better) under the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme, where provided: 1. Fridges, fridge freezers: A+ rating 2. Washing machines: A++ rating 3. Dishwashers: A+ rating 4. Washer-dryers and tumble dryers: A rating. OR 5. If any of the appliances will be purchased during occupation by the tenant/owner, information on the EU Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme of efficient white goods must be provided to the residential areas of the building. Note: 1. Any white goods available to purchase from the developer must be compliant with criteria F1 to F4 above. 2. If criterion F5 were chosen to demonstrate compliance, only one of the two available credits could be awarded. The procurement of large scale equipment (where present, see compliance note CN3) and sets of electrical equipment (where numbering more than 50) has been informed and selected by life cycle costing analysis for at least two options in accordance with HTM07-02, Chapter 3.0 4 The project has incorporated all of the energy efficiency measures (except as specified) outlined in each of the following sections of CIBSE Guide TM50 5 : 1. Section 8 (Drainage and kitchen waste removal) 2. Section 9 (Energy controls - specifically controls relevant to appliances) 3. Section 11 (Appliance specification - not fabrication or utensil specifications) 4. Section 12 (Refrigeration) 5. Section 13 (Warewashing: dishwashers and glasswashers) 6. Section 14 (Cooking appliance selection) 7. Section 15 (Water temperatures, taps, faucets and water saving controls). Refrigeration for kitchen and catering facilities should be assessed here, not in Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storage.

Energy efficient white goods scheme and equivalent rating scheme (Category reference F)

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

159

Energy

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Function/equipment

Criteria

Energy rating certifications other than the EU labelling scheme will be accepted, providing the energy efficiency performance is equivalent to the EU labelling scheme. This can be any internationally recognised energy efficiency labelling scheme for white goods or a national scheme developed for use in the country of assessment, for example Energy Label (in EU), Energy Star (in USA), The Appliance Energy Rating Scheme (in Australia), etc. A statement confirming that the scheme is nationally recognised and can be regarded as equivalent to the EU labelling scheme is required for use. Large-scale equipment in healthcare (Category reference G) This includes commercial-scale catering and laundry equipment, and all other equipment with connected electrical loads in excess of 10kW rated input power. All medical equipment can be exempted from complying with the criteria.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

1. Criteria 1 and 2 apply excluding ‘Ref B Swimming pool’ from Table - 27 which is not applicable.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

Refrigeration equipment

The criteria in ‘Ref A Small power, plug in equipment’ inChecklists and tables apply to the following refrigeration equipment (where present): 1. Air cooled condensing units 2. Cellar cooling 3. Commercial service cabinets 4. Curtains/blinds for refrigerated display cabinets 5. Refrigeration compressors 6. Refrigeration system controls 7. Refrigerated display cabinets.

CN5

A meaningful reduction in unregulated energy demand

BREEAM does not specify a level or percentage that defines a meaningful reduction in unregulated energy demand. The project team must justify how they have determined or judged a meaningful reduction from the unregulated energy demand and the assessor must be satisfied that this is an appropriate justification.

General

160

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 08 Energy efficient equipment

Energy

Ref

Terms

Description

CN6

Cold storage

The criteria do apply to commercial kitchen refrigeration but not to other commercial or industrial sized refrigeration and storage systems. These systems are covered within the scope of Ene 05 Energy efficient cold storageBREEAM Ene 05 and should be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.

CN7

Lifts, escalators and moving walks

This issue does not apply to lifts, escalators and moving walkways. These systems are covered within the scope of Ene 06 Energy efficient transportation systems and should be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.

CN8

Laboratory systems

This issue does not apply to laboratory ducted fume cupboards. These systems are covered within the scope of Ene 07 Energy efficient laboratory systems and should be removed from the list of unregulated loads with respect to this issue.

CN9

Reuse of equipment

Reuse of electrical equipment does not comply by default, as it may not be the most energy efficient option. However, the credit could be awarded if either of the following criteria are demonstrated: 1. The existing electrical appliances meet the criteria for inclusion on the Enhanced Capital Allowance Scheme Energy Technology Product List 1. 2. Reusing the old equipment would, over the course of its life, be a more energy-efficient option than specifying new equipment.

Building specific CN10

Large-scale equipment in Healthcare See criterion 1 and Ref G

This includes commercial-scale catering and laundry equipment and all other equipment with connected electrical loads in excess of 10kW rated input power, including equipment used for medical purposes.

Methodology None

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1Enhanced Capital Allowance scheme, http://www.eca.gov.uk

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

161

Energy

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Additional information Relevant definitions Data centre For the purpose of this BREEAM issue, the term ‘data centres’ includes all buildings, facilities and rooms which contain enterprise servers, server communication equipment, cooling equipment and power equipment, and may provide some form of data service (e.g. large scale mission critical facilities all the way down to small server rooms located in office buildings). Government’s Buying Standards A website listing minimum and best practice standards for equipment being procured forprojects. IT-intensive areas These include computer areas where more than 1 PC per 5m2 is provided, e.g. training suites, design studios, libraries’ IT areas and other areas with a high density of computing devices. Office equipment Computer monitors, desktop computers, scanners, photocopiers, printers, workstations etc. Regulated energy Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions. Unregulated energy Building energy consumption resulting from a system or process that is not ‘controlled’, i.e. energy consumption from systems in the building on which the Building Regulations do not impose a requirement. This may include energy consumption from operational related equipment, e.g. computers, servers, printers, laptops, mobile fume cupboards, cooking, audio-visual equipment and other appliances etc. Unlike the definition for Ene 01 Reduction of emissions, for this issue, it does not include energy consumption from systems integral to the building and its operation, e.g. commercial/industrial refrigeration systems; lifts, escalators and other transportation systems; and ducted fume cupboards; because they are already assessed separately in issues Ene 05, Ene 06 and Ene 07 respectively. White goods and small power equipment Domestic appliances for example washing machines, fridges,freezers, fridge-freezers, tumble dryers, washer dryers, air-movement fans/heaters, etc.

Other information None 1Energy Star labelling scheme, http://www.energystar.gov/index.cfm?c=products.pr_find_es_products or http://www.eu-

energystar.org/en/index.html 2Government Buying Standards, http://sd.defra.gov.uk/advice/public/buying/ 3EU Code of Conduct on Data Centres: http://iet.jrc.ec.europa.eu/energyefficiency/sites/energyefficiency/files/best_ practices_v4_0_5-r1.pdf 4HTM 07-02: EnCO de, Making energy work in Healthcare, Department of Health, 2005. 2 5CIBSE TM50: Energy Efficiency in Commercial Kitchens, CIBSE

162

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 09 Drying space

Energy

Ene 09 Drying space Number of credits available

Minimum standards

1

No

Aim To provide a reduced energy means of drying clothes.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit

1. For self-contained dwellings: An adequate internal or external space with posts and footings, or fixings capable of holding: a. One to two bedrooms: 4m+ of drying line b. Three or more bedrooms: 6m+ of drying line.

AND/OR 2. Individual bedrooms: An adequate internal or external space with posts and footings, or fixings capable of holding: a. Two metres or more of drying line per bedroom for developments with up to 30 individual bedrooms; plus b. One metre of additional drying line for each bedroom over the 30 individual bedroom threshold. AND 3. The space (internal or external) is secure.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

163

Energy

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

Multi-residential developments with CSH assessed dwellings See criterion 1.

For buildings with self-contained dwellings also being assessed under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH), the following applies: Where CSH issue Ene 4 has been achieved for all dwellings assessed under the CSH, the requirements for self-contained dwellings under this issue are also met. If this is the case, the credit under this issue can be achieved provided any self contained dwellings not assessed under the CSH orr individual bedrooms in the building meet the compliance requirements for this issue.

CN5

Adequate internal space See criteria 1 and 2.

This is either: A heated space with adequate, controlled ventilation, complying with the national building regulations relevant to the location of the building (rooms that commonly meet these requirements are a bathroom or utility room); or An unheated outbuilding, where calculations by an appropriate Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineer (CIBSE or equivalent professional) demonstrate that ventilation in the space is adequate to allow drying in normal climatic conditions and to prevent condensation/mould growth. The fixing or fitting needs to be a permanent feature of the room. Internal drying spaces in the following rooms do not comply: 1. Living rooms 2. Kitchens 3. Dining rooms 4. Main halls 5. Bedrooms

CN6

Building has no residential areas.

Please note that where a building contains no residential function this issue is not applicable and will not require assessment.

CN7

Supported living facilities

This issue does not apply to multi-residential assessments of supported living facilities (for safety reasons, to minimise ligature risk to particular residents).

General

Methodology None

164

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Ene 09 Drying space

Energy

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Secure space For self-contained dwellings this can be defined as an enclosed space only accessible to the residents of the dwelling. For buildings with a communal drying space it is an enclosed space with a secure entrance, accessible to the residents of the building only.

Other information Ventilation - Building regulations The following lists the building regulations relevant for the assessment of this issue specific to the country of the UK. Wales - Approved Document F Ventilation 2010 (England and Wales) Scotland - Technical Handbook 2013 - Domestic Section 3 Environment Northern Ireland - Technical Booklet K: 2012 - Ventilation England - Approved Document F Ventilation 2010 (incorporating further amendments in 2013) (England and Wales)

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

165

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Transport

166

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Tra 01 Public transport accessibility

Transport

Tra 01 Public transport accessibility Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

No

Aim To recognise and encourage development in proximity of good public transport networks, thereby helping to reduce transport-related pollution and congestion.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Accessibility Index (up to 5 credits - building type dependent) Dedicated bus service (1 credit) The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Up to five credits - Accessibility Index

1. The public transport Accessibility Index (AI) for the assessed building is calculated and BREEAM credits awarded in accordance with the table of building types, AI benchmarks and BREEAM credits seeTable - 28 in the checklists and tables section. 2. The Accessibility Index is determined by entering the following information in to the BREEAM Tra 01 calculator: a. The distance (m) from the main building entrance to each compliant public transport node b. The public transport type(s) serving the compliant node e.g. bus or rail c. The average number of services stopping per hour at each compliant node during the operating hours of the building for a typical day (see compliance notes and in the Additional Information section).

OR One credit - Dedicated bus service

3. For buildings with a fixed shift pattern, i.e. where building users will predominantly arrive/depart at set times, one credit can be awarded where the building occupier provides, or commits to providing a dedicated bus service to and from the building at the beginning and end of each shift/day.

This credit is only available in cases where a development is unable to achieve any of the available credits using the Accessibility Index criteria (i.e. its location has a low public transport Accessibility Index).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

167

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Checklists and tables Table - 28: Credits available for each building type relating to the public transport Accessibility Index (AI) score. Accessibility Index

≥2

≥4

≥8

≥ 10

≥ 12

≥ 18

Building type

BREEAM credits available

Offices, Industrial, Multi-residential, Other building type 1

1

2

3

-

-

-

Pre-school, School, Sixth Form

1

2

3

-

-

-

Retail, Law Court, Further Education College, Higher Education type 1, Other building type 2

1

2

3

3

4

5

Higher Education type 2

1

2

3

4

5

-

Healthcare - Hospitals (Acute, Specialist, Teaching, Mental health)

1

2

3

3

4

5

Healthcare - GP surgery, Health centre, Community hospital

1

2

3

4

5

-

Rural location sensitive buildings. Other building type 3

1

2

-

-

-

-

Prison site, MOD site

1

2

-

-

-

-

Transport hub

1

2

3

3

3

4

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply

Simple buildings CN2

168

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Tra 01 Public transport accessibility

Ref

Terms

Transport

Description

Country specific Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

General CN3

Campus developments, see criterion 1

Where 80% or more of the buildings on a campus-style development, e.g. further or higher education sites, are within 1000m of the campus' main entrance, then the campuses main entrance can be used as the reference point for the assessment of distance to compliant public transport nodes for this issue. The campus’ main entrance is that which is accessed by the majority of the assessed building’s staff/students/visitors. A site may have more than one main entrance which between them account for the majority of staff, students and visitors that access the site. In such a case either entrance can be used as the basis for the calculation. Where less than 80% of the buildings on the campus development are within 1000m of the campus’ main entrance, the assessed building’s main entrance must be used as the reference point for the assessment of distance to compliant public transport node for this issue. This rule implies that for large campus developments, when distances are too great to be comfortably covered by walking, the needs of the building users would be served better by locating the public transport nodes inside or on the periphery of the campus. Where the building is not part of a centralised campus then its main entrance must be used as the reference point for the assessment of this issue.

CN4

Dedicated bus services, see criterion 3

The credit for the provision of a dedicated bus service is available for any building type with a fixed shift pattern; examples could include schools, offices, retail, factories, prisons etc. The bus must provide transfer to the local population centre, public transport interchange or be a door-to-door service. The credit is provided as an alternative, where the AI of the building is too low to achieve any BREEAM credits, but where the building users will have the option of a dedicated bus service. However, a dedicated bus service can be included in the public transport Accessibility Index calculation as a means of contributing towards achieving credits via this method (regardless of the shift pattern). Where this is the case, the distance from the main building entrance to the drop-off/pick-up point (the transport node) of the service should be used.

CN5

Phased developments, see criterion 3

In the case of a large phased development where new transport facilities will be provided, but at a later stage than the building being assessed, the assessment can consider such facilities provided that: A commitment has been made to provide transport facilities within the shortest of the following periods, this is demonstrated either within the General Contract Specification or in the form of a Section 106 Agreement:

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

169

Transport

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description 1. The transport facilities will be available for use by the time 25% of all phases have been completed and are ready for occupation. OR 2. The transport facilities will be available for use within 25% of the total build time for the phase in which the assessed building forms a part, measured from the completion date of that phase. The most appropriate rule for the development in question must be used, ensuring that the time building users have to wait before having use of the transport facilities is as short as possible. Where the transport facilities will not be available for use within a period of five years from occupation of the building, they cannot be considered for determining compliance with the BREEAM criteria.

Methodology The methodology for calculating the Accessibility Index uses Transport for London’s Public Transport Accessibility Level (PTAL) method, itself based on a methodology developed in 1992 by the London Borough of Hammersmith and Fulham. For a detailed description of the PTAL methodology and how it works refer to appendix B of Transport Assessment Best Practice; Guidance Document:http://www.tfl.gov.uk/assets/downloads/businessandpartners/transport-assessment-best-practiceguidance.pdf

Calculating the average number of services For the purpose of the calculation, the frequency of public transport is the average number of services per hour. This is calculated by determining the number of stopping services at the node during the peak arrival/departure times for the building or the building's typical day’s operating hours (see definition 'operating hours'), divided by the number of hours within that period. For example: the average number of services for an assessment of a building that operates between 08:00 19:00 hrs (11 hours) and is within proximity of a bus stop with 35 stopping services during this period is 3.2 (equivalent to an average service frequency of approximately 20 minutes).

Multiple services Services that operate from more than one node within proximity of the building, i.e. two separate bus stops served by the same bus, must be considered only once - at the node in closest proximity to the building. Different services at the same node can be considered as separate.

Bi-directional routes Routes will be bi-directional; however for the purpose of calculating the index, consider only the direction with the highest frequency (in accordance with the PTAL methodology).

Buildings in Greater London Transport for London hosts a Planning Information Database that allows users to search for a specific London location by street name, co-ordinates or postcode and then calculate the Accessibility Index (AI) for that location. The Total AI is confirmed for the Point of Interest (POI) within the summary seport, which can be downloaded and used as evidence of compliance for the assessed building. Go to:www.webptals.org.uk

170

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Tra 01 Public transport accessibility

Transport

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

1-3

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1-2

A completed copy of the Tra01 calculator

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Accessibility Index A measure that provides an indicator of the accessibility and density of the public transport network at a point of interest (in the case of BREEAM, a building). The index is influenced by the proximity and diversity of the public transport network and the level or frequency of service at the accessible node. For example, a building that has a single public transport node 500m from its main building entrance with one service stopping every 15 minutes, i.e. four services per hour on average, will score an AI of approximately 1.90. Alternatively, the same node with one service every 15 minutes, but 300m from the building entrance will achieve an AI of 2.26. The same node with two services stopping every 15 minutes will score an AI of 2.85. The greater the number of compliant nodes, services and their proximity to the building, the higher the AI. Additional building type classifications Tra 03 Cyclist facilities Higher Education type 1: H.E buildings located on a campus where less than 25% of students are resident on the campus or within 1km radius from the campus’ main entrance. Higher Education type 2: H.E buildings located on a campus where 25% or more of the students are resident on the campus or within 1km radius from the campus’ main entrance. Other Building - type 1: A building predominantly occupied by staff/employees with occasional business related visitors. Other Building - type 2: A building occupied by a number of core staff/employees with a larger number of consistently frequent visitors/users (either resident or non-resident). Other Building - type 3: As type 2, but building types specifically required to be located rurally as a result of its function, i.e. a building which would never be located within an urban area, e.g. a National Park visitor centre (see definition of rural and rural location sensitive buildings location). Compliant transport node A compliant node includes any bus service with a stop within 650m and any railway station within 1000m of the assessed building’s main entrance, measured via a safe pedestrian route (not ‘as the crow flies’). The service stopping at each node must provide transport from, or onward travel to, either an urban centre, major transport node or a community focal point e.g. doctor’s surgery, library, school or village centre. Only local services should be assessed and any national public transport services should be excluded from the analysis, unless such a service can be said to provide a local commuter service. Prison and M.O.D sites:The distance requirement for a compliant node for buildings on these sites is 1000m for both bus and rail. Main building entrance The main building entrance is the entrance to the assessed building which is directly connected to the main building reception, circulation routes, lifts/stairs and is available to the majority of the building’s staff and visitors on arrival, it is

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

171

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

not the site entrance (unless the site entrance is also the building entrance e.g. building with a boundary on a public highway). For prison/MOD site assessments, the main entrance should be taken as the gatehouse entrance. Operating hours BREEAM seeks to define the building’s accessibility to the public transport network for the period during which the majority of building users will travel to and from the building. In most cases the normal operating hours of the building can be used. Where shift patterns see the majority of building users (over 80%) arriving or leaving during a certain period, for example an office building where the majority of office workers arrive between 8-10am, then that period can be used as an alternative to the operating hours of the building. This accounts for some building types that operate a 24 hour day and on a shift work basis. During what typically would be deemed unsociable hours, and therefore periods where there is little if any public transport operating, such periods are not required to be accounted for in the assessment of this issue. Where the assessed building operates on a 24-hour basis or the operating hours are unknown at the time of assessment, then refer to and use the table of default operating hours, which can be found in the additional information section of this issue. BREEAM Tra 01 calculator tool A spreadsheet-based calculator used to determine the Accessibility Index for the assessed building and the number of BREEAM credits achieved. Rural location A rural location is defined in this context as a site clearly not within or on the boundary of a small, medium or large urban cover. An urban cover will have a population of 3000 people or more, located within a tract of continuously built-up urban land extending 20 hectares or more. Therefore, the definition of rural includes village locations, green field sites or small urban centres with a population of less 3000 people within a tract of land no greater than 20 hectares. Such locations will most likely be on a local bus route to larger urban areas or other local towns and may have local shops and other facilities. This classification is based on the Department of Transport National Travel Survey definition, which specifies urban areas based on the extent of urban development indicated on Ordnance Survey maps Rural location sensitive buildings This definition includes any of the building types (listed below) where there is a demonstrable social or economic need from a rural population for the service/demand, which the new building is intended to meet; and therefore locating the building at an alternative site which could have higher public transport accessibility levels, i.e. within an urbanised area, is unfeasible. The following building types are examples of those that may fall into this category. 1. Offices where providing services to the local community 2. Industrial where providing services to the local community 3. Retail where providing services to the local community 4. Pre-school, primary and secondary school 5. GP surgery Typical day The typical day is that which represents the period when travel to and from the building by its users and visitors will be at its highest. For most buildings this should be taken as a mid-week day. In choosing a typical day the assessor should check that timetabled information for that day is, within reason, representative of the public transport provision for the entire operating week (excluding Sundays).

Other information Table 1.2- 1:Default hours of operation by building type for a typical day Building type

Default hours

Commercial

8.00am - 7.00pm

172

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Tra 01 Public transport accessibility

Transport

Building type

Default hours

Pre-school, school, sixth form college

7.30am -10.00am,3.00pm - 5.30pm

Further & Higher Education

8.00am - 7.00pm

Healthcare

7.00am - 8.00pm (encompassing visiting hours and the typical daytime shift pattern)

Retail: Shopping centre

9.00am - 7.00pm

Retail: Supermarket

8.00am - 10.00pm

Retail: Service provider

8.00am - 6.00pm

Retail: Convenience store

7.00am - 10.00pm

Retail: DIY/retail park

8.00am - 8.00pm

Retail: shop

8.30am - 5.30pm

Multi-residential accommodation

8.00am - 7.00pm

Court

8.00am - 7.00pm

Prison

7am - 8pm (encompassing visiting hours and the typical daytime shift pattern)

Other Buildings

8.00am - 7.00pm Or use any of the above hours, as appropriate to the building type.

24 hour use building

7am - 8pm

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

173

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Tra 02 Proximity to amenities Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

No

Aim To encourage and reward a building location that facilitates easy access to local services and so reduces the environmental, social and economic impacts resulting from multiple or extended building user journeys, including transport related emissions and traffic congestion.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Up to two credits - Proximity to local amenities

1. Where the building is located within close proximity of, and accessible to, local amenities which are likely to be frequently required and used by building occupants, as outlined in Table - 29

Checklists and tables Table - 29: Credits available for Tra02 for different building types Building types Criteria

Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

Type 4

No. of BREEAM credits

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

No. of amenities

4

4

5

4

4

7

4

500

500

500

500

500

1000

500

Proximity (metres)

Type 5

Type 6

Core amenities (3 out of the following 4 core amenities must be accessible and within proximity of the building) Appropriate food outlet

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

Access to cash

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

Access to an outdoor open space (public or private, provided suitably sized and accessible to building users)

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

174

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Tra 02 Proximity to amenities

Transport

Building types Criteria

Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

Type 4

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

Publicly available postal facility

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

Community space

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

Over-the-counter services associated with a pharmacy

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

Access to a recreation/leisure facility for fitness/sports

Type 5

Type 6

Additional amenities

A public sector GP surgery or general medical centre Child care or school

ü

ü

Type 1: Offices, Retail, Industrial, Courts Type 2: Pre-school, Schools, Sixth Form Type 3: Higher Education and Further Education Type 4: Healthcare Type 5: Multi-residential (there are two credits available and each can be awarded independently of the other). Type 6: Other Building types This issue is not applicable to prison buildings/developments.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

175

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

guidance

building type and function apply.

CN4

Collective amenities

One type of amenity may also exist within or as part of other types of amenities, e.g. a grocery store in a petrol station, cash point or pharmacy in a supermarket etc. It is not a requirement of this issue that each amenity is ‘stand alone’.

CN5

Amenities within assessed building or on site

An amenity within the building or on the same site as the proposed development, e.g. where the assessed building is part of a campus, retail or business park/centre, complies with the assessment criteria.

CN6

Phased developments

The guidance provided in BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility, concerning phased developments, also applies to this issue.

Ref

General

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

1

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1

Evidence showing: 1. Location of assessed building 2. Location and type of amenities 3. The route to the amenities 4. Plan/map scale OR Where the amenities do not currently exist but are due to be developed a letter from the client/developer confirming: a. The location and type of amenities to be provided b. The timescale for development of the amenities.

176

Final post-construction stage

As per interim design stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Tra 02 Proximity to amenities

Transport

Additional information Relevant definitions Accessible amenities Amenities (as listed) that are within the required proximity (distance in metres) of the building and accessible via safe pedestrian routes, e.g. pavements/paths and safe crossing points or, where provided, dedicated pedestrian crossing points. The distance should not be measured in a straight line, ‘as the crow flies’. Appropriate food outlet A means of accessing a food supply that is affordable to the majority of the buildings users as well as being appropriate for their day-to-day needs. For example, a small office building would benefit from having a small shop selling sandwiches or snacks or a multi-residential building would benefit from having a restaurant in the local area. Community space An internal space that is inclusive to the majority of building users who will occupy the assessed building/development. The space will serve to facilitate community activities applicable to the assessed building type,for example for a multi-residential building a community centre or village hall.

Other information None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

177

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Tra 03 Cyclist facilities Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

No

Aim To encourage building users to cycle, so promoting exercise and helping reduce congestion and emissions, by ensuring adequate provision of cyclist facilities,

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit - Cycle storage (excluding sheltered housing, care homes, supported living facilities and prison building types) 1. Compliant cycle storage spaces that meet the minimum levels set out in Table - 30 (see checklists and tables) are installed.

One credit - Cyclist facilities (excluding sheltered housing, care homes and supported living facilities, Student residents, key accommodation, transport hub and MOD residential and prison building types)

2. Criterion 1 has been achieved. 3. At least two of the following types of compliant cyclist facilities have been provided (see compliance notes for the scope of compliant cyclist facilities): a. Showers b. Changing facilities c. Lockers d. Drying spaces

One credit - Cycle storage and cyclist facilities (sheltered housing, care homes and supported living facilities and prison building types only) 4. Where criteria 1 to 3 have been met for cycle space and cycle facilities requirements.

Checklists and tables Table - 30: Cycle space criteria for each building type Building type

No. spaces per unit of measure

Unit of measure

Notes

Commercial Offices, Industrial

1

10 staff

178

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Tra 03 Cyclist facilities

Transport

Retail Large Retail

1

10 staff

1

20 public car parking spaces

10

Total

Pre-school or creche

1

10 staff

Primary School

5

Per form or class in year group

Secondary schools and sixth form, Further and Higher Education (FE and HE)

1

10 staff & pupils/students total

1

10 staff

1

2 consulting rooms OR 10 beds

1

10 staff

Small retail

The number of staff should be the maximum number using the building at any time/shift. The staff spaces must be provided in addition to customer spaces. Whilst they do not need to be separate from customer spaces, this is encouraged. This is subject to providing a minimum of 10 cycle customer spaces. Any retail development that provides at least 50 customer cycle storage spaces will comply regardless of the number of parking spaces.

The spaces must be publicly accessible within proximity of a main building entrance. Compliant cyclist facilities are intended for staff only i.e. it is not a requirement of compliance to provide facilities for customers.

Education

For example: where a primary school has been designed to accommodate three classes per year, a total of 15 compliant cycle storage spaces are provided for the whole school. Where there are varying numbers of forms/classes per year, the calculation must be based on the year with the greatest number of classes/forms FE/HE: student numbers must account for both under and post graduates, as well as PhD students and PostDoctorates.

Healthcare All healthcare building types

Unit of measure: use the measure which is the largest for the building type e.g. if hospital then use beds, if GP surgery then use consulting rooms. The requirement for consulting rooms/beds is subject to a minimum of four compliant cycle storage spaces being provided.

Courts and Prisons Prison establishment located building

Only one credit available with the provision of two cyclist facilities.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

179

Transport

Law Court

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

1

10 building occupants (staff and visitors)

1

10 staff

1

2 residents

1

10 staff

Multi-residential Student residences, key worker accommodation

Sheltered housing, Care homes, Supported living facility

1 Compliant wheelchair or electric buggy storage spaces

10 residents*

The requirement is subject to a minimum of one compliant space being provided.

* Or spaces specified in accordance with the number required as identified by the likely resident profile. Where the resident profile is not the elderly or physically disabled or impaired then, where appropriate, the requirement for wheelchair or electric buggy spaces should be changed to compliant cycle spaces

Other buildings Transport type 1* Transport type 2*

Use the criteria defined for office buildings. 1 1

Transport type 3*

1

1

10 staff 10 visitors or beds 20 staff

A single credit can be awarded where spaces for staff only are provided as well as the appropriate compliant cyclist facilities. The Compliance note allowing a reduction to the cyclist provision in rural locations has been accounted for in the unit of measure for this transport type. It should not therefore be applied again.

1

20 building visitors/ beds

Transport hubs

1

10 public users

Apply the sliding scale (as per compliance note) to a maximum of 5000 daily public users. Public users refer to regular peak time users of the service who start and/or finish their public transport journey at the assessed building.

MOD nonresidential

1

10 living-out personnel

These criteria apply to MOD buildings where the majority of personnel live off-site.

MOD residential

1

2 residents

180

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Tra 03 Cyclist facilities

Transport

Note : Where the number of building users (based upon the unit of measure) exceeds 200 the sliding scale of compliance can be used to identify the appropriate number of cycle spaces required (see Methodology section).

* See definitions in the BREEAM issueTra 01 Public transport accessibilityfor classification of transport type 1, 2 and 3.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Where the credits are being sought the compliant number of cycle storage spaces must be provided as part of the base build. Compliant cyclist facilities (showers, changing areas etc.) can be provided in shell and core areas of the building as part of the base build.Alternatively, compliance can be demonstrated where the shell and core building is designed to facilitate future installation of the compliant number and type of cyclist facilities by the tenant/owner-occupier through the provision of an appropriately sized and dedicated space in the base building, including either the installation of the appropriate services (for showers) or infrastructure to allow the future installation of the relevant services e.g. capped water supply, service /ventilation ducts, drainage etc. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

CN3

Use of local compliant cycle storage

For all buildings which form part of a larger site / development, use of existing local BREEAM compliant cycle storage space is acceptable.

CN4

Compliant cyclist facilities and noncompliant local storage spaces

Where the assessed building has compliant cyclist facilities, plus access to some local cycle storage spaces that are not BREEAM compliant, one credit can still be awarded.

CN5

Compliant cycle spaces but no cyclist facilities

Where the assessed building meets the minimum number of compliant cycle spaces required for two credits, but does not have or meet the minimum provision for compliant cyclist facilities, then one credit can be awarded.

Country specific CN6

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

181

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

CN7

Existing/new site wide facilities

For assessments of new infill buildings on an existing site where there exist shared compliant facilities, or where the new building will form a part of a larger development (e.g. campus, retail or business park), the required number of facilities can be determined on a development-wide basis. The number of compliant facilities must be large enough to cater for the building occupants of the assessed building, in addition to the occupants of any existing or other new buildings that will share those facilities.

CN8

Building locations with a high level of public transport accessibility

For sites where at least 50% of the available BREEAM credits for Public transport accessibility (Tra 01) have been awarded (rounded to the nearest whole credit), the number of compliant cycle spaces required in Table - 30 can be reduced by 50%. This reduction will also reduce the requirement for compliant shower/lockers by the same margin for most building types by default, since the calculation is based on the number of cycle storage spaces. Building types where the number of required showers/lockers is not based on cycle storage provision can reduce the actual requirement for compliant showers/lockers by 50%.

CN9

Rural locations

For sites in rural locations the following can be applied; 1. Where the distance to the nearest urban location is greater than 10 miles, the number of compliant cycle spaces can be reduced by 50%. 2. Where the distance to the nearest urban location is greater than 20 miles, the number of compliant cycle spaces can be reduced by 70%. 3. Where the distance to the nearest urban location is greater than 30 miles, the number of compliant cycle spaces can be reduced by 90%. This reduction will also reduce the requirement for compliant shower/lockers by the same margin for most building types by default, since the calculation is based on the number of cycle storage spaces. Building types where the number of required showers/lockers is not based on cycle storage provision can reduce the actual requirement for compliant showers/lockers by 50%, 70% or 90% as appropriate. A percentage reduction in this context cannot be applied in addition to the 50% reduction due to the building's Public Transport Accessibility level (as described in the Compliance note above). The definition of a rural location (and urban location) can be found in the BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility – Additional information.

CN10

Number of building occupants unknown

If it is not possible to confirm the number of building occupants commuting to the development, e.g. speculative developments, then the default occupancy rates given in the table in Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity – Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity can be used to determine a default number of users. Alternatively, the number of building occupants in an existing development of similar type and size can be used (the assessor needs to justify/validate the number used in their certification report).

Ref General

Building type specific CN11

182

Education (schools only) Compliant showers

In the case of a pre-school or primary school shower provision is for staff only and set at a rate of one shower for every 10 cycle storage spaces provided (subject to a minimum of one shower being provided). For example, where a primary school has

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Tra 03 Cyclist facilities

Transport

Terms

Description

- additional requirements, see criterion 3

been designed to accommodate three classes per year, a total of 15 compliant spaces are required to meet the BREEAM criteria for cycle storage, and therefore two showers for staff use would be required for compliance with the cycle facilities criterion. In secondary schools (and sixth forms) where there are less than 100 pupils, a minimum of two showers must be provided for pupils with one male and one female shower (where applicable). A minimum of one shower for staff should be provided in all cases.

CN12

Sheltered housing or care homes and supported living facilities

Compliant wheelchair and buggy storage facilities are those that meet the following: 1. Charging points for electric buggies (at least two) provided within the storage space 2. The storage area must be secure yet easily accessible. 3. Lighting of the storage facility must be compliant with the external (or internal where relevant) lighting criteria defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. The lighting must be controlled to avoid operation during daylight hours, where there is sufficient daylight in or around the facility. 4. Where access to and from the building main entrance needs to be tightly controlled for the safety/security of residents, and it can be demonstrated that compliance with points 2 and 3 above impact on this (e.g. where residents include those with mental health problems), these two items can be excluded from the compliance requirements.

CN13

Residential buildings with transient visitors such as hotels, hostels and training centre

The unit of measure for visitors or beds does not apply in residential buildings with transient visitors, e.g. hotels, hostels, training centres where the visitor typically resides for less than one month. For a secure accommodation unit compliance should be based on visitors (not beds). In this case, cyclist facilities for staff must be accessible to all building users to ensure that visitors and patients/community that will travel to and use or work within the building are provided for.

Ref

Methodology Sliding scale of compliance To recognise the increased confidence in availability that occurs where there is larger scale provision of facilities, it is acceptable to reduce the provision requirement for building users by increasing the standard unit of measure (defined in Table - 30) and potentially the provision of cyclist facilities on a sliding scale as follows: 1. For buildings with more than 200 users but less than 300 the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 1.5. 2. For buildings with more than 300 users but less than 400 the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 2. 3. For buildings with more than 400 users, the unit of measure can be increased by a ratio of 2.5. For example, an office building with 800 users would be required to provide the following number of cycle storage spaces: 1-200 users @ 1 space per 10 users = 20 spaces 201-300 users @ 1 space per 15 users (standard unit of measure x 1.5) = 7 spaces 301-400 users @ 1 space per 20 users (standard unit of measure x 2) = 5 spaces 401+ users @ 1 space per 25 users (standard unit of measure x 2.5) = 16 spaces Total compliant cycle storage spaces required = 48 spaces

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

183

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

The sliding scale of compliance does not apply to the following building types: small and large retail, primary schools, multiresidential buildings and MOD residential buildings.

Minimum cycle storage provision Where the calculated number of required cycle storage spaces is less than four, total provision should be based on the lower of the following: a. A minimum of four compliant storage spaces must be provided OR b. One space per user (staff and where appropriate other user groups).

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria

Additional information Relevant definitions Compliant cycle storage spaces Compliant cycle storage spaces are defined as those that meet the following: 1. Cycles can be secured within spaces in rack(s).They are covered overhead and the cycle racks are set in or fixed to a permanent structure (building or hard-standing). Alternatively the cycle storage may be located in a locked structure fixed to or part of a permanent structure with appropriate surveillance. 2. The distance between each cycle rack, and cycle racks and other obstructions, e.g. a wall, allows for appropriate access to the cycle storage space, to enable bikes to be easily stored and accessed. 3. The storage facility or entrance to the facility is in a prominent site location that is viewable/overlooked from either an occupied building or a main access to a building. 4. The cycle storage facility has adequate lighting, this could be demonstrated with the lighting criteria defined in BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. The lighting must be controlled to avoid out-of-hours use and operation during daylight hours, where there is sufficient daylight in or around the facility. Compliant showers Compliant showers are defined as those that meet the following: 1. Provision of one shower for every 10 cycle storage spaces (unless stated, see below), subject to a minimum provision of one shower. 2. Any development providing eight showers or more will comply regardless the number of cycle storage spaces provided. 3. Both male and female users must be catered for i.e. either separate showers within shared gender-specific facilities (required provision split 50-50) or single shower cubicles and changing space for mixed use. 4. The showers do not need to be dedicated to cyclists and can be those shared with other users/uses. Compliant changing facilities Compliant changing facilities are defined as those that meet the following: 1. Appropriately sized for the likely/required number of users. The assessor should use their judgement to determine whether the changing area is appropriately sized given the number of cycle storage spaces or showers provided. 2. Changing areas must include adequate space and facilities to hang or store clothing and equipment whilst changing or showering, e.g. bench seat and/or hooks. Toilet/shower cubicles cannot be counted as changing facilities.

184

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Tra 03 Cyclist facilities

Transport

Compliant lockers Compliant lockers are defined as those that meet the following: 1. The number of lockers is at least equal to the number of cycle spaces required. 2. Lockers are either in or adjacent to compliant changing rooms. 3. The lockers are sized appropriately for the storage of a cyclist's equipment. Compliant drying spaces A compliant drying space is defined as a space that is specifically designed and designated with adequate heating/ventilation for the drying of wet clothes. A plant room for example is not a compliant drying space. Small retail type Includes smaller retail units/shops that may form part of a wider retail/business district, city or town centre or mixeduse development and typically do not have the scope to provide their own dedicated cyclist facilities. Large retail type Includes large retail developments, such as shopping centres, retail parks and supermarkets, which typically will have covered or uncovered parking or external areas and therefore scope to provide their own dedicated cycle facilities.

Other information None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

185

Transport

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Tra 04 Maximum car parking capacity Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

No

Aim To encourage the use of alternative means of transport other than the private car to and from the building, thereby helping to reduce transport related emissions and traffic congestion associated with the building’s operation.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Up to two credits - Car parking capacity

1. The building’s car parking capacity is compared to the maximum car parking capacity benchmarks inTable - 31 and the relevant number of BREEAM credits awarded. For most building types, except those where stated, the benchmarks vary according to the buildings public transport Accessibility Index (determined in accordance with BREEAM issue Tra 01 Public transport accessibility). Therefore, for these building types the AI must be determined prior to assessing this issue. This is required to ensure that the building’s car parking capacity is relative to the development's accessibility to the public transport network.

Checklists and tables Table - 31: Credits available in Tra04 Maximum car parking capacity for different building types Building type

Criteria Building’s Accessibility Index 95% of WC or urinal flushing demand is met using recycled non potable water. 2. Due to the use of the weightings, the overall component level achieved will not necessarily be a whole number, e.g component level 4. Where this is the case the methodology will always round down to the nearest component level and therefore BREEAM credit(s) level, e.g. if the component specification achieved is 3.6 credits, the actual number of credits awarded is 3 credits (the methodology will not round up to 4 credits because the performance specification for 4 credits has not been achieved). 3. Where the assessed building development has multiple specifications for the same water consuming component type, the number of fittings and component level achieved for each specification can be entered in the 'Other building type calculator'. Using this information, the calculator will determine the building’s aggregated performance level for that component type. Please note: whilst attempts have been made to align the benchmarking of both methodologies described above, they do determine performance in different ways. The number of BREEAM credits awarded by each method could therefore differ for the same water component specification. This could lead to variation in the credits achieved when applying BREEAM New Construction to a number of different building types that form a part of the same overall development.

Component Type Table - 34 outlines the standards, by component type, used to define the performance levels set in BREEAM. These defined levels of efficiency have been steered by a range of published sources of information (see references4) and therefore reflect robust levels of typical, good, best and exemplary practice. Table - 34: Water efficient consumption levels by component type Component

Performance Levels (quoted numbers are minimum performance required to achieve the level) Base

1

2

3

4

5

Unit

WC

6

5

4.5

4

3.75

3

Effective flush volume (litres)

Wash hand basin taps

12

9

7.50

4.50

3.75

3

litres/min

Showers

14

10

8

6

4

3.50

litres/min

Baths

200

180

160

140

120

100

litres

Urinal (2 or more urinals)

7.50

6

3

1.50

0.75

0

litres/bowl/hour

Urinal (1 urinal only)

10

8

4

2

1

0

litres/bowl/hour

Greywater/ rainwater system

0%

0%

0%

25%

50%

75%

% of WC/urinal flushing demand met using recycled non potable water

Kitchen tap: kitchenette

12

10

7.50

5

5

5

litres/min

Kitchen taps: restaurant (pre-rinse nozzles only)

10.30

9

8.30

7.30

6.30

6

litres/min

Domestic sized

17

13

13

12

11

10

litres/cycle

200

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wat 01 Water consumption

Component

Water

Performance Levels (quoted numbers are minimum performance required to achieve the level) Base

1

2

3

4

5

Unit

Domestic sized washing machines

90

60

50

40

35

30

litres/use

Waste disposal unit

17

17

0

0

0

0

litres/min

Commercial sized dishwashers

8

7

6

5

4

3

litres/rack

Commercial/ Industrial sized washing machines

14

12

10

7.50

5

4.50

litres/kg

dishwashers

Please note that specifying components for a building in accordance with the above levels will result, in most cases, in the corresponding number of BREEAM credits being achieved. However, please bear in mind that the component specifications above are akin to thresholds between each level. Therefore caution should be taken when defining a component specification for a BREEAM assessed building using exactly the same levels as the threshold levels. It is recommended that, where Wat 01 BREEAM credits are being targeted, the performance of a particular building’s component specification is verified using the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator before committing to a particular specification and ordering/installing components. This will provide greater assurance that the component specification achieves the targeted number of BREEAM credits.

Water consuming components - data requirements Table - 35: defines for each component type the appropriate data that will need to be collected from manufacturers’ product information to complete the assessment. Domestic component

Data requirements

WCs

Actual maximum or, where dual flush, effective flush volume in litres/use.

Urinals

Flush volume in litres/use for single use flush urinals. For cistern fed systems, the flushing frequency/hour and cistern capacity in litres

Taps

Flow rate of each tap, at full flow rate in litres per minute measured at a dynamic pressure: For high pressure (Type 1) taps - 3 ± 0.2 bar (0.3 ± 0.02 MPa) OR For low pressure (Type 2) taps - 0.1 ± 0.02 bar (0.01 ± 0.002 MPa) (BS EN 200:2008, sanitary tapware, single taps and combination taps for supply systems of type 1 and 2. General technical specifications) This includes any reductions achieved with flow restrictions.

Showers

Flow rate of each shower at the outlet using cold water (T 30˚C), in litres per minute measured at a dynamic pressure 3 ± 0.2 bar (0.3 ± 0.02 MPa) for high pressure (Type 1) supply systems OR 0.1 ± 0.05 bar (0.01 ± 0.005 MPa) for low pressure (Type 2) supply systems (BS EN 1112:2008, Sanitary tapware. Shower outlets for sanitary tapware for water supply systems type 1 and 2. General technical specifications).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

201

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Kitchen taps

Maximum flow rate litres/minute.

Baths

Capacity to overflow in litres. Taps on baths should not be included in the calculation, as the water consumption from bath taps is taken account of in the use factor for baths. The calculation of water consumption for baths will assume 40% of the capacity to the overflow. This is to reflect that: a) Users tend not to fill the bath to overflow; and b) The displacement affect the user has on the actual volume of water required for a bath.

Dishwasher

Litres/cycle for domestic applications and/or appliances or litres/rack for commercial applications and/or appliances.

Washing machine

Litres/use for domestic applications (for a typical wash cycle) and/or appliances or litres/kg for commercial applications and/or appliances, e.g. in hotels.

Waste disposal unit

Flow rate in litres/minute.

Unspecified water consuming components As the methodology and BREEAM credits for water efficiency compare the buildings modelled water consumption performance against the performance of a baseline specification for the same component types, where a component type is not specified it is not accounted for in the methodology, i.e. the component is excluded from both the proposed and baseline building. Therefore no benefit is gained in terms of BREEAM performance, by deciding not to specify a particular component. However, the methodology will reflect the reduction in overall water consumption (litres/person/day) for the building, as a result of not specifying a particular component.

Buildings with a greywater and rainwater system(s) The following information is required where a greywater and/or rainwater system is specified: Rainwater: In accordance with BS 8515 ‘intermediate approach’: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Collection area (m2) Yield co-efficient (%) Hydraulic filter efficiency (%) Rainfall (average mm/year)

Rainwater: In accordance with BS 8515 ‘detailed approach’: 1. Daily rainfall collection (litres) Greywater: in accordance with BS 8525 : 1. Manufacturer or system designer details. 2. The percentage volume of waste water collected (and re-used) from the following (where relevant); wash hand basins, showers, kitchen basins, dish-washers, baths, washing machines and sources of waste water from non-domestic components. Where greywater and/or rainwater systems are specified there is a minimum level of component efficiency that must be achieved to award 4 or 5 BREEAM credits and the exemplary level credit. This is to avoid awarding a higher number of BREEAM credits where performance from less efficient fittings is off-set by the specification of a greywater and/or rainwater collection system.

202

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wat 01 Water consumption

Water

The intention being to ensure demand reduction is prioritised before off-setting consumption. Where a greywater/rainwater system is specified/installed, the component specification must achieve a percentage reduction in water consumption (over the baseline specification) equivalent to that required for 2 credits, i.e. a 25% improvement. Where this level is achieved, all of the total water demand met by greywater/rainwater sources can contribute to the overall percentage improvement required to achieve BREEAM credits. If it is not achieved, the percentage of greywater/rainwater allowable will be equivalent to the percentage improvement in water consumption achieved for the component specification, i.e. percentage improvement on baseline performance. For example, if only a 20% improvement is achieved, and therefore the building is not meeting the 25% requirement, then only 20% of the water demand met via greywater/rainwater sources can be used to off-set water consumption from the micro components. This minimum requirement does not apply where only 1, 2 or 3 credits are sought or where no greywater/rainwater system is specified, i.e. percentage improvement is based solely on the water efficiency of the microcomponent specification. BRE Global may allow some exemptions to this rule in instances where a particular fitting type requires a high flow rate due to specialised end-user requirements, and its specification prevents compliance with 25% improvement.

Buildings with a mixture of different functional areas For the majority of buildings using the standard Wat 01 method, the BREEAM Wat 01 calculator defines the building type and range of different water consuming activity areas within that building; for example, a retail development with sales area and goods storage or an office that includes a canteen and gym. However, where carrying out a single assessment of a building/development which consists of a diverse mix of activity areas/building types, all of which can be assessed separately within the calculator, the following applies: Determine the building’s total water consumption performance by carrying out separate assessments for each relevant activity area/building type. On completion of each assessment, the assessor will need to determine the percentage improvement as follows: (T × T ) + ... + (T nAct × T nOcc)  I = 100 × 1 − 1Act 1Occ (T 1Base × T1Occ) + ... + (T nBase × T nOcc)   

Where: I = Overall improvement (%) TnAct = the modelled net water consumption (L/person/day) for each building type TnBase = the modelled baseline water consumption for the corresponding building type TnOcc = the total default occupancy rate for the corresponding building type. Where greywater/rainwater systems are specified, the assessor should take care to avoid unintended double counting of the yield from such systems and using it to off-set demand for each activity area/building type.

Fixed water use The BREEAM water efficiency calculation includes an allowance for fixed water use. This includes water consumption for vessel filling (for building users drinking water), cleaning in kitchens and food preparation in buildings with a catering facility. Fixed uses are included to provide greater accuracy in reporting of the building’s overall estimated water consumption. As these uses are fixed for both actual and baseline building models, their totals do not influence the achievement of BREEAM credits.

Other permissible component demand for non-potable water The focus of this BREEAM issue is the performance of the building's permanent domestic scale water consuming components. Where a grey water or rainwater system is specified, the yield from the system should be prioritised for such uses, i.e. WC orUrinal flushing. However, where the building demonstrates that it has other consistent (i.e. daily) and equivalent levels of non-potable water demand, and such demands are intrinsic to the building’s operation, then it is permissible for the demand from these non-domestic uses to be counted, i.e. the demand for rainwater/greywater yield from such

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

203

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

systems/components can be used as well as, or instead of non-potable water demand from the building's WC/Urinal components. Examples of consistent and intrinsic demands could include laundry use in hotels/multi-residential developments or horticultural uses in garden centres, botanical gardens and golf courses. Demand for general landscaping and ornamental planting irrigation are not considered as equivalent/intrinsic by BREEAM.

Other permissible source of non-potable water The methodology allows for the collection and recycling of non-potable water from the relevant components listed in the criteria i.e. taps, showers, baths and dish-washers or washing machines. In addition, where non-potable water is collected from a non domestic component or source that is intrinsic to the building, then the amount collected can be accounted for in the methodology. This could include for example wastewater from active hygiene flushing, i.e. a regular hygiene flushing programme to minimize poor water quality in a potable cold or hot water system. In order for the method to account for this total, the design team will need to confirm to the assessor the yield from the component/system (in litres) and the frequency of that yield (in days), i.e. if once a week then frequency would be seven days.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

1-6

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1

A completed copy of the BREEAM Wat 01calculator

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions BREEAM Wat 01 calculator for New Non-Domestic Buildings The BREEAM Wat 01 calculator is a method for the assessment of water efficiency in most common types of new non-domestic buildings. The calculator assesses the contribution that each internal domestic scale water consuming component (as listed in the criteria) has on whole building water consumption).The calculator and accompanying guidance on its application is available separately from this Scheme Document. Please note; the calculator is a compliance tool and not a design tool for water demand and drainage systems. The tool uses default usage and occupancy rates to provide a benchmark of the typical consumption given the specified fittings (in litres/person/day and m3 /person/year) and their impact on the buildings overall water efficiency. Due to the impacts and differences of actual user behaviour and occupancy rates the results of the method will not reflect directly the actual water use during building operation. The results from the methodology should, therefore, not be used for the purpose of comparison with or prediction of actual water consumption from a non-domestic building. Domestic scale components Domestic scale components include water consumed (potable and non-potable) by internal building components including kitchen taps, wash hand basin taps, baths, showers and dishwashers, WCs, urinals, washing machines and waste disposal units. Effective flush volume Effective flush volume is the volume of water needed to clear the toilet pan and transport any contents far enough to avoid blocking the drain. The effective flush volume of a single flush WC is the volume of water used for one flush. The effective flush volume of a dual flush WC is the ratio of full flush to reduced flush. This is taken to be one full flush for every three reduced flushes for non-domestic buildings and one full flush for every two reduced flushes in

204

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wat 01 Water consumption

Water

domestic (residential) buildings/areas. The effective flush volume can therefore be calculated as follows, using a 6/4 litre dual flush volume WC as an example: Non-domestic: {(6 litre x 1) + (4 litre x 3)}/4 = 4.5 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dual flush WC) Domestic: {(6 litre x 1) + (4 litre x 2)}/3 = 4.67 litre effective flushing volume (for a 6/4 dual flush WC) The differing ratio between non-domestic and domestic buildings reflects the different patterns of user behaviour between these building types. Greywater recycling The appropriate collection, treatment and storage of domestic wastewater (which is defined as that discharged from kitchens, baths or showers, laundry rooms and similar) to meet a non-potable water demand in the building e.g. WC flushing, or other permissible non potable use on the site of the assessed building. Potable water Water suitable for human consumption that meets the requirements of Section 67 (Standards of Wholesomeness) of the Water Industry Act 1991 5 is referred to as wholesome water. Non potable water Any water other than potable water, also referred to as unwholesome water (BS 8525, see references). Rainwater recycling The appropriate collection and storage of rainwater run-off from hard outdoor surfaces to meet a non-potable water demand in the building e.g. WC flushing, or other permissible non potable use on the site of the assessed building. Clinical areas Refer to BREEAM issue Hea 01 Visual comfort.

Other Information None 1BS 8525-1:2010, Greywater systems – Part 1 code of practice, BSi, 2010 2BS 8515:2009, Rainwater harvesting systems – Code of practice, BSi, 2009 3BNWAT22: Domestic water consumption in domestic and non-domestic properties (version 1.1). Market Transformation

Programme, 2007 4AECB Water Standards: Delivering buildings with excellent water and energy performance, vol 2 The water standards, technical background report (version 1), Grant, Thorton, AECB, 2009. BNWAT22: Domestic water consumption in domestic and non-domestic properties (version 1.1). Market Transformation Programme, 2007. BNWAT07: Baths - water efficiency performance tests (version 2.0). Market Transformation Programme, 2007. BNWAT23: Reliability of information on water consumption of appliances (version 1), Market Transformation Programme, 2007. BS6465-3:2006, Sanitary installations – Part 3: Code of practice for the selection, installation and maintenance of sanitary and associated appliances. BSi, 2006.CIRIA W10, Key Performance Indicators for water use in hotel, Rachel Waggett and Catherine Arotsky, CIRIA, 2006. CIRIA W11, Key Performance Indicators for water use in offices, Waggett, Arotsky, CIRIA, 2006. Conserving water in buildings, a practical guide. Environment Agency, 2007. Enhanced Capital Allowance Water Technology List criteria: www.eca-water.gov.uk Report by Entec UK Ltd for CLG: Research to Assess the Costs and Benefits of Improvements to the Water Efficiency of New Non-household Buildings, Final Report, Oct 2009. SD129: Certification and Listing of Low Flush WC appliances. BRE Global, 2008 SD174: Certification and Listing of Water Efficient Terminal Fittings. BRE Global, 2008. SD175: Certification and Listing of Water Efficient Baths. BRE Global, 2008. The Building Regulations 2000, Part G: Sanitation, hot water safety and water efficiency (2010 edition). HM Government. Waterwise: www.waterwise.org.uk Water Efficiency Calculator for New Dwellings. Communities and Local Government, 2009.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

205

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Water efficient product labelling scheme: www.water-efficiencylabel.org.uk Water Supply (water fittings) Regulations 1999, DEFRA. Sustainable Products 2006: Policy Analysis and Projections, Market Transformation Programme, 2006. Water UK - Macerators, the impact on sewers: www.water.org.uk/home/policy/positions/waste-macerators-position-paper Water Efficient Buildings, water and planning, guidance for planners http://www.water-efficient-buildings.org.uk/ 5Great Britain, The Water Industry Act 1991. London: The Stationery Office

206

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wat 02 Water monitoring

Water

Wat 02 Water monitoring Number of credits available

Minimum standards

1

Yes (criterion 1 only)

Aim To ensure water consumption can be monitored and managed, and therefore encourage reductions.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit

1. The specification of a water meter on the mains water supply to each building; this includes instances where water is supplied via a borehole or other private source. 2. Water-consuming plant or building areas, consuming 10% or more of the building’s total water demand, are either fitted with easily accessible sub meters or have water monitoring equipment integral to the plant or area (see Compliance notes). 3. Each meter (main and sub) has a pulsed output to enable connection to a Building Management System (BMS) for the monitoring of water consumption. 4. If the site on which the building is located has an existing BMS, managed by the same occupier/owner (as the new building), the pulsed water meter(s) for the new building must be connected to the existing BMS.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance Notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Criteria 1, 3 and 4 Both options: All Assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Criterion 2 Option 1 - Shell only: This criterion is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2 - Shell and Core Only: Compliance with criterion 2 must be demonstrated

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

207

Water

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description for water consuming plant/building areas identifiable by the developer (also see definitions). Water consuming plant/building areas to be added/installed by the tenant do not need to be assessed for this issue. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

All Assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Country specific CN3

Country specific

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

General CN4

Water consuming plant or building area, see Criterion 2

CN5

10% of water demand, see criterion 2.

208

As a minimum this includes the following (where present): 1. Buildings with a swimming pool and its associated changing facilities (toilets, showers etc.). 2. On sites with multiple units or buildings, e.g. shopping centres, industrial units, retail parks etc. separate sub meters are fitted on the water supply to the following areas (where present): Each individual unit supplied with water Common areas (covering the supply to toilet blocks) Service areas (covering the supply to outlets within storage, delivery, waste disposal areas etc.) Ancillary/separate buildings to the main development with water supply. 3. Laboratory: in any building with a laboratory or containing laboratories, a separate water meter is fitted on the water supply to any process or cooling loop for ‘plumbed-in’ laboratory process equipment. 4. Healthcare: for sites with multiple departments, e.g. large health centres or acute hospitals, separate sub meters are fitted on the supply to the following areas where present: Staff and public areas Clinical areas and wards Letting areas: on the water supply to each tenant unit Laundries Main production kitchen Hydrotherapy pools Laboratories CSSD/HSDU, pathology, pharmacy, mortuary and any other major process water use Supplementary supply of water from a cold water tank The sub-meter requirement does not necessarily apply in the following cases, where the assessor confirms there will be no additional monitoring benefit resulting from their installation:

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wat 02 Water monitoring

Terms

Ref

Water

Description 1. Where a building has only one or two small sources of water demand (e.g. an office with sanitary fittings and a small kitchen) 2. Where the building has two sources of water demand, one significantly larger than the other, and the water consumption for the larger demand is likely to mask the smaller demand.

CN6

Extensions to existing buildings, see criterion 4.

If no new water supply is being installed because the occupants of the extended building will use the facilities in, and therefore water supply to the existing building, then the following must be provided in the existing building; 1. A water meter for the mains water supply 2. Sub-meters for large water consuming plant or facilities, e.g. evaporative cooling, swimming pool etc. (where present). The meters provided must have a pulsed output or connection to existing BMS in accordance with the assessment criteria.

CN7

No water supply to the building or unit

If there is no installed water supply to the assessed building because there will be no water-consuming fittings in the building, then in such instances the guidance given in the above Compliance note for extensions to existing building applies.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the ‘BREEAM Evidential Requirements’ section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria

Additional Information Relevant definitions Staff areas Refer to BREEAM Issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. Clinical areas Refer to Hea 01 Visual comfort. Patient areas Refer to BREEAM Issue Hea 01 Visual comfort. CSSD Central Sterile Supply Department.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

209

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

HSDU Hospital Sterilisation and Disinfection Unit.

Other information None.

210

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wat 03 Water leak detection

Water

Wat 03 Water leak detection Number of credits available

Minimum standards

2

No

Aim To reduce the impact of water leaks that may otherwise go undetected.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit - Leak detection system

1. A leak detection system which is capable of detecting a major water leak on the mains water supply within the building and between the building and the utilities water meter is installed. The leak detection system must be: a. A permanent automated water leak detection system that alerts the building occupants to the leak OR an in-built automated diagnostic procedure for detecting leaks is installed. b. Activated when the flow of water passing through the water meter/data logger is at a flow rate above a pre-set maximum for a pre-set period of time. c. Able to identify different flow and therefore leakage rates, e.g. continuous, high and/or low level, over set time periods. d. Programmable to suit the owner/occupiers’ water consumption criteria. e. Where applicable, designed to avoid false alarms caused by normal operation of large water-consuming plant such as chillers.

One credit - Flow control devices

2. Flow control devices that regulate the supply of water to each WC area/facility according to demand are installed (and therefore minimise water leaks and wastage from sanitary fittings).

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment

Leak detection system, criterion 1 Both options : All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

211

Water

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

criteria

apply. Flow control devices, criterion 2 Option 1 -Shell only: This criterion is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2 - Shell and core only: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. The WC areas or facilities must be assessed as per criterion 2 regardless of whether or not the WC areas or facilities are fitted out. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Leak detection systems (1 credit) 1. Criterion 1 is applicable. OR 2. Install automatic excess flow valves at relevant locations to protect property from damage caused by leaking pipes or tanks. Flow control devices (1 credit) 3. Criterion 2 is applicable.

CN3

Automatic excess flow valve, See point 2 CN2.

An automatic excess flow valve acts as a flow switch (‘fuse’) to automatically stop the flow of water and prevent uncontrolled release when the flow of water exceeds a predetermined rate (such as may occur in the event of failure of water supply pipes and tanks).

Country specific CN4

Country specific

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN5

Leakage ratess S See criterion 1.

This issue does not specify what the high and low level leakage rates should be however the leak detection equipment installed must have the flexibility to distinguish between different flow rates to enable it to be programmed to suit the building type and owner/occupier’s usage patterns.

CN6

System criteria See criterion 1.

It is anticipated that the leak detection credit will usually be achieved by installing a system which detects higher than normal flow rates at meters and/or sub-meters. It does not necessarily require a system that directly detects water leakage along part or the whole length of the water supply system.

CN7

Water utilities meters See criterion 2.

Where there is a water utilities meter at the site/building boundary, it may be necessary to install a separate flow meter (or alternative measurement system) just after the utility meter to detect leaks; however, if the water utility company agrees to some form of leak detection being installed on their meter, this would also be acceptable.

General

212

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wat 03 Water leak detection

Water

Ref

Terms

Description

CN8

Flow control device See criterion 2.

The following could be considered as types of flow control devices:

CN9

Flow control systemsSee criterion 2.

Flow control systems may control combined WC areas, such as male and female toilets within a core; they are not required for each individual sanitary appliance. The criteria are set to encourage the isolation of the water supply to each WC block when it is not being used.

CN10

Single WCs See criterion 2.

The flow control criteria for this issue do apply to facilities which have only a single WC (potentially within smaller or low occupancy buildings). In these instances shutoff could be provided via the same switch that controls the lighting (whether proximity detection or a manual switch).

CN11

No water supply to the building or/ unit See criteria 1 and 2.

These credits are still assessed where there are no installed fittings and therefore no water supply to the building. In these instances the facilities likely to be used by the future occupants of the assessed building must meet the criteria, e.g. those facilities within the nearest accessible building.

CN12

Extensions to existing buildings, see criteria 1 and 2

If the water supply to the new extension is via the existing building then the water supply to the existing building must be assessed against the criteria of this issue.

A time controller, i.e. an automatic time switch device to switch off the water supply after a predetermined interval A programmed time controller, i.e. an automatic time switch device to switch water on and/or off at predetermined times. A volume controller, i.e. an automatic control device to turn off the water supply once the maximum pre-set volume is reached. A presence detector and controller, i.e. an automatic device detecting occupancy or movement in an area to switch water on and turn it off when the presence is removed. A central control unit, i.e. a dedicated computer-based control unit for an overall managed water control system, utilising some or all of the types of control elements listed above.

Building type specific CN13

Clinical areas in healthcare buildings

The criteria for this issue do not apply to toilet facilities in clinical areas.

Methodology None.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

213

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in the ‘BREEAM Evidential Requirements’ section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria

Additional information Relevant definitions Clinical areas Hea 01 Visual comfort.

Other information None.

214

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wat 04 Water efficient equipment

Water

Wat 04 Water efficient equipment Number of credits available

Minimum standards

1

No

Aim To reduce unregulated water consumption by encouraging specification of water efficient equipment.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit

1. Identify the building's unregulated water demands and for each, estimate or model its contribution to the total nondomestic water consumption of the building. 2. Identify the system(s) or processes that have a major impact on the total unregulated water demand of the development and its operation, and demonstrate through either good practice design or specification a meaningful reduction in the total water demand of the building.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Criteria 1 and 2 Both options: Where the only unregulated water demand comes from an irrigation system (because this is being specified/installed by the developer), then it must be used for the purpose of assessing compliance. Where no irrigation systems are specified, and therefore it is not possible to estimate or model any unregulated water demands for the building, this issue is not applicable to these shell and core assessment options. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

215

Water

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Country specific CN3

Country specific

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

Major impact on water demand

For a typical office building this would constitute around 10% of total water demand. For different building types and developments what is deemed as 'significant' will vary.

CN5

Reducing unregulated water consumption

BREEAM does not prescriptively define all potential means or solutions for reducing unregulated water consumption. The design team needs to demonstrate to the assessor that they have identified key areas of water consumption in the building and that a reduction in unregulated water consumption has been achieved using existing 'tried and tested' solutions or new innovative solutions relevant to the building and its functional requirements. The following are some examples of solutions 'deemed to satisfy compliance' for a number of different building types or functions (where the unregulated water demand for that function is one of/the significant contributor in the building): 1. Drip fed subsurface irrigation incorporating soil moisture sensors. The irrigation control should be zoned to permit variable irrigation to different planting assemblages. 2. Reclaimed/recovered water from a rainwater collection or waste water recovery system, with appropriate storage, i.e. greywater collection from building functions or processes that use potable water, e.g. vehicle wash, sanitary facilities, irrigation etc. This should take into account the Government Buying Standards1 where appropriate to the building type. 3. External landscaping and planting that relies solely on precipitation, during all seasons of the year. 4. All planting specified is restricted to contextually appropriate species that thrive without irrigation and will continue to do so in those conditions likely as a result of climate change, i.e. typically warmer and drier conditions.

General

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

216

Final post-construction stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wat 04 Water efficient equipment

Water

Additional information Relevant definitions Unregulated water For the purposes of this BREEAM Issue, unregulated water is water not used for domestic purposes and is therefore not regulated by building regulations or other relevant legislation. This includes, but is not limited to, equipment used for irrigation and, for the relevant building types, vehicle wash plant/equipment.

Other information None. 1http://sd.defra.gov.uk/advice/public/buying/products/water-using-products/

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

217

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Materials

218

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Materials

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

No

Aim To recognise and encourage the use of construction materials with a low environmental impact (including embodied carbon) over the full life cycle of the building.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Up to six credits

1. BREEAM awards credits on the basis of the building’s quantified environmental life cycle impact through assessment of the main building elements, as set out in Table - 36 below:

Table - 36: Elements assessed by building type Building type

Element Type Assessed External walls

Windows

Roof

Upper floor slab

Internal walls

Floor finishes/coverings

Office

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

Retail

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

Industrial

ü

Education

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

Healthcare

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

Prisons

ü

ü

ü

Courts

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

Multi-residential

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

Other buildings

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

ü

-

-

ü

2. Credits are awarded on the basis of the total number of points achieved, as set out inTable - 37 below, and calculated using the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator. This point’s score is based on the Green Guide rating(s) achieved for the specifications that make-up the main building elements (as above). Note: Where an independently verified third-party Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), covering part of or the

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

219

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

whole life cycle, is available for a material or product that forms part of an assessed building element, this can be used to increase the contribution of that element to the building’s Mat 01 performance (refer to Calculation procedure where a specific Environmental Product Declaration is available for a material under the Methodology section for more detail). Table - 37: Allocation of credits by building type and Mat 01 points Building type

Total Mat 01 points achieved 1 and 2 ≥2

≥4

≥5

≥8

≥ 10

≥ 12

≥ 14

Available BREEAM credits Office

1

1

2

3

4

5

-

Retail

1

1

2

3

4

5

-

Industrial

1

2

-

-

-

-

-

Education

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

Healthcare

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

Prisons

1

1

2

3

4

-

-

Courts

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

Multiresidential

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

Other buildings

1

1

2

3

4

5

6

1. Please refer toMethodology section (below) for a description of the methodology used to determine the number of points and BREEAM credits achieved. 2. Where the total points achieved exceeds the level required for maximum credits see the exemplary level criteria as the building may be eligible for an additional innovation credit.

3. Life cycle Green House Gas emissions (kgCO eq.) for each element are also required to be reported based on a 60-year 2 building life. Where specific data is not available for a product or element, generic data should be used. Generic data can be obtained from the online Green Guide for each element and must be entered in to the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator.

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the two exemplary level routes available to achieve up to three innovation credits for this BREEAM issue.

Route 1: Using the Green Guide to Specification (elemental approach) - one credit 4. Where assessing four or more applicable building elements, the building achieves at least two points in addition to the total points required to achieve maximum credits under the standard BREEAM criteria (as outlined in the table above) OR 5. Where assessing fewer than four applicable building elements, the building achieves at least one point in addition to the total points required to achieve maximum credits under the standard BREEAM criteria. Where the assessed building does not specify an element listed above, see the Compliance note regarding the exemplary level benchmark.

220

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Materials

Route 2: Using compliant life cycle assessment software tools (whole building approach) - two credits 6. Where the design team has used an IMPACT compliant software tool (or equivalent) to measure the environmental impact of the building. 7. Where the design team can demonstrate how the use of an IMPACT compliant software (or equivalent) has benefited the building in terms of measuring and reducing its environmental impact. See CN16 8. Where the design team submit the Building Information Model (BIM) from the IMPACT compliant software tool (or equivalent) for the assessed building to BRE Global (via the project’s appointed BREEAM assessor).See CN17. Further information about IMPACT is provided in the Other information section of this BREEAM issue. Please note a project can achieve all three innovation credits where it is complying with exemplary level criteria 4 to 8, i.e. one route is not necessarily exclusive of the other, a project can comply with both routes 1 and 2 or choose to comply with only route 1 or only route 2

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options : All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Where floor finishes and internal walls are applicable to the building type being assessed, the following applies to both the options: In addition to the main building elements, all building areas where floor finishes and/or internal walls are being specified/installed by the developer (Including those in common areas, show areas and other fitted out areas) must be accounted for in the assessment of this issue. Office buildings: If the developer has specified floor finishes in a show area only (for compliance with BREEAM issue Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes), the area (m2) and Green Guide rating of the floor finishes in the show area must be accounted for in the assessment of Mat 01. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

-Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

221

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

CN4

Element not specified See criteria 1, 2, 4 and 5.

Where the building does not contain an element listed above, for example there are no upper floors in a single storey building, the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator allows the BREEAM assessor to exclude the element from the assessment. In such instances the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator will re-calculate the standard and exemplary level benchmarks on the basis of the remaining applicable elements.

CN5

Element consisting of more than one specification See criterion 2.

Where more than one specification is present for a given element, the Green Guide rating and area for each specification should be entered into the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator. The calculator will then determine the total points score on the basis of each specifications rating and area as a proportion of the whole element.

CN6

Finding exact Green Guide Ratings. See criterion 2.

While exact matches in specifications are not always found, it should be possible to identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of assessment (also see note below ‘No Green Guide rating match’).

CN7

No Green Guide rating match. See criterion 2.

Where a generic Green Guide rating cannot be found for a specification the BREEAM assessor can use the online Green Guide calculator to determine a bespoke Green Guide rating for the specification (for any elements except floor finishes). Licensed BREEAM assessors can access the calculator via www.thegreenguide.org.uk. If a required component is not present via the online Green Guide calculator, the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will respond to the query with a solution and /or guidance to enable completion of a specification. Refer to Green Guide Calculator Online Tool guidance for more information.

CN8

Environmental Profile Certification of products See criterion 2.

Products with certified Environmental Profiles can be used to demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue. Products are certified with a “product specific” Green Guide rating as part of a relevant elemental specification, e.g. a manufacturer’s concrete block as part of an external wall specification. This rating can be used in the same way as a generic Green Guide rating for this BREEAM issue (see the Additional informationsection for a screenshot example of a product listing from GreenBook Live). Where a certified product forms part of a different specification, for the same or different element type (i.e. different to that described on the Environmental Profile certificate), the guidance within the 'Methodology' section concerning Environmental Product Declaration types should be followed. This procedure outlines how BREEAM gives additional recognition for materials with robust Environmental Product Declaration types. Refer to BRE Environmental Profile Methodology under Additional information section for more information on where to source an Environmental Profile Certificate.

CN9

Reporting life cycle GHG emissions See criterion 3.

Where the data is available, it is a requirement that the life cycle GHG emissions (kgCO eq.) for each specification are gathered and reported, via the BREEAM 2 scoring and reporting tool. BREEAM assessors can source this information as follows: For generic Green Guide ratings the. is reported via the online green guide www.thegreenguide.org.uk. Simply click on the relevant specification type (having

Ref General

222

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Ref

Terms

Materials

Description already defined the building, category and element type) and the. are reported along with the individual category ratings for that element, at the bottom of the page (see screen shot in the Additional information section). The information is not available at present for bespoke Green Guide ratings. For Green Guide ratings based on a product manufacturer’s certified Environmental Profile, Assessors will find the. in the product’s Environmental Profile Certificate appendix, in the ‘Characterised data’ section (against the ‘Climate Change’ issue).

CN10

New elements containing re-used materials See criterion 2.

If a new element is specified e.g. external wall, and part of that element includes a reused material e.g. reclaimed bricks, the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will then calculate the rating and confirm the result to the assessor.

CN11

Existing elements reused in the new construction

Only new elements need to be assessed. Existing in situ elements adjoining a new construction, e.g. an existing building facade, do not require assessment. If this BREEAM scheme is being used to assess a major refurbishment project, where the assessed building is re-using existing in situ elements as part of its structure, those elements can be allocated an A+ Green Guide rating. If the existing element will contain substantial new materials the BREEAM assessor will need to submit a Bespoke Green Guide Query proforma. BRE Global will then calculate the rating and confirm the result to the assessor.

CN12

Partial assessments See criterion 1.

Where the assessment covers only some of the floors in the building, the roof must still be assessed as it is protecting the assessed building below. If the roof is directly above domestic accommodation (e.g. flats), the equivalent domestic Green Guide rating for the roof must be used as opposed to the ratings for non-domestic roofs. Roof areas not protecting parts of the assessed building or space can be omitted from the assessment.

CN13

Specialist floor finishes in operational areas See criterion 1.

Specialist floor finishes (See definition) in operational areas of buildings fall outside of the scope of the Green Guide.In such instances, only non specialist floor finishes and those in non-operational areas of the building should be included in the assessment of this BREEAM issue. See also guidance in Additional information section, on floor finishes.

CN14

Roof lights, patio doors and glazed conservatories See criterion 1.

For the purpose of this issue any doors with a large expanse of glazing, such as patio doors, should be assessed as windows. Similarly, glazed areas of conservatories and roof lights should be assessed as windows.

CN15

Where integral insulated cold storage units form a part of the building fabric

For insulated cold storage units forming an integral part of the building fabric the following must be followed 1. Where the cold storage unit forms part of, or is integral to the external wall element: As an external wall type the insulated units will be assessed in the Green Guide on the basis that it is a normal temperature building without the extra insulation, so a standard thickness of insulation will be considered. As such, the walls of the insulated unit should be treated as part of the external wall element for the assessment of this BREEAM issue.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

223

Materials

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description 2. Where the cold storage unit forms part of, or is integral to a ceiling element: As a roof element of the insulated unit, suspended ceilings are not included within the Green Guide. Therefore, the roof of the insulated unit will be assessed as a standard construction from the deck upwards, assuming a standard thickness of insulation. As such, the roof of the insulated unit should be treated as part of the ceiling element for the assessment of this BREEAM issue. 3. Where the cold storage unit forms part of an internal wall element: The insulated unit will be treated as meeting a very specific Functional Unit outside the scope of the internal wall elements listed in the Green Guide. The wall to the insulated unit should therefore be excluded from the assessment of the internal wall element.

CN16

Demonstrating benefit See Criterion 7.

This should take the form of a short qualitative statement from the design team providing comments on the following: 1. How and at what stages of the design the tool was utilised. 2. How the tool helped (or did not help) steer the design process to optimise cost and mitigate environmental impacts, giving examples of specific changes to the building design/specification that resulted.

CN17

Scope of IMPACT Compliant (or equivalent) Tools and Data Submission Requirements See Criterion 8.

Guidance note GN08 : Scope of IMPACT Compliant (or equivalent) Tools and Data Submission Requirements available via the Assessor Extranet outlines in detail the requirements for submitting the BIM from IMPACT compliant (or equivalent) software tools. The Guidance Note also contains instructions on how tools other than IMPACT compliant software tools can demonstrate equivalency for the purpose of this assessment issue. Assessors should review Guidance Note GN08 and ensure that submissions meet the criteria relevant to demonstrate compliance.

Building type specific CN18

Building specific guidance

All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Methodology Determining the number of BREEAM credits achieved as a result of each element’s Green Guide rating The Green Guide uses an A+ to E rating system, whereby the rating relates to the relative life cycle performance of a specification in comparison with other types of specifications available for a particular building element type e.g. external wall. Three steps are undertaken to translate the performance of all the separate individual elemental specifications and their Green Guide ratings into an overall building performance score for life cycle impact, against which BREEAM credits can be awarded. Each of these steps is undertaken using the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator and the information collated by the BREEAM assessor. The steps in this process are as follows:

Step 1: Translating the Green Guide rating into points The first step in the calculation procedure is translating a specification’s Green Guide rating into a number of points. The table below illustrates the points available by Green Guide rating.

224

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Materials

Green Guide Rating

Mat 01 Points

A+

3.00

A

2.00

B

1.00

C

0.50

D

0.25

E

0.00

The maximum number of points available for an assessed building is a product of the number of elements assessed multiplied by three. For example, for an office building five elements are assessed so there are a maximum of fifteen points available; furthermore twelve of those fifteen points must be achieved to award all five BREEAM credits. Whilst it may appear that three points are available for each element assessed, and in many assessments this may be the case, the actual maximum number of points available for a particular element will depend on the impact of the element type compared with the other elements present and assessed (refer to step 3 below). This is because this issue assesses the life cycle impact of the whole building, taking in to account the relative performance and therefore contribution of the main building elements towards the building’s overall performance.

Step 2: Weighting the performance of individual specifications within an elemental category Where an element consists of several different specifications, the overall points achieved for that element are weighted according to the relative area and Green Guide rating of each of the individual specifications. An example of this is provided below for an external wall element consisting of three different types of external wall specification. Element type

Specification

Area (m2)

% of element type

Generic Green Guide rating

Points

Area weighted points

External Wall

External wall type 1

280

26%

A+

3

0.78

External wall type 2

350

33%

C

0.5

0.17

External wall type 3

435

41%

B

1

0.41

1065

100%

-

-

1.36

Element Total

This adjustment is made to ensure the contribution of points is balanced in accordance with the life cycle performance of each specification.

Step 3: Weighting the performance of individual elements relative to all elements assessed Step three is completed in two parts:

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

225

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Part 1: Weights the performance of the building elements based on its area relative to the overall area of the different elements. This is done by multiplying the area of each element by the weighted Green Guide score, adding the total for all elements and then dividing by the total area of the assessed elements. For example, a 20-storey office block will have a smaller roof area than external wall area, and so the area weighting will take this into account by giving a smaller weighting to the points score for the roof in comparison to the external walls. Part 2: The range of impacts, measured using Ecopoints, for each of the elements will differ and therefore so will the increments between each Green Guide rating level. For example, the external walls have a larger Ecopoints range than the internal walls, therefore, if both elements achieve the same Green Guide rating, the rating of the external walls achieves a higher proportion of the overall points than the rating for the internal walls, thus recognising the relatively higher reduction possible in the environmental impact of the external walls, due to the larger Ecopoints range for that element.

Calculation procedure where a specific Environmental Product Declaration is available for a material The Green Guide online provides users (design teams and clients) with information on the relative life cycle environmental impacts for a range of different building elemental specifications e.g. external wall, roof, windows etc. Each specification’s online Green Guide rating is based on verified LCA data for generic construction products assessed according to BRE’s Environmental Profiles Methodology. There are many different schemes producing EPD for products or services complying with BS ISO 14025 (there is specific construction product and service variant of BS ISO 14025; BS ISO 21930) using LCA according to the BS ISO 14040 series. Where a third party verified EPD is available for a product that forms part of an assessed element, for example a concrete block used in an external wall, the EPD can potentially be used to uplift the element’s BREEAM performance, i.e. points and therefore credits achieved. The degree of uplift available in such instances depends on three factors: 1. The assessed element’s existing Green Guide rating 2. The proportion of the total environmental impact of the element that the material with the EPD contributes 3. The manufacturer’s Environmental Product Declaration type for the relevant product/material(s) Using this information, the points achieved for the existing Green Guide rating of the element is adjusted as follows (using the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator): 1. The proportion of the total environmental impact of the assessed element that the material with the EPD contributes is determined using the Online Green Guide Calculator 1 The Online Green Guide calculator will list the relative environmental impact of each constituent material of a defined element as a percentage. Select the percentage for the relevant material and enter this into the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator. If an element cannot be defined using the Online Green Guide Calculator the assessor will need to complete a Bespoke Green Guide Query Proforma and submit to BRE Global, who will then confirm the relevant proportional impact of the material(s) in question. This will also be required for a material with a BRE Environmental Profile which is specified as part of an element that differs from the elemental description on which that profile is based (see also relevant compliance note above). 2. Define the Environmental Product Declaration type and tier level (seeTable - 38 below) for the material(s) in question. Table - 38: The Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) type and tier ranking EPD tier level

EPD description

1

A third-party, independently verified EPD covering the whole life cycle (i.e. cradle-to-grave).

2

A third-party, independently verified EPD covering partial life cycle (i.e. cradle-to-gate or cradleto-gate with options*).

*Partial life cycle EPD can cover:

226

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

EPD tier level

Materials

EPD description

1. The product stage only. Such an EPD covers raw material supply, transport, manufacturing and associated processes; this EPD is said to be “cradle to gate”; 2. The product stage and selected further life cycle stages. Such an EPD is said to be “cradle to gate with options” In both cases, the above EPD must be produced in accordance with the requirements of the ISO 14020 series, particularly ISO 14025 and ISO 21930 2 (concerning environmental labels and declarations) and ISO 14040 3 and 14044 4 (concerning life cycle assessment).

3. Once the element’s Green Guide rating and the relevant material(s) proportional impact and EPD type and tier level have been defined, the points uplift can be calculated (see Table - 39 below). The BREEAM Mat 01 calculator does this by multiplying the material’s proportional impact by the maximum points uplift available for the Green Guide rating achieved for the element. The points uplift is then added to the points already achieved for that element’s generic Green Guide rating (see worked example below). The BREEAM Mat 01 calculator then continues its calculation procedure, as outlined in steps 2 and 3 above, to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved. Table - 39: Green Guide points uplift by EPD type Existing Green Guide Rating

Generic Green Guide rating Points

EPD Tier 1 Max points uplift

EPD Tier 2 Max. points uplift

A+

3.00

1.00

0.75

A

2.00

1.00

0.75

B

1.00

1.00

0.50

C

0.50

0.50

0.25

D

0.25

0.25

0.125

E

0.00

0.00

0.00

The points uplift for tier 1 has been linked to the points available for achieving generic Green Guide ratings. An element whose constituent materials have each had their life cycle impacts quantified and independently verified i.e. tier 1 EPD, will achieve a points uplift to the next level above that achieved for the elements generic Green Guide rating. The tier 2 points uplift is set relative to tier 1, based on the fact that a tier 2 EPD covers only part of the material/element life cycle i.e. cradle to gate and not the full life cycle i.e. cradle to grave. Example: The following is an example of the above calculation for a theoretical external wall specification with a generic Green Guide B rating (which equates to one point). External wall specification

Proportion of element impact

EPD tier

Points uplift

Load bearing concrete cladding

65%

1

0.65 x 1.0 = 0.65

Limestone finish

17%

None

0

Medium density solid block

10%

1

0.1 x 1.0 = 0.1

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

227

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

External wall specification

Proportion of element impact

EPD tier

Points uplift

Plasterboard and paint

5%

2

0.05 x 0.5 = 0.025

Insulation

3%

None

0

Total points uplift

0.78

Total points achieved for element

1.78

In the above example therefore, having product specific Environmental Product Declarations for 80% (by impact) of the Green Guide B rated element’s materials results in a points uplift of 0.78 (a 78% uplift on the element’s BREEAM performance in this instance). This uplift could make a difference in the number of BREEAM credits achieved for the building.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

1-5

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1-5

A copy of output from the BREEAM Mat 01 calculator tool,including Green Guide rating and element number for each specification assessed 1.

As design stage

Online Green Guide calculator output (where relevant). 6-8

A copy of the statement demonstrating benefit of the of using IMPACT compliant software (or equivalent) AND BRE Global email confirmation for receipt of the Model.

As design stage

1. Element numbers are unique but the available specifications may change. As a result assessors should keep a note of the element numbers they use to give Green Guide rating advice on BREEAM assessments for auditing purposes.

Additional information Relevant definitions BREEAM Mat 01 calculator A spreadsheet-based calculator required to determine the number of credits achieved for this BREEAM issue, based on each applicable element’s Green Guide rating. See Calculation procedures below for a description of how BREEAM determines the number of credits achieved for the life cycle impact of the building’s main material elements.

228

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Materials

Ecopoint The Ecopoint used in the Green Guide online is single score that measures the total environmental impact of a product or process as a proportion of overall impact occurring in Europe. The annual environmental impact caused by a typical European citizen therefore creates 100 Ecopoints. Green Guide ratings are derived by sub-dividing the range of Ecopoints/m2 achieved by all specifications considered within a building element. Environmental Product Declaration BS EN ISO 14025:2010 5 defines an environmental label or environmental declaration as a claim which indicates the environmental aspects of a product or service. BS EN ISO 14020:2001 6 goes on to state that environmental labels and declarations provide information about a product or service in terms of its overall environmental character, a specific environmental aspect, or any number of aspects. BRE’s Environmental Profile Methodology and Green Guide to Specification is an example of an EPD. Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) is the tool underpinning EPD and the LCA should conform to the requirements of the BS ISO 14040 series. BRE Environmental Profile Methodology BRE Environmental Profile Methodology and subsequent product certification involves calculating the ‘cradle to grave' environmental profile of a building material, product or system, and services. This is a measure of all key environmental impacts, during extraction, processing/manufacture, use (including maintenance and refurbishment) and disposal, over a 60-year study period. Once certified, environmental profiles are reviewed on an annual basis to ensure they remain valid, and are recalculated every three years. Frequently updated lists of building materials, products and systems assessed and certified under the Environmental Profiles Certification Scheme can be viewed at www.greenbooklive.com. The listing also includes the Green Guide rating for the approved products. Where a product specified is claiming certification against the BRE Environmental Profiles Methodology, the BREEAM assessor should ask for a copy of the certificate and its appendix (which contains characterised data, normalised data and the Ecopoints score) or the certificate number and certifying body from the relevant manufacturer or, alternatively, they can verify the claim via Green Book Live listings. The BREEAM assessor should include a reference to the BRE Global Approved certificate number in their assessment report. An example screenshot of a product specific Environmental Profile listing on GreenBook Live is provided in the Additional Information section of this issue. Green Guide to Specification The Green Guide to Specification is an easy-to-use comprehensive reference website and electronic tool, providing guidance for specifiers, designers and their clients on the relative environmental impacts for a range of different building elemental specifications. The generic elemental ratings within the online Guide are based on LCA data generated using the BRE Environmental Profiles Methodology. The Environmental Profiles Methodology has been peer reviewed to comply with BS ISO 14040 and represents the Product Category Rules for BRE Global’s environmental labeling scheme (EPD - ISO 14025, Type III) for construction products and elements. www.thegreenguide.org.uk Green Guide element number A unique BRE Global reference number given to a Green Guide rating for any particular building element type specification. Both standard Green Guide ratings and those calculated using the Online Green Guide calculator will have an element number. Online Green Guide calculator BRE Global have developed the online Green Guide Calculator to enable BREEAM and CSH assessors to quickly and efficiently generate Green Guide ratings for a significant proportion of specifications not listed in the Green Guide Online. The Green Guide Calculator database is based on the components currently used to create specifications within the Green Guide online. These components can be selected and combined to generate instant Green Guide ratings for a multitude of different specifications. To access the Green Guide Calculator, you must be a licensed BREEAM/EcoHomes/Code for Sustainable Homes Assessor. Please note that, at the time of writing, the Green Guide Calculator is not yet available for public use. Reused materials Reused materials are materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without further processing, or with only minor processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g. cleaning, cutting, fixing

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

229

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

to other materials). Specialist floor finishes For the purpose of BREEAM specialist floor finishes are defined as those which have been designed to meet specific high performance requirement such as chemical resistance, temperature resistance, impact resistance, thermal shock protection, electrical resistivity, anti-microbial and easy decontamination.

Other information Using the online Green Guide to Specification The Green Guide categorises ratings by building type and element. When using the Green Guide online, (www.thegreenguide.org.uk), the main page asks the user to select a building type from the following options: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Domestic Commercial (offices) Health Retail Industrial Education

To obtain the appropriate Green Guide ratings for the assessed building elements, select the category that corresponds to the assessed building type. See below for guidance on which category to select for building types not listed above. Please note there are a number of common building elements (see below) and therefore Green Guide ratings. As these elements are common, any building type can be selected to determine the appropriate rating (regardless of the actual nondomestic building type being assessed). Table - 40: Building type and the use of appropriate Green Guide ratings Building type

Green Guide ratings

Further or Higher Education buildings

When carrying out a BREEAM assessment of a Further or Higher Education building, in most cases the Green Guide ratings listed under the ‘Education’ category can be used. Alternatively, if the elemental specification of the building/space is more akin to a commercial, retail, industrial or health specification in terms of its Green Guide functional unit, then select and use the Green Guide ratings from the relevant the building type.

Prison buildings

To obtain appropriate ratings for elements that are not common (upper-floors, roofs and floor finishes), select the ‘healthcare’ category. For prison building types that are more akin to commercial buildings in their construction e.g. visitors’ centres, catering buildings, sports halls select the commercial category. These categories include ratings that are most appropriate to the elemental specifications used for these types of prison buildings.

Law court buildings

To obtain appropriate Green Guide ratings for elements that are not common (internal walls, roof, upper floor slab and floor finishes) select the ‘schools’ category for court buildings. This category includes ratings that are most appropriate to the elemental specifications used for this building type. For floor finishes, it is permissible to select flooring from another building type other than schools, if the function/use in the assessed building is more appropriate to that type.

Other buildings

For many other building types assessed it may be clear which category of building type to select for Green Guide purposes (for elements that are not common). If it is not clear the BREEAM assessor will need to contact BRE Global for advice, supplying a description of the building including the relevant function(s). BRE Global will then confirm to the BREEAM assessor the appropriate category to select.

Common

The following elements, for the purpose of non-domestic buildings, have common Green Guide ratings

230

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Building type

Green Guide ratings

elements

irrespective of the building type: 1. External walls 2. Landscaping 3. Windows - commercial The user can therefore search for ratings for the above elements under any building category.

Materials

Guidance for the assessment of floor finishes The Green Guide online, under each building type, has categories of flooring specifications commonly used for the key floor areas for that building type. For example, the Retail category contains ratings for hard and soft floor finish specifications for public access areas based on the functional unit for that type of space. However, any given building will normally contain several different floor areas with different wear requirements. Therefore, the BREEAM Assessor will need to refer to floor finishes under other building type categories to find the relevant specification and Green Guide rating for the building (if floor finishes are one of the applicable elements). For example, for ‘back of house’ office and corridor areas in a retail development, it will be necessary to search the floor finishes specifications and ratings under the ‘commercial’ category of the Green Guide online. To aid users of the Green Guide online, there is a diagram that will direct you to the appropriate ratings to be used for other floor areas. The diagram is found in the guidance under the Floor Finishes category. Specialist floor finishes in operational areas of buildings fall outside the scope of the Green Guide. This is due to the specific high performance requirements of the specifications, such as chemical, temperature and/or impact resistance etc., all of which limit the options available for specification. For this reason such floor finishes can be omitted from the assessment.

IMPACT (Integrated Material Profile And Costing Tool) IMPACT is a specification and database for software developers to incorporate into their tools to enable consistent Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) and Life Cycle Costing (LCC). IMPACT compliant tools work by allowing the user to attribute environmental and cost information to drawn or scheduled items in the BIM. IMPACT takes quantity information from the BIM and multiplies this by environmental impact and/or cost ‘rates’ to produce an overall impact and cost for the whole (or a selected part) of the design. The results generated by IMPACT allow the user to: analyse the design to optimise cost and environmental impacts. compare whole-building results to a suitable benchmark to assess performance, which can be linked to building assessment schemes. The benefit of BIM enabled whole-building assessment is that the calculations are based on real design data and accurate quantities, rather than generic specifications for particular building elements. IMPACT compliant tools also allow users to accurately model the life cycle performance of primary structures and substructures, which are not covered by the Green Guide to Specification. IMPACT was developed by an industry consortium led by BRE. The work was funded by the UK’s Technology Strategy Board. Further information about IMPACT and IMPACT compliant software tools (identified by the IMPACT compliant logo) is available from www.impactwba.com

Submission of an IMPACT (or equivalent) BIM BRE Global requires the submission of the Building Information Model (BIM) from the IMPACT compliant software tool (or equivalent) in order to: Facilitate the establishment of robust building level life cycle performance benchmarks in BREEAM. This will enable future BREEAM versions to recognise and reward those designs which achieve above average performance. Fulfil BREEAM Quality Assurance requirements Conduct further research using data from real life projects.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

231

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Any data supplied to BRE Global will be treated in confidence and the use of BIM data for research purposes will ensure individual projects are unidentifiable.

Tools equivalent to but not compliant with IMPACT Tools that are considered by BRE Global to be equivalent to an IMPACT Compliant tool will be eligible for the same Exemplary credits. Equivalence will be judged by BRE Global based on the following:Suitability of the BIM content for refining benchmarks Format in which the BIM is transmitted. Please contact BRE Global at the earliest opportunity to establish equivalence status of a non-IMPACT compliant software tool.

Indoor Air Quality and the Green Guide flooring category ratings The Green Guide Online does not cover the potential health and wellbeing issues associated with flooring materials and indoor air quality, this impact is covered in BREEAM issue Hea 02 Indoor air quality.

Screenshot of a specification from the BRE Green Guide Online

232

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 01 Life cycle impacts

Materials

Screenshot of a product specific Environmental Profile listing on GreenBook Live

1At the time of publishing the pre-live version of this Scheme Document (March 2011) this Online Green Guide Calculator

functionality is not present. 2BS EN ISO 21930:2007 Sustainability in building construction. Environmental declaration of building products. BSi, 2007. 3BS EN ISO 14040:2006 Environmental management. Life cycle assessment. Principles and framework. BSi, 2006 4BS EN ISO 14044:2006 Environmental management. Life cycle assessment. Requirements and guidelines. BSi, 2006 5BS EN ISO 14025:2010, Environmental labels and declarations - Type III environmental declarations, Principles and procedures. BSi, 2010. 6BS EN ISO 14020, Environmental labels and declarations - General principles. BSi, 2001.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

233

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection Number of credits available

Minimum standards

1

No

Aim To recognise and encourage the specification of materials for boundary protection and external hard surfaces that have a low environmental impact, taking account of the full life cycle of materials used.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit

1. Where at least 80% of all external hard landscaping and 80% of all boundary protection (by area) in the construction zone achieves an A or A+ rating, as defined in the Green Guide to Specification. Green Guide ratings for the specification (s) of each element can be found at www.thegreenguide.org.uk

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Shell and core applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Simple buildings applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific

234

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 02 Hard landscaping and boundary protection

Materials

Ref

Terms

Description

CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

Green Guide Online

When using the Green Guide for the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, ratings for landscaping elements are common across all building types. The rating will therefore be the same irrespective of the building type selected via the Green Guide online.

CN5

Finding exact Green Guide ratings

Whilst exact matches in specifications are not always found, it should be possible to identify a similar specification and use its rating for the purposes of assessment. Where no similar specification can be found, seek guidance from BRE for the appropriate rating.

CN6

Green Guide rating via Environmental Profile Certification

Where applicable, products with Environmental Profiles Certification can be used to demonstrate compliance with this BREEAM issue. Products are certified with a “product specific” Green Guide rating and this rating can be used in the same way as a generic Green Guide rating. See Mat 01 Life cycle impacts – Methodology for more information.

CN7

Minor alteration of existing elements

Where there is hard landscaping or boundary protection which is to remain as existing, then provided no more than 20% of the total area of the existing hard landscaping and boundary protection elements are subject to minor alterations, repair or maintenance, these elements can be awarded an A+ rating for the purposes of determining compliance with this issue.

CN8

No hard landscaping or boundary protection

If one of the elements is not present, e.g. boundary protection, then the credit must be assessed on the basis of the specification of the single element e.g. hard landscaping. Where the development has neither element, the credit can be awarded.

CN9

Building façade forming boundary

Any part of an external building elevation (of either the assessed building or any other neighbouring building) that forms a part of the site boundary should be excluded from the assessment of this credit.

CN10

Existing natural features

Any existing or specified natural boundary protection (such as hedging or other living barrier) should be awarded with an A+ rating for the purposes of this analysis.

General

Building type specific CN11

Prison buildings Secure Perimeter Zones/Areas

The criteria for hard surfaces are applicable only to those areas outside of the secure perimeter zone, but within the overall curtilage of the site. The criteria for boundary protection apply to all specifications within the secure perimeter zone and external zone, including its borders and curtilage, i.e. the whole site. The criteria DO NOT apply to the secure perimeter fence, wall or any other fencing subject to security standards.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

235

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

All

The Green Guide rating and element number for the assessed specifications.

As design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Construction zone For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as the site and its boundary which is being developed for the BREEAM assessed building and the external site areas that fall within the scope of the new works. Green Guide Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Green Guide Element Number Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Scope of hard landscaping For the purpose of assessment, hard landscaping includes (but is not limited to) parking areas (including manoeuvring areas,lanes, roads within the parking area), pedestrian walkways, paths, patios. The definition excludes basement parking, access or approach roads and designated vehicle manoeuvring areas, balconies, roof terraces, specialist sports areas (running tracks,netball areas etc.) and retaining walls.

Other information None.

236

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials

Materials

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials Please note: BRE Global are currently consulting on a common set of criteria and process for the evaluation of schemes for Responsible Sourcing of Materials (RSM) in BREEAM. This work will impact on the way in which BREEAM recognises RSM schemes and their relative ranking. As a result of this work the BREEAM tier table of RSM schemes will be updated and, in future, regularly revisited as RSM schemes are developed and evolve. It will be hosted on the BREEAM website in future to enable this updating rather than being included in the scheme manual itself. Further information on the proposals and the consultation process can be found at http://www.breeam.org/page.jsp?id=617. This work will be completed in May 2014 prior to the launch of the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 for new project registrations. Number of credits available

Minimum standards

4

Yes (Criterion 1 only)

Aim To recognise and encourage the specification of responsibly sourced materials for key building elements.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Pre-requisite

1. All timber used on the project is 'Legally harvested and traded timber'. Note: a. It is a minimum requirement for achieving a certified BREEAM rating certification (for any rating level) that compliance with criterion 1 is confirmed. b. For other materials there areno pre-requisite requirements at this stage.

One credit - Sustainable Procurement Plan

2. The principal contractor sources materials for the project in accordance with a sustainable procurement plan (see the Relevant definitions in the Additional information section).

Up to 3 credits - Responsible sourcing of materials (RSM)

3. The available credits (refer to Table - 41 ) can be awarded where the applicable building and hard landscaping materials (refer to Table - 42) are responsibly sourced in accordance with the BREEAM methodology, as defined in steps 1-4 in the Methodology section (below).

Table - 41: The number of BREEAM credits achieved is determined as follows RSM credits

% of available RSM points achieved

3

TBC

2

TBC

1

TBC

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

237

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve one innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 4. Where (TBC)% of the available RSM points are achieved.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance is applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

A government licence See criterion 1.

A government licence e.g. a UK Forestry Commission felling licence certificate, can be used to provide evidence of legally sourced timber but does not meet the definition of a third party timber certification scheme and so does not comply with the responsible sourcing requirements of this issue.

CN5

Sustainable procurement plan See criterion 2.

For design stage assessments where the principle contractor has not yet been appointed, a specification or a letter of intent from the party responsible for appointing the principal contractor must be provided confirming a requirement for the principal contractor to have in place a sustainable procurement plan. Refer toThe BREEAM evidential requirements section for more guidance on providing letters of commitment.

CN6

Responsible sourcing certification schemes and their

A table of responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised under BREEAM, their scope and associated tier levels can be found at www.TBC.com (TBC). This table is reviewed on a regular basis and BREEAM Assessors must ensure they use the current table.

General

238

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials

Ref

Terms

Materials

Description

tier levels See criterion 3. CN7

Checking responsible sourcing claims See criterion 3.

Confirmation of manufacturers and suppliers claims should be sought from the relevant responsible sourcing scheme provider. Many of the organisations who administer certification schemes will, via their website, list companies and products that have been certified against their standards, including the scope of any such certification. Some schemes, including BES 6001 via www.greenbooklive.com, will provide downloadable copies of the relevant certificate, which can in turn be used as evidence of compliance for this BREEAM issue.

CN8

Specified reused materials See criterion 3.

Reused materials specified for the development are considered equivalent to materials covered by certification schemes that fall within tier (TBC) of the Responsible Sourcing Tier Levels and Criteria.

CN9

Route 1 Percentage of specification for the applicable material to be responsibly sourced. See Step 2 in theMethodology section.

Step 2 under Route 1 requires all specifications for an applicable material type to have a valid certificate from the recognised scheme, for that material type to be eligible to contribute toward achieving BREEAM credits. Recognising that in some instances there may be a specification that does not have a responsible sourcing certificate, provided at least 95% of the applicable material consists of specifications covered by a recognised responsible sourcing scheme then the applicable material type can still be considered eligible for contributing toward achieving the credits. In such instances detailed calculations demonstrating the 95% level are not required, provided the assessor is satisfied that the project information shows that this level is exceeded. If there is reasonable doubt the assessor should consider asking the project team for further information to verify and reference this accordingly in their assessment report.

Methodology There are two routes to demonstrating compliance with this issue. Either route may be followed for any situation: Route 1 is intended for use in the majority of situations. Route 2 is intended for situations where a more detailed analysis is possible sufficient detail is available on materials and supply chains.

Route 1 : Lowest tier level ranking The following steps outline the methodology to be followed for this route to determine the number of credits achieved for responsible sourcing. Each of these steps outlined are undertaken using the BREEAM Mat 03 calculator and the relevant project information collated by the assessor.

Step 1 Identify from Table - 42Table - 42 the materials specified or present in and usedfor the construction of the building being assessed. Where composite products (such as windows, doors, etc.) are present these must be broken down into constituent materials. Only materials that make up significant majority (at least 80%) of the product must be considered. Note : The list below is included for indicative purposes at present. The categorisation of materials is currently under review and this list will be amended before the scheme is finalised

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

239

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Table - 42: Applicable materials (building and associated hard-landscaping) Bulk Materials - TBC 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Structural timber In situ concrete Precast concrete Structural metals. Cladding metals Engineering bricks Facing Bricks Other ceramics (including clay tiles) Fabric insulation Building services insulation

Other materials - TBC 1. Non-structural timber, timber composite and wood panels (including glulam, plywood,Oriented strand board (OSB), Medium Density Fibreboard(MDF), chipboard and cement bonded particleboard) 2. Stone and gravel, including dressed and building stone 3. Gypsum 4. Cementitious materials: mortars, plasterboard, plaster, cementitious renders 5. Glass 6. Bituminous materials, including roofing membranes and asphalt 7. Plastics and polymers, including rubbers,Ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM),Thermoplastic PolyOlefin (TPO), Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), and VET roofing and other membranes and polymeric renders 8. Pavers (concrete, clay)

Step 2 For each material type identified as applicable in step 1, determine for each specification whether or not it is covered by a BREEAM recognised Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme certificate. Ensure at least [number TBC ] materials from the bulk materials (relevant to the building) list have been responsibly sourced. Visit webpage www.TBC.com (TBC) for the most up-to-date list of BREEAM recognised Responsible Sourcing Certification Schemes (see Additional information section), their scope and corresponding tier level. To be eligible to contribute towards achieving BREEAM credits for responsible sourcing of materials, 'all specifications' (see CN9 ) for the applicable material type must have a valid certificate from the recognised scheme.

Step 3 Using, determine the appropriate number of Responsible Sourcing BREEAM points for each applicable material type identified in step 1 and deemed compliant in step 2. Table - 43: Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme tier levels and corresponding BREEAM ‘responsible sourcing of materials’ points.

240

Tier level

Points for bulk materials

Points for other materials

TBC

TBC

TBC

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials

Materials

Note: 1. The tier rank is determined based on the rigour of responsible sourcing demonstrated by the supplier (s ) or manufacturer(s) of that material or element (through responsible sourcing certification schemes) See CN6 for information on BREEAM recognised Responsible Sourcing Certification Schemes and their tier levels. 2. Where responsibly sourced materials within a single materials category fall into a mix of tier levels the lower tier level must be considered for allocation of points.

Step 4 Determine the percentage of points achieved as a proportion of the points available. This percentage is then compared with the credit allocation Table - 41 (see the assessment criteria section above) and the relevant number of credits awarded. The points available are the sum of the number of applicable materials (determined in step 1) multiplied by the highest number of points available for a Responsible Sourcing Certification Scheme in the top tier level.

Route 2: Proportion of materials responsibly sourced This route allows for a more detail analysis of the responsibly sourced materials in a building where a wide range of specifications are used within the material categories in Table 2 above. It follows a similar methodology to that set out for Route 1 above but allows for a detailed calculation of the impact of varying specifications and supply chains based on the relative quantities of materials present. The alculation procedure is set out in the guidance note GNXX (TBC) available on the BREEAM Assessor Extranet. Please review this document for detailed description of the methodology including the allocation of points and credits.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

See ‘The BREEAM evidential requirements’ section for a list of general evidence types that can be used to demonstrate compliance with the relevant criteria for this issue.

All

A copy of the completed BREEAM Mat 03 calculator for the project.

Additional information Relevant definitions BREEAM Mat 03 Calculator A calculator tool used by the BREEAM Assessor to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved for BREEAM issue Mat 03. BREEAM recognised responsible sourcing certification schemes These are third party schemes evaluated and approved by BRE Global for recognition under BREEAM. Please visit www.TBC.com for information on the evaluation criteria and the process for the evaluation and acceptance of schemes, including application and appeals. Chain of custody (CoC) This is a process used to maintain and document the chronological history of the evidence/path for products from forests to consumers. Timber must be tracked from the certified forest to the finished product. All the steps, from

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

241

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

the transportation of timber from the forest to a sawmill until it reaches the customer, must maintain adequate inventory control systems that allow for separation and identification of the certified product. Chain of custody certification ensures that a facility has procedures in place to track timber from certified forests and avoid confusion with non-certified timber. Chain of custody is established and audited according to the rules of relevant forest certification systems. See also definition of CITES below. Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES) The Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of wild fauna and flora (CITES) works by subjecting international trade in specimens of selected species to certain controls. All import, export, re-export and introduction from the sea of species covered by the Convention has to be authorised through a licensing system. Each Party to the Convention must designate one or more Management Authorities in charge of administering that licensing system and one or more Scientific Authorities to advise them on the effects of trade on the status of the species. The species covered by CITES are listed in three Appendices, according to the degree of protection they need. 1. Appendix I includes species threatened with extinction. Trade in specimens of these species is permitted only in exceptional circumstances. 2. Appendix II includes species not necessarily threatened with extinction but in which trade must be controlled in order to avoid utilisation incompatible with their survival. 3. Appendix III contains species that are protected in at least one country, which has asked other CITES Parties for assistance in controlling the trade. Appendices I and II of the CITES list illustrate species of timber that are protected outright. Appendix III of the CITES list illustrates species that are protected in at least one country. If a timber species used in the development is on Appendix III it can be included as part of the assessment as long as the timber is not obtained from the country/countries seeking to protect this species. Composite material Composite material can be defined as an engineered material made from two or more constituent materials with significantly different physical or chemical properties and which remain separate and distinct on a macroscopic level within the finished structure. Resin based composites such as glass reinforced plastic and polymeric render and timber composites such as chipboardor particleboard, MDF, OSB, plywood, hardboard, laminated veneered lumber, glulam and cement bonded particleboard are all required to be assessed for responsible sourcing. Legally harvested and traded timber BREEAM follows the UK government's definition of legally sourced timber, as outlined in the Central Point of Expertise on Timber (CPET) 5th Edition report on the UK Government Timber Procurement Policy, which states that legal timber and wood derived products are those that originate from a forest where the following criteria are met: 1. The forest owner/manager holds legal use rights to the forest. 2. There is compliance by both the forest management organisation and any contractors with local and national legal criteria including those relevant to: a. Forest management b. Environment c. Labour and welfare d. Health and safety e. Other parties’ tenure and use rights f. All relevant royalties and taxes are paid. 3. There is full compliance with the criteria of CITES. Relevant documentation demonstrating the above must be provided or made available on request subject to the availability of such materials in the country concerned. The policy requires all timber and wood-derived products to be from only: 1. Independently verifiable legal and sustainable sources OR 2. Forest Law Enforcement, Governance and Trade (FLEGT) - licensed timber or equivalent sources. Further information on the UK Government's Timber Procurement Policy and compliant responsible sourcing certification schemes is available from the CPET (Central Point of Expertise on Timber) website www.cpet.org.uk/.

242

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials

Materials

Pre-consumer waste stream Waste material generated during manufacturing processes; this excludes reuse of materials such as rework, regrind or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it. Post-consumer waste stream Waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial and institutional facilities in their role as endusers of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. This includes returns of material from the distribution chain. Responsible sourcing The management and implementation of sustainable development principles in the provision, procurement and traceability of construction materials and components. In BREEAM, this is demonstrated through auditable third party certification schemes. Visit webpage www.link.com (TBC) for a table of responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised by BRE Global Ltd for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment. Reused materials Materials that can be extracted from the waste stream and used again without further processing, or with only minor processing, that does not alter the nature of the material (e.g. cleaning, cutting, fixing to other materials). Recycled material Materials diverted from the pre-consumer and/or post-consumer waste streams that require significant processing before they can be used again. For further information please see Calculating and declaring recycled content in construction products, 'Rules of Thumb' Guide (WRAP, 2008) www.wrap.org.uk Sustainable Procurement Plan A plan that sets out a framework for responsible sourcing of materials to guide procurement throughout a project. The plan may be prepared and adopted at an organisational level or be site/project specific and for the purposes of BREEAM compliance, will cover the following as a minimum: 1. Risks and opportunities are identified against a broad range of social, environmental and economic issues. BS 8902:2009 Responsible sourcing sector certification schemes for construction products- Specification can be used as a guide to identify these issues. 2. Aims, objectives and targets to guide sustainable procurement activities. 3. Strategic assessment of sustainably sourced materials available locally and nationally. There should be a policy to procure materials locally where possible. 4. Procedures are in place to check and verify that the sustainable procurement plan is being implemented/adhered to on individual projects. These could include setting out measurement criteria, methodology and performance indicators to assess progress and demonstrate success. Tier levels A graded scale to reflect the rigour of the certification scheme used to demonstrate responsible sourcing, forming the basis for awarding points and credits in the BREEAM issue Mat 03. Visit webpage www.TBC.com (TBC) for a table of responsible sourcing certification schemes recognised by BRE Global Ltd for the purposes of a BREEAM assessment.

Other information BES 6001:2008 Framework Standard for Responsible Sourcing of Construction Products This is a BRE Global standard that provides a framework for the assessment and certification of the responsible sourcing of construction products. The Standard has been structured so that compliance can be demonstrated through a combination of meeting the requirements of other recognised certification schemes, establishing written policies, setting objectives and targets and engaging with relevant stakeholders. To comply with the standard a product must meet a number of mandatory criteria. Where a product demonstrates compliance beyond the mandatory levels, higher levels of performance can be achieved. The standard's performance ratings range from Pass to Good, Very Good and Excellent.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

243

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

The development of this standard and subsequent certification schemes will, it is envisaged, provide construction products, not wholly covered under current recognised standards, a means for demonstrating their responsibly sourced credentials. In turn this will allow clients, developers and design teams to specify responsibly sourced construction products with greater assurance and provide a means of demonstrating compliance with the assessment criteria for this BREEAM issue. To view a list of products approved to BES 6001 and additional information about the standard visit: www.greenbooklive.com

Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) and Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC) validity A CPET document may be helpful to assessors with respect to determining the validity of FSC and PEFC certificates. See www.cpet.org.uk.

244

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 04 Insulation

Materials

Mat 04 Insulation Number of credits available

Minimum standards

1

No

Aim To recognise and encourage the use of thermal insulation which has a low embodied environmental impact relative to its thermal properties

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit- Embodied impact

1. Any new insulation specified for use within the following building elements must be assessed: a. External walls b. Ground floor c. Roof d. Building services 2. The Insulation index for the building fabric and services insulation is the same as or greater than 2.5. See Mat 04 Insulation section for a description of calculating the Insulation index.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Shell and core applicable assessment criteria

Embodied Impact - Criteria 1-2 Both options: All new insulating products being specified or installed by the developer must be accounted for in the assessment of this issue. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

245

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN2

Simple buildings applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Insulation incorporated as part of an off-site manufactured element

If the insulation is incorporated as a component of an element that has been manufactured offsite (in order to maximise material optimisation) e.g. a wall or roof, and that element has been assessed as part of Mat 01, then for the purpose of assessing the insulation for this BREEAM issue, a Green Guide rating of A+ should be used. The same rule applies to insulation that has a significant additional function, such as providing supporting structure e.g. structural insulated panels (SIPS). In the Green Guide the actual insulation will be listed within the element title, rather than under the generic insulation category.

General CN4

Building type specific CN5

Building specific guidance

No building specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Methodology Insulation index calculation The Insulation Index is calculated using the BREEAM Mat 04 calculator which uses the following calculation methodology: For each type of thermal insulation used in the relevant building elements, the volume weighted thermal resistance provided by each type of insulation is calculated as follows: 1. (Area of insulation (m2) x thickness(m))/Thermal Conductivity (W/m.K) OR 2. Total volume of insulation used (m3)/Thermal conductivity (W/m.K) The volume weighted thermal resistance for each insulation material is then multiplied by the relevant Green Guide point(s) from the following table to give the Green Guide Rating corrected value: Table - 44: Green Guide rating points/element Green Guide rating

Points/element

A+

3

A

2

246

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 04 Insulation

Materials

Green Guide rating

Points/element

B

1

C

0.5

D

0.25

E

0

To calculate the Insulation Index, the sum of the Green Guide rating corrected values for all insulating elements is divided by the sum of the volume weighted thermal resistance values (See example calculation below). Note a. Where more than one insulation type is present for a given element, the rating, area and conductivity for each insulation type should be entered into the BREEAM Mat 04 calculator and an average is calculated (by volume). b. Where no similar insulation can be found assessors should seek guidance from BRE on the appropriate rating. c. Where an independently verified third-party Environmental Product Declaration (EPD), covering part of or the whole life cycle, is available for an insulating material/product, this can be used to increase the contribution of that material/product to the building’s Mat 04 performance See below for more detail.

Example calculation as carried out by the BREEAM Mat 04 calculator The Insulation Index is calculated for a building using the following types of insulation: Type 1 Walls Area = 450m2. Thermal insulation thickness = 100mm. Thermal conductivity = 0.023 W/mK Green Guide rating = A (2 points) Volume weighted thermal resistance: ((450x0.100)/0.023) = 1956 Green Guide rating correction: 1956 x 2.0 = 3912 Type 2 Building Services Volume of insulation used = 21m3. Thermal conductivity = 0.022 W/mK Green Guide rating = C (0.5 points) Volume weighted thermal resistance: (21/0.022) = 955 Green Guide rating correction: 955 x 0.5 = 477 Type 3 Roof Area = 210m2. Thermal insulation thickness = 120mm. Thermal conductivity = 0.027 W/mK Green Guide rating = A+ (3 points) Volume weighted thermal resistance: ((210x0.120)/0.027) = 933 Green Guide rating correction: 933 x 3.0 = 2799 Type 4 Ground Floor Area = 210m2. Thermal insulation thickness = 120mm. Thermal conductivity = 0.027 W/mK Green Guide rating = B (1 point) Volume weighted thermal resistance: ((210x0.120)/0.027) = 933 Green Guide rating correction: 933 x 1.0 = 933

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

247

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Total volume weighted thermal resistance = 1956+955+933+933 = 4777 Green Guide rating correction = 3912 + 477 + 2799 +933 = 8121 Insulation Index: Green Guide Rating Correction/Total volume weighted thermal resistance = 8121/4777 = 1.7 (credit not achieved)

Calculation procedure where a specific Environmental Product Declaration is available for a material Please refer to Mat 01 Life cycle impacts – Methodology Note: Step 1 of the Methodology outlined in BREEAM issue Mat 01 (the proportion of the total environmental impact of the assessed element) is not applicable for this issue as the insulation is assessed as a single material in BREEAM issue Mat 04 and not as part of a larger building element containing other materials (as in BREEAM issue Mat 01).

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1-2

Copy of the output from the BREEAM Mat 04 calculator tool.

As design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Environmental Product Declaration Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Green Guide Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Green Guide element number Mat 01 Life cycle impacts Insulation index A measure of performance used in BREEAM that seeks to assess the thermal properties of insulation products used in the building relevant to the embodied impact of that insulating material. BREEAM Mat 04 calculator A spreadsheet based tool used by the BREEAM assessor to determine the Insulation Index and therefore, whether the BREEAM credit is achieved. Materials optimisation Material optimisation means adopting a resource efficient approach to design which results in less material being used in the design (i.e. lean design), and/or less waste is produced in the construction process, without compromising the design concept. Whilst this assessment issue is focused on the embodied impact of the insulation material specified, the design team should consider solutions that optimise the use of the material and therefore minimise construction waste.See Mat 06 Material efficiency for more information.

248

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 04 Insulation

Materials

Other information None

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

249

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience Number of credits available

Minimum standards

1

No

Aim To recognise and encourage adequate protection of exposed elements of the building and landscape, therefore minimising the frequency of replacement and maximising materials optimisation.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit Protecting vulnerable parts of the building from damage. 1. The building incorporates suitable durability and protection measures or designed features/solutions to prevent damage to vulnerable parts of the internal and external building and landscaping elements. This must include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Protection from the effects of high pedestrian traffic in main entrances, public areas and thoroughfares (corridors, lifts, stairs, doors etc). b. Protection against any internal vehicular/trolley movement within 1m of the internal building fabric in storage, delivery, corridor and kitchen areas. c. Protection against, or prevention from, any potential vehicular collision where vehicular parking and manoeuvring occurs within 1m of the external building façade for all car parking areas and within 2m for all delivery areas.

Protecting exposed parts of the building from material degradation 2. The relevant building elements incorporate appropriate design and specification measures to limit material degradation due to environmental factors. See Table - 45 under 'Checklists and tables' for list of applicable elements, environmental factors and material degradation effects to consider.

Checklists and tables Table - 45: Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradations effects to consider. Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradation effects Applicable building elements 1. Foundation/substructure/lowest floor/retaining walls 2. External walls 3. Roof/balconies

250

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience

Materials

Applicable building elements, environmental factors and material degradation effects 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Glazing: windows,skylight External doors Railings/Balusters (where exposed to external environment) Cladding (where exposed to external environment) Staircase/ramps (where exposed to external environment) Hard landscaping

Environmental factors 1. Environmental agents, including: a. Solar radiation b. Temperature variation c. Water/Moisture d. Wind e. Precipitation e.g rain and snow f. Extreme weather conditions: High wind speeds, flooding, driving rain, snow 2. Biological Agents, including: a. Vegetation b. Pests, insects c. Pollutants, including: d. Air contaminants e. Ground contaminants Material degradation effects (includes, but not necessarily limited to the following) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Corrosion Dimensional change, e.g. swelling or shrinkage Fading/discolouration Rotting Leaching Blistering Melting Salt crystallisation Abrasion

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Shell and core applicable assessment criteria

Protecting vulnerable parts of the building from damage - Criterion 1 Where vulnerable elements identified form part of the shell and core developer’s remit. Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply and must be accounted for in the assessment of this issue. Where vulnerable elements identified are internal and do not form a part of the shell and core developer's remit, i.e. they are in speculative areas and compliance is

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

251

Materials

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description subject to the tenants/future occupiers fit-out specification: Both options: These areas can be excluded from assessment. Protecting exposed parts of the building from material degradation - Criterion 2 Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Simple buildings applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

Suitable durability measures See criterion 1

Suitable durability and protection measures to vulnerable parts of the building can include: 1. Bollards/barriers/raised kerbs to delivery and vehicle drop-off areas 2. Robust external wall construction, up to 2m high 3. Corridor walls specified to Severe Duty (SD) as per BS 5234-2 1 and, for healthcare buildings, see CN8.2 4. Protection rails to walls of corridors 5. Kick plates/impact protection (from trolleys etc) on doors 6. Hard-wearing and easily washable floor finishes in heavily used circulation areas (i.e. main entrance, corridors, public areas etc) 7. Designing out the risk without the need for additional materials specification to protect vulnerable areas.

CN5

Vehicle impact protection See criterion 1c

Any vehicle impact protection measures specified must be positioned at an adequate distance from the building to protect the fabric from impact from any vehicle with a measurable overhang of the body from the wheel track, in particular for any goods delivery areas. In vehicle movement areas only; where the specification of external robust wall construction is specified to comply with the credit, additional protection must be provided to ensure against potential damage to the robust façade from vehicle movement, i.e. specifying bollards or protection rails.

CN6

Preventing excessive material use

The specification or design measures chosen should reflect the need to balance the additional specification of materials with the need to protect building elements to minimise their replacement, insuring against excessive material use and promoting materials optimisation.

CN7

Public/Common Areas

Consideration should be given to materials specification in public/common areas (especially public waiting areas and toilet areas) to provide protection against

General

252

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 05 Designing for durability and resilience

Ref

Terms

Materials

Description potential malicious or physical abuse in as far as it is possible.

Building type specific CN8

Healthcare : Suitable durability measures for corridor walls

The following lists the Standards or/ Building Regulations etc. relevant for the provision of durability measures for corridor walls England Health Building Note 00-10: Part B Walls and ceilings, Department of Health, 2013 Norhtern Ireland same as England. Wales Welsh Health Building Note 00-10: Part B Walls and ceilings, NHS Wales, 2014 3 Scotland Scottish Health Technical Memorandum 58: Partitions, NHS National Services Scotland, 2006 4 .

Methodology Protecting exposed parts of the building from material degradation The following outlines the process to assess criterion 2. 1. Identify from the list of ‘applicable building elements’ under Table - 45 the elements that are appropriate to the building being assessed. 2. Establish from the ‘environmental factors’ list those factors that are likely to cause material degradation effects in the identified applicable building elements. 3. Confirm the design and specification measures in place to limit these degradation effects. 4. The assessor should use their professional judgement in determining whether the measures proposed are appropriate in terms of demonstrating compliance and meeting the aim of the criterion/issue.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Materials efficiency Refer to BREEAM issue Mat 04 Insulation

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

253

Materials

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Other information None 1BS 5234-2: Partitions (including matching linings) – Specification for performance criteria for strength and robustness

including methods of test, BSI1992. 2Health Building Note 00-10: Part B Walls and ceilings, Department of Health, 2013 3Welsh Health Building Note 00-10: Part B Walls and ceilings, NHS Wales, 2014 4Scottish Health Technical Memorandum 58: Partitions, NHS National Services Scotland, 2006

254

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 06 Material efficiency

Materials

Mat 06 Material efficiency Number of credits available

Minimum standards

1

No

Aim To recognise and encourage measures to optimise material efficiency in order to minimise environmental impact of material use and waste.

Assessment criteria The following is required to show compliance for:

One credit

1. Opportunities and measures to optimise the use of materials in building design, procurement, construction, maintenance and end of life have been identified,investigated and implemented by the design/construction team as appropriate in consultation with the relevant parties (see CN4) at each of the following RIBA stages: a. Preparation and Brief b. Concept Design c. Development Design d. Technical Design e. Construction

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

255

Materials

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

assessment criteria

guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Relevant parties

All parties involved in the design, specification and/or construction of the building should be consulted. This includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Client/developer 2. Cost consultant 3. Architect 4. Engineers - Structural,civil 5. Building services engineer - mechanical, electrical 6. Principal contractor 7. Demolition/strip out contractor 8. Environmental consultant 9. Project management consultant 10. Materials/component manufacturers/suppliers

General CN4

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Material efficiency The process of undertaking a building project to enable the most efficient use of materials over the lifecycle of the building and its component. This includes using fewer materials, reusing existing demolition/strip-out materials and, where appropriate, procuring materials with higher levels of recycled content 1 It may also include the adoption of alternative means of design/construction that result in lower materials usage and lower wastage levels including offsite manufacture and use of pre-assembled service pods.

256

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Mat 06 Material efficiency

Materials

Other information Specifying materials for resource efficiency The construction industry accounts for approximately 55% of the total annual materials consumption and 50% of total CO2e. It is also responsible for 30% of total UK water use and 35% of arising waste. The breakdown of global industrial carbon emissions shows that 55% is used to make five stock materials- steel (25%), cement (19%), paper (4%), plastic and aluminium (3%).

Tools for achieving material efficiency The following provide frameworks for the consideration and review of resource efficiency in design and construction:

BS 8895 Designing for material efficiency in buildings projects - Part 1 : Code of practice for Strategic Definition and Preparation and Brief standard outlines specific material efficiency process, key tasks, team members and their responsibilities and outputs specific to each RIBA Work Stage along with supporting guidance and tools. This serves as a useful tool to assist the design team in developing and implementing material efficiency strategies for their developments.

WRAP Designing out Waste: A design team guide for buildings. This standard outlines five principles of designing out waste and can be applied during design development, and serve as prompts for investigating opportunities for material efficiency in design. 1BS 8895: Designing for material efficiency in building projects- Part1: Code of practice for Strategic Definition and

Preparation and Brief. BSI, 2013.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

257

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Waste

258

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 01 Construction waste management

Waste

Wst 01 Construction waste management Number of credits available

Minimum standards

4

Yes

Aim To promote resource efficiency via the effective management and reduction of construction waste.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Construction resource efficiency (3 credits) Diversion of resources from landfill (1 credit). The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

Up to three credits - Construction resource efficiency

1. Where a Construction Resource Management Plan (CRMP) has been developed covering the non-hazardous waste related to onsite construction and offsite manufacture or fabrication (including demolition and excavation waste) generated by the building’s design and construction (see CN4). 2. Where construction waste related to on-site construction and off-site manufacture/fabrication (excluding demolition and excavation waste) meets or is lower than the following Table - 46:

Table - 46: Construction waste resource efficiency benchmarks BREEAM credits

Amount of waste generated per 100m2 (gross internal floor area) m3

tonnes

≤ 13.3

≤ 11.1

Two credits

≤ 7.5

≤ 6.5

Three credits

≤ 3.4

≤ 3.2

Exemplary level

≤ 1.6

≤ 1.9

One credit

Note - Volume (m3) is actual volume of waste (not bulk volume). 3. Where existing buildings on the site will be demolished a pre-demolition audit of any existing buildings, structures or hard surfaces is completed to determine if, in the case of demolition, refurbishment/reuse is feasible and, if not, to maximise the recovery of material from demolition for subsequent high-grade/value applications. The audit must be referenced in the CRMP and cover: a. Identification of the key refurbishment/demolition materials. b. Potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the key refurbishment and demolition materials in accordance with the waste hierarchy.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

259

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

One credit - Diversion of resources from landfill

4. The following percentages of non-hazardous construction (on-site and off-site manufacture/fabrication), demolition and excavation waste (where applicable) generated by the project have been diverted from landfill:

Table - 47: Diversion from landfill benchmarks BREEAM credits

Type of waste

One credit

Exemplary level

Volume

Tonnage

Non demolition

70%

80%

Demolition

80%

90%

Excavation

N/A

N/A

Non demolition

85%

90%

Demolition

85%

95%

Excavation

95%

95%

5. Waste materials will be sorted into separate key waste groups see Table - 48 (according to the waste streams generated by the scope of the works) either onsite or offsite through a licensed contractor for recovery.

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 6. Non-hazardous construction waste generated by the building’s design and on-site construction and off-site manufacture or fabrication (including demolition and excavation waste) is no greater than the exemplary level resource efficiency benchmark (outlined in Table - 46). 7. The percentage of non-hazardous construction (onsite and offsite manufacture/fabrication), demolition and excavation waste (if relevant) diverted from landfill meets or exceeds the exemplary level percentage benchmark (outlined in Table 47). 8. All key waste groups are identified for diversion from landfill in the CRMP.

One credit - Construction resource efficiency - simple buildings

9. Where projects have a Construction Resource Management Plan (CRMP) with the aim of minimising and monitoring waste.

Two credits - CRMP measurements and reporting - simple buildings

10. Where criterion 9 above has been met. 11. The developed and implemented waste management procedures recorded in the CRMP ensure that the following are measured and reported on : a. Construction waste generated by the project in m3 or tonnes per 100 m2 gross internal floor area (excluding demolition and excavation waste). b. The proportion of this construction waste diverted from landfill, i.e. reused/recycled/recovered. This data must be reported at the final post-construction stage of the BREEAM assessment, via the BREEAM assessment and reporting process (in addition to any other internal or external reporting of the data that may occur). Note: where existing buildings on the site will be demolished, a pre-demolition audit of any existing buildings, structures or hard surfaces must be completed to determine if, in the case of demolition, refurbishment/reuse is feasible. If the audit finds that this is not feasible, then its purpose is to maximise the recovery of material from demolition for subsequent highgrade/value applications. The audit must be referenced and cover: c. Identification of the key refurbishment/demolition materials. d. Potential applications and any related issues for the reuse and recycling of the key refurbishment and demolition materials.

260

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 01 Construction waste management

Waste

Exemplary level criteria - simple buildings

12. The first three construction resource efficiency credits have been achieved. 13. Non-hazardous construction waste measurement/monitoring records details of the source of the waste arisings, by associating the waste with project work packages (see Methodology). 14. Where the project meets or improves on the BREEAM exemplary level benchmark (Table - 47) for the diversion from landfill of non-hazardous construction and demolition waste (where generated).

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Construction resource efficiency (3 credits available) One credit 1. Criterion 9. Two credits 2. Criteria 10 and 11. Diversion from landfill (1 credit available) 3. Criteria 4 and 5. Exemplary level credit 4. Criteria 12 to 14.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Construction Resource Management Plan records

The project waste arisings should be recorded and include construction, demolition and excavation waste. Note that the performance benchmarks for the award of credits do not include demolition and excavation waste.

General CN4

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

261

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN5

Limited site space for segregation and storage See criterion 5.

Where space onsite is too limited to allow materials to be segregated, a waste contractor may be used to separate and process recyclable materials offsite. Similarly, manufacturers’ take-back schemes could also be used. Where this is the case, evidence must be produced which demonstrates that segregation of materials is carried out to the agreed levels and that materials are reused/recycled as appropriate. Such evidence could be Environment Agency / Scottish Environment Protection Agency / Environment Agency Wales / Northern Ireland Environment Agency Waste Return Forms.

CN6

Waste from temporary support structures

Any waste generated onsite for the purposes of the development (excluding demolition and excavation waste) must be taken account of in the assessment of this issue. If temporary support structures, or any other materials/system brought onsite to facilitate construction of a building, enter the waste stream (albeit for recycling), then they will need to be classified as construction waste and therefore contribute to the construction waste benchmark necessary to facilitate assessment with this issue. If the support structure is reused by the contractor (or by another contractor) on other sites, then it hasn’t been discarded and therefore doesn’t enter the waste stream. Thus wouldn’t be included in the waste generated and hence the benchmark figures for this issue. The same would apply to timber formwork where re-used.

CN7

Waste from offsite manufacturing

Where a system manufactured offsite is being used on the project, the manufacturer will need to supply the amount of waste generated during the assembly of that system within the factory environment. The total amount of waste generated needs to be reported per 10 m2 of the assembled system. This must then be added to the waste generated onsite to determine the overall project construction waste generated.

Methodology Work packages For the simple building exemplary criteria, the waste arisings need to be associated with the source of waste by project work packages. These work packages could include 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Asbestos removal External and site works Fixtures and fittings Groundworks and excavation Refurbishment Remediation Re-roofing Services Soft strip Substructure Superstructure

262

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 01 Construction waste management

Waste

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

All

A copy of the Construction Resource Management plan and, where relevant, predemolition audit.

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Best practice waste management plan Best practice is a combination of commitments to: 1. Design out waste (materials optimisation) 2. Reduce waste generated onsite 3. Develop and implement procedures to sort and reuse/recycle construction and demolition waste on and offsite (as applicable) 4. Follow guidance from: DEFRA (Department of Environment, Food and Rural Affairs) BRE (Building Research Establishment Ltd) WRAP (Waste and Resources Action Programme) Welsh Government. Construction Resource Management Plan (CRMP) The aim of the CRMP is to promote resource efficiency and to prevent illegal waste activities. Resource efficiency includes minimising waste at source and ensuring that clients, designers and principal contractors assess the use, reuse and recycling of materials and products on and off the site. A compliant CRMP is one that defines: 1. A target benchmark for resource efficiency, i.e. m3 of waste per 100m2 or tonnes of waste per 100m2 2. Procedures and commitments for minimising non-hazardous waste in line with the target benchmark 3. Procedures for minimising hazardous waste 4. A waste minimisation target and details of waste minimisation actions to be undertaken 5. Procedures for estimating, monitoring, measuring and reporting hazardous and non-hazardous site waste. If waste data is obtained from licensed external waste contractors, the data needs to be reliable and verifiable, e.g. by using data from EA/SEPA/EA Wales/NIEA Waste Return Forms 6. Procedures for sorting, reusing and recycling construction waste into defined waste groups (see additional guidance section), either on site or through a licensed external contractor 7. Procedures for reviewing and updating the plan 8. The name or job title of the individual responsible for implementing the above. Diversion from landfill Actions to avoid waste being disposed of in landfill include: Reusing the material onsite (in situ or for new applications) Reusing the material on other sites Community reuse and recycling Salvaging or reclaiming the material for reuse

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

263

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Returning material to the supplier via a ‘take-back’ scheme Recovery of the material from site by an approved waste management contractor and recycled or sent for energy recovery. Offsite construction systems These systems are defined as the pre-assembly of components, elements or modules before installation into their final location. These can include volumetric and panellised systems, and sub-assemblies and components such as floors, ceilings, bathroom and kitchen pods. Site Waste Management Plans Some locations may have a legal requirement, due to government requirements, to produce a Site Waste Management Plan (SWMP) containing prescribed details. This should be complied with as necessary. To achieve any of the construction waste management credits the assessed development, regardless of value or locality, must have a BREEAM compliant Construction Resource Management Plan that includes best practice (see best practice waste management plan). Waste hierarchy The order of priority for the management of waste where waste generation could or does occur. This is listed in descending order of environmental preference in The Waste (England and Wales) Regulation 2011 1 as: Prevention Re-use Recycle Recover Dispose. Waste Minimisation This term encompasses two elements of the waste hierarchy: Waste reduction/prevention = using less material in design, manufacture and installation, keeping products for longer, using no hazardous materials Reuse = using products again for the same purpose for which they were conceived, which may require checking, cleaning or repairing (preparing for reuse). Types of waste minimisation actions include: 1. Set and report against waste reduction targets 2. Design for standardisation of components 3. Avoid waste from excavation/groundworks and consider opportunities for zero cut and fill 4. Return packaging for reuse 5. Consider community reuse of surplus/off-cuts 6. Include waste minimisation initiatives and targets in tenders/contracts and engage with the supply chain 7. Consider use of BIM (Building Information Modelling) 8. Design for offsite/modular build 9. Design for flexibility, adaptability and future deconstruction 10. Design to use fewer materials 11. Use of reusable temporary elements such as shuttering and protection. This list is not exhaustive and other waste minimisation actions can be taken. Construction waste groups Table - 48: Construction waste groups European Waste Catalogue

Key Group

Examples

170102

Bricks

Bricks

170101

Concrete

Pipes, kerb stones, paving slabs, concrete rubble, precast and in situ

264

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 01 Construction waste management

Waste

European Waste Catalogue

Key Group

Examples

170604

Insulation

Glass fibre, mineral wool, foamed plastic

1501

Packaging

Paint pots, pallets, cardboard, cable drums, wrapping bands, polythene sheets

170201

Timber

Softwood, hardwood, board products such as plywood, chipboard, medium density fibreboard (MDF)

1602

Electrical and electronic equipment

Electrical and electronic TVs, fridges, air-conditioning units, lamps equipment

200301

Canteen/office

Office waste, canteen waste, vegetation

1301

Oils

Hydraulic oil, engine oil, lubricating oil

1703

Asphalt and tar

Bitumen, coal tars, asphalt

170103

Tiles and ceramics

Ceramic tiles, clay roof tiles, ceramic, sanitary ware

1701

Inert

Mixed rubble/excavation material, glass

1704

Metals

Radiators, cables, wires, bars, sheet

170802

Gypsum

Plasterboard, plaster, fibre cement sheets

170101

Binders

Render, cement, mortar

170203

Plastics

Pipes, cladding, frames, non-packaging sheet

200307

Furniture

Tables, chairs, desks, sofas

1705

Soils

Soils, clays, sand, gravel, natural stone

Most relevant EWC

Liquids

Non-hazardous paints, thinners, timber treatments

Most relevant EWC

Hazardous

Defined in the Hazardous Waste List (HWL) of the European Waste Catalogue (EWC)

Most relevant EWC

Floor coverings (soft)

Carpets, vinyl flooring

Most relevant EWC

Architectural Features

Roof tiles, reclaimed bricks, fireplaces

170904 (Mixed)

Mixed/other

Efforts should be made to categorise waste into the above categories wherever possible

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

265

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Other information BREEAM construction resource efficiency benchmarks The resource efficiency benchmarks used in BREEAM have been derived using data collected from hundreds of real life projects using BRE's SMARTWaste system, from July 2008 to March 2013. The BREEAM credits are aligned to the benchmarks as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

One credit: Performance in the top 50% of projects (better than standard practice) Two credits: Performance in the top 25% of projects (good practice) Three credits: Performance in the top 10% of projects (best practice) Exemplary level: Performance in the top 5% of projects (exemplary practice).

For more information please go to www.smartwaste.co.uk

Why does BREEAM exclude demolition and excavation waste from the resource efficiency benchmarks? BREEAM does not include demolition and excavation (D&E) waste in its resource efficiency benchmark, despite it often being the largest tonnage of waste onsite, because the amount of D&E waste produced is site-dependant. Furthermore, it is not necessarily possible to reduce the amount of demolition waste (unless a decision is taken not to demolish in the first place). Including D&E waste in an overall construction resource efficiency benchmark would: 1. Not encourage sites with unavoidably large amounts of D&E waste to focus on reducing waste arising from construction materials (which would have further knock-on environmental impacts); and 2. Mean that sites with little or no D&E waste would find compliance with the benchmark more straight forward, which would weaken the drivers for reducing construction waste resulting from the specification and use of new building materials. BREEAM aims to ensure that, where D&E waste is generated, it is diverted from landfill and where possible reused for high grade use onsite to reduce the volume of new materials produced/required in the supply chain (which themselves may go on to generate additional waste). One credit and an exemplary level credit are available where it can be demonstrated that D&E waste has been diverted from landfill.

Tools for preparing, implementing and reviewing a CRMP SMARTWaste® Construction is a web-based membership tool allowing users to comprehensively measure and monitor construction site impacts, including construction waste. The tool can be used for: 1. Preparing, implementing and reviewing Site Waste Management Plans (SWMPs) 2. Online measuring and reporting on: a. Waste (aligned to defined waste groups) b. Site energy, fuel and water use; and c. Procurement of certified/sustainable timber. 3. Industry waste benchmarks 4. Links to BREMAP, a geographical information system of waste management facilities. See www.bremap.co.uk SMARTWaste® Construction is frequently updated and offers a greater level of flexibility, reporting and support. Templates are available to meet the latest BREEAM credits and can also be downloaded. SMARTWaste Plan is a free version of the tool that can be used to manage all aspects of creating SWMPs and measuring waste generated on projects. The free tool is occasionally updated, only providing support up to BREEAM 2008, and does not support the measuring and reporting on energy/fuel/water use or timber procurement. Other tools for preparing, implementing and reviewing a CRMP are available from the Waste and Resources Action Programme (WRAP) www.wrap.org.uk.

266

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 01 Construction waste management

Waste

WRAP and UKCG waste reporting guidelines WRAP have guidelines for measuring and reporting construction, demolition and excavation waste which have been developed with the United Kingdom Contractors Group (UKCG). This differs from SMARTWaste in a number of ways. For the WRAP/UKCG method, only materials taken offsite as waste are to be recorded as waste. It is optional to record data for materials that are reused onsite but these should not be reported. The WRAP/UKCG method also has default diversion from landfill rates for waste sent offsite to waste destinations. For example, it is assumed that 50% of inert soil and stones (EWC 17 05 04) and brick, concrete, tiles and ceramics (EWC 17 01 01, EWC 17 01 02, EWC 17 01 03, and EWC 17 01 07) sent to landfill will go to beneficial reuse (e.g. landfill engineering and restoration). SMARTWaste and BREEAM do not make this assumption. 1The Waste (England and Wales) Regulations 2011, Environmental Protection, England and Wales, Statutory Instrument No.

988.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

267

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Wst 02 Recycled aggregates Number of credits available

Minimum standards

1

No

Aim To recognise and encourage the use of recycled and secondary aggregates, thereby reducing the demand for virgin material and optimising material efficiency in construction.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Recycled aggregates

1. The percentage of high-grade aggregate that is recycled and/or secondary aggregate, specified in each application (present) must meet the following minimum % levels (by weight or volume) to contribute to the total amount of recycled and/or secondary aggregate, as specified in the table below.

Table - 49: Minimum levels (by weight and volume) of high-grade aggregate specified per application (where present) that is recycled and/or secondary aggregate Min. % One credit

Application

Min. % Exemplary performance

Bound Structural frame

15%

30%

Bitumen or hydraulically bound base, binder, and surface courses for paved areas and roads

30%

75%

Building foundations

20%

35%

Concrete road surfaces

15%

45%

Pipe bedding

100%

N/A

Granular fill and capping (see Relevant definitions section)

100%

N/A

Unbound

268

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 02 Recycled aggregates

Waste

2. The total amount of recycled and/or secondary aggregate specified, and meeting criterion 1, is greater than 25% (by weight or volume) of the total high-grade aggregate specified for the development. Where the minimum level in criterion 1 is not met for an application, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate when calculating the total high grade aggregate specified. 3. The recycled and/or secondary aggregates are EITHER: a. Construction, demolition and excavation waste obtained onsite or offsite OR b. Secondary aggregates obtained from a non-construction post-consumer industrial by-product source (see Relevant definitions section).

Exemplary level criteria The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue. 4. The percentage of high-grade aggregate, that is recycled and/or secondary aggregate, specified in each application (present) must meet the exemplary minimum levels (by weight or volume), as defined in the table above. Where this minimum level is not met, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate when calculating the total high grade aggregate specified. 5. Where the total amount of recycled and/or secondary aggregate specified is greater than 35% (by weight or volume) of the total high-grade aggregate specified for the project. Where the minimum level in criterion1 is not met for an application, all the aggregate in that application must be considered as primary aggregate when calculating the total high grade aggregate specified. 6. The contributing secondary aggregate must not be transported more than 30 km by road transport.

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

269

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN4

Offsite recycled aggregates

Where offsite recycled aggregates from construction, demolition and excavation waste are used, they should be produced according to the relevant Quality Protocol and/or comply with the relevant BS/EN standards for aggregates.

Methodology None

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

2

Calculation confirming the amount of recycled/secondary aggregate to be used.

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Air cooled blast furnace slag Air cooled blast furnace slag is classified as a by-product (rather than a waste) and can therefore be used as an aggregate without the need for a quality protocol. The slag used must meet the requirements of the European and BS Aggregates Standards that apply to the end use application (e.g. bitumen bound, unbound etc.). Granular fill and capping Crushed masonry used as fill material for general landscaping is not considered to be high grade. This practice is now common place on construction sites due to landfill costs. For granular fill to be considered a ‘high grade aggregate’, it must conform to one of the following classes under the Specification for Highway Works (SHW) Series 600 Earthworks: 1. Class 6A, 6I and 6N - Selected well graded granular material 2. Class 6B - Selected coarse granular material 3. Class 6C, 6D, 6J and 6L - Selected uniformly graded granular material 4. Class 6E, 6G, 6H, 6K, 6M, 6P and 6R - Selected granular material 5. Class 6F (and the various sub classes) - Selected coarse and fine graded material 6. Class 6Q – Well graded, uniformly graded or coarse graded material. If the application is capping, then granular materials should conform to one of the following classes under the Specification for Highway Works (SHW) Series 600 Earthworks: 1. Class 6F – Selected coarse and fine graded material 2. Class 6S – Selected well graded granular material. If the application is capping, then stabilised materials should conform to one of the following classes under the Specification for Highway Works (SHW) Series 900 Earthworks:

270

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 02 Recycled aggregates

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Waste

Class 9A - Cement stabilised well graded granular material Class 9B - Cement stabilised silty cohesive material Class 9C - Cement stabilised conditioned pulverised fuel ash cohesive material Class 9D – Lime stabilised cohesive material Class 9E – Lime and cement stabilised cohesive material Class 9F – Lime and cement stabilised well graded material.

Low grade aggregate uses Crushed masonry used as fill material for general landscaping is not considered to be high grade. This practice is now common place on construction sites due to increased landfill costs. Materials optimisation Mat 04 Insulation Post-consumer waste stream Waste material generated by households or by commercial, industrial and institutional facilities in their role as endusers of the product, which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. This includes returns of material from the distribution chain. Waste materials generated during manufacturing processes are pre-consumer waste streams and are excluded. These streams include re-utilisation of materials such as rework, regrind or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it. Quality Protocol The purpose of a Quality Protocol is to provide a uniform control process for producers, from which they can reasonably state and demonstrate that their product has been fully recovered and is no longer a waste. It also provides purchasers with a product quality-managed to common standards, which increases confidence in performance. Aggregates that do not meet the requirements of a Quality Protocol and/or relevant aggregate standards will still be considered waste. Protocols exists for: Aggregates produced from inert waste Use of pulverised fuel ash (PFA) and furnace bottom ash (FBA) in bound applications. Recycled aggregates Recycled aggregates are those derived from reprocessing materials previously used in construction, e.g. crushed concrete or masonry from construction and demolition waste material. Secondary aggregates By-products of industrial processes that can be processed to produce secondary aggregates. Secondary aggregates are sub-divided into manufactured and natural, depending on their source. Recognised non-construction post-consumer or post-industrial by-products include: 1. China clay waste 2. Slate overburden 3. Pulverised Fuel Ash (PFA) 4. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS) 5. Air-cooled blast furnace slag 6. Steel slag 7. Furnace Bottom Ash (FBA) 8. Incinerator bottom ash 9. Foundry sands 10. Recycled glass 11. Recycled plastic 12. Spent oil shale 13. Colliery spoil 14. Municipal solid waste treatment residues

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

271

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Other information Further guidance Details on the European Standards for Aggregates (2004) are available at: http://aggregain.wrap.org.uk/quality/aggregates_standards/european.html The Environment Agency publishes and updates Quality Protocols: http://www.environment-agency.gov.uk/business/sectors/142481.aspx Currently: The Quality Protocol for production of aggregates from inert waste is due for re-publication in 2013.http://www2.wrap.org.uk/downloads/0083_Quality_Protocol_A4.0bd6bd91.87.pdf Steel slag, incinerator bottom ash aggregates and furnace bottom ash (from coal fired power generation) are not covered by the above Quality Protocol but are/will be covered by their own quality protocols. WRAP has information, tools and guidance on the use of recycled and secondary aggregates:http://aggregain.wrap.org.uk/

272

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 03 Operational waste

Waste

Wst 03 Operational waste Number of credits available

Minimum standards

1

Yes

Aim To recognise and encourage the provision of dedicated storage facilities for a building’s operational-related recyclable waste streams, so that this waste is diverted from landfill or incineration.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Operational waste

1. Dedicated space(s) is provided for the segregation and storage of operational recyclable waste volumes generated by the assessed building/unit, its occupant(s) and activities. This space must be a. Clearly labelled, to assist with segregation, storage and collection of the recyclable waste streams b. Accessible to building occupants or facilities operators for the deposit of materials and collections by waste management contractors c. Of a capacity appropriate to the building type, size, number of units (if relevant) and predicted volumes of waste that will arise from daily/weekly operational activities and occupancy rates. 2. Where the consistent generation in volume of the appropriate operational waste streams is likely to exist, e.g. large amounts of packaging or compostable waste generated by the building’s use and operation, the following facilities are provided: a. Static waste compactor(s) or baler(s); situated in a service area or dedicated waste management space. b. Vessel(s) for composting suitable organic waste resulting from the building’s daily operation and use; OR adequate space(s) for storing segregated food waste and compostable organic material prior to collection and delivery to an alternative composting facility. c. Where organic waste is to be stored/composted onsite, a water outlet is provided adjacent to or within the facility for cleaning and hygiene purposes.

Additionally for healthcare buildings only 3. The specified/installed operational waste facilities are compliant with HTM 07-01: Safe management of healthcare waste1 (England), WHTM07-01 Safe management of healthcare (Wales)1, HTM07-01 (Northern Ireland version) or SHTN3 NHS Scotland Waste Management guidance Part A- Best Practice Overview and Part B Waste Management Policy template2 (Scotland).

Additionally for multi-residential buildings with self contained dwellings/bedsits only 4. Each dwelling/bedsit has a provision of three internal storage containers, as follows: a. A minimum total capacity of 30 litres b. No individual container smaller than 7 litres c. All containers in a dedicated non obstructive position d. The storage containers for recycling are provided in addition to non-recyclable waste storage.

1WHTM 07-01: Safe management of healthcare waste, NHW Wales Shared Services Partnership - Facilities Services, 2013

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

273

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Additionally for multi-residential buildings with individual bedrooms and communal facilities only 5. The above storage requirements (criterion 4) for self-contained dwellings/bedsits are met for every six bedrooms 6. The recyclable storage is located in a dedicated non obstructive position in either: a. Communal kitchens; OR b. Where there are no communal kitchens present, in a communal space such as communal lounges or utility areas. 7. Home composting facilities and a home composting information leaflet is provided within the kitchen area or communal space for each self contained dwelling, bedsit or communal kitchen.

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Criteria 1 and 2 Both options:All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. For criterion 2, if the end-occupier is known the criterion is assessed as written. If the end-occupier is not known but the function/areas of the assessed building suggest that large amounts of packaging or compostable waste is likely to be generated during the building’s operation, e.g. it is a retail or industrial development or contains a large catering facility, then an appropriately sized space and services/infrastructure to accommodate the relevant facilities must be provided. The facilities themselves do not necessarily need to be provided/installed to demonstrate compliance for a shell and core project assessment. Criteria 3-7 These criteria are not applicable to shell and core assessments. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Country specific CN3

Country specific

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to this building type and function apply.

Determining if the dedicated space

The design team demonstrates that the provision of waste management facilities for the assessed building is adequate given the building type, occupier (if known),

General CN4

274

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 03 Operational waste

Waste

Terms

Description

complies See criteria 1 and 2.

operational function and likely waste streams and volumes to be generated. Where it is not possible to determine what provision should be made, the following guide for minimum storage space provision should be used: 1. At least 2m2 per 1000 m2 of net floor area for buildings < 5000 m2 2. A minimum of 10 m2 for buildings ≥ 5000 m2 3. An additional 2 m2 per 1000 m2 of net floor area where catering is provided (with an additional minimum of 10 m2 for buildings ≥ 5000 m2). The net floor area should be rounded up to the nearest 1000m2.

CN5

Extensions to existing buildings

Where there are facilities within the existing building, these can be used to assess compliance. The scope of these facilities must be adequate to cater for the total volume of predicted recyclable waste arising from the new and existing buildings.

CN6

Multiple building assessments and buildings that form part of a wider estate See criterion 1c.

Where the assessment applies to one or more buildings/units that are part of a wider estate or campus, the design team can choose to demonstrate compliance through the provision of dedicated centralised storage space and waste management facilities with the capacity to accommodate the recyclable waste material generated from all buildings and their activities.

CN7

Limited space or vehicle access for a compactor/baler See criterion 2.

For developments that have limited space for static installations, compliance can be assessed on the basis of the provision of adequate space for a smaller portable compactor or baler.

CN8

Internal storage areas

Where the facilities are situated internally, vehicular gate heights/widths and manoeuvring and loading space must be sized to ensure ease of access for vehicles collecting recyclable materials.

CN9

General waste

The area for storage of recyclable materials must be provided in addition to areas and facilities provided for dealing with general waste and other waste management facilities, e.g. compactors, balers and composters.

CN10

Small industrial units See criterion 1.

For an industrial building or development consisting of a number of smaller units, each ≤ 200m2 floor area, shared facilities that meet the above criteria for the building/development as a whole are sufficient to achieve this credit.

CN11

Shopping centres and retail parks See criterion 1.

For shopping centres and retail parks there must be adequate space to cater for each tenant and their potential recyclable waste volumes. Tenants that occupy a large proportion of the centre, i.e. ‘flagship tenants’, must have their own dedicated compliant facilities. For smaller non-flagship tenant units, compliant central or common facilities onsite or dedicated spaces for individual units will meet the assessment criteria for this BREEAM issue.

CN12

Home composting information leaflet (multi-residential buildings) See criteria 4, 5, 6 and 7.

The leaflet must provide information on:

Ref

How composting works and why it is important The materials that can be composted (e.g. raw vegetable peelings and fruit, shredded paper, tea bags, etc.); and

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

275

Waste

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description Details of the operation and management plan for the communal composting scheme. Where a green/kitchen waste collection scheme is in operation, the information leaflet provided by the Local Authority is sufficient to meet the information leaflet criteria.

Building specific CN13

Multi-residential: supported living facility

Where it is not possible to locate the recycling bins within a communal area, which is accessible to residents, for safety reasons (e.g. where the residents have mental health problems and free access to these facilities would pose significant risk of self harm or harm to others) it is acceptable to locate them within a dedicated nonobtrusive position accessible to staff only, but in close proximity to the areas where recyclable waste material is generated.

Methodology None

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions Accessible space Accessible space is typically within 20 m of a building entrance. Depending on the size of the building, site restrictions or tenancy arrangements, it may not be possible for the facilities to be within 20 m of a building entrance. In such circumstances, judgement on whether the space is ‘accessible’ to the building occupants and vehicle collection must be made. Clinical waste Waste derived from medical practices and defined as bodily fluids and wastes, drugs and medical equipment; and other waste which, unless rendered safe, may prove hazardous or infectious to persons coming into contact with it. Dedicated non-obstructive position An easily accessible cupboard under the sink or any other cupboard in the kitchen, next to the storage or likely area for storing non-recyclable waste, where practical. Where a kitchen cupboard location is not possible the bins can be located near to the kitchen, in a utility room or connected garage, for example.

276

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 03 Operational waste

Waste

Flagship or anchor tenant The largest and primary tenant within a retail development, typically department store-type retailers. Waste compactor or baler A machine that is designed to compress waste streams in order to improve storage and transport efficiency.

Other information Recyclable storage The following footprint dimensions (informed by the Metric handbook, Planning and design data) can act as a guide when determining size and accessibility criteria for the recyclable storage space: 1. Compactor dimensions: about the size of one car parking bay; 4.8 x 2.4 m 2. Skip: the footprint of an 8 and 12 cubic yard skip measures 3.4 m x 1.8 m, therefore allow a minimum of 2.0 m width and 4.0 m length or 8 m2 area for the storage and access of such containers 3. Wheeled bins: 360 litre = 0.86 m x 0.62/660 L= 1.2 m x 0.7 m/1100 L = 1.28 m x 0.98 m 4. Roll-on-roll-off containers: allow a minimum of 6.1 m x 2.4 m 5. Vehicle access: the following are dimensions for lorry types that are typically used to collect waste. Therefore gate height/widths should not be smaller than these measurements: a. Dustcart: medium capacity; length = 7.4 m Height = 4 m width 3.1 m b. Skip lorry: length = 7 m Height = 3.35 m width 3.1 m. Consideration must also be given to any other types of vehicle requiring access to this area, e.g. lorries for roll on/off containers.

Recycling bins Individual recycling bins located at convenient locations throughout the building are necessary to maximise recycling rates. 1HTM 07-01: Safe management of healthcare waste, Department of Health, 2013 2SHTN3 NHS Scotland Waste Management guidance Part A- Best Practice Overview and Part B Waste Management Policy

template, Health Facilities Scotland March 2010

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

277

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes Number of credits available

Minimum standards

1

No

Aim To encourage the specification and fitting of floor and ceiling finishes selected by the building occupant and therefore avoid unnecessary waste of materials.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Speculative floor and ceiling finishes Office building types only 1. For tenanted areas (where the future occupant is not known), prior to full fit-out works, carpets, other floor finishes and ceiling finishes have been installed in a show area only. 2. In a building developed for a specific occupant, that occupant has selected (or agreed to) the specified floor and ceiling finishes.

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Option 1- Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2- Shell and core only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings

278

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 04 Speculative floor and ceiling finishes

Waste

Ref

Terms

Description

CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

General

None.

General CN4

Building specific CN5

Office: Show area See criterion 1.

A show area could be either a floor plate or an individual office. However, to award this credit it must be less than 25% of the net lettable floor area.

Methodology None

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Additional information Relevant definitions None

Other information None

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

279

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change Number of credits available

Minimum standards

1

No

Aim To recognise and encourage measures taken to mitigate the impact of extreme weather conditions arising from climate change over the lifespan of the building.

Assessment criteria A number of BREEAM issues within the New Construction scheme contain assessment criteria which aim to support mitigation of the impacts of extreme weather events arising from climate change. The main credit focuses on structural and fabric resilience not covered in other issues. An Exemplary Credit is awarded where other issues relating to adaptation to climate change are covered holistically. The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Adaptation to climate change – structural and fabric resilience

1. Conduct a climate change adaptation strategy appraisal for structural and fabric resilience by the end of Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent), in accordance with the following approach: a. Carry out a systematic risk assessment (specific to structural and fabric resilience) to identify and evaluate and where feasible mitigate against the impact of the expected increase in extreme weather conditions arising from climate change on the building over the projected life-cycle of the building. The assessment should cover the following stages: i. Hazard Identification ii. Hazard assessment iii. Risk estimation iv. Risk Evaluation v. Risk Management

Exemplary credit – Responding to adaptation to climate change Achievement of this criteria represents a holistic approach to designing and construction for the impacts of climate change which this lifecycle stage of BREEAM aimed to mitigate.. The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 1. Achievement of the Structural and fabric resilience issue and following issues and the following criteria points or credits:

Hea 04 – Thermal comfort (Link to Wst 5 issue- to preventing increasing risks of overheating) Criterion 7 in the second credit of the Hea 03 issue is met..

Ene 01 – Reduction of CO2 emissions and energy efficiency (Link to Wst 5 issue – to maximise energy efficiency contributing to low carbon emissions resulting from increasing energy demands)

280

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change

Waste

At least (TBC) credits in this issue have been achieved.

Ene 04 – Low carbon design (Link to Wst 5 issue– to maximise opportunities to avoid unecessary carbon emissions) The Passive design analysis credit in this issue is achieved.

Wat 01 – Water consumption (Link - to minimise water demands in periods of drought) A minimum of three credits in this issue are achieved.

Mat 05 – Designing for resilience and robustness (Link to Wst 5 issue - to avoid increased risks of deterioration and higher maintenance demands) The Material degradation credit in this issue is achieved.

Pol 03 – Surface water run off (Link to Wst 5 - to minimise the risks of increased flood risk and surface water run off affecting the site or others) Flood risk – a minimum of one credit is achieved. Surface water run off – a minimum of two credits are achieved.

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Adaptation to climate change – structural fabric and resilience 1. Criterion 1

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

281

Waste

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

Relevant bodies See criterion 2.

This includes but is not limited to the following:

General CN4

Local authorities Statutory bodies e.g. Defra, EA, NIEA, SEPA etc Technical bodies e.g. CIBSE, UKCIP

Methodology Hazard identification

1. Review the evidence/information from relevant bodies to identify and understand the expected impacts of increased extreme weather events climate change for on the building. 2. Identify likely hazards (see Relevant definitions).

Hazard assessment

1. Identify the scale of the hazards identified.

Risk estimation

1. Identify the risk presented by these hazards to the building and the likely impact of the hazards taking into account the following aspects as a minimum: a. Structural stability b. Structural robustness c. Weather proofing and detailing d. Material durability e. Health and safety of building occupants and others f. Impacts on building contents and business continuity

Risk evaluation 1. 2. 3. 4.

Evaluate the potential impact of these risks on the building Determine the tolerable risk threshold Check the sensitivity of the risk assessment Identify areas where the risks are unacceptable in health and safety, life cycle assessment and financial terms

Risk management

1. Identify risk reduction measures 2. Mitigate the hazards where as far as is practically feasible. 3. Adapt the design/specification to incorporate the measures identified by the risk assessment in the final design.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

282

Final post-construction stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change

Waste

Additional information Relevant definitions Structural and fabric resilience BREEAM defines this as the ability A quality inof a structural to withstand increased burden of weather/increase pressure/hazards associated with climate change.. Examples of increased pressures/hazards include: 1. Solar radiation 2. Temperature variation 3. Water/ moisture 4. Wind 5. Precipitation e.g rain and snow 6. Extreme weather conditions: high wind speeds, flooding, driving rain, snow; rainwater ponding 7. Subsidence/ ground movement Durability The ability to withstand wear, pressure, or damage. Hazard A hazard is a situation or event which has the potential to cause harm. It may be an accidental or a malicious action, insufficient strength or resistance, or excessive deviation from intended limits Resilience The ability of a building or structural system or material to withstand an accidental or exceptional loading or other incident without experiencing an undue degree of damage or decrease in performance, such that progressive collapse, loss of performance or disproportionate degree of damage occurs. Systematic risk assessment A structured approach to help professionals identify, evaluate and manage risk, where the reduction of the risks identified is integral to the process, It includes: Identifying the hazards Eliminating the hazards, so far as reasonably practicable Reducing the risks from each hazard, so far as reasonably practicable Developing the building design to be robust.

Other information This new BREEAM issue aims to encourage and support efforts to mitigate the future impacts of climate change on the building by considering a number of relevant factors during the design stages. BRE have avoided being overly-prescriptive with the assessment criteria in order to allow a degree of flexibility in its application and demonstrating compliance, recognising that this is a complex environmental and design issue where solutions and approaches are largely influenced by site location and building specific factors. This places a greater emphasis on the BREEAM Assessor to use their judgement in determining whether the project team and the building design has met the aim and intent of the credit and its criteria, using appropriate project information to back their judgement. BRE will endorse the BREEAM Assessors judgement through the Quality Assurance audit where a reasonable justification to award the credit on the basis of project team actions and proposed design solutions is evident. BRE would welcome any feedback on the application of this assessment issue to assist with the evolution of the criteria and inclusion of additional guidance on compliance in future BREEAM versions. The National Adaptation Programme1 report has been drawn up by the government, industry and other non-government organisations working together. It contains a mix of policies and actions to help the UK to adapt successfully to future weather conditions, by dealing with the risks and making the most of the opportunities.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

283

Waste

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

The book "Design for climate change"2 describes buildings and issues as part of the Design for Future Climate, Adapting Buildings programme, the largest programme focusing on the climate-change adaptation of buildings in the UK. This programme from the Technology Strategy Board (TSB) is aimed at improving the climate resilience of building projects. The book has guidance on construction, including structural stability. The BRE report 3, Potential implications of climate change in the built environment, discusses climate change adaptation strategies, including some for structural resilience. The Health Technical Memorandum 07-07 includes guidance on future-proofing healthcare buildings.

284

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 06 Functional adaptability

Waste

Wst 06 Functional adaptability Number of credits available

Minimum standards

1

No

Aim To recognise and encourage measures taken to accommodatefuture changes of use of the building over its lifespan.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Functional adaptability

1. Conduct a building specific functional adaptation strategy appraisal by Concept Design (RIBA Stage 2 or equivalent), which includes consideration of: a. Adaptability of the internal environment to accommodate changes in working practices b. Adaptability of the internal physical space and external shell to accommodate change in use c. Design for ease of replacement of all major plant within the life of the building e.g. panels in floors/ walls that can be removed without affecting the structure, providing lifting beams and hoists. d. Local services accessibility, such as local power, data etc. e. Ability for major refurbishment, including replacing the façade 2. Functional adaptation measures have been implemented in accordance with the functional adaptation strategy and its implementation plan, where practical and cost effective.

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

285

Waste

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

assessment criteria

guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Functional adaptation implementation plan

The content of the functional adaptation implementation plan will be specific to the building type, but should broadly include information on the following: 1. The feasibility for multiple/alternative building uses and area functions 2. Options for multiple building uses and area functions 3. Routes and methods for major plant replacement 4. Accessibility for local plant and service distribution routes 5. Potential for the building to be extended, horizontally and/or vertically 6.

General CN4

Methodology None

Evidence Ref

Interim design stage

Final post-construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

All

Functional adaptation strategy and implementation plan report

As per design stage evidence

Additional information Relevant definitions Building functional adaptation Work to an existing building that responds to a required change of use or requirements and goes beyond maintenance and repairs. These changes solve functional problems and could provide significant improvements. The functional adaptation works could include alterations, conversions and/or extensions. Functional adaptability The ability of a building to be adapted to be used as a different building type or for different requirements.

286

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Wst 06 Functional adaptability

Waste

Other information The Health Technical Memorandum 07-07 4 includes guidance on future-proofing healthcare buildings. 1National Adaptation Programme: Making the country resilient to a changing climate. Defra; 2013 2Gething B, Puckett K, Design for climate change. RIBA; 2013 3Graves HM, Phillipson MC, Potential implications of climate change in the built environment. BRE Centre for Environmental

Engineering: BRE East Kilbride; 2000 4Health Technical Memorandum 07-07: Sustainable health and social care buildings. Department of Health; 2013

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

287

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Land Use and ecology

288

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

LE 01 Site selection

Land Use and Ecology

LE 01 Site selection Number of credits available

Minimum standards

2

No

Aim To encourage the use of previously occupied and/or contaminated land and avoid land which has not been previously disturbed.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Previously occupied land (1 credit) Contaminated land (1 credit). The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit - Previously occupied land

1. At least 75% of the proposed development’s footprint is on an area of land which has previously been occupied by industrial, commercial or domestic buildings or fixed surface infrastructure.

One credit - Contaminated land

2. The site is deemed to be significantly contaminated as confirmed by a contaminated land specialist’s site investigation, risk assessment and appraisal, which has identified: a. The degree of contamination b. The contaminant sources/types c. The options for remediating sources of pollution which present an unacceptable risk to the site. 3. The client or principal contractor confirms that remediation of the site will be carried out in accordance with the remediation strategy and its implementation plan.

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

289

Land use

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

assessment criteria

apply.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

. This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

Temporary works See criterion 1.

Undeveloped areas of the site to be used for temporary works (e.g. temporary offices/parking, material/machinery storage) must be considered as development on undeveloped land and therefore included in the calculations unless they have been defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ (LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features).

CN5

Infill development See criterion 1.

New buildings developed within the boundary of existing sites do not automatically comply with the re-use of land criteria. At least 75% of the land on which the new building will be sited must meet the definition of previously occupied (for prisons, refer to the building type specific compliance note below).

CN6

Prior decontamination See criteria 2 and 3.

The credit for use of contaminated land can only be awarded where remediation has taken place to enable development of the site for the assessed building, or a larger phased development that includes the assessed building (see below). The credit is not achievable for instances where historical remediation and development of the site has occurred outside the scope of the current development proposals.

CN7

Large sites split into smaller plots See criteria 2 and 3.

Where contamination of a large site has been remediated and has then been packaged up into smaller plots of land for individual buildings (possibly as part of a phased development strategy), the credit can be awarded regardless of the plot location of the assessed building within the wider development plan. This is on the condition that the site could not have been developed without remediation work taking place.

CN8

Health and safety related decontamination See criteria 2 and 3.

Contaminated land that has been decontaminated solely for health and safety reasons (rather than for the specific purpose of re-development) does not comply.

CN9

Asbestos See criteria 2 and 3.

Where the only remediation required is the removal of asbestos within an existing building fabric, the site cannot be classified as contaminated land. However, where asbestos is found to be present in the ground this will be classed as contamination for the purposes of assessing this issue.

General

290

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

LE 01 Site selection

Ref

Terms

Land Use and Ecology

Description

Building specific CN10

Education (schools only) Playing fields See criterion 1.

Development of a playing field within the construction zone can be counted as development on previously occupied land only if an equivalent area of playing field is reinstated within one year of the completed construction works; and where such reinstatement will not encroach on land of high ecological value as defined in BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features

CN11

Prisons See criterion 1.

All land within a secure perimeter fence on an existing prison site can be classified as previously occupied land. Therefore assessments of buildings located within this area will achieve the credit. If the secure perimeter fence of a prison is being extended to accommodate the proposed building, or the proposed building is located on a completely new site, then the building must comply with the assessment criteria defined above.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

3

A copy of the remediation strategy and implementation plan

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Construction zone For the purpose of this BREEAM issue the construction zone is defined as any land on the site which is being developed (and therefore disturbed) for buildings, hard standing, soft landscape, site access, plus a 3m wide zone measured outward from the boundary. It also includes any areas used for temporary site storage and buildings. If it is not known exactly where buildings, hard standing, site access and temporary storage will be located it must be assumed that the construction zone is the entire site. Contaminant A contaminant is defined as any solid, liquid or gaseous material in, or on the ground to be covered by the building, which is classed as a hazard and therefore presents an unacceptable risk to human health and the environment. The definition also includes land significantly infested by non-native invasive plant species (see definition below).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

291

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Contaminated land specialist An individual that holds a degree or equivalent qualification in chemistry, environmental science/management, earth sciences, civil engineering or a related subject, and has a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years) in site investigation, risk assessment and appraisal. Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical knowledge of site investigation methodologies and understanding of remediation techniques and national legislation on the subject; as well as acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for remediation. Non-native invasive plant species Non-indigenous species that adversely affect the habitats they invade economically, environmentally or ecologically. Note: For the purposes of the BREEAM UK New Construction Scheme this currently includes Japanese Knotweed and Giant Hogweed. Further information on control and disposal, together with legislative requirements relating to such species can be obtained from statutory agencies, such as the Environment Agency. Pollution linkages A relevant pollutant linkage is one that has been identified during the risk assessment stage as representing unacceptable risks to human health or the environment. Proposed development Any development (building, hard landscaping, car park and access roads) that falls within the boundary of the assessed site. Previously occupied land For the purposes of this issue BREEAM defines previously occupied land as that which is or was occupied by a permanent structure, including any associated fixed surface infrastructure (the definition is based on the National Planning Policy Framework1 definition of Previously Developed Land). The definition excludes: 1. Land that is or has been occupied by agricultural or forestry buildings. 2. Land that has been developed for minerals extraction or waste disposal by landfill purposes where provision for restoration has been made through development control procedures. 3. Land in built-up areas such as parks, recreation grounds and allotments which, although may feature paths, pavilions and other buildings, has not been previously occupied. 4. Land that was previously occupied but where the remains of the permanent structure or fixed surface structure have blended into the landscape in the process of time (to the extent that it can reasonably be considered as part of the natural surroundings), typically over a period of more than 50 years. Remediation Any activity undertaken to prevent, minimise, remedy or mitigate the risk caused by contaminated land to human health, the environment or local resources such as sources of potable water. Significant contamination For the purposes of this issue, significant contamination is contamination compliant with the above definition of contaminant and that which without remediation, development of the site is not possible.

Other information None.

1National Planning Policy Framework. www.gov.uk/government/publications/national-planning-policy-framework--2

292

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features

Land Use and Ecology

LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features Number of credits available

Minimum standards

2

No

Aim To encourage development on land that already has limited value to wildlife and to protect existing ecological features from substantial damage during site preparation and completion of construction works.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit - Ecological value of site

1. Land within the construction zone is defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ using either: a. The BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value (see Additional Information section below); OR b. A Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) who has identified the land as being of ‘low ecological value’ within an ecological assessment report, based on a site survey.

One credit - Protection of ecological features

2. All existing features of ecological value within and surrounding the construction zone and site boundary area are adequately protected from damage during clearance, site preparation and construction activities in line with BS42020: 2013 1. 3. In all cases, the principal contractor is required to construct ecological protection prior to any preliminary site construction or preparation works (e.g. clearing of the site or erection of temporary site facilities).

Checklists and tables BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value If the answer to all questions in the checklist is ‘no’, the land can be defined as having a low ecological value and the credit awarded. Should any of the questions be answered ‘yes’, the credit can only be awarded on confirmation from a Suitably Qualified Ecologist that the site is of low ecological value. The checklist should be completed by either the BREEAM Assessor, using appropriate evidence submitted by the design team or completed by the design team and submitted to the assessor along with appropriate supporting evidence. The answers to the checklist must be based on an evaluation of the site prior to any site clearance or construction activities (refer to Compliance notes for further details).

1BS 42020: 2013: Biodiversity - Code of Practice for Planning and Development, BSI 2013

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

293

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Table - 50: BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value ID

Question

Yes

No

Q1

Has the Planning Authority required that an ecological survey or statement be prepared?





Q2

Is the development within 2 km of a Special Area of Conservation (SAC), Special Protection Area (SPA) or Ramsar site? 1. www.natureonthemap.org.uk 2. www.magic.gov.uk 3. Local Plan Proposals Map.





Q3

Is the development within 500m of a Site of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) 1. www.natureonthemap.org.uk 2. www.magic.gov.uk 3. Local Plan Proposals Map.





Q4

Are any of the following habitats present on, or within 100m of the construction zone? 1. Broad-leaved woodland* 2. Water courses (rivers, streams or canals) ** 3. Wetlands (ponds, lakes, marshland, fenland, reed bed) 4. Flower-rich meadow/grassland 5. Heathland (habitat/plants that thrive on acidic soils, such as heather and gorse).





Q5

Are any of the following features present within or on the boundary of the construction zone? 1. Trees more than 10 years old 2. Mature hedgerow (field hedgerows over 1m tall and 0.5m wide)*** 3. Existing buildings (occupied or derelict) with either pitched tile, slate or shingle roofs, lofts, wall hanging tiles, weatherboarding or dense climbing plants, soffits and cellars, basements, ice houses etc.





Notes: * The Countryside Survey defines woodland as ‘having over 25% canopy cover of trees and shrubs, over a metre high’. Broad-leaved woodland should be taken to mean broad-leaved, mixed and Yew woodland. ** The Countryside Survey defines the broad habitats of rivers and streams as running watercourses ranging from small headwater streams to large rivers. This broad habitat, along with wetlands, includes the open water itself and the vegetation along the water’s edge. *** The Countryside Survey defines a hedge as ‘a line of woody vegetation that has been subject to management so that trees no longer take their natural shape.’ http://www.countrysidesurvey.org.uk/

294

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features

Land Use and Ecology

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.y.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

No features of ecological value See criterion 1.

The credit for the protection of ecological features can be awarded where the construction zone is defined as ‘land of low ecological value’ and where the surrounding site contains no features of ecological value.

CN5

Use of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist See criterion 1.

Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) is employed and has, using their professional judgement, defined the site as land of low ecological value, this assessment/judgement overrides any assessment determined using the BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value. The Suitably Qualified Ecologist must base their findings on data collected from a site visit conducted at appropriate time(s) of the year, when different plant and animal species are evident. The content of the Ecology Report is to be representative of the existing site’s ecology prior to the commencement of initial site preparation works (i.e. before RIBA Stage 5 Construction). Where the ecologist has not visited the site at the appropriate times the credit cannot be awarded (except in the circumstances indicated below in the Compliance note 'Site clearance prior to purchase of the site'). See Additional Information for the BREEAM definition of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE).

CN6

Features of little or no ecological value See criterion 1.

If a Suitably Qualified Ecologist has confirmed that a feature present on the site has little or no ecological value, or where a tree is deemed to create a significant danger to the public or occupants by a statutory body or qualified arboriculturalist, then that feature may be exempt from the 'protection of ecological features' requirement of this issue.

CN7

Prior removal of features of ecological value

If features of ecological value have been removed as part of the site clearance activities then the development cannot achieve the credits, even if they are to be replaced as part of a new soft landscape strategy.

General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

295

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN8

Site clearance prior to purchase of the site See criterion 1 and 2.

For sites cleared prior to purchase of the site and less than five years before assessment, a Suitably Qualified Ecologist should estimate the site’s ecological value immediately prior to clearance using available desktop information (including aerial photography) and the landscape type/area surrounding the site. Where it is not possible for the ecologists to determine that the site was of low ecological value prior to the site clearance then the credits must be withheld, i.e. where there is no evidence and therefore justification for awarding the credits. For sites cleared more than five years ago, the ecological value of the site is to be based on the current situation on the basis that within five years, ecological features would have started to re-establish themselves and therefore act as an indicator of the site’s ecological value.

CN9

Verification of a report written by an ecologist not meeting the BREEAM SQE criteria See criterion 1b.

Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is verifying an Ecology Report produced by another ecologist who does not meet the SQE criteria, they must, as a minimum, review the report and confirm in writing that they have found it to: 1. Represent sound industry practice 2. Report and recommend correctly, truthfully and objectively 3. Be appropriate given the local site conditions and scope of works proposed 4. aAoid invalid, biased and exaggerated statements. Additionally, written confirmation from the third party verifier that they comply with the definition of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is required.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1

Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is not employed: BREEAM checklist for defining land of low ecological value.

As per interim design stage.

Additional information Relevant definitions Construction zone As defined for BREEAM issue LE 01 Site selection.

296

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features

Land Use and Ecology

Features of ecological value Features requiring protection during site clearance and construction in accordance with BS 42020: 2013 to maintain their presence and ecological value, which include as a minimum: 1. Trees of over 100 mm trunk diameter, and/or of significant ecological value (as defined by BS 5837: 2012 1 and confirmed by the Suitably Qualified Ecologist or qualified arboriculturalist). 2. Hedges and natural areas requiring protection. 3. Watercourses and wetland areas. Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) An individual achieving all the following items can be considered to be 'suitably qualified' for the purposes of compliance with BREEAM: 1. Holds a degree or equivalent qualification (e.g. N/SVQ level 5) in ecology or a related subject. 2. Is a practising ecologist, with a minimum of three years relevant experience (within the last five years). Such experience must clearly demonstrate a practical understanding of factors affecting ecology in relation to construction and the built environment; including acting in an advisory capacity to provide recommendations for ecological protection, enhancement and mitigation measures. Examples of relevant experience are: ecological impact assessments; Preliminary Ecological Appraisals (PEA); Phase 2 habitat and fauna surveys; and habitat creation. 3. Is covered by a professional code of conduct and subject to peer review. Full members of the following organisations, who meet the above criteria, are deemed Suitably Qualified Ecologists for the purposes of BREEAM: a. Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Management (CIWEM) b. Chartered Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (CIEEM) c. Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA) d. Landscape Institute (LI) e. The Institution of Environmental Sciences (IES). Peer review A peer review is defined as the process employed by a professional body to demonstrate that potential or current full members maintain a standard of knowledge and experience required to ensure compliance with a code of conduct and professional ethics. Ecology related subject Depending on the ecological content (minimum 60%), the following degrees might be considered relevant: Ecology, Biological Sciences, Zoology, Botany, Countryside Management, Environmental Sciences, Marine and Freshwater Management, Earth Sciences, Agriculture, Forestry, Geography, Landscape Management.

Other information Very often there is the potential for a site to increase its biodiversity value through appropriate design and management, regardless of whether enhancing biodiversity is required to gain planning consent. This BREEAM assessment issue provides the opportunity to reward those projects that contribute to protecting and enhancing biodiversity, improve living environments and meet environmental objectives. Whilst not mandatory, BREEAM recommends that a Suitably Qualified Ecologist is appointed to ensure that a project maximizes biodiversity gains. Although a large number of developments are not required to undertake formal ecological assessments as part of the planning process because of the nature of the existing site, they may have potential to be of biodiversity value. Verification of this is best achieved by the appointment of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist. The Suitably Qualified Ecologist’s recommendations may impact on specifications worked-up by other design team members, such as landscape architects or drainage engineers. BREEAM recommends that collaborative input between the ecologist and relevant professionals is sought from the concept stage of the development to highlight opportunities and constraints and allow effective integration of these aspects into the ecologist’s recommendations.

1BS 5837: 2012: Trees in relation to design, demolition and construction - Recommendations, BSI 2012

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

297

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Organisations and institutes, including the Chartered Institute of Ecology and Environmental Management (CIEEM) and the Association of Wildlife Trust Consultancies (AWTC), provide lists of ecologists working within a particular region that may meet the SQE requirements. Relating Ecology Reports to BREEAM Guidance on relating ecology reports to BREEAM was provided in BREEAM New Construction 2011 Appendix F. This information will be available in a Guidance Note to be provided on the BREEAM website.

298

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology

Land Use and Ecology

LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology Number of credits available

Minimum standards

2

Yes

Aim To minimise the impact of a building development on existing site ecology.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Two credits - Change in ecological value 1

1. The change in ecological value of the site is equal to or greater than zero plant species, i.e. no negative change, using the methods outlined in either (a) or (b) below: a. Determine the following information and input this data in to the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator: i. The broad habitat type(s) that define the landscape of the assessed site in its existing pre-developed state and proposed state (see Table - 51). ii. Area (m2) of the existing and proposed broad habitat types. OR b. Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) has been appointed and, based on their site survey, they confirm the following and either the assessor or ecologist inputs this data in to the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator: i. The broad habitat types that define the landscape of the assessed site in its existing pre-developed state and proposed state. ii. Area (m2) of the existing and proposed broad habitat plot types. iii. Average total taxon (plant species) richness within each habitat type.

One credit - Change in ecological value 2

2. Where the change in ecological value of the site is less than zero but equal to or greater than minus nine plant species i.e. a minimal change, using the methods outlined in either 1(a) or (b) above.

Checklists and tables Table - 51: Broad habitat types(Source: Countryside Survey 2007) Broad habitat name

Description

Acid grassland

Vegetation dominated by grasses and herbs on a range of lime-deficient soils which have been derived from acidic bedrock or from superficial deposits such as sands and gravels. They characteristically include a range of calcifuge or ‘lime-avoiding’ plants.

Arable and

Includes all arable crops such as different types of cereal and vegetable crops, together with

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

299

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Broad habitat name

Description

horticultural

orchards and more specialist operations such as market gardening and commercial flower growing. Freshly ploughed land, fallow areas, short-term set-aside and annual grass leys are also included in this category.

Boundary and linear features

This habitat includes a diverse range of linearly arranged landscape features such as hedgerows, lines of trees (whether they are part of a hedgerow or not), walls, stone and earth banks, grass strips and dry ditches. These features may occur separately or in combinations forming multielement boundaries. This habitat type also includes some of the built components of the rural landscape, including roads, tracks and railways. The narrow strips of semi-natural vegetation along verges or cuttings are also included.

Bracken

Stands of vegetation greater than 0.25 ha in extent which are dominated by a continuous canopy cover (> 95% cover) of bracken (Pteridium aquilinum) at the height of the growing season.

Built-up and gardens

Covers urban and rural settlements, farm buildings, caravan parks and other man-made built structures such as industrial estates, retail parks, waste and derelict ground, urban parkland and urban transport infrastructure. It also includes domestic gardens and allotments. This category has been split in to three individual broad habitat categories for the purpose of BREEAM: 1. Gardens, allotments and urban parkland 2. Built-up (maintained buildings and infrastructure) 3. Derelict land (where the land was previously used for major historical industrial use or development). This split is to reflect the differing impact of development in these types of habitats.

Broadleaved, mixed and yew woodland

This form of woodland is dominated by trees that are more than 5m high when mature, which form a distinct, although sometimes open, canopy with a cover of greater than 20%. It includes stands of native broad leaved trees (such as oak, ash and beech), non-native broad leaved trees (such as sycamore and horse chestnut), and yew trees, where the percentage cover of these trees in the stand exceeds 20% of the total cover of the trees present. Scrub vegetation, where the woody component tends to be mainly shrubs (usually less than 5m high), is included if the cover of woody species is greater than 30%.

Calcareous grassland

Vegetation dominated by grasses and herbs on shallow, well-drained soils, which are alkaline, as a result of the weathering of chalk, limestone or other types of base-rich rock. They characteristically include a range of calcicoles or ‘lime-loving’ plants.

Coniferous woodland

Dominated by trees that are more than 5m high when mature, which form a distinct, although sometimes open, canopy which has a cover of greater than 20%. It includes stands of both native conifers (Scots pine but not yew) and non-native conifers (such as larch and Sitka spruce) where the percentage cover of these trees in the stand exceeds 80% of the total cover of the trees present.

Mixed woodland

This is not a category in its own right, but has been included separately by BRE Global for clarification. Many areas of woodland contain both broad leaved and coniferous trees. There is not a separate Broad Habitat for mixed woodland. Instead where mixtures occur they are assigned to the Broad leaved, Mixed and Yew Broad Habitat type if the proportion of conifers is less than 80%.

300

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology

Broad habitat name

Land Use and Ecology

Description

The separation of coniferous from Broad leaved, Mixed and Yew habitat is applied at a stand or sub-compartment level within large woodlands to avoid areas that are predominantly coniferous being treated as mixed because they are part of a larger wood, of which 20% consists of pure broadleaved trees. Therefore, most areas of mixed woodland that are assigned to the Broad leaved, Mixed and Yew Broad Habitat would normally have much more than 20% broad leaved or yew trees. Dwarf shrub heath

Vegetation that has a greater than 25% cover of plant species from the heath family or dwarf gorse species. It generally occurs on well-drained, nutrient-poor, acid soils.

Improved grassland

Occurs on fertile soils and is characterised by the dominance of a few fast-growing species, such as rye-grass and white clover. These grasslands are typically used for grazing and silage, but they can also be managed for recreational purposes. They are often intensively managed using fertiliser and weed control treatments, and may also be ploughed as part of the normal rotation of arable crops but if so, they are only included in this Broad Habitat type if they are more than one year old.

Inland rock

Habitat types that occur on both natural and artificial exposed rock surfaces, such as inland cliffs, caves, screes and limestone pavements, as well as various forms of excavations and waste tips, such as quarries and quarry waste.

Neutral grassland

Found on soils that are neither very acid nor alkaline. They support different types of vegetation communities compared to Acid and Calcareous Grasslands in that they do not contain calcifuge (‘lime-avoiding’) plants which are found on acid soils, or calcicole (lime-loving) plants which are found on calcareous soils. Unimproved or semi-improved Neutral grasslands may be managed as hay meadows, pastures or for silage. They differ from Improved grassland in that they are less fertile and contain a wider range of herb and grass species. Usually the cover of rye grass is less than about 25%.

Table - 52: Inclusive analysis of average total taxon richness by broad habitat in ‘Fields and Other Main Land Cover Parcels plots’ in Great Britain. Habitat type

Previously undeveloped land

Previously developed land (within broad habitat type)** & *** (Time period that the site has been unoccupied/unmaintained and therefore derelict)

Average total taxon (plant species) richness* < 5 Years

5-10 Years

10 - 20 Years

20 - 30+ Years

Acid grassland

19.58

0

5.87

14.69

19.58

Arable and horticultural land

10.25

-

-

-

-

Boundary and linear features

15.42

-

-

-

-

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

301

Land use

Habitat type

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Previously undeveloped land

Previously developed land (within broad habitat type)** & *** (Time period that the site has been unoccupied/unmaintained and therefore derelict)

Average total taxon (plant species) richness* Bracken

19.29

-

-

-

-

Built-up (buildings and infrastructure)**&*** &

-

0

-

-

-

Calcareous grassland

43.02

0

12.91

32.27

43.02

Coniferous woodland

14.05

-

-

-

-

-

0

6.00

14.99

19.99

Gardens, allotments and urban parkland***

19.99

0

6.00

14.99

19.99

Dwarf shrub heath

15.87

0

4.76

11.90

15.87

Improved grassland

14.28

0

4.28

10.71

14.28

Inland rock

16.74

-

-

-

-

Mixed, broadleaved and yew woodland

20.91

-

-

-

-

Neutral grassland

20.44

0

6.13

15.33

20.44

Derelict land**

Source: Acknowledgement - Countryside Survey data owned by NERC – Centre for Ecology and Hydrology. Countryside Survey © Database Right/Copyright NERC– Centre for Ecology and Hydrology. All rights reserved. *Total taxon richness is higher plant species only, no bryophytes (non flowering plants). Figures are based on the average species richness per 200m2 plot. **The derelict land and built-up figures are not from the Countryside survey data (see Additional information). ***BRE Global have split the 'Built-up and gardens' Countryside survey category into these headings to reflect the differing impact of building on these types of land. ****The ecological value of derelict sites is time dependent; a linear scale has been used to determine intermediate values between zero ecological value, where development occurs within 5 years from the end of occupation and maintenance works, and the value at 30 years based on the full species richness for the relevant broad habitat. This presents a minimum figure which can be amended on the advice of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist and their site survey.

302

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology

Land Use and Ecology

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

Assessment of a single development on a larger site

Where the assessment is of a single building that forms part of a larger development and the soft landscape and ecological features form a common part of the whole site, for the purpose of assessing this issue the plot types and areas for the entire site must be used.

CN5

Infill developments on existing occupied site

Where a new building is an infill on an existing occupied site, then the construction zone for the new building would be the area of site assessed for the purposes of this issue.

CN6

Site clearance prior to purchase of the site

Refer to BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features – Compliance notes

CN7

Green roofs/walls See criterion 1b.

The contribution of plant species on a green roof can only be incorporated within the calculation where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist has been appointed to advise on suitable plant species for the roof. Presently green walls cannot be considered compliant within this BREEAM issue due to concerns over high maintenance requirements which are often not self supporting/sustainable, resulting in deterioration of these plants. If the assessor feels that the green wall specified meets the aims of this issue and will be self sustaining, details can be sent to BRE for consideration. Ground planted plants trained up a framework supported by the building would be acceptable (confirmed by the SQE) as these are not so dependent on systems and maintenance.

General

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

303

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Methodology Calculating the change in ecological value for a site The change in ecological value is determined by measuring the diversity (species richness and cover) of plants on the site immediately before site clearance/preparation and after construction of the assessed development. The ecological value is expressed as an area-weighted average of plant species richness for the site’s broad habitat types. This enables BREEAM to use plant species as an indicator of the development’s impact on the site’s existing ecological value. A simple example of the calculation is outlined below. 1. Calculate the ecological value of a previously developed existing site: A 2065m2 existing site consists of the following types of land and, using data from the table above, plant species richness: 1. a. 1865m2 hard landscape = 0 species b. 200m2 urban parkland = 19.99 species The ecological value of the site in its existing condition is calculated as follows, for each plot type; Number of species on plot type x plot type area as % of total area. Therefore, for the example site: 1. a. Hard landscape: {(0 species x (1865m2/2065m2)} = 0 b. Urban parkland: {(19.99 species x (200m2/2065m2)} = 1.94 c. Ecological value of the existing site = 0 + 1.94 = 1.94 2. Calculate the ecological value of the site in its proposed, post-developed state: The 2065m2 post-construction site consists of the following types of land: a. 1375m2 of building = 0 species. b. 550m2 of hard landscape = 0 species c. 140m2 has remained as urban parkland = 19.99 species The ecological value of the proposed site is as follows: a. b. c. d.

Building: {(0 species x (1375m2/2065m2)} = 0 Hard landscape: {(0 species x (550m2/2065m2)} = 0 Urban parkland: {(19.99 species x (140m2/2065m2)} = 1.36 Ecological value of the proposed site = 0 + 0 + 1.36 = 1.36

The ecological impact is the difference between the two ecological values: a. Change in ecological value: 1.36 (after) – 1.94 (before) = - 0.58 Therefore, as the ecological value has decreased by no less than minus nine, for this example one credit can be awarded.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1-2

Where relevant:

304

Final post construction stage

As per interim design stage.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology

Criteria

Land Use and Ecology

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

A completed copy of the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator

For large mixed-use/multi-building developments, where the whole site has not been completed and ecological enhancements have not yet been added, or where features are being added at a later date in an appropriate planting season: Evidence from the client or principal contractor confirming planting will be completed within 18 months from completion of the development.

Additional information Relevant definitions Average total taxon (plant species richness) The ecological value of a site expressed as an area weighted average of plant species richness for a site's broad habitat types. Note: BREEAM uses plant species richness as an indicative measure of ecological value of the assessed site and therefore an indication of ecological impact resulting from its development. Construction zone Refer to BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features. Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) Refer to BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features.

Other information See LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features ‘Other information’ for information that also apply to LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology. Where green roofs are specified The GRO Green Roof Code1 provides guidance on green roof design, installation and maintenance and maximising their environmental benefits.

Countryside Survey (2007) data The data used in this BREEAM issue has been obtained from the Countryside Survey 2007 tables; http://www.countrysidesurvey.org.uk/data_access/Graphs/SummaryResults.aspx Broad habitat definitions have been sourced from: http://www.countrysidesurvey.org.uk/archiveCS2000/Report_ pdf/appen.pdf Some of the Countryside Survey broad habitat data have not been used within this BREEAM issue either because the broad habitat supports no taxon richness or because it is unlikely that buildings will be constructed within these habitat types e.g. bog, fen etc.

BREEAM assumptions In order to use the Countryside Survey data within BREEAM, BRE Global have made the following assumptions:

1The GRO Green Roof Code: Green Roof Code of Practice for the UK 2011, Groundwork Sheffield

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

305

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

1. Built-up (maintained buildings and hard landscaping) have a plant species richness of zero. 2. The previously developed land category is relevant for derelict sites within a broad habitat type where plant species found in that habitat are likely to reclaim the site if left to do so over a defined period of time. BRE have assumed this is the case for land found within the grassland, heath, derelict, gardens, allotments and urban parkland habitats. It has not been assumed for other categories as BRE Global are unable to confirm an appropriate period over which planting will re-establish itself on derelict land within these other broad habitat types. 3. A period of 5 to 10, 10 to 20 and 20 to 30 year’s dereliction is used; the species richness figures against each period for a particular habitat type are based on a re-establishment rate of 30% of richness, 75% and 100% respectively. 4. BRE have split the ‘Built up and gardens’ category from the Countryside Survey into ‘Gardens, allotments and urban parkland’, ‘Derelict’ and ‘Built-up’ habitat types. This split is to reflect the differing impact of building on this type of land.

306

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

LE 04 Enhancing site ecology

Land Use and Ecology

LE 04 Enhancing site ecology Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

No

Aim To encourage actions taken to enhance the ecological value of the site as a result of development.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

One credit - Ecologist's report and recommendations (Except buildings on HM Prison sites where two credits are available for compliance with criteria 1 and 2) 1. A suitably qualified ecologist (SQE) has been appointed by the client or their project representative by the end of the Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) to report on enhancing the ecology of the site, and: a. The SQE provides an Ecology Report with appropriate recommendations for the enhancement of the site’s ecology. b. The report is based on a site visit/survey by the SQE (see also CN4). 2. The recommendations of the Ecology Report for the enhancement of site ecology have been, or will be, implemented in the final design and build.

Two credits - Increase in ecological value (All building types except those on HM Prison sites) 3. The criteria of the first credit are met. 4. The recommendations of the Ecology Report for the enhancement of site ecology have been implemented in the final design and build, and the suitably qualified ecologist confirms that this will result in an increase in ecological value of the site, with an increase of six plant species or greater (refer also to Compliance note CN8 for alternative means of compliance). 5. The increase in plant species has been calculated using the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator, using actual plant species numbers.

One credit - Simple buildings specific

6. The project team has sought recommendations from recognised ‘local’ ecological expertise and generic guidance in the form of published guidance documents, information leaflets to inform the adoption of locally relevant ecological measures that enhance the ecological value of the site. These measures may include: a. Planting of native species or those with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife b. Adoption of horticultural good practice (e.g. no or low use of residual pesticides) c. Installation of bird, bat and/or insect boxes at appropriate locations on the site. Only native floral species or those with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife can be considered for the purpose of enhancing the ecological value of the site.

OR Criteria 1 to 5 are applicable as an alternative means of demonstrating compliance with this issue.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

307

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria Local expertise See criterion 6.

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria. Note that guidance may be sought from bodies such as The Wildlife Trust, The Royal Horticultural Society, etc. to inform the adoption of locally relevant ecological measures that enhance the ecological value of the site.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

Timing of ecologist's survey and report See criterion 1.

The suitably qualified ecologist must be appointed to carry out site surveys of existing site ecology, on which their report is based (or to provide verification where the report is prepared by others) at the Preparation and Brief stage (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) in order to facilitate and maximise potential ecological enhancement.

CN5

Appropriate recommendations See criterion 1.

Appropriate recommendations for enhancing the ecological value of the site are to include, and go beyond, compliance criteria for all current EU and UK legislation relating to protected species and habitats. These recommendations may include ecological recommendations as detailed in the definitions.

CN6

Guidance for ecologists and assessors

Guidance on relating ecology reports to BREEAM was provided in BREEAM New Construction 2011 Appendix F. This information will be available in a Guidance Note to be provided on the BREEAM website.

CN7

Plant species See criterion 4.

Native floral or plant species contributing to local, regional and/or UK Priority Species/Habitats, or those species specified by the SQE with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife can be considered for the purpose of increasing the number

General

308

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

LE 04 Enhancing site ecology

Ref

Terms

Land Use and Ecology

Description of species on site, as well as general enhancement.The planting area, density and mixture of different species must be specified with input from both the SQE and the landscape architect (where employed), to address the following three points; The enhancement of the ecological value of the site The best possible chance of establishment and long term survival of the species within the habitat Links to and support of the local ecosystem beyond the site boundary.

CN8

Increase in ecological value See criterion 4.

BREEAM uses plant species richness as an indicative measure of ecological value of the assessed site. The second credit is achieved on the basis that an increase in ecological value post development is achieved, compared to the value of the site pre-development. Where the SQE identifies that an increase in the ecological value of the site can be achieved without meeting the target of an increase of 6 plant species the credit can be awarded if there is clear justification which addresses the following three points: The enhancement of the ecological value of the site The best possible chance of establishment and long term survival of the species within the habitat Links to and support of the local ecosystem beyond the site boundary. The BREEAM Assessor must rely on the professional judgement of the SQE when determining compliance for this issue.

CN9

Infill construction on existing sites with limited space for ecological enhancements or overriding security requirements See criterion 1.

Where it is not possible to implement ecological enhancements within the construction zone due to overriding security issues, or where space for ecological enhancements within the zone is severely limited, ecological enhancements made to other areas of the site can be taken into account and used to determine the number of BREEAM credits achieved. These enhancements must be made within the boundary of the wider existing development and be planned and commissioned on a similar time scale to the assessed development. Examples of instances where this Compliance note may apply include new ‘infill’ building developments within existing HM Prison sites, further and higher education campuses, retail or business parks.

Methodology For the methodology used to calculate the increase in plant species refer to the Methodology section in BREEAM issue LE 03 Minimising impact on existing site ecology – Methodology

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

309

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

5

A completed copy of the BREEAM LE 03/LE 04 calculator

As per interim design stage. For large mixed-useor multi-building developments, where the whole site has not been completed and ecological enhancements have not yet been added, or where features are being added at a later date in an appropriate planting season: evidence from the client or principal contractor confirming any planting will be completed within 18 months from completion of the development.

6

-

For large mixed-use/multi-building developments, where the whole site has not been completed and ecological enhancements have not yet been added, or where features are being added at a later date in an appropriate planting season: evidence from the client or principal contractor confirming any planting will be completed within 18 months from completion of the development.

Additional information Relevant definitions Ecological recommendations Ecological recommendations are defined as measures adopted to enhance the ecology of the site. Measures may include but are not limited to: 1. The planting of locally appropriate native species or non-native species with a known attraction or benefit to local wildlife. 2. The adoption of horticultural good practice (e.g. no, or low, use of residual pesticides). 3. The installation of bird, bat and/or insect boxes at appropriate locations on the site. 4. Development of a full Biodiversity Management Plan including avoiding clearance/works at key times of the year (e.g. breeding seasons). 5. The proper integration, design and maintenance of SUDs (such as rain gardens), green roofs, green walls, community orchards, community allotments etc. Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) Refer to BREEAM issue LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features.

Other information Flora Locale (www.floralocale.org) may be a useful site for finding suppliers of British flora. Biological Records Centres and the National Biological Network collate data on species findings for the UK. Design teams, assessors and ecologists can support the collation of species data by providing survey records from the assessed development to the local Biological Records Centre (www.brc.ac.uk/irecord) or nationally to the National Biological Network.

310

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity

Land Use and Ecology

LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity Number of credits available

Minimum standards

2

No

Aim To minimise the long term impact of the development on the site and the surrounding area’s biodiversity.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance for:

Up to two credits

1. Where a Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) is appointed prior to commencement of activities onsite and they confirm that all relevant UK and EU legislation relating to the protection and enhancement of ecology has been complied with during the design and construction process. 2. Where a landscape and habitat management plan, appropriate to the site, is produced covering at least the first five years after project completion in accordance with BS 42020:2013 1 Section 11.1. This is to be handed over to the building owner/occupants for use by the grounds maintenance staff. 3. Where, in addition to criteria 1 and 2, measures to improve the assessed sites long term biodiversity are adopted, according to Table - 53. The BREEAM credits can then be awarded as follows: No. of credits

No. of additional measures

1

2

2

4

Where the Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) confirms that some of the additional measures listed in Table - 53 are not applicable to the assessed development, the credits can be awarded as follows: Applicable additional measures All

4

3

2

1

Credits

Number of additional measures to assess

1

2

2

2

2

1

2

4

4

3

2

1

1BS 42020: 2013 Biodiversity - Code of Practice for Planning Development, BSI 2013

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

311

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Table - 53: Table 1: Additional measures for the improvement of long term biodiversity Ref

Additional measure for the improvement of long term biodiversity

1

The principal contractor nominates a Biodiversity Champion with the authority to influence site activities and ensure that detrimental impacts onsite biodiversity are minimised in line with the recommendations of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.

2

The principal contractor trains the site workforce on how to protect site ecology during the project. Specific training must be carried out for the entire site workforce to ensure they are aware of how to avoid damaging site ecology during operations onsite. Training should be based on the findings and recommendations for protection of ecological features highlighted within a report prepared by a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.

3

The principal contractor records actions taken to protect biodiversity and monitor their effectiveness throughout key stages of the construction process. The requirement commits the principal contractor to make such records available where publicly requested.

4

Where a new ecologically valuable habitat appropriate to the local area is created. This includes a habitat that supports nationally, regionally or locally important biodiversity, and/or which is nationally, regionally or locally important itself; including any UK Biodiversity Action Plan (UK BAP) priority habitats1 Local Biodiversity Action Plan (LBAP) habitats, those protected within statutory sites (e.g. SSSIs), or those within non-statutory sites identified in local plans. Local biodiversity expertise should be sought during the Preparation and Brief (RIBA Stage 1 or equivalent) to help identify species of local biodiversity importance onsite and ensure that the proposals support local priorities.

5

Where flora and/or fauna habitats exist onsite, the contractor programmes site works to minimise disturbance to wildlife. For example, site preparation, ground works, and soft landscape have been, or will be, scheduled at an appropriate time of year to minimise disturbance to wildlife. Timing of works may have a significant impact on, for example, breeding birds, flowering plants, seed germination, amphibians etc. Actions such as phased clearance of vegetation may help to mitigate ecological impacts. This additional requirement will be achieved where a clear plan has been produced detailing how activities will be timed to avoid any impact on site biodiversity in line with the recommendations of a Suitably Qualified Ecologist.

6

Education buildings (pre-schools, schools and sixth form colleges only) A partnership has been set up by the design team with a local group that has wildlife expertise (e.g. local wildlife trust or similar local body) and the group has: a. Provided advice early in the design process regarding protecting and/or providing habitat for species of local importance on the site. b. Provided advice to ensure the design is in keeping with the local environment. In particular this should draw on their local knowledge of any features or species of ecological interest on or near the site. c. Provided, or will continue to provide, ongoing support and advice to the educational establishment to help them manage, maintain and develop the outdoor space in the longer term. A suitable starting point for discussion with the local wildlife group would be to ask for advice on how to take account of the Local Biodiversity Action Plan (LBAP) in the school/college landscape design.

1For information on UK BAP Priority Habitats refer to Joint Nature Conservation Committee: www.jncc.defra.gov.uk,

312

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity

Land Use and Ecology

Checklists and tables None.

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Where additional measures are not applicable See criterion 1,2 and 3.

In all cases it is necessary to employ a Suitably Qualified Ecologist to achieve these credits. As a minimum the ecologist must provide the following in writing: 1. Confirmation that criteria 1 and 2 have been achieved 2. Clarification on how many of the additional measures for criterion 3 are applicable and have been achieved 3. Guidance on how to achieve additional measure 4 (where possible). Where the Suitably Qualified Ecologist confirms that none of the additional measures are applicable (due to the nature of the site and its surroundings) full credits can be awarded for demonstrating compliance with criteria 1 and 2.

General CN4

Building specific CN5

Education (preschool, school and sixth form college buildings only) Additional measure 6: Ongoing support and advice

This could take the form of meetings several times a year with staff/pupils/students working party to help them plan conservation and ecological enhancement work, or activities relating the ecology in or near the school or college grounds.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

313

Land use

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN6

Prisons Additional measure 4

The Prison Service Biodiversity Action (PSBAP)1 should be referred to for prison buildings where additional measure 4 is being assessed. For habitats that are not listed in the PSBAP guidance on appropriate habitat creation should be sought from the National Biodiversity Network and the UKBAP.

Methodology None.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

6

Where Additional Measure 6 is assessed: 1. Scope of the partnership. 2. Details and remit of wildlife group. 3. A description of the process for ongoing support that the group commit to give to the partnership. 4. Details of the meetings and actions to date.

Where Additional Measure 6 is assessed: Documentary evidence from the design team or wildlife group detailing as a minimum meetings, actions, advice given, framework for future support including a timetable for meetings and events.

Additional information Relevant definitions Biodiversity Biodiversity is defined as the variety of life on earth. It includes all species, animal, plants, fungi, algae, bacteria and the habitats that they depend upon. Biodiversity Action Plan A plan which sets specific, measurable, achievable, realistic and time bound conservation targets for species and habitats. The JNCC (Joint Nature Conservation Committee) website www.jncc.defra.gov.uk provides information on Biodiversity Action Plans and the UK Post-2010 Biodiversity Framework. Biodiversity Champion An individual formally tasked by the principal contractor with the responsibility for monitoring and influencing site activities and minimising detrimental impact on biodiversity. The individual must have sufficient authority and time on site and knowledge of ecology and construction to carry out the role. The Biodiversity Champion does not have to be

1Statement of Action and Strategy for a Prison Service Biodiversity Action Plan, HMPS, 2003.

314

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

LE 05 Long term impact on biodiversity

Land Use and Ecology

an ecologist or ecological expert. This may be the same person as the Sustainability Champion inMan 03 Responsible construction practices. Local group with wildlife expertise A local group with wildlife expertise could be the local Wildlife Trust or an alternative group that has been involved with local wildlife conservation/enhancement projects. Prison Service Biodiversity Action Plans (BAPs) In March 2003 HM Prison Service produced a Strategy Statement of Action for a Prison Service biodiversity action plan. The Prison Service BAP comprises three stages, the first of which involves managing SSSI sites. The second stage addresses the management of sites that are not designated, but which may have land which has local, county or regional importance on biodiversity. The third stage addresses the rest of the prison estate, principally comprising urban prisons. The PSBAP falls under the Ministry of Justice (MOJ) Statement for Biodiversity, the MOJ’s commitment to supporting its diverse biological estate. Suitably Qualified Ecologist (SQE) Refer to LE 02 Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features

Other information Guidance on relating ecology reports to BREEAM was provided in BREEAM New Construction 2011 Appendix F. This information will be available in a Guidance Note to be provided on the BREEAM website. BS 42020: 2013 Section 11.1 states that the following should be included in long-term management plans for habitats, species and biodiversity features: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

Description and evaluation of features to be managed. Ecological trends and constraints onsite that could influence management. Aims and objectives of management. Appropriate management options for achieving aims and objectives. Prescriptions for management actions. Preparation of a work schedule (including an annual work plan capable of being rolled forward over a five year period). Body or organisation personnel responsible for implementation of the plan. Monitoring and remedial measures (see 11.2). Funding resources and mechanisms to ensure sustainable long-term delivery of the proposed management.

BS 42020: 2013 also states that the level of detail required for any given site should be that which is necessary to ensure the effective management of the biodiversity features present.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

315

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Pollution

316

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants

Pollution

Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants Number of credits available

Minimum standards

3

No

Aim To reduce the level of greenhouse gas emissions arising from the leakage of refrigerants from building systems.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into two parts: Buildings that use no refrigerants (3 credits) OR for buildings that use refrigerants Pre-requisite Impact of refrigerant (1 to 2 credits) Leak detection (1 credit). The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Three credits - No refrigerant use

1. Where the building does not require the use of refrigerants within its installed plant/systems.

OR alternatively, where the building does require the use of refrigerants, the three credits can be awarded as follows:

Pre-requisite

2. All systems (with electric compressors) must comply with the requirements of BS EN 378:2008 1 (parts 2 and 3) and where refrigeration systems containing ammonia are installed, the Institute of Refrigeration Ammonia Refrigeration Systems Code of Practice2.

Two credits - Impact of refrigerant

3. Where the systems using refrigerants have Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2 equivalent emissions (DELC CO2e) of ≤ 100 kgCO2e/kW cooling/heating capacity. To calculate the DELC CO2e please refer to the Relevant definitions in the Additional information section and the Methodology section. OR 4. Where air-conditioning or refrigeration systems are installed the refrigerants used have a Global Warming Potential (GWP) ≤ 10.

OR

One credit - Impact of refrigerant

5. Where the systems using refrigerants have Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2 equivalent emissions (DELC CO2e) of ≤ 1000 kgCO2e/kW cooling/heating capacity.

1BS EN 378 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements, BSI, 2008 2Ammonia Refrigeration Systems Code of Practice, Institute of Refrigeration, 2009

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

317

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

One credit - Leak detection

6. Where systems using refrigerants have a permanent automated refrigerant leak detection system installed; OR where an in-built automated diagnostic procedure for detecting leakage is installed. In all instances a robust and tested refrigerant leak detection system must be installed and must be capable of continuously monitoring for leaks. 7. The system must be capable of automatically isolating and containing the remaining refrigerant(s) charge in response to a leak detection incident. A system which initiates an automated shut down and pump down of the refrigerant into a separate storage tank would meet this criterion.

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Option 1 – Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2 – Shell and core only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. If the building is designed in such a way that it avoids the need for refrigerant containing building services, and therefore no 'refrigerant using' building services or systems will be specified for the fit out, then the available credits can be awarded by default (this would apply to Option 2 only). Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Refrigerant charge of less than 6kg

For installations of small multiple hermetic systems only where the refrigerant charge in each unit is less than 6kg, the credit for leak detection and containment can be awarded by default. This is on the basis that the risk of a large refrigerant leak due to system failure is minimised, as individual leaks from each system will be small where leakage occurs, and therefore there is little life cycle benefit of requiring leak detection equipment on each small system.

General CN4

318

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants

Terms

Ref

Pollution

Description Note: solutions such as this may be less energy efficient and as such may impact on the achievement of credits under Ene 01.

CN5

Specification of multiple systems

Where more than one air conditioning/refrigeration system is installed in the building, the assessor must source the relevant technical data for each system and enter it in to the Pol 01 calculator. The calculator will then determine the weighted average DELC for the multiple installation and the BREEAM credits can be awarded or withheld accordingly.

CN6

Leak detection See criteria 6 and 7.

The refrigerant leak detection criteria are still applicable in instances where any type of non-solid refrigerant is present, i.e. even if the refrigerant meets BREEAM’s DELC CO2e benchmark(s). Exceptions to this are systems that use natural and environmentally benign refrigerants, such as air and water (for example lithium bromide/water absorption chillers) and installations of small multiple hermetic systems, where compliance note 1 above applies. These types of system/refrigerants will achieve the leak detection credit by default.

Methodology The number of Pol 01 BREEAM credits achieved is determined by the assessor using the BREEAM Pol 01 calculator. The Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2e emissions (DELC) per kW of cooling capacity are calculated using the following equation: [Refigerant loss operational + refrigerant loss system retirement] × GWP Cooling Capacity (kW)

Where: Refrigerant loss operational: (Ref charge x Sys op-life x (L1 + L2 + S1 + S2)) /100 Refrigerant loss system retirement = Ref charge x (1 - Ref RecEff /100) Where: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Ref charge: Refrigerant charge (kg) Sysop-life: System operational lifetime (years) Ref RecEff : Refrigerant Recovery Efficiency factor (%) L1: Annual Leakage Rate (units: % Refrigerant charge) L2: Annual Purge Release factor (% Refrigerant charge) S1: Annual Service Release (% Refrigerant charge) S2: Probability factor for catastrophic failure (%Refrigerant charge loss/year) GWP: Global Warming Potential of refrigerant Cooling/heating capacity (kW).

The following default values must be used, where system specific data is not available: System operational design life (*years): See Table - 54 Refrigerant recovery efficiency factor (%): - 95% Annual leakage rates (% refrigerant charge): See Table - 55 Annual purge release factor (% refrigerant charge):- 0.5 (if the system does not require an annual purge, zero should be used).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

319

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Annual service release (% refrigerant charge): 0.25 (this applies where the system requires opening up to carry out the annual service. For systems which do not require opening up, there will be no associated annual release of refrigerant, therefore a default of zero should be used). Probability factor for catastrophic failure (% refrigerant charge loss/year): 1% (based on a failure rate of 1 in 100 systems). The following information must be sourced from the design team’s mechanical and electrical engineer and/or system manufacturer: System type Refrigerant charge (kg) GWP: Global Warming Potential of refrigerant(s) Cooling/heating capacity (kW). Table - 54: Default system operational design life values System type

Default system operational design life values (years)

Small/medium capacity chillers

15

Large capacity chillers

20

Unitary Split

15

Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) system

15

All other systems

10

These figures are based on those reported in LOT 6 for Air Conditioning units and the British Refrigeration Association’s (BRA) Guideline Methods of Calculating TEWI (2006)1 Note: The following should be considered when determining whether the system specified is defined as small/medium/large: Large capacity chiller: Centrifugal compressor Medium capacity chiller: Scroll/screw compressor Small capacity chiller : Scroll compressor

Table - 55: Average annual leakage rates for the UK Annual leakage rate (% of charge per annum)

System type

Cold storage and display systems Integral cabinets

3%

Split/condensing units

18%

Centralised

19%

1Guideline Methods of Calculating TEWI Issue 2, (2006), BRA Specification.

320

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants

Pollution

Annual leakage rate (% of charge per annum)

System type

Air conditioning systems Unitary split

15%

Small scale chillers

10%

Medium/large chillers

5%

Heat pumps

6%

These figures are based on those reported in LOT 6 for Air Conditioning units and also Table 2 of the Market Transformation Programmes Briefing Note for Commercial Refrigeration no. 36, ‘Direct Emission of Refrigerant Gases’ (version 1.2). The figures are based on the average of the leakage rates from the four separate studies reported in Table 2 (where a range is reported the higher value was used).

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post- construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

3 and 5

Completed copy of the Pol 01 calculator tool

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Direct effect life cycle (DELC) carbon dioxide equivalent A measure of the effect on global warming arising from emissions of refrigerant (in the case of this BREEAM assessment issue) from the equipment to the atmosphere over its lifetime (units: kgCO2eq.). The calculation involves estimating the total refrigerant release over the period of operation and subsequent conversion to an equivalent mass of carbon dioxide. Should the system use several different refrigerants, e.g. a primary refrigerant and a secondary coolant, or a cascade system, individual calculations are made for all refrigerants which contribute to the direct effect (see Methodology section for a description of how DELC is calculated). Moderately airtight enclosure This can be defined as an enclosure that does not produce a draught or significant fresh air ingress that would dilute any leaked refrigerant gas (dilution may prevent detection). Ozone Refrigerant leak detection An automated permanently installed multi-point sensing system, designed to continuously monitor the atmosphere in the vicinity of refrigeration equipment and, in the event of detection, raise an alarm. The system may be aspirated or

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

321

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

have multiple sensor heads linked to a central alarm unit or BMS. Various sensor types are available including infra-red, semi-conductor or electro-chemical. Refrigerant recovery The process of removing refrigerant from a system and storing it in an airtight container. Refrigerant pump down The specification of automatic refrigerant pump down can further limit potential losses and damage to the environment and have subsequent economic benefits to the building owner. Under the United Kingdom 1990 Environmental Protection Act unwanted refrigerant and refrigerating system oil are classified as either controlled or hazardous waste. Not only is it an offence to discharge them to the environment, but there are procedures regarding transport, storage, transfer of ownership and ultimate disposal. Article 16 of EC regulation 2037/2000 specifies that used CFCs and HCFCs must be recovered for destruction or recycling/reclamation. Robust and tested refrigerant leak detection system This is normally defined as that included on the Enhanced Capital Allowance (ECA) Energy Technology Product List 1 (or an equivalent list). Where the system does not fall within the scope of the ECA energy technology product list or an equivalent list, the design team must demonstrate to the assessor that the system specified meets the principles of the scheme as far as is applicable. Small scale white goods These should be defined as domestic scale white goods and would also include small individual display cabinets, for example drinks cabinets in small retail shops. Systems using refrigerants The criteria of this issue apply to air conditioning and refrigeration systems installed in the building for the following uses, regardless of the systems refrigerant charge (kg), including: Comfort cooling and/or space heating (including assessment of refrigerants in heat pumps) Cold storage, including commercial food/drink display cabinets but excluding small scale white goods (see definition above) Process based cooling loads e.g. servers/I.T equipment. Global Warming Potential (GWP) GWP is defined as the potential for global warming that a chemical has relative to 1 unit of carbon dioxide, the primary greenhouse gas. In determining the GWP of the refrigerant, the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) methodology using a 100-year Integrated Time Horizon (or ITH) should be applied. Refrigerant There are three main make-ups of refrigerants: 1. Hydrogenated Fluorocarbon Refrigerants (HFCs) are made up of hydrogen, fluorine, and carbon. Because they do not use a chlorine atom (which is used in most refrigerants) they are known to be one of the least damaging to the earth's ozone layer. 2. Hydrogenated Chlorofluorocarbon Refrigerants (HCFCs) are made up of hydrogen, chlorine, fluorine, and carbon. These refrigerants contain minimal amounts of chlorine; they are not as detrimental to the environment as some other refrigerants. 3. Chlorofluorocarbon Refrigerants (CFCs) contain chlorine, fluorine and carbon. These refrigerants carry high amounts of chlorine so they are known for being the most hazardous to the ozone layer. The use of CFCs and HCFCs as refrigerants has been addressed under the Montreal protocol. Phase out programmes have been agreed resulting in these substances no longer being used as refrigerants in all new build and most existing situations. The industry’s favoured replacements are currently HFCs which are often potent global warming contributors. Hydrocarbons and ammonia-based refrigerants have low or zero GWP and are therefore preferred long term options. These are now widely available and are valid alternatives to HFCs in all buildings, provided health and safety issues are fully addressed. The United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) hosts a HCFC Help Centre which contains information about the

1www.etl.decc.gov.uk

322

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 01 Impact of refrigerants

Pollution

management and phase out of HCFCs and alternatives to HCFCs in the refrigeration and air conditioning sector http://www.uneptie.org/ozonaction/topics/hcfc.asp.

Other information Table - 56: List of some common refrigerant types with low GWP R-Number

Chemical name

GWP 100-yr

R-30

Dichloromethane

9

R-170

Ethane

3

R-290

Propane

3

R-600

Butane

3

R-600a

Isobutane

3

R-702

Hydrogen

5.8

R-717

Ammonia

0

R-718

Water

0.2 ±0.2

R-729

Air (nitrogen, oxygen, argon)

1

R-744

Carbon dioxide

1

R1150

Ethylene

3

R-1234yf

2,3,3,3-Tetrafluoropropene

4

R-1270

Propylene

3

Sources: The United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP) ‘2006 Report of the Refrigeration, Air conditioning and Heat Pumps Technical Options Committee’ (page 32-34): http://ozone.unep.org/teap/Reports/RTOC/index.shtml Appendix A of the Department of Trade and Industry guidance ‘Refrigerant and Air Conditioning CFC and HCFC Phase Out: Advice on Alternatives and Guidelines for Users’.http://www.berr.gov.uk/files/file29101.pdf BS EN 378-1:2008+A2:2012: Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements. Part 1: Basic requirements, definitions, classification and selection criteria - Annex E.

The formula used to calculate the Direct Effect Life Cycle CO2e emissions in BREEAM is based on the Total Equivalent Warming Impact (TEWI) calculation method for new stationary refrigeration and air conditioning systems. TEWI is a measure of the global warming impact of equipment that takes into account both direct emissions (as assessed in this BREEAM issue) and indirect emissions produced through the energy consumed in operating the equipment (which is assessed in the BREEAM energy section). Refer to BS EN 378-1 1 and the British Refrigeration Association’s (BRA) Guideline Methods of Calculating TEWI for further details. The BRA publication also includes sectoral release factors for new systems designed to best practice standards.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

323

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

REAL Zero The refrigeration and air conditioning sector supported by the Carbon Trust is working across all sectors of business and industry, to help achieve significant reductions in carbon emissions due to refrigerant leakage from installed systems. The Institute of Refrigeration led initiative, Real Zero, is building a clearer understanding of where and why leakage occurs as well as how to prevent it. For further information including guidance notes, calculators/tools and case study information visit:http://www.ior.org.uk/real-zero 1BS EN 378-1 Refrigerating systems and heat pumps - Safety and environmental requirements Part 1: Basic requirements,

definitions, classification and selection criteria. BSI, 2008

324

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 02 NOx emissions

Pollution

Pol 02 NO emissions x Number of credits available

Minimum standards

Building type dependent

No

Aim To contribute to a reduction in national NO emission levels through the use of low emission heat sources in the building. x

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

Up to three credits (all building types except Industrial)

1. Where the plant installed to meet the building’s delivered heating and hot water demand has, under normal operating conditions, a NO emission level (measured on a dry basis at 0% excess O2) as follows: x NO Emission levels for heating and hot water (mg/kWh) x

Credits

≤ 100 mg/kWh

1 credit

≤ 70 mg/kWh

2 credits

≤ 40 mg/kWh

3 credits

Two credits (Industrial building types only) NO Emission levels for heating and hot water (mg/kWh) x

Credits

Office and associated areas ≤ 70 mg/kWh

1 credit

Operational areas ≤ 70 mg/kWh

1 credit

2. Report via the BREEAM scoring and reporting tool the direct and indirect NO emissions in mg/kWh and energy x consumption in kWh/m2/yr arising from systems installed to meet the building's space heating, cooling and hot water demands.

Checklists and tables None

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

325

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Option 1 – Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2 – Shell and core only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

New build extensions to existing buildings

If the heating/hot water demand for the new extension is being met by an existing system, then the NO emission level for the existing system must be assessed against x the criteria of this issue.

CN5

Highly insulated building

Where the heating load for a highly insulated building is less than or equal to 7% of the heat load for a Building Regulations compliant building of the same size and type, one credit can be awarded regardless of the NO emission level. Figures used for x calculations of the percentage of total heat demand must be based on the output from approved building energy calculation software.

CN6

NO data x provided in different units

Where NO data is provided in different units or at a level of excess oxygen greater than x zero, the manufacturer/supplier will need to be asked to convert this to comply with the BREEAM criteria. Alternatively, the assessor may adjust the figure using the relevant correction factors provided in the Methodology section. Note that the conversion factors provided do not apply where combined heat and power (CHP) systems are being assessed. Where CHP systems are used, the information must be obtained from the system manufacturer.

CN7

Grid electricity

Where grid electricity is used to supply a heating system, the NO should be assumed to x be 617 mg/kWh for the purpose of BREEAM. This is to reflect the likely NO emissions x fromgrid electricity over the next 10 years based on the predicted generation mix in the UK.

General

326

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 02 NOx emissions

Pollution

Ref

Terms

Description

CN8

Heat recovery

Heat recovery can be considered as having zero NO emissions for the purpose of this x issue.

CN9

Open flues

No credits may be awarded for open flue heating or hot water systems.

CN10

Water heating benchmark and point of use heaters

Where the water heating can be demonstrated to be less than 10% of the buildings total energy consumption, these credits can be awarded based solely on the NO x emissions from space heating.

CN11

Assessment and reporting of a building'sNO x emissions from cooling

At present the Pol 02 issue does not benchmark and award credits for NO emission x levels associated with a building's cooling demands. To facilitate possible future benchmarking of this kind and alignment with European Standards on the Sustainability of Construction Works, BREEAM does require, as a condition of achieving any credits for this issue, the reporting of both direct and indirect NO emissions resulting from x meeting the buildings heating, cooling and hot water demands. In the case of indirect emissions, this refers primarily to emissions associated with grid electricity, where grid electricity is a/the source of energy for the building's heating, cooling and/or hot water demands. Direct NO emissions are those resulting from the x burning of fuel on site or in the assessed building to meet heating, cooling and/or hot water demands, for example via a gas/oil fired/biomass boiler.

Building type specific CN12

Industrial Office/operational areas not present

First credit: Where the assessed building is designed without an office area, the first credit does not apply. One credit is therefore available where compliance with the operational area benchmark is met. Second credit: Where the operational area of the assessed building is designed to be untreated, the second credit does not apply. One credit is therefore available where compliance with the office area benchmark is met. Where there is no office area and no heating in the operational area, this issue is not assessed.

Methodology Conversion factors Manufacturers should be asked to supply NO emissions data in mg/kWh, measured on a dry basis. Where this is not possible x the assessor may use the following conversion factors to convert figures in ppm, mg/MJ, mg/m3 or wet. It should be noted that these conversion factors assume worst case efficiencies and are likely to give conservative answers. This could have the effect of lowering the number of credits achieved. Note that these conversion factors are not applicable where combined heat and power (CHP) systems are being used. Please see the calculation procedures below for further details on assessing CHP systems for this issue. 1. Figures in mg/m3 should be multiplied by 0.859 in order to gain emissions in mg/kWh1 A conversion may also be necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below) 2. Figures in parts per million (ppm) should be multiplied by 1.76 in order to obtain mg/kWh. A conversion may also be necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below) 1BS EN 15502-1:2012 Gas-fired heating boilers Part 1: General requirements and tests.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

327

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

3. Figures in mg/MJ should be multiplied by 3.6 in order to show emissions in mg/kWh (1 kWh = 3.6 MJ). A conversion may also be necessary for data not calculated at 0% excess oxygen (see below).

Wet NO conversion factor x This issue’s criteria are based on dry NO values – almost all manufacturers will quote emissions measured on a dry basis. x However if wet NO figures are supplied, these will need to be converted to dry. The following formula should be used to x determine the wet NO conversion factor 1: x Conversion factor c = 100/(100-y) Where y is the % water vapour content measured in the gas.This figure should be obtained from the manufacturer.

Excess oxygen correction If a NO emission rate is quoted by the manufacturer in mg/m3 or ppm, then it should be established at what % excess oxygen x this emission was measured. The greater the amount of excess oxygen in the flue gases at the time of measurement, the more 'diluted' the NO emissions. It is therefore important to convert any emission rate back to 0% excess oxygen. For the x purpose of BREEAM, the following conversion factors can be used for the most frequently used rates supplied by manufacturers: Table - 57: Excess oxygen conversion factors % Excess O 2

Conversion (c)

3%

x 1.17

6%

x 1.40

15%

x 3.54

Conversion factor c = 20.9/(20.9 – x) Where x = % excess O2 (NOT excess air) and 20.9 is the percentage of O2 in the air.

Calculating NO emission levels from combined heat and power (CHP) systems x Where CHP systems are specified, it is only necessary to consider the heat related NO emissions for the assessment of this x issue. NO emissions are allocated to heat and electricity in line with the respective power outputs. A NO emission rate equivalent to x x the current rate for grid electricity should be assumed for the electrical output (i.e. 617 mg/kWh supplied), and the remaining NO should be allocated to the heat output. Only the heat-related component is then compared with the benchmark scale. x The following formula should be used to determine this: X = (A - B)/C Where: Term

Description

X

NO emissions per unit of heat supplied (mg/kWh heat). x

A

NO emissions per unit of electricity generated (mg/kWhelec), i.e. the NO emitted by the CHP x x

1BS EN 14792:2005 Stationary Source emissions - Determination of mass concentration of nitrogen oxides (NO ) - Reference

method: Chemiluminescence.

328

x

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 02 NOx emissions

Term

Pollution

Description system per unit of electricity generated. It is essential that this figure is obtained from the installer/supplier of the system and should be based on the system when operating at full load.

B

NO emissions per unit of electricity supplied from the grid (mg/kWhelec) this should be x assumed to be 617 mg/kWh.

C

Heat to Electricity Ratio of the CHP scheme.

The above methodology determines the net NO emissions from CHP-generated electricity compared with central x generation of electricity and allocates this amount to the heat production. Where x is calculated to be negative, it should be assumed to be zero.

Calculating the average NO emission levels from multiple systems x Where the CHP or other heating system type operates in conjunction with another system, an average NO emission rate x should be used based on the ratio of power output from each source, i.e. multiply the emissions of each system by the percentage of heat demand it supplies and total these values. This is likely to be the case where a CHP system has been sized on the base power demand rather than the heat demand and therefore a secondary heating system is required. The following formula can be used for such cases:

(

(

)

)

(

)

AverageNOX = N 1 × H 1/ HT + N 2 × (H 2 / HT ) … + Nn × (Hn / HT ) Where: Term

Description

N1

NO emissions rate for source 1 x

N2

NO emissions rate for source 2 x

Nn

NO emissions rate for source n x

HT

Total heat output from all sources

H1

Heat output from source 1

H2

Heat output from source 2

Hn

Heat output from source n

Calculating NO emission levels from heat pumps x For the purpose of assessing this BREEAM issue, either of the formulas below can be used to determine the contributing NO x emissions from a heat pump:

MHeat =

M Elec ×WElec WHeat

OR

MHeat =

M Elec EER

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

329

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Where: Term

Description

MHeat

NO emission per unit of heat generated in mg/kWhHeat x

MElec

NO emissions from UK grid electricity mg/kWh, this should be assumed to be 617 mg/kWhElec x

WElect

Total quantity of electricity consumed by heat pump kWhElec

WHeat

Total quantity of heat produced by heat pump kWhHeat

EER

Energy Efficiency Ratio (also referred to as Co-efficient of Performance)

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1-2

Calculations showing the average NO x emissions for the building where multiple systems are present.

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions Approved building energy calculation software Refer to BREEAM issue Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions. NO emissions x NO emissions are pollutant gases produced by the combustion of fossil fuels. NO reacts with heat and sunlight to x x produce ozone that can cause serious respiratory problems. It also reacts with water to produce acid rain which has a detrimental effect on ecosystems. For the purposes of BREEAM, NOx emission levels are required in units of mg/kWh, measured on a dry basis at 0% excess oxygen levels.

Other information Some systems may find it difficult to achieve credits in this issue, including:

Heat pumps Heat pumps powered by grid electricity are likely to indirectly produce emission rates higher than those required by BREEAM and are therefore typically unable to achieve credits under this issue. However, there is a formula for determining NO x emissions from heat pumps in the Methodology section. Please note, the energy saved by using certain types of heat pumps is recognised in the energy section of BREEAM.

330

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 02 NOx emissions

Pollution

District heating District heating systems that incinerate waste usually have NO emission rates higher than the levels set to achieve any BREEAM x credits.

Biomass Biomass systems are recognised as reducing the impact of fossil fuel depletion, by employing a renewable fuel source (provided it is sustainably sourced). However, biomass can produce a significant amount of NO and so may not achieve this x credit. They may, however, gain recognition in the energy section of BREEAM.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

331

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off Number of credits available

Minimum standards

5

No

Aim To avoid, reduce and delay the discharge of rainfall to public sewers and watercourses, thereby minimising the risk and impact of localised flooding on and off site, watercourse pollution and other environmental damage.

Assessment criteria This issue is split into three parts; Flood risk - (1 to 2 credits) Surface water run-off - (2 credits) Minimising water course pollution - (1 credit).

Up to two credits - Flood resilience Two credits - Low flood risk 1. Where a site specific flood risk assessment (FRA) confirms the development is situated in a flood zone that is defined as having a low annual probability of flooding (in accordance with current best practice national planning guidance). The FRA must take all current and future sources of flooding into consideration (see CN6).

One credit - Medium/high flood risk 2. Where a site specific FRA confirms the development is situated in a flood zone that is defined as having a medium or high annual probability of flooding and is not in a functional floodplain (in accordance with current best practice national planning guidance). The FRA must take all current and future sources of flooding into consideration (see CN6). 3. To increase the resilience and resistance of the development to flooding, one of the following must be achieved: a. The ground level of the building and access to both the building and the site, are designed (or zoned) so they are at least 600 mm above the design flood level of the flood zone in which the assessed development is located (see CN9 ); OR b. The final design of the building and the wider site reflects the recommendations made by an appropriate consultant in accordance with the hierarchy approach outlined in section 5 of BS 8533:2011 1.

Two credits - Surface water run-off Pre-requisite 4. An appropriate consultant is appointed to carry out, demonstrate and/or confirm the development's compliance with the following criteria:

1BS 8533:2011 Assessing and managing flood risk in development - Code of Practice, 2011

332

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Pollution

One credit 5. Where drainage measures are specified to ensure that the peak rate of run-off from the site to the watercourses (natural or municipal) is no greater for the developed site than it was for the pre-development site. This should comply at the 1 year and 100 year return period events. 6. Calculations include an allowance for climate change; this should be made in accordance with current best practice planning guidance (see definitions).

One credit 7. Where flooding of property will not occur in the event of local drainage system failure (caused either by extreme rainfall or a lack of maintenance); AND EITHER 8. The post development run-off volume, over the development lifetime, is no greater than it would have been prior to the assessed site’s development for the 100 year 6 hour event, including an allowance for climate change (see criterion 13). 9. Any additional predicted volume of run-off for this event is prevented from leaving the site by using infiltration or other SuDS techniques. OR (only where criteria 8 and 9 for this credit cannot be achieved) 10. Justification from the Appropriate Consultant indicating why the above criteria cannot be achieved, i.e. where infiltration or other SuDS techniques are not technically viable options. 11. The post development peak rate of run-off is reduced to the limiting discharge. The limiting discharge is defined as the highest flow rate from the following options: a. The pre development 1-year peak flow rate; OR b. The mean annual flow rate Qbar; OR c. 2L/s/ha. Note that for the 1-year peak flow rate the 1 year return period event criterion applies (as described in the peak run-off criteria above). 12. Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified SuDS are in place. 13. For either option, above calculations must include an allowance for climate change; this should be made in accordance with current best practice planning guidance.

One credit - Minimising water course pollution

14. There is no discharge from the developed site for rainfall up to 5mm (confirmed by the Appropriate Consultant). 15. In areas with a low risk source of watercourse pollution, an appropriate level of pollution prevention treatment is provided, using appropriate SuDS techniques. 16. Where there is a high risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil (see Compliance notes for a list of areas), separators (or an equivalent system) are installed in surface water drainage systems. 17. Where the building has chemical/liquid gas storage areas, a means of containment is fitted to the site drainage system (i.e. shut-off valves) to prevent the escape of chemicals to natural watercourses (in the event of a spillage or bunding failure). 18. All water pollution prevention systems have been designed and installed in accordance with the recommendations of documents such as Pollution Prevention Guideline 3 (PPG 3)1 and/or where applicable the SUDS manual2 For areas where vehicle washing will be taking place, pollution prevention systems must be in accordance with Pollution Prevention Guidelines 13 1. 19. A comprehensive and up-to-date drainage plan of the site will be made available for the building/site occupiers. 20. Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified SuDS must be in place. 21. Where present, all external storage and delivery areas designed and detailed in accordance with the current best practice planning guidance (see CN3 for further information).

1Pollution Prevention Guidelines (PPG) 13 Vehicle washing and cleaning, Environment Agency/SEPA/Environment and Heritage

Service, 2007

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

333

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Surface water run-off - Two credits - Simple buildings For 'simple buildings', the below criteria should be applied in place of the surface water run-off criteria above (please see CN2 for more information). 22. Either of the following criteria is met: a. There is a decrease in the impermeable area by 50% or more, from the pre-existing impermeable hard surfaces; OR b. Where all run-off from the roof for rainfall depths up to 5 mm from all new and existing parts of the building have been managed on site using source control methods OR

Surface water run-off - One credit - Simple buildings

23. Either of the following criteria is met: a. There is no increase in the impermeable surfaces as a result of the new construction; OR b. If there is an increase in the impermeable surface as a result of the new construction then the following must be met: i. Hard standing areas - where there is an extension or increase in the hard standing areas and hence an increase in the total impermeable area as a result of the new construction, the hard standing area must be permeable or be provided with onsite SuDS to allow full infiltration of the additional volume, to achieve the same end result. The permeable hard standing must include all pavements and public rights of way, car parks, driveways and nonadoptable roads, but can exclude small garden paths which will drain onto a naturally permeable surface. ii. Building (new build/extension) - where there is an increase in building footprint, extending onto any previously permeable surfaces, the additional run-off caused by the area of the new build/extension must be managed on site using an appropriate SuDS technique for rainfall depths up to 5 mm.

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Both options: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

Flood risk (1-2 credits available) Two credits 1. Criterion 1. OR One credit 2. Criteria 2 and 3 Surface water run-off (1-2 credits available) Two credits

334

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Ref

Terms

Pollution

Description 3. Criterion 22 OR One credit 4. Criterion 23 Minimising water course pollution (1 credit available) One credit 5. Criteria 15 to 21 6. Criterion 14 Exemplary level credit The following outlines the exemplary level criteria to achieve an innovation credit for this BREEAM issue: 7. Criteria 4 to 13

Country specific CN3

External storage and delivery areas guidance documents See Criterion 21.

The following lists the standards/building regulations relevant for the assessment of this issue in a specific UK country: Scotland and Northern Ireland For assessment in Scotland and Northern Ireland, the 'Pollution Prevention Pays Guidelines' from the Environment Agency reference the following documents which are relevant: Introducing Pollution Prevention: PPG1 Above ground oil storage tanks: PPG2 The use and design of oil separators in surface water drainage systems: PPG3 Working at demolition and construction sites: PPG6 Vehicle washing and cleaning: PPG13 Managing firewater and major spillages: PPG28 Dewatering underground ducts and chambers: PPG20 Incident response planning: PPG21 Dealing with spills: PPG22 Drums and intermediate bulk container: PPG26 Underground storage tanks: PPG27 Wales and England For assessment in Wales and England, the recommendations of the Environment Agency’s publication Pollution Prevention Pays Guidance, 2013 3 should be followed.

General CN4

Alternative standards and recommendations from an appropriate statutory body See criteria 1 and 2.

None of the credits can be awarded where the assessed development has proceeded against the recommendation of the statutory body on the basis that the flooding implications are too great (this includes a recommendation given by the statutory body even where such a recommendation cannot or is not statutorily enforced). Where the local authority (or other statutory body) has set more rigorous criteria than those above these must be met in order to achieve the relevant credit(s).

CN5

Contaminated

Drainage designs for sites must take into account legislation relating to contaminated

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

335

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description

sites See criteria 8 and 9.

sites, however in many circumstances even on contaminated sites there may be opportunities for the installation of some SuDS techniques. Please see the Other information section for more details.

CN6

Sources of flooding See criteria 1 and 2.

The FRA must detail the risk of flooding from the following sources: 1. Fluvial (rivers). 2. Tidal. 3. Surface water: sheet run-off from adjacent land (urban or rural). 4. Groundwater: most common in low-lying areas underlain by permeable rock (aquifers). 5. Sewers: combined, foul or surface water sewers. 6. Reservoirs, canals and other artificial sources. Please see Other informationsection which provides more detail on the above sources of flooding. The content of the FRA should be based on historic trends, but should also account for predicted changes to the climate which may impact on the flood risk to the site in future.

CN7

Functional flood plain See criterion 3.

The BREEAM credit for locating in a flood zone of ‘medium or high annual probability’ cannot be awarded where the building is located in the functional flood plain. Technical Guidance to the National Planning Policy Framework 4 defines the functional flood plain as a ‘zone [that] comprises land where water has to flow or be stored in times of flood’. If the building assessed is or has been defined as ‘water-compatible development’, confirmation should be provided from the local planning authority that they are satisfied with the proposals.

CN8

Flood defences See criteria 1, 2 and 3.

Third party defences There are many landscape feature defences, owned by third parties, which due to their location act as a flood defence by default, e.g. motorway, railway embankments, walls etc. It can be assumed that such embankments will remain in place for the lifetime of the development, unless the assessor or project team have reason to believe otherwise. For walls, assurance must be sought that the wall is likely to remain for the design life of the building.

Ref

Flood risk

Pre existing flood defences In an area protected by existing flood defences (designed to withstand a certain magnitude of flooding) the appropriate number of flood risk credits can be awarded where the defences reduce the risk to ‘low’ or ‘medium’ and the following conditions are met: 1. The development is not located in an area where new flood defences have to be, or have been, constructed to minimise the risk of flooding to the site and its locality purely for the purpose of the development and/or its wider master plan. 2. The development is located on previously developed land (as defined by the criteria in BREEAM issue LE 01 Site selection. 3. The relevant agency confirms that, as a result of such defences, the risk of a flood event occurring is reduced to low or medium risk. If firm confirmation is not provided then the credit cannot be awarded. A statutory body’s local/regional office may be able to provide more information on existing defences in the area in which the assessed development is located.

336

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Pollution

Ref

Terms

Description

CN9

600 mm threshold See criterion 3a.

It is accepted that, for buildings located in medium and high risk flood zones, areas of the car park and site access may be allowed to flood and therefore fall below the 600 mm threshold. In such cases the credit is still achievable provided safe access to the site, and the ground floor of the building can be maintained (i.e. they are 600 mm above the design flood level) to ensure the building and site do not become an ‘island’ in the event of a flood. Where the development has been permitted and the ground levels of the topography/infrastructure immediately adjacent to the site fall below the 600 mm threshold, the credit can still be awarded, provided there are no other practical solutions for access to the site above this level and the assessed building, and access to it, meets the assessment criteria. As much of the external site area as possible (or as required by an appropriate statutory body) should be designed at or above the threshold. For buildings located in medium or high flood risk zones, any areas used to store sensitive, historical, hazardous, valuable and perishable materials, e.g. radioactive materials, microbiological facilities, server rooms, libraries, etc., must be located above the 600 mm threshold.

CN10

Level of detail required in the FRA for smaller sites See criteria 1 and 2.

For smaller sites, e.g. less than 1 ha (10,000 m2), the level of detail required in an acceptable FRA will depend on the size of the site and the arrangement of buildings on that site. For a small site with a relatively simple arrangement of buildings this might consist of a brief report. For larger sites with a higher density of buildings a more detailed assessment would be appropriate. For small simple sites (2000 m2 and less), an acceptable FRA could be a brief report carried out by the contractor’s engineer confirming the risk of flooding from all sources of flooding, including information obtained from the Environment Agency, water company/sewerage undertaker, other relevant statutory authorities, site investigation and local knowledge.

Surface water run-off CN11

Sites with many buildings

Where the assessed building is part of a larger development of buildings, there are a number of options for assessment of the surface water run-off credits: 1. The individual building and its associated hard standing areas can be assessed independently where the run-off is being dealt with on a building-by-building basis (i.e. each building has its own dedicated sub-catchment that serves only that building). 2. When assessing the run-off from a number of buildings (including domestic and non-domestic buildings) the assessment must take into account the drainage from the local sub-catchment serving all those dwellings/buildings. Note that proportioning cannot be used to calculate the percentage of run-off discharging into the local sub-catchment resulting from just the assessed building. 3. The whole development can be assessed for compliance. Whichever approach is taken to demonstrate compliance, it must be consistent when completing both the rate of run-off and volume of run-off calculations.

CN12

Discharge to the sea or tidal estuaries

The peak rate of run-off and volume run-off criteria can be deemed to be met by default if the site discharges rainwater directly to a tidal estuary or the sea. The site must discharge run-off directly into the tidal estuary or the sea, if these criteria are to be awarded by default. Typically, this would mean that drainage pipes would only carry run-off from the site and that they would not need to cross privately owned land

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

337

Pollution

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Terms

Description outside the boundary of the development before reaching the sea. Please see Relevant definitions section for a definition of tidal estuary.

CN13

No change in impermeable area

Where the man-made impermeable area draining to the watercourse (natural or municipal) has decreased or remains unchanged post-development, the peak and volume rate of run-off requirements for the surface water run-off credits will be met by default. Flow rate calculations will not need to be provided. Instead, drawings clearly showing the impermeable areas of the site draining to the watercourse should be provided for the pre- and post-development scenarios. Figures must also be given (ideally on the drawings) to show a comparison between the areas of drained impermeable surfaces pre- and post-development. In this instance a flood risk assessment must be carried out and any opportunities identified to reduce surface water run-off are implemented.

CN14

Limiting discharge flow rate See criterion 11.

For the surface water run-off credits, where the limiting discharge flow rate would require a flow rate of less than 5 l/s at a discharge point, a flow rate of up to 5 l/s may be used where required to reduce the risk of blockage.

CN15

Highways and impermeable areas

Where new non-adoptable highways are built, including those for developments with a mixture of buildings, all of the new impermeable surfaces must be included in calculations to demonstrate compliance with the peak rate of run-off and volume of run-off criteria. Where buildings are built beside existing highways or where adoptable highways are built, the impermeable area of the highway does not need to be included in the calculations.

CN16

Derelict sites. See criteria 7, 10,11 and 13.

If the site has been derelict for over five years, the Appropriate Consultant must assess the previous drainage network and make reasonable assumptions to establish probable flow rates and volumes. To do this they should use best practice simulation modelling, to determine the 1 year and 100 year peak flow rates at the relevant discharge points. To complete the calculations, a site visit prior to development will be required unless accurate data already exists from a previous survey. The resultant professional report can then be used to determine the pre-development volumes and rates of run-off. Without this professional input, the site must be deemed greenfield pre-development, assuming Soil type 5 for the calculation of the pre development site run-off.

CN17

Rainwater harvesting

BS 8515 Rainwater harvesting systems: Code of Practice, Annex A5 must be followed where rainwater harvesting systems are specified for storm water control. To ensure flood risk is not increased if the rainwater harvesting system is, for some reason, unavailable, the exceedance flow route capacity provided in accordance with CIRIA report C635 should ignore the beneficial effect of the rainwater harvesting system.

Watercourse pollution CN18

338

5 mm discharge for minimising watercourse pollution See criterion 14.

In a small number of sites it may not be possible for the first 5 mm of rainfall to be prevented from leaving site completely. Where this is the case, an appropriately qualified professional must design the system to ensure that the intent of this criterion has been met as far as possible and provide justifications to explain why the criterion could not be fully achieved on the site. Where this can be justified, the awarding of the

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Ref

Terms

Pollution

Description water quality credit would not be affected, provided all other relevant criteria have been achieved.

CN19

5 mm requirement end-of-pipe solutions See criterion 14.

End-of-pipe solutions, such as ponds and basins, will only be deemed to comply with the 5 mm criteria where the principal run-off control to prevent discharge from the first 5 mm of a rainfall event, is achieved using source control and site control methods.

CN20

5 mm requirement green roofs See criterion 14.

Green roofs can be deemed to comply with this requirement for the rain that falls onto their surface. However evidence is still required to demonstrate that the 5 mm rainfall from all other hard surfaces on site is being dealt with, to allow this credit to be awarded.

CN21

Areas that are a source of pollution See criteria 16, 17 and 18.

For the purpose of assessing the watercourse pollution credit, an area that presents a risk of watercourse pollution includes vehicle manoeuvring areas, car parks, waste disposal facilities, delivery and storage facilities or plant areas.

CN22

Extension or infill building on existing site

Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site, i.e. infill development, the watercourse pollution criteria apply to areas within the construction zone that present a risk of pollution, as well as any areas external to the construction zone that are affected by the new works, i.e. drainage onto or from the proposed development.

CN23

Suitable level of treatment See criteria 15 to 21.

In all cases the Appropriate Consultant should use their professional judgement to determine the most appropriate strategy for minimising watercourse pollution.

CN24

Roof plant See criteria 17,18 and 20.

Roof top plant space must be considered where there is a risk from polluting substances such as petrol or oil. Refrigerants are not assessed under the pollution aspect of this issue, as the main risk of pollution is to air and not the watercourse.

Methodology Calculating peak rate of run-off Key publications that should be referred to for guidance on calculating the peak rate of run-off include: 1. The SuDS Manual6. 2. Preliminary rainfall run-off management for developments 7. 3. Development and Flood Risk, Planning Policy Statement 25 (or where available equivalent national planning policy guidance/statement) along with the latest version of the practice guide. 4. IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994)8. 5. Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999)9.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

339

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Greenfield sites of less than 50 ha The calculation of greenfield run-off rates must be in accordance with IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994). The pro-rata method on the size of catchment detailed in Table 4.2 in The SuDS Manual, CIRIA C697 (2007) must be followed.

Greenfield sites of 50 ha to 200 ha The calculation of greenfield run-off rates must be in accordance with IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994). Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999) can be used for these sites as an alternative, where there is a preference to do so, but only if the catchment is considered to be suitable for its application.

Greenfield sites of more than 200 ha The calculation of greenfield run-off rates must be in accordance with the Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999) and any subsequent updates. Where the Flood Estimation Handbook is not considered appropriate for the development IH Report 124 can be used.

Brownfield sites The calculation of brownfield run-off rates should be as follows: If the existing drainage is known then it should be modelled using best practice simulation modelling, to determine the 1 year and 100 year peak flow rates at discharge points (without allowing surcharge of the system above cover levels to drive greater flow rates through the discharge points). If the system is not known, then the brownfield run-off should be calculated using the greenfield run-off models described above but with a Soil Type 5.

Limiting discharge rate The limiting discharge for each discharge point should be calculated as the flow rates from the pre-developed site. The calculation should include the total flow rate from the total area of the site feeding into the discharge point (this should include both BREEAM assessed and non BREEAM assessed parts of the development, if applicable). The discharge point is defined as the point of discharge into the watercourse/sewers (including rivers, streams, ditches, drains, cuts, culverts, dykes, sluices, public sewers and passages through which water flows, see Relevant definitions in the Additional information section). Where this calculation results in a peak flow rate of less than 5 l/s, the limiting discharge rate may be increased up to a level of no more than 5 l/s at the point of discharge from the site to reduce the risk of blockage. For example, if the flow rate for the 1 year and 100 year events were 4 l/s and 7 l/s respectively, then the limiting discharges would be 5 l/s and 7 l/s. Similarly, if it was calculated to be 2 l/s and 4 l/s, then a maximum of 5 l/s limiting discharge rate could be applied to both discharge points. Sites should not be subdivided to enable higher overall limiting discharge rates to be claimed. It is, however, recognised that some sites may require more than one discharge point as a result of the local topography or existing surrounding drainage infrastructure, and in such cases, the limiting discharge flow rate may be increased to a level no more than 5 l/s at each discharge point. The assessor should seek evidence that the number of discharge points is necessary due to topography and/or infrastructure limitations. Evidence may be in the form of a topographical map and an explanation from the Appropriate Consultant as to why multiple discharge points are required, stating that it is not feasible to have fewer discharge points.

100-year peak rate event: excess volume of run-off The storage of excess flows from the 100-year event does not necessarily have to be contained within the drainage system or SuDS features (the features designed solely for the purpose of drainage). Where appropriate, storage of some or all of this volume can be achieved using temporary surface flooding of areas such as a playing field. Specific consideration should be given to overland flow routing. Overland flood flows and temporary storage of flood water on the surface must not be so frequent as to unreasonably inconvenience residents and other users.

340

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Pollution

Designing for exceedance guidance CIRIA publication C635 (2006) Designing for exceedence in urban drainage – good practice 10 should be referred to for guidance.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

8

Information showing the proposed drainage solution, system failure flood flow routes, potential flood ponding levels and ground floor levels

As per interim design stage.

13 and 20

-

Relevant maintenance agreements for the ownership, long term operation and maintenance of all specified SuDS.

Additional information Please note this section will be revised when the National Standards for Sustainable Drainage and associated regulations come into force.

Relevant definitions Adoptable highways For the purposes of BREEAM, an ‘adoptable’ highway is a highway that is the responsibility of the highways authority in terms of installation and maintenance of surface water drainage which only carries run-off from the highway itself. This means that to fall under the definition of an ‘adoptable highway’ the drainage network must not be directly connected to any other upstream drainage network (e.g. from a private development) and only handle run-off from the adoptable highway. Where drainage within the highway will carry run-off from both the highway and housing, it is not regarded as an 'adoptable' highway. In this instance the drainage design must take account of the highway runoff. Appropriate consultant A consultant with qualifications and experience relevant to designing SUDS and flood prevention measures and completing peak rate of run-off calculations. Where complex flooding calculations and prevention measures are required, this must be a specialist hydrological engineer. Appropriate statutory body This refers to either the Environment Agency in England and Wales, the Environment Agency, Department of the Environment, and the Rivers Agency in Northern Ireland, the Scottish Environment Protection Agency in Scotland or the local authorities and internal drainage boards. Catchment The area contributing surface water flow to a point on a drainage or water course. It can be divided into subcatchments.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

341

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Control devices Any drainage structure or unit designed to control the run-off of storm water. Examples of SuDS control devices are check dams within swales and basins, and combined weir/orifice controls for ponds. Examples of traditional control devices are throttles constructed with pipes and vortex controls. The control devices must be capable of regular inspection and maintenance, and the system should be fail-safe so that upstream flooding does not result from blockage or other malfunction. For guidance on control devices, refer to The SuDS manual (CIRIA C697, 2007) and other best practice guidelines. Current best practice national planning guidance These are current at the time of publication: Technical Guidance to the National Planning Policy framework– England; Planning Policy Statement 15 – Northern Ireland; Scottish Planning Policy 7 - Scotland; Technical Advice Note - Wales. Design flood level The maximum estimated water level during the design storm event. The design flood level for a site can be determined through either known historical data or modelled for the specific site. Design flood event An historic or notional flood event of a given annual flood probability, against which the suitability of a proposed development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed. Design storm event Historic or notional weather conditions of a given annual probability, against which the suitability of a proposed development is assessed and mitigation measures, if any, are designed. Discharge point The discharge point(s) is the point at which the run-off from the site leaves the site boundary and enters a watercourse. Flood defences Flood defences do not completely remove the risk of flooding, but they do reduce it. Building in areas where flood defences are present (and appropriately designed to withstand a certain magnitude of flooding) is therefore preferable to those built in medium/high risk areas without defences. However, for the purpose of this issue, it is still preferable to build in areas of low risk than encourage development of new flood defences in areas with a higher risk of flooding purely for the sake of new development. Flood event A flooding incident characterised by its peak level or flow, or by its level or flow hydrograph. Flood probability The estimated probability of a flood of given magnitude occurring or being exceeded in any specified time period. For example, the 100-year flood has a 1% chance of occurring in any given year. Flood risk The combination of the flood probability and the magnitude of the potential consequences of the flood event. Flood risk assessment A study to assess the risk of a site flooding, and to assess the impact that any changes or development on the site will have on flood risk to the site and elsewhere. A Flood Risk Assessment should be prepared according to relevant planning policy and technical guidance documents. The FRA must account for future climate change and detail any necessary adaptation measures where/if required. Where more than five years have passed since the FRA was carried out, evidence would be required to demonstrate that the basis of the FRA has not changed in that time. Flood storage The temporary storage of excess run-off or river flow in ponds, basins, reservoirs or on the flood plain during a flood event.

342

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Pollution

Flood zones Flood zones are defined in the relevant planning, policy and technical guidance documents for each country in the UK: PPS25 (England), TAN15 (Wales), SPP7 (Scotland), PPS15 (Northern Ireland). Please note, PPS15 does not categorise flood risk zones and there are no similar publicly available flood maps covering Northern Ireland. Assessments in Northern Ireland will therefore need to rely on site-specific flood risk assessments, or other relevant date/surveys, to determine the extent of flood risk for a specific development, and use the same definitions as those outlined for England (Table - 58 ). The Northern Ireland Department of Environment or Rivers Agency may offer further advice or recommendations in this respect www.doeni.gov.uk and www.riversagencyni.gov.uk Whilst the definitions of flood zones and probabilities of flooding are generally the same throughout the UK, there are some differences. The definitions are outlined in Table - 58. Greenfield A site which has either never been built on, or one which has remained undisturbed for five years or more. Greenfield run-off rate The rate of run-off that would occur from the site in its undeveloped and therefore undisturbed state. Hard surfaces These include roofs, car parks, access roads, pavements, delivery/service yards and external hard landscaping. Footpaths less than 1.5 m wide which have free drainage to soft landscaped areas on both sides may be excluded. Infiltration The passage of water into a permeable surface, such as soil, permeable paving, soakaways and so on. Limiting discharge The limiting discharge is based upon the calculated pre-development flow rate at a discharge point. Level of pollution prevention treatment When used in the context of one, two or three levels of treatment for surface water, the treatment level should be regarded as the number of SuDS components in series through which run-off passes from the originating surface on which rainfall fell to the site discharge point. Where a SuDS component has more than one treatment process, it might be considered to provide more than one level of treatment. In these circumstances advice should be sought from the BREEAM office. Low risk areas (with respect to watercourse pollution) Low risk areas can be defined as areas where the risk of contamination or spillage of substances such as petrol and oil is reduced. For the purpose of this credit, roofs and small car parks may be considered as low risk areas. Peak run-off rate (referred to as Qp [m3/sec]) This is the highest rate of flow from a defined catchment area assuming that rainfall is uniformly distributed over the drainage area, considering the entire drainage area as a single unit and estimation of flow at the most downstream point only. Pre-development The state of the site under assessment immediately prior to purchase of the site by the client/developer (or, where the client has owned/occupied the site for a number of years, its current state). Qbar An estimation of the mean annual flood flow rate from a catchment (see Report IH124 Flood estimations for small catchments). Rainwater discharge Rainwater discharge is the rainwater which flows from the development site to watercourses and sewers. It is also referred to as run-off. Run-off This is usually rainwater, but can also be groundwater or overspill from sewers and other sources.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

343

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Sewerage undertaker This is a Body, typically a water company, with statutory responsibility for sewerage and sewerage disposal and also surface water from roofs and yards of premises. Soakaways A sub-surface structure designed to promote the infiltration of surface water into the ground. As a general point, soakaways may be shallow and broad – as in a blanket under permeable paving, or deeper structures. Deeper, point source soakaways should be avoided for road and car park drainage, but shallow structures providing infiltration in an extensive way (infiltration trenches and permeable paving) do not need oil separators. SuDS management train An approach to drainage design that combines a sequence of appropriate surface water drainage structures using SuDS systems for management of the run-off to treat the flow, reduce run-off volume and restrain the run-off rate in order to minimise man’s impact on the environment. Additional benefits associated with operation and maintenance, ecology and amenity are aspects which are considered when designing a management system. The management train incorporates a hierarchy of techniques: 1. Source control. Examples of SuDS techniques include: Soakaways Porous/pervious paving Roof water directed to garden (rather than piped drains) Rainwater re-use/harvesting Green roofs Other surface infiltration, attenuation and conveyance techniques that deal with run-off at source. 2. Site/local control. Examples of SuDS techniques include: Swales Pond Infiltration basins Detention basin Larger soakaways Pervious (porous or permeable) paving 3. Regional control. Examples of techniques include: Balancing ponds Wetlands Large detention basin SuDS techniques One or more components built to manage surface water run-off to prevent flooding and pollution, including for example: wet ponds, infiltration basins, detention basins, swales, reed beds, pervious (porous or permeable) paving, soakaways, rainwater harvesting, filter strips, filter drains and trenches with or without perforates pipes, green roofs and underground attenuation storage. For more information refer to The SuDS manual (CIRIA C697, 2007). Surface water run-off Water flow over the ground surface to a drainage system. This occurs if the ground is impermeable, is saturated or if the rainfall is particularly intense. Tidal estuary A tidal estuary is defined as a semi-enclosed coastal body of water which has a free connection with the open sea and within which seawater is measurably diluted with fresh water derived from land drainage. An estuary should be unconstrained tidal waters, i.e. there should be no barriers or constricted shorelines that would restrict the free flow of water into the open sea in any conditions. The impact on the total volume of run-off from the site (and other sites which may in future discharge into the estuary) should be insignificant in terms of the overall water levels in the estuary. Tidal rivers (i.e. where no or limited measurable seawater content is present during normal tidal movements) cannot be included as part of the estuary for the purposes of BREEAM. Treatment Improving the quality of water by physical, chemical and/or biological means.

344

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Pollution

Types of oil separator Class 1 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 5 mg/l oil under standard test conditions. They should be used when the separator is required to remove very small oil droplets, such as those arising from car park run-off. Class 2 Separators: These are designed to achieve a concentration of less than 100 mg/l oil under standard test conditions. They are suitable for dealing with discharges where a lower quality requirement applies and/or for trapping large spillages. Both classes can be produced as ‘full retention’ or ‘by pass’ separators: Full retention separators: These treat the flow that can be delivered by the drainage system, which is normally equivalent to the flow generated by a rainfall intensity of 50 mm/hr. Bypass separators: These fully treat all flows generated by rainfall rates of up to 5 mm/hr. Flows above this rate are allowed to bypass the separator. These separators are used when it is an acceptable risk not to provide full treatment for high flows. Pollution Prevention Guideline 3 contains more detailed guidance on the selection and sizing of an appropriate type of separator. Volume of run-off The volume of run-off that is generated by rainfall occurring on the site. This is typically measured in cubic metres. Additional predicted volume of run-off is the difference between the volumes of run-off pre- and postdevelopment. Watercourses and sewers A term that includes rivers, streams, ditches, drains, culverts, dykes, sluices, sewers and passages through which water flows.

Other information Definition of flood zones by country Table - 58: Definition of flood zones by country Definition

England

Wales

Scotland

Low annual probability of flooding

Zone 1 Less than 1 in 1000 chance of river and sea flooding (< 0.1%).

Zone A Considered to be at little or no risk. Zone B If site levels are greater than the flood levels used to define adjacent extreme flood outline.

Little or no risk area As defined for England.

Medium annual probability of flooding

Zone 2 Between 1 in 100 and 1 in 1000 chance of river flooding (1% – 0.1%) and between a 1 in 200 and 1 in 1000 chance of sea flooding (0.5% – 0.1%).

Zone B If site levels are not greater than the flood levels used to define adjacent extreme flood outline. Zone C Equal to or greater* than 0.1% (river, tidal or coastal flooding). * For the purposes of BREEAM assume upper

Low to medium risk area Watercourse, tidal or coastal flooding in the range 0.1% – 0.5% (1:1000 – 1:200).

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

345

Pollution

Definition

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

England

Wales

Scotland

probability of flooding no greater than that specified for England. High annual probability of flooding

Zone 3a High Probability 1 in 100 or greater chance of river flooding (>1%) and a 1 in 200 or greater chance of flooding from the sea (>0.5%). Zone 3b The Functional Floodplain Land where water has to flow or be stored in times of flood.

Zone C1 and C2 * For the purposes of BREEAM assume the same lower and upper probability of flooding as that specified for England.

Medium to high risk areas Annual probability of watercourse, tidal or coastal flooding: greater than 0.5% (1:200).

Please note: Northern Ireland PPS15 does not categorise flood risk zones and there are no similar publicly available flood maps covering Northern Ireland. Assessments in NI will therefore need to rely on site-specific flood risk assessments, or other relevant data/surveys, to determine the extent of flood risk for a specific development, and use the same definitions as those outlined for England. The Northern Ireland Department of Environment or Rivers Agency may offer further advice or recommendations in this respect www.doeni.gov.uk and www.riversagencyni.gov.uk

Sources of flooding and flood risk 1. Streams and Rivers: Flooding that can take place from flows that are not contained within the channel due to high levels of rainfall in the catchment. 2. Coastal or Estuarine: Flooding that can occur from the sea due to a particularly high tide or surge, or a combination of both. 3. Groundwater: Where the water table rises to such a height where flooding occurs. Most common in low-lying areas underlain by permeable rock (aquifers), usually due to extended periods of wet weather. 4. Sewers and highway drains: Combined, foul or surface water sewers and highway drains that are temporarily overloaded due to excessive rainfall or due to blockage. 5. Surface water: The net rainfall falling on a surface (on or off the site) which acts as run-off which has not infiltrated into the ground or entered into a drainage system. 6. Infrastructure failure: Canals, reservoirs, industrial processes, burst water mains, blocked sewers or failed pumping stations.

SuDS - sustainable drainage systems: A sequence of management practices and control structures designed to drain surface water in a more sustainable fashion than some conventional techniques. Examples of SuDS devices include: Holding ponds. Swales. Reed beds. Permeable paving - in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow this to function, e.g. block paved surface on permeable sub-base over gravel bed to store the water and allow it to seep into the soil. For less permeable soils, the gravel layer might be deeper and the water taken to a soakaway although this is not an option in some areas. Local or centralised soakaways either as full systems or as ‘overflow’ or ‘holding’ systems, in areas where local geological and hydrological conditions allow them to function. Run-off from roofs collected as a part of a rainwater harvesting system. Run-off from roofs directed to a local soakaway or other holding facility such as tanks, ponds, swales etc. Green roofs.

346

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 03 Surface water run-off

Pollution

For more information refer to The SuDS Manual (CIRIA C697, 2007).

Specification of oil/petrol interceptors For the purpose of assessing the watercourse pollution credit, Pollution Prevention Guide 3 Use and design of oil separators in surface water drainage systems (2006) defines the type of areas on a development where separators are required. PPG3 is produced on behalf of the Environment and Heritage Service (Northern Ireland), Scottish Environment Protection Agency and Environment Agency (England and Wales). In some instances, where the risk of contamination is infrequent and potential spills will be small, oil interceptors may not be required if appropriately designed sustainable urban drainage systems are specified. Refer to PPG3 for additional guidance.

Contaminated sites Examples of contamination legislation that should be considered includes: the Water Resources Act 1991, the Environmental Protection Act 1990, the Groundwater Directive (2006/118/EC) and, more recently the Groundwater (England and Wales) Regulations 2009. Where the site risk assessment confirms that infiltration SuDS techniques are not appropriate, SuDS techniques that do not allow infiltration, such as swales lined with an impermeable membrane, can be used. It may be the case that only some areas of the site are contaminated and therefore infiltration SuDS techniques can be used elsewhere on the site. There may also be a requirement to remediate the contaminated soils, creating opportunities for the use of infiltration SuDS post-remediation. 1Pollution Prevention Guideline (PPG) 3 Use and design of oil separators in surface water drainage systems, Environment

Agency/SEPA/Environment and Heritage Service, 2006. 2C697 The SUDS Manual, CIRIA 2007. 3Pollution Prevention Pays, Environment Agency, 2013. 4Technical Guidance to the National Planning Policy Framework, DCLG, March 2012. 5BS 8515 Rainwater harvesting systems: Code of Practice, Annex A 6C697 The SUDS Manual, CIRIA 2007. 7Preliminary rainfall run-off management for developments, W5-074/A/TR/1 Revision D, EA/DEFRA (September 2005) Useful

Link: http://webarchive.nationalarchives.gov.uk/20130123162956/http:/www.defra.gov.uk/environment/flooding/documents/ research/sc030219.pdf 8IH Report 124, Flood estimation for small catchments (Marshall and Bayliss, 1994) 9Flood Estimation Handbook (Centre for Ecology and Hydrology, 1999) 10CIRIA publication C635 (2006) Designing for exceedence in urban drainage – good practice

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

347

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution Number of credits available

Minimum standards

1

No

Aim To ensure that external lighting is concentrated in the appropriate areas and that upward lighting is minimised, reducing unnecessary light pollution, energy consumption and nuisance to neighbouring properties.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit

1. Where external lighting pollution has been eliminated through effective design that removes the need for external lighting without adversely affecting the safety and security of the site and its users.

OR alternatively, where the building does have external lighting, one credit can be awarded as follows: 2. The external lighting strategy has been designed in compliance with Table 2 (and its accompanying notes) of the ILP Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, 2011 1. Buildings located in Scotland must comply with the light pollution criteria in the guidance note ‘Controlling Light Pollution and Reducing Lighting Energy Consumption2’. This can be demonstrated via completion of the checklists in Annexes B and C of the guidance note by a relevant member of the design team. 3. All external lighting (except for safety and security lighting) can be automatically switched off between 23:00 and 07:00. 4. If safety or security lighting is provided and will be used between 23:00 and 07:00, this part of the lighting system complies with the lower levels of lighting recommended during these hours in Table 2 of the ILP’s Guidance notes. 5. Illuminated advertisements, where specified, must be designed in compliance with ILE Technical Report 5 – The Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements3

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core CN1

348

Applicable

Both options: All assessment criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 04 Reduction of night time light pollution

Ref

Pollution

Terms

Description

assessment criteria

Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue applies to assessments of simple buildings. There is no additional guidance on how to apply the criteria.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

General

None.

General CN4

Methodology The following provides guidance on when and how to apply the criteria to the external lighting associated with a building being assessed: 1. Where the assessment is of an individual building on an existing site then only those areas affected by the works, i.e. within the construction zone, need to be assessed. Where the assessment is of a building that forms part of an entire new development, the criteria apply site-wide. 2. If the scope of the assessment covers a new extension only, then it is only new lighting specified as part of the extended works that need to be assessed. 3. Flush stud lights used for safety purposes in vehicle manoeuvring areas may be excluded from the assessment. 4. Where light fittings are specified to comply with specific security standards and these conflict with the BREEAM criteria they can be excluded from the assessment of this issue. In these circumstances the assessor must obtain evidence confirming the specific security standards and that they are applicable to the assessed development.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

349

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Additional information Relevant definitions Construction zone For the purpose of this issue the construction zone is defined as the site which is being developed for the BREEAM assessed building and its external site areas, i.e. the scope of the new works.

Other information The ILP Guidance notes for the Reduction of Obtrusive Light, 2011 are available free of charge from the ILP website www.theilp.org.uk. Table 2 of the ILP guidance and its accompanying notes outlines four sets of recommendations: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Limits to the average upward light ratio of the luminaires, to restrict sky glow. Limiting illuminance at the windows of nearby properties for which light trespass might be an issue. Limiting the intensity of each light source in potentially obtrusive directions beyond the site boundaries. Limiting the average luminance of the building, if it is floodlit.

In each case the limiting values depend on the location of the site of the building (for example rural, urban or city centre). A calculation of illuminance (b) or intensity (c) is not required if all luminaires are cut-off types and angled so that light in potentially obtrusive directions is blocked. 1GN01 Guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light, Institution of Lighting Professionals(ILP), 2011. www.theilp.org.uk, 2Guidance Note Controlling Light Pollution and Reducing Lighting Energy Consumption, Scottish Executive, 2007. 3Technical Report No. 5: The Brightness of Illuminated Advertisements, Institution of Lighting Engineers (ILE), Third Ed, 2001.

350

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution

Pollution

Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution Number of credits available

Minimum standards

1

No

Aim To reduce the likelihood of noise arising from fixed installations on the new development affecting nearby noise-sensitive buildings.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance:

One credit

1. Where there are, or will be, no noise-sensitive areas or buildings within 800 m radius of the assessed development. OR alternatively, where the building does have noise sensitive areas or buildings within 800 m radius of the development, one credit can be awarded as follows: 2. Where a noise impact assessment in compliance with BS 7445 1 has been carried out and the following noise levels measured/determined: a. Existing background noise levels at the nearest or most exposed noise-sensitive development to the proposed development or at a location where background conditions can be argued to be similar. b. The rating noise level resulting from the new noise-source (see CN5). 3. The noise impact assessment must be carried out by a suitably qualified acoustic consultant holding a recognised acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate professional body (see Relevant definitions in the Additional information section). 4. The noise level from the proposed site/building, as measured in the locality of the nearest or most exposed noisesensitive development, is a difference no greater than +5dB during the day (07:00 to 23:00) and +3dB at night (23:00 to 07:00) compared to the background noise level. 5. Where the noise source(s) from the proposed site/building is greater than the levels described in criterion 4, measures have been installed to attenuate the noise at its source to a level where it will comply with criterion 4.

Checklists and tables None

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Shell and core

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

351

Pollution

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Ref

Terms

Description

CN1

Applicable assessment criteria

Option 1 – Shell only: This issue is not applicable to this shell and core assessment option. Option 2 – Shell and Core only: All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply. Refer to Appendix D for a more detailed description of the above shell and core assessment options.

Simple buildings CN2

Applicable assessment criteria

This issue is not applicable.

Country specific CN3

Country specific guidance

No country specific guidance applicable under this issue. All criteria relevant to the building type and function apply.

CN4

Attenuating noise at its source See criteria 4 and 5.

BS 8233:1999 2 gives recommendations for the control of noise in and around buildings. Confirming the specification of attenuation measures in accordance with this Code of Practice can be used as a method of demonstrating compliance with criterion 4.

CN5

Compliance at the design stage See criterion 2.

At the design stage of assessment, where noise sensitive areas or buildings are present, actual measurement is unlikely to be possible due to the planned but non-existent installation. In such situations compliance can be demonstrated through the use of acousticians’ calculations or by scale model investigations. For such cases BS 7445-2 states that 'as universally agreed prediction models do not exist, the method adopted should be carefully described in the acoustician’s report” and that 'when available, prediction models accepted by relevant authorities should be used'. Where prediction through these methods is not possible, measurement will be necessary using either a noise source similar to that proposed or, alternatively, measurement of the actual noise from the installation (once installed); compliance with the latter approach requires a written commitment to appoint a suitable qualified acoustician to carry out the required measurements post-installation, and a further commitment to attenuate the noise source in compliance with criteria 4 and 5 of BREEAM (if proved necessary by the measurements).

CN6

Untreated buildings

This assessment issue does not apply to buildings designed to be untreated, i.e. where internal spaces will not be serviced by heating, ventilation or air conditioning systems and therefore have no noise generating plant. Examples of such building types could include industrial warehouse storage.

General

Methodology None

352

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Pol 05 Reduction of noise pollution

Pollution

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

Final post construction stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1, 2

Map of local area highlighting noise sensitive buildings.

As per interim design stage

Additional information Relevant definitions

Noise sensitive area Landscapes or buildings where the occupiers are likely to be sensitive to noise created by the new plant installed in the assessed building, including: 1. Residential areas 2. Hospitals, health centres, care homes, doctor’s surgeries etc. 3. Schools, colleges and other teaching establishments 4. Libraries 5. Places of worship 6. Wildlife areas, historic landscapes, parks and gardens 7. Located in an Area of Outstanding Natural Beauty (AONB) or near a Site of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) 8. Any other development that can be considered noise sensitive. Suitably qualified acoustician An individual who holds a recognised acoustic qualification and membership of an appropriate professional body. The primary professional body for acousticians in the UK is the Institute of Acoustics.

Other information None 1BS 7445:1 Description and measurement of environmental noise, Part 1: Guide to quantities and procedures, British

Standards Institute, 2003. BS 7445:2 Description and measurement of environmental noise, Part 2: Guide to the acquisition of data pertinent to land use, British Standards Institute, 1991. BS 7445:3 Description and measurement of environmental noise, Part 3: Guide to application to noise limits, British Standards Institute, 1991. 2BS 8233 Sound insulation and noise reduction for buildings, Code of practice, British Standards Institute, 1999.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

353

Innovation

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Innovation

354

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Inn 01 Innovation

Innovation

Inn 01 Innovation Number of credits available

Minimum standards

10

No

Aim To support innovation within the construction industry through the recognition of sustainability related benefits which are not rewarded by standard BREEAM issues.

Assessment criteria The following is required to demonstrate compliance; Up to a maximum of 10 credits are available in aggregate from a combination of the following:

Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues

1. Where the building demonstrates exemplary performance by meeting defined exemplary level performance criteria in one or more of following BREEAM assessment issues: a. Man 03 Responsible construction practices b. Man 05 Aftercare c. Hea 01 Visual comfort d. Hea 02 Indoor air quality e. Ene 01 Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions f. Wat 01 Water consumption g. Mat 01 Life cycle impacts h. Mat 03 Responsible sourcing of materials i. Wst 01 Construction site waste management j. Wst 02 Recycled aggregates k. Wst 05 Adaptation to climate change l. Pol 03 Surface water run off (Simple buildings only) Please refer to the relevant BREEAM issue within this Scheme Document for the exemplary level performance assessment criteria.

Approved innovations

2. One innovation credit can be awarded for each innovation application approved by BRE Global, where the building complies with the criteria defined within an Approved Innovation Application Form.

Checklists and tables None

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

355

Innovation

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Compliance notes Ref

Terms

Description

Exemplary level of performance

Refer to the compliance notes within the individual assessment issues that contain exemplary performance levels.

General CN1

Methodology Exemplary level of performance in existing BREEAM issues For information on the methodology for exemplary level credits refer to the 'Methodology' section of the relevant BREEAM issues.

Approved innovations Innovation applications can be submitted to BRE Global by a Licensed BREEAM Assessor using the formal Approved Innovation Application Form.

Evidence Criteria

Interim design stage

All

One or more of the appropriate evidence types listed in The BREEAM evidential requirements section can be used to demonstrate compliance with these criteria.

1

As defined within existing BREEAM issues.

As defined within existing BREEAM issues.

2

A copy of the Approved Innovation Application Form AND A copy of the Innovation Application Report stating the application outcome as ‘approved’ AND Relevant documentary evidence demonstrating specification of the approved innovation.

As interim design stage AND Relevant documentary evidence confirming that the project has achieved/installed the approved innovation as described and quantified within the approved innovation application form.

356

Final post construction stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Inn 01 Innovation

Innovation

Additional information Relevant definitions Approved innovation Any new technology, design, construction, operation, maintenance or demolition method or process that can be shown to improve the sustainability performance of a building and is of demonstrable benefit to the wider industry in a manner that is not covered elsewhere in BREEAM. In addition the innovation has been approved by BRE Global in accordance with its published BREEAM Innovation credit procedures.

Other information Applying for innovation credits Refer to the BREEAM Innovation section documents available from the BREEAM Assessor Extranett for more information on BREEAM Innovation credit eligibility criteria, application process, application fees and, previously approved innovations.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

357

Appendices

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Appendices

358

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types

Appendices

Appendix A – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Healthcare building types BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 has been tailored specifically for the assessment of the following healthcare establishments: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Teaching/specialist hospitals General acute hospitals Community and mental health hospitals GP surgeries Health centres and clinics

The table below provides a description of the typical facilities and services offered by and forming a part of one of the above healthcare buildings. Where a healthcare development does not fit one of the building type descriptions below, BREEAM New Construction can still be used to assess that building type provided it falls within the building type category descriptions outlined in the scope section of this document. Where it does not fall in to one of these categories, the project will require the development of bespoke assessment criteria. Typical descriptions

Facility

Service

Teaching Hospital Specialist Acute Hospital

In-patient High concentration of energy- intensive engineering services and specialist equipment

Diagnostic and treatment services for physical healthcare together with specialist services Consultant-led

General Acute Hospital

In-patient Medium concentration of energy- intensive engineering services and specialist equipment

Diagnostic and treatment services for physical healthcare Consultant-led

Community Hospital Cottage Hospital Mental Health Hospital/Unit Learning Disability Unit

In-patient Basic engineering services and equipment

Limited diagnostic and treatment services for physical healthcare Nurse- or GP-led Care services for physical healthcare Nurse- or GP-led Mental health and learning disability services Consultant- or nurse-led

GP Surgery

Non in-patient Use typically 50-65 hours/week Basic engineering services and equipment

Primary care consultation GP-led

Health Centre/Clinic

Non in-patient Use typically 35-45 hours/week Basic engineering services and equipment

Primary care and mental health Nurse/dental/visiting consultant or specialist

Other ‘healthcare’ associated building types BREEAM New Construction can also be used to assess the following:

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

359

Appendices

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

1. Ambulance Trust buildings (‘Other buildings’ type) 2. Residential care homes and staff residential accommodation (Multi-residential accommodation building type) 3. Non-patient building types e.g. offices, laboratories, storage buildings (as listed in the table of building types in the scope section).

360

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Education buildings

Appendices

Appendix B – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Education buildings BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 has been tailored specifically for the assessment of the following educational establishments: 1. Pre-school, including; a. Nursery schools1 b. Children’s centres2 2. Schools, including; a. Primary schools b. Secondary schools (including those containing sixth form colleges) c. All age-range schools (including education or teaching buildings at boarding schools) d. Academies e. Non-acute special educational needs (SEN) schools 3. Sixth form colleges 4. Further and higher education or vocational colleges and Institutions, including; a. Teaching facility b. Learning Resource Centre c. Laboratory/workshop/studio d. Student union e. Or a mixture of the above types.

All age range schools and academies All age range schools and academies can typically be assessed using the guidance/criteria applicable to secondary schools. In some cases, for these types of education establishments, it may be more appropriate to use the assessment criteria for further education colleges or primary schools. For example, where an all age range school or academy will contain functional or operational areas more akin to further or higher education buildings or where the needs of the accommodation and occupiers are similar to those of primary or early years pupils. Based on the information received about the proposed building, the BREEAM assessor should determine the most appropriate BREEAM criteria to apply in the assessment of the building.

Acute special educational needs (SEN) schools Acute special educational needs (SEN) refers to children with severe disabilities/learning difficulties that prevent them from interpreting their surroundings without feeling anxious or distressed. These children can become easily distracted and/or over-stimulated. This group of pupils mainly include children with a behavioural, emotional or social difficulties (BEDS) and children with communication and interaction disability (autistic spectrum disorder (ASD)). This BREEAM scheme has not been specifically tailored to assess acute SEN schools. However assessment using the methodology is still possible, except where highly specialised accommodation is provided. Acute SEN schools are therefore defined as an 'Other' building type and BREEAM assessors carrying out assessments on schools for pupils with such needs will need to consider carefully all the BREEAM issues that might be affected by the need to provide special facilities for such building users, e.g. View out, Cyclist facilities, etc. Where it is not explicit within this scheme document for this building type, the assessor will need to decide which, if any, building type assessment criteria is appropriate and apply accordingly, seeking confirmation from BRE Global Ltd. on the application of alternative building criteria where appropriate to do so. For more information on SEN please refer to Building Bulletin 102 Designing for disabled children with special educational needs, published by the Department for Children Schools and Families (available from www.education.gov.uk)

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

361

Appendices

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Student residential accommodation BREEAM New Construction can be used to assess boarding school residential and halls of residence accommodation buildings. These types of building are classified as a multi-residential accommodation building type for the purpose of a BREEAM assessment. 1Nursery school/education means full-time or part-time education suitable for children who have not attained compulsory

school age (whether provided at schools or elsewhere), i.e. facilities/buildings for the teaching of children who are between the ages of two or three to five years old. 2Children’s centres are multi-agency service hubs where young children and their families can receive early education, full day childcare, parental support and child and family health services, such as access to health visitors and health screening. Children’s centres will often be allied to a local primary school, on or adjacent to the school site.

362

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential buildings

Appendices

Appendix C – BREEAM UK New Construction scope and Multi-residential buildings BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 can be used to assess multi-occupancy residential buildings that are not suitable for assessment under the Code for Sustainable Homes (CSH) in England, Wales and Northern Ireland, or under EcoHomes in Scotland. The UK New Construction scheme provides a whole building assessment methodology which can also be applied to buildings which contain dwellings assessed under the CSH, but also communal facilities within the same building, to allow assessment of the whole building. BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 can be used to assess the following types of multi-residential buildings: 1. Student halls of residence 2. Key worker accommodation 3. Care homes that do not contain extensive or specialist medical facilities (limited consulting rooms and medical rooms are acceptable) 4. Sheltered housing 5. Other multi-residential buildings which contain a mix of residential accommodation with communal areas such as some military accommodation.

BREEAM Multi-residential and the Code for Sustainable Homes BREEAM New Construction for non domestic buildings provides a whole building assessment methodology which can also be applied to a building containing self-contained dwellings and communal facilities. Where both a Code for Sustainable Homes and a BREEAM assessment are required, to avoid duplication of effort, evidence collected for the purpose of a CSH assessment can be used towards demonstrating compliance with the equivalent BREEAM assessment criteria and vice versa.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

363

Appendices

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and shell and core project assessments Non-fitted, speculative new buildings (often referred to as shell and core buildings) can be assessed using the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 scheme. The BREEAM New Construction version can be applied to both fully fitted and shell and core building projects. This section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the application of BREEAM to shell and core projects. A shell and core building project is defined as one where the developer’s scope of works is the design and construction of the base building only, leaving a range of construction and fit out works to be completed before the building is able to be occupied. This may include some or all of the following elements: the structure, building envelope, core building systems including building servicing strategy and installations (such as HVAC) or plant support for installation of such systems and where present, fit-out of common areas. Upon completion, the whole building or space within the building is sold or let to be fitted out as appropriate for occupation. The new owner(s) or tenant(s) will fit-out the building’s accommodation in accordance with their corporate and operational needs. In these projects, where areas of the development are not fully-fitted, performance of the building and compliance with BREEAM is verified based on the developer’s scope of works.only.This performance is measured using two standard project type options that in turn define appropriate assessment criteria applicable to that project type. Whilst some projects will differ to some extent from the scope of these standard options, for the purpose of BREEAM, issues not included within the chosen option will be excluded from the assessment, even where they are within the Developer’s scope of works. This approach is necessary to ensure clarity, consistency and comparability within the property market. A fully flexible filtering of issues based on each individual projects scope would not allow comparability between BREEAM ratings, either in terms of performance benchmarking or promotional/publicity purposes.

Defining the shell and core project type For the purpose of defining the scope of assessment and BREEAM certification labelling, a shell and core new construction project can be categorised in to one of the following types: Option 1: Shell only assessment and certification Option 2: Shell and core assessment and certification

Option 1: Shell only assessment This assessment and certification option is available where the developer’s scope of works covers new build works to the fabric, sub and superstructure of the building only, including: External walls, windows, doors, roof, core internal walls, floors Hard and soft landscaping areas (where present and within scope of works)

Option 2: Shell and core assessment This option is available where the developer's scope of works covers shell works, as described in Option 1, plus core building services. Core building services relates to the installation of central or communal transportation systems, water systems, fitout of common areas, central mechanical and electrical systems including HVAC, but without local fitting of systems within tenant areas. The systems will typically be centralised with capped off distribution to each tenanted area (for future connection as part of a tenant’s fit-out works). These shell and core assessment options are available only for the following non-domestic building types:

364

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and shell and core project assessments

Appendices

Office Retail Industrial

Assessing new build shell and core projects In the main the assessment process and application of a majority of the BREEAM assessment issues will be unaffected by the scope of new build shell and core works. This is because most of the BREEAM criteria are concerned with impacts, processes and management procedures that occur with any new build development, regardless of whether it is a shell and core or fully fitted project. However, several BREEAM issues and criterion are tailored for the assessment of fitted-out buildings, for example acoustics performance.Therefore, additional guidance is given within the assessment issue in the form of a compliance note. These shell and core compliance notes confirm whether the assessment issue applies to a shell and core project and, where it does apply, how to assess it for the shell and core project types defined above. Table 77-1summarises the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment issues and their applicability to shell and core projects.

Shell and core building assessments and minimum BREEAM standards All minimum BREEAM standards remain applicable to shell and core building assessments for the developers scope of works.The only exception is minimum standards for BREEAM issues/credits/criteria which are not assessed in a shell and core project (confirmed by the shell and core compliance note in each relevant issue).

BREEAM UK New Construction and the BREEAM UK Refurbishment Fit-Out scheme At the time of writing, BRE Global Ltd. are developing a standalone BREEAM scheme to cover the refurbishment and fit out stages of the life cycle for non-domestic buildings. Under this scheme, only criteria that would fall under the tenant's fit-out works would be assessed and certified. When launched, certified assessments of shell and core projects that opted for either option 1 or option 2 under BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 can choose to assess fit–out related issues under BREEAM UK Refurbishment and Fit-out scheme to gain a fully fitted-out status under BREEAM. By having a two part assessment for the shell and core projects, where the shell and core parts and fit–out parts are assessed separately, BREEAM aims to provide a flexible yet robust way of assessing shell and core projects. Table 77-1: BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment issues: Shell and core applicability Ref

Issue

Applicable to shell and core option type Option 1: Shell only

Option 2: Shell and core

Managment Man 01

Project brief

Y

Y

Man 02

Life cycle costing and service life planning

Y

Y

Man 03

Responsible construction practices

Y

Y

Man 04

Commissioning and handover

Y

Y

Man 05

Aftercare

N

N

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

365

Appendices

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Issue

Applicable to shell and core option type Option 1: Shell only

Option 2: Shell and core

Healthand wellbeingW Hea 01

Visual comfort

Y

Y

Hea 02

Indoor air quality

Y

Y

Hea 03

Safe containment in laboratories

N

N

Hea 04

Thermal comfort

Y

Y

Hea 05

Acoustic performance

Y

Y

Hea 06

Safety and security

Y

Y

Ene 01

Reduction of energy use and carbon emissions

Y

Y

Ene 02

Energy monitoring

Y

Y

Ene 03

Energy efficient external lighting

Y

Y

Ene 04

Low carbon design

Y

Y

Ene 05

Energy efficient cold storage systems

N

Y

Ene 06

Energy efficient transportation systems

N

Y

Ene 07

Energy efficient laboratory systems

N

N

Ene 08

Energy efficient equipment

N

N

Ene 09

Drying space

N

N

Tra 01

Public transport accessibility

Y

Y

Tra 02

Proximity to amenities

Y

Y

Tra 03

Cyclist facilities

Y

Y

Energy

Transport

366

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Appendix D – BREEAM UK New Construction and shell and core project assessments

Ref

Issue

Appendices

Applicable to shell and core option type Option 1: Shell only

Option 2: Shell and core

Tra 04

Maximum car parking capacity

Y

Y

Tra 05

Travel plan

Y

Y

Wat 01

Water consumption

N

Y

Wat 02

Water monitoring

Y

Y

Wat 03

Water leak detection and prevention

Y

Y

Wat 04

Water efficient equipment (process)

Y

Y

Mat 01

Life cycle impacts

Y

Y

Mat 02

Hard landscaping and boundary protection

Y

Y

Mat 03

Responsible sourcing of materials

Y

Y

Mat 04

Insulation

Y

Y

Mat 05

Designing for durability and resilience

Y

Y

Mat 06

Material efficiency

Y

Y

Wst 01

Construction waste management

Y

Y

Wst 02

Recycled aggregates

Y

Y

Wst 03

Operational waste

Y

Y

Wst 04

Speculative floor finishes

Y

Y

Wst 05

Adaptation to climate change

Y

Y

Wst 06

Functional adaptability

Y

Y

Water

Materials

Waste

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

367

Appendices

Ref

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Issue

Applicable to shell and core option type Option 1: Shell only

Option 2: Shell and core

Land use and ecology LE 01

Site selection

Y

Y

LE 02

Ecological value of site and protection of ecological features

Y

Y

LE 03

Minimising impact on site ecology

Y

Y

LE 04

Enhancing site ecology

Y

Y

LE 05

Long term impact on biodiversity

Y

Y

Pol 01

Impact of refrigerants

N

Y

Pol 02

NO emissions from heating source x

N

Y

Pol 03

Surface water run-off

Y

Y

Pol 04

Reduction of night time light pollution

Y

Y

Pol 05

Noise attenuation

N

Y

Y

Y

Pollution

Innovation

368

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction simple building assessments

Appendices

Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction simple building assessments The BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 version can be applied to both complex and less complex building projects. This section provides guidance to assessors and project teams on the application of BREEAM to less complex i.e. 'simple building' projects. A simple building is defined as one where the building services are predominantly of limited capacity and local in their delivery, largely independent from other systems in the building fabric and avoid complex control systems. Where the building includes complex services, systems or functions/facilities including, but not limited to those listed below, it cannot be defined or assessed as a ‘simple building’ and a full BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment should be carried out: Air conditioning and refrigeration systems. Mechanical ventilation, displacement ventilation, and complex passive ventilation. Note: Buildings with small localised cooling or ventilation systems are eligible for assessment using the ‘simple buildings’ criteria. See 'Building Services' section below for further guidance. Renewable energy sources, with the exception of on-site microgeneration technologies Renewable energy sources, with the exception of situations where connecting to an existing communal network system Laboratories and buildings that contain either fume cupboards and/or safety cabinets and/or containment areas Major water-consuming plant or functions such as swimming / hydrotherapy / research pools and/or vehicle wash / irrigation systems. Cold storage plant and enclosures, with the exception of domestic scale refrigeration Escalators and/or travelling walkways. The list above is not exhaustive, but serves to indicate the types of services and systems that describe a more complex building solution and therefore would not be present within a simple building. Examples of buildings which could fall under the BREEAM UK New Construction definition of ‘simple building’ (depending on the remit of the works) include; offices, educational and community buildings, GP surgeries, basic industrial units, and extensions to existing buildings. The following section describes some of the additional features a ‘simple building’ may have. These descriptions can be used to support the classification of a building for the purpose of a BREEAM ‘simple building’ assessment:

Building type The building can be classified within any of the building types categories listed in the scope section of this Technical Manual, including mixed-use developments/building types.

Building services 1. Space and/or hot water heating is provided by simple systems only, e.g. systems with total capacity of less than 100kW2 or point of use heaters. 2. Predominately naturally ventilated, using simple cross-flow ventilation relying solely on openable windows and/or trickle vents, except in areas where mechanical extract ventilation is required by the Building Regulations. Note: Buildings with small local systems, such as local split cooling systems or ventilation systems (to service single rooms or areas for occasional or seasonal use), with a total system capacity of less than 12kW and a total collective refrigerant charge of less than 5kg can be assessed using the ‘simple buildings’ criteria.

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

369

Appendices

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

3. Domestic scale sanitary, kitchen and laundry facilities with only basic connections for hot and cold water provision and drainage. 4. Building services commissioning required will be limited in complexity.

Typical profile of a simple building The cost and size of a simple building is likely to differ, so BREEAM uses the complexity of the building function and its services to determine whether it can be assessed using the BREEAM ‘simple buildings’ criteria. If a particular building does not meet the profile described above, but exhibits features which suggest it could be classified as a ‘simple building’, it may still be possible to assess the building as such. Please contact [email protected] for further advice and classification. . The table below summarises the BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 assessment issues, credits and criteria applicable to an assessment of a 'simple building'. Table - 1: BREEAM UK New Construction 2014 issue applicability for simple building assessments Issue ID

Criteria applicability to simple buildings No change

Simplified

Credits available

Exemplary credits available

N/A

Management Man 01

ü

2

2

Man 02

ü

1

0

Man 03

ü

4

0

Man 04

ü

4

0

3

0

(3-5) - building type dependent

1

(2-3) - building type dependent

0

N/A

N/A

3

0

N/A

N/A

2

0

Man 05

ü

Health and wellbeing Hea 01

ü

Hea 02

ü

Hea 03 Hea 04

ü ü

Hea 05 Hea 06

370

ü ü

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction simple building assessments

Issue ID

Criteria applicability to simple buildings No change

Simplified

Appendices

Credits available

Exemplary credits available

N/A

Energy Ene 01

ü

12

5

Ene 02

ü

(1-2) -building type dependent

0

Ene 03

ü

1

0

Ene 04

ü

3

0

N/A

N/A

2

0

N/A

N/A

Ene 05 Ene 06

ü ü

Ene 07

ü

Ene 08

ü

2

0

Ene 09

ü

1

0

Tra 01

ü

(Up to 5) - building type dependent

0

Tra 02

ü

(1-2) - building type dependent

0

Tra 03

ü

(1-3) - building type dependent

0

Transport

Tra 04

ü

N/A

N/A

Tra 05

ü

N/A

N/A

Water Wat 01

ü

5

1

Wat 02

ü

1

0

2

0

N/A

N/A

Wat 03 Wat 04

ü ü

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

371

Appendices

Issue ID

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Criteria applicability to simple buildings No change

Simplified

Credits available

Exemplary credits available

N/A

Materials Mat 01

ü

(Up to 6) - building type dependent

3

Mat 02

ü

1

0

Mat 03

ü

3

TBC

Mat 04

ü

1

0

Mat 05

ü

1

0

Mat 06

ü

1

0

3

1

Waste Wst 01

ü

Wst 02

..ü

1

1

Wst 03

ü

1

0

Wst 04

ü

1

0

Wst 5

ü

1

1

Wst 6

ü

1

0

Land use and ecology LE 01

ü

2

0

LE 02

ü

2

0

LE 03

ü

2

0

2

0

N/A

N/A

LE 04 LE 05

372

ü ü

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Appendix E – Applicability of BREEAM UK New Construction simple building assessments

Issue ID

Criteria applicability to simple buildings No change

Simplified

Appendices

Credits available

Exemplary credits available

N/A

N/A

(1-3) - building type dependent

0

5

1

1

0

N/A

N/A

N/A

Pollution Pol 01 Pol 02

ü ü

Pol 03 Pol 04 Pol 05

ü ü ü

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

373

Appendices

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Appendix F – TBA

374

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Appendix G – TBA

Appendices

Appendix G – TBA

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

375

Appendices

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

Appendix H – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates for the interim design stage and final post construction stage are provided in Figure 3 and Figure 4 respectively.

Figure 3: Example of certificate at design stage

376

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Appendix H – Examples of BREEAM UK New Construction certificates

Appendices

Figure 4: Example of certificate at post construction stage

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

377

BREEAM Scheme Document for New Construction

Index

Index

BREEAM Mat 01 calculator 228 BREEAM Mat 04 calculator 248

A

BREEAM recognised responsible sourcing certification schemes 241

Accessibility Index 171

BREEAM related performance targets 35

Accessible Amenities 177

BREEAM Tra 01 Calculator 172

Accessible Meters 131

BREEAM Wat 01 calculator 204

Accredited energy assessor 121

Building 188

Acoustically 106

Building Emission Rate 122

Adequate 72

Building regulations 122

Adoptable highways 341

Building Regulations 107

Aggregates

Building User Guide 51

Secondary aggregates 271 Allowable solutions 125

Building Users 194 C

anchor tenant 277

Capital cost reporting 40

AP 35 Appropriate consultant 341 Appropriate food outlet 177 Appropriate statutory body 341 Approved building energy calculation software 122 Approved Innovation 357

Carbon negative building 122 Carbon neutral 122 Care Homes 189 Catchment 341 Chain of custody 241 CITES 242

Areas 83

ClassVent 83

Automatic 135 Average daylight factor 72 Average total taxon 305

Clinical 83, 205 CoC 241 Common areas 131

B

Communication strategy 35

Baler 277

Community space 177

BAPS 315

Complex systems 51, 56

Biodiversity 314

Compliant organisational, local or national considerate construction schemes 45

Biodiversity Action Plan 314 Biodiversity Champion 314 biofuels 142

Compliant Test Body 107 Compliant transport node 171 Component level LCC plan 40

BRE Environmental Profile Methodology 229 BREEAM 241

Composite material 242 Computer simulation 72

BREEAM Accredited Professional 35

378

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Index

Considerate Constructors Scheme 45

Effective flush volume 204

Considerate ConstructorsScheme 45

Elemental LCC Pplan 40

Construction processes 46

Energy 131

Construction Resource Management Plan 263

Energy demand 123

Construction zone 72, 135, 236, 291, 296, 305, 350

Energy meters 131

Consultation feedback 35

Energy monitoring and management system 131

Contaminant 291

Energy Performance Ratio 123

Contaminated land specialist 292

Energy Specialist 142

Control devices 342

Energy supply 131

Controlled service 122

Environmental Product Declaration 229

Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species 242

Extract cabinet 89

Counterbalancing 151

F

Counterbalancing ratio 150

Factory gate 46

Current National planning guidance 342

Features 297 Fixed building service 123

D

Flagship tenant 277

Data centre 162 Daylight sensor 135 Dedicated non-obstructive position 276 DELC 321 Design flood event 342 Design flood level 342 Design storm event 342 Direct Effect Life Cycle - Carbon Dioxide Equivalent 321 Discharge point 342 Domestic scale components 204 Durability 283 Dwelling Emission Rate 122 Dynamic Simulation Model 123

Flood defences 342 Flood event 342 Flood probability 342 Flood risk 342 Flood risk assessment 342 Flood storage 342 Flood zones 343 Free cooling 142 Fume 89 Fume cabinet 89 Fume cupboard 89 G Global Warming Potential 322 Government’s Buying Standards 162

E ECA Energy Technology Product List 147 Ecological recommendations 310 Ecology related subject 297 Ecopoint 229

Green Guide 229 Green Guide element number 229 Green Guide to Specification 229 Greenfield 343

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

379

BREEAM Scheme Document for New Construction

Index

Greenfield run-off rate 343

Luminous 135

Greywater recycling 205

LZC 142

Groups 107

LZC feasibility study in regulations 142

GWP 322 M H

Machine Room Less lift 150

Habitable rooms 107

Main building entrance 171

Hard surfaces 343

Material change of use 107 Material efficiency 256

I

Materials 253, 271

I.T-intensive areas 162

Materials optimisation 248

Idle condition 150

Microgeneration Certification Scheme 142

Illuminance 72

Moderately airtight enclosure 321

Independent third party 36

Modular boiler systems 131

Indirect operational greenhouse gas emissions 147

MRL 150

Infiltration 343

Multiple occupancy offices 107

Insulation Index 248 N K

National Calculation Method 123

Key design team meetings 36 Key phases 36

NCM 123 Near-site LZC 123, 142 Noise sensitive area 353

L

Non-habitable rooms 107

Laboratory 156 Laboratory containment devices 87 Legally harvested and traded timber 242 Level of pollution prevention treatment 343 Life cycle cost 40

Non-native invasive plant species 292 Non potable water 205 Notional building 123 Novel LZC technologies 142 NR curves 109

Lift car lighting 150 Limiting discharge 343

O

linical area 72

Occupied 83

Living-out personnel 189

Occupied space 72

Low and zero carbon 142

Occupied spaces 107

Low grade aggregate uses 271

Office equipment 162

Low or zero carbon (LZC) technologies 123

On-site LZC 124, 142

Low risk areas 343

Online Green Guide calculator 229

380

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

Index

Openable 84

Refrigerant pump down 322

Operating Hours 172

Refrigerant recovery 322 Regulated energy 124, 162

P

Relevant 84

Patient areas 72

Relevant Building Areas 73

Payback period 142

Relevant third parties 37

Peak run-off rate 343

Remediation 292

Peer review 297

Renewables Obligation Certificate 124

Point daylight factor 72

Reporting protocols 47

Pollution linkages 292

Resilience 283

Post-consumer waste stream 243, 271

Responsible sourcing 243

Potable water 205

Reused materials 229, 243

Pre-consumer waste stream 243

Right 156

Pre-development 343

Risk assessment 89

Presence 135 Previously developed land 292

Robust and tested refrigerant leak detection system 322

Primary energy consumption 124

Robust Details 107

Prison Service biodiversity action plan 315

ROC 124

Private wire arrangement 124

Room for residential purposes 107

Project delivery stakeholders 36

Run-off 343

Project execution plan 36

Rural location 172

Proposed development 292

Rural location sensitive buildings 172

Public 253 Public areas 73

S SAP 124-125

Q

SBEM 124-125

Qbar 343

Scope of hard landscaping 236 Secondary aggregates 271

R

Secure space 165

Rainwater discharge 343

Separate 74

Rainwater recycling 205

Sewerage undertaker 344

Recyclable storage 277

Sheltered Housing 189

Recycled aggregates 271

Significant contamination 292

Recycled material 243

Simplified Building Energy Model 124

Refrigerant 322

Single occupancy offices 108

Refrigerant leak detection 321

Site Waste Management Plans 264

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

381

BREEAM Scheme Document for New Construction

Index

Small 322

Types of Oil Separator 345

Soakaways 344

Typical day 172

Soft Landings Framework 56 U

Sources 84 Specialist Ccommissioning Mmanager 57

Uniformity 74

Specialist commissioning manager 51

Unoccupied 108

Specialist floor finishes 230

Unregulated energy 124, 162

Specified performance level 108

Unregulated water 217

Staff areas 74

V

Standard Assessment Procedure for Energy Rating of Dwellings 124

View of sky 74

Standby condition 150

Volatile Organic Compound 85

Structural and fabric resilience 283

Volatile Organic Compounds 85

Structural robustness 283

Volume of run-off 345

Sub-meters 131 SuDS management train 344

W Waste compactor 277

SuDS Techniques 344 Suitably qualified acoustician 108, 353 Suitably qualified ecologist 297, 305, 310, 315 Suitably qualified professionals 52

Waste hierarchy 264 Waste treatment 277 Watercourses and sewers 345 Weighted standardised impact sound pressure level 108

Surface Water Run-off 344 Surrounding 74

Weighted standardized level differences 108

Sustainability Champion 46 Sustainability Champion (design) 37

White goods 162 Working plane 74

Sustainable Procurement Plan 243 Systems using refrigerants 322

Z Zero net carbon (CO2) emissions 125

T

/docDetials

Target Emission Rate 124

BREEAM UK New Construction non-domestic buildings technical manual 2014

The ILP Guidance notes 350

Pages: 1

Generation date: 11/02/2014 - 08:17

Tidal estuary 344 Tier levels 243 Time switch 135 Toxic fumes 89 Travel Plan 194 Treatment 344

382

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

383

Technical Manual: Version: SD5076 – Issue: 0.1 (DRAFT) – Issue Date: 11/02/2014

384